View Details

(Please note, if you don’t listen to the podcast, you’re not getting the full story!)

WOWZERS.

Did you read or listen to TR 685 - Have We Been Betrayed by Trump?

A lot of people have, and the feedback has been wild.

I’d anticipated some pushback, maybe a little hate-mail, even a heavy dose of rejection; but I’d also figured there would be a certain degree of agreement and appreciation in the audience.

Both assumptions turned out to be correct.

I’d like to pause for a second and reflect on what that means—the fact that I’ve been both praised and berated for stating that I, personally, feel betrayed by Trump.

It implies that there is a large number of people who agree on many things; a large cohort of conservative Americans who share a deep love for our Constitutional Republic; people from all walks of life, from business owners to bartenders and everyone in between, who together form a substantial group of regular everyday Americans who adamantly agree that our nation is in desperate need of fixing.

We are the group, some 77 million strong, who elected Donald Trump.

Typically, this group likes each other. They hang out. They talk. They text.

They laugh at the same “politically incorrect” jokes.

They don’t flinch when someone quotes Blazing Saddles:

“Where all the white women at?”

This group consists of family, friends, neighbors and coworkers, we form an unofficial network of smiling faces, silent nods, and quiet knowing throughout the community.

(For the record, this group is also our safety net if st ever really hits the fan.)

Practically speaking, this group constitutes the bulk of our political allies in the ongoing culture war. This is the group that united in 2023 to elect Donald Trump, for the third time. We came together in historic numbers all across the nation, in big cities and small towns, in churches and in bars, and stood together to put a big, fat middle finger straight in the face of the political establishment.

Enter Trump’s third term.

Those who voted, voted, and voted again for Donald Trump were absolutely PUMPED when he finally took office. After the 2020 election was stolen in the dark of night, Trump’s triumphant return to the White House felt like a pivotal point in American history. The excitement was visceral and palpable, all across the fruited plains.

We, as a group, wholeheartedly believed in Donald Trump. We believed that he was the best man for the job, by far. Kamala Harris? Joe Biden? Are you kidding me?!

Donald Trump is a businessman. He’s been successful longer than I have been alive. He’s written several books, had his own TV show, and built a real estate empire—specifically by being a tough negotiator. In short, Donald Trump has a track record of getting results, and that is exactly the kind of man we needed in the White House.

Clearly Trump has the chops to be President of the United States.

Who else can compare, really? I’m being serious here. He’s a remarkable man.

Sure, he’s a little rough around the edges and can be crass at times—but isn’t that part of the allure, that he’s not just another slick, fast-talking politician?

Yes, of course he’s had some unflattering moments in the past—but haven’t we all?

Those of us who have stood by Trump through thick and thin have not been blind to the man’s imperfections. Instead, we’ve weighed it all out, and like I was saying yesterday, the good far outweighs the bad. We chose to see and appreciate the humanity in the man, rather than get all riled up by every scandal the Dems cooked up.

We all know that crazy lefties have been flinging mud at Trump since the day he came down the escalator. We all know the media has been relentless in their blatant lies, twisted stories, and relentless anti-Trump propaganda. We’ve long been keen to the RINO Republican establishment that’s tried to undermine him from day one.

That’s why we elected him the first time, to “drain the swamp,” remember?

So, just to check-in real quick: We are all in the same group still, right?

(If what I’ve just said resonates with you, then you’re in the group!)

With all that said, having established that we’re all on the same team, I’d like to move forward with humility and attempt to reconcile a couple of the divisions that are currently festering within the group. Whether you agree or disagree, I believe that it is vitally important that we understand where both sides are coming from.

Before I get started, please keep one simple fact front and center:

We’re all in this together.

I don’t mean that in a kumbaya sort of way.

I mean that in the most practical sense imaginable.

There is SO much at stake right now, regarding the future of our country. In fact, the stakes could not be higher. I firmly believe that the next several years are going to either make or break our country. Either the American experiment will overcome the forces of global domination and we will continue to live as free human beings; or, if we fail to stand together as a group, or if the group gets swept up into supporting a previously unacceptable agenda, then our country will be forever transformed into the inescapable socialist digital gulag the global elite have planned for us.

Those who want to continue living in freedom, who want their children and grandchildren to thrive in a free and prosperous society, must never lose sight of this bigger picture. As I’ve discussed many times before, there are dark forces stacked against us, and if we lay it all out on the table, the future looks daunting.

But alas, that’s not the point here today. Please don’t forget that despite all that is going on in the world, life is still fundamentally good—so don’t forget to live it well.

Along those lines, I’d like to share a recent experience with you.

The best defense of Trump, ever.

As it happened, the other night I found myself engaged in an emotionally charged discussion of current events with a very dear friend. This is an individual for whom I have deep appreciation and complete respect, someone whom I love and have forged a bond with through countless conversations that span over two decades.

When I brought up Trump’s Easter Sunday post, it was immediately apparent that we did not feel the same way about it. As the conversation stretched into the Epstein Files and the war in Iran, the disagreement became even stronger. I’d say that without so many years of love and respect between us, the conversation most certainly would have derailed and things would have ended in a tailspin.

Fortunately that didn’t happen, and I came away with greater clarity on why so many people feel so strongly about Trump, and so offended when someone like me starts challenging his intentions. During the course of debate, my dear friend gave the most passionate defense of Donald Trump I have ever heard, laying out a comprehensive and intelligent perspective that is undeniably shared by millions of people.

Nobody could have said it better or with greater conviction.

Out of respect, I listened. In the end, I learned.

Though I was ultimately unpersuaded, it left me with plenty of food for thought (fueling this report). By the end of the night we had hugged it out and moved on to lighter topics. The disagreement was strong, but we were still on the same team.

This is a good lesson, is it not?

It’s okay to disagree.

Let’s zoom out.

In Torch Report 685, I stated that I personally feel betrayed by Donald Trump.

Do I still feel that way today? Yes I do.

I will explain exactly why in a moment.

Much of my friend’s defense of Trump revolved around the fact that I don’t have all the information and I can’t possibly see the whole picture, therefore I cannot understand what Trump is going through or why he’s making the decisions that he is.

On it’s face, this is true.

Indeed, I was told by more than one person that I shouldn’t be rushing to judgment. Some people said I must be listening to too much mainstream media. Others suggested that I might have succumbed to some sort of psyop, that perhaps I was being deceptively misled into questioning Trump’s motives.

The implication here, which is critical, is that I have been listening to the wrong voices, watching the wrong news, or reading the wrong sources. After all, what else could account for my sudden departure from the general group consensus?

That’s a reasonable assumption, but here’s the thing:

When I sat down to write that report, I was only listening to one voice, and that was my own. Taking a full year off, detoxing from the daily news, I came to relish the peace of mind and more fruitful focus that naturally flows in the absence of relentless propaganda. Contrary to popular opinion, my mind has not been immersed or misled by the ever changing stories that are being pumped out every news cycle.

Rather than follow the various narratives over the last year, I’ve only caught snippets here and there from what family and close friends have shared with me. This gave me a different vantage point, allowing me to see things from a different angle. Rather than filtering information through the media matrix, I was getting raw data on how these stories were impacting the people I personally knew.

That is a very different perspective.

That’s why, when I first heard friends talking about why we needed to take over Greenland or send the U.S. Navy down to blow up some cartel boats in South America, I was literally stunned. Why was this what people were talking about?

How had that all of a sudden become the most important thing?

The more I listened to the different stories in various social circles, the more obvious it became that these different groups were all tuning into different sources. From the outside looking in, it was also plain to see that each group was simply parroting their respective narratives, virtually verbatim, without any sort of skepticism.

However, being unplugged and out of the loop, upon hearing these things, my immediatethought was, “What in the hell, that doesn’t seem right.”

That was my voice.

It didn’t come from some talking head on TV, some podcaster or YouTube influencer. I didn’t pick it up reading political commentary or cruising social media. That inner voice was just a pure, instinctive reaction to the new stories my friends had shared.

The exact same thing happened when I first heard that Trump had started calling the Epstein documents a “democrat hoax,” and also when I learned that he had deployed the military to Iran. My inner voice immediately spoke up:

“Wait a minute, that’s not right. Something is wrong here. Why are we going to war in Iran when Trump said he was not going to start any wars? And why is he repeatedly called the Epstein files a democrat hoax, when he knows they exist and even suggested he would release them? What’s going on here?”

Again, doesn’t it seem fair to ask these very important questions?

Think about it, Trump himself declared that he was going to be the President of Peace, and he himself signed the Epstein Files Transparency Act.

I’m sorry-not-sorry, this just doesn’t add up to me.

I’ve come to wonder, having been unplugged over the last year, if my perspective on all this might act as some sort of loose benchmark. I’ve wondered if where my mind is at today, regarding these issues, might be close to where the majority of the group was at just over a year ago—back when absolutely nobody was talking about ignoring the Epstein Files, taking over Greenland, deploying commandos to execute a regime change in Venezuela, or bombing the hell out of Iran.

If I recall correctly, not that long ago we were all talking about the desperate need for accountability for a veritable laundry list of well-documented crimes, from Epstein’s child sex trafficking, to stolen elections, J6, the deadly covid mandates, and so on.

Perhaps some of you remember when this was being widely circulated:

To this day, all of the issues above have simply been glossed over in favor of cheering on the ever evolving narrative. Hence, my utter disgust when I learned Trump was talking about bombing civilian infrastructure in the name of “freedom” for the Iranian people. That same inner voice, my own, started screaming loudly, “Now wait a damn minute, SOMETHING IS SERIOUSLY WRONG HERE!!”

And now I am just expected to go along with all of this?

I’m sorry, I cannot.

To claim that the Epstein Files are a democrat hoax is a flat out lie.

Sending the U.S. Navy to South America and justifying regime change in Venezuela on the premise that it would keep drugs out of America is also a flat out lie.

Launching large-scale military attacks against Iran, claiming first it was to quell an imminent nuclear threat, then changing stories and declaring that it was actually to free the Iranian people, is yet another series of lies.

I cannot trust someone who lies to me.

Thus, I feel betrayed.

But perhaps you still believe these narratives.

Please ask yourself why. Why did you support the sudden and aggressive regime change in Venezuela? Why do you now support losing more American lives in yet another military campaign in the Middle East? Why are you now willing to accept that documented crimes against children (by high profile people, including elected officials) is somehow a “democrat hoax”—that these crimes don’t merit any sort of accountability, and that it’s not even worth talking about anymore?

I can’t comprehend it.

Is it possible that we see things so differently precisely because of the news that you’ve consumed over the last year, that I have not? How often have you taken a step back and unplugged, and for how long? How often have you questioned the stories you’re being told from your favorite sources? It’s just food for thought.

Regardless, we’re still on the same team right?

We still agree that America needs saving; that our Republic is under attack by enemies both foreign and domestic; that the two-party establishment is corrupt to the core; that without accountability for the crimes that have already been committed, the rule of law becomes obsolete; that our outrageous national debt is in fact one of the greatest threat to our national security; we do still agree on all that, don’t we?

Stay wise patriots. I’m telling you, there is something fishy afoot.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Time flies.

It has been exactly one year and one day since I last posted a Torch Report. I have to admit, my little hiatus lasted far longer than intended, but the extended time away from the endless propaganda and maddening headlines has been good for the soul.

Rather than try to recap the bazillion-and-one “super important” events that have come and gone, or chase the various squirrels of conspiracy, today I’m going to cut straight to the chase: Personally, I feel utterly betrayed by Donald Trump.

And I know I’m not alone.

As one friend put it, “What in the hell happened to Trump?” As in, whatever happened to draining the swamp, no more wars, and putting America First?

Another friend recently hit me with this doozy: “So, Luke, how do you feel about Trump totally dividing his base and destroying the MAGA movement?”

Ouch. Honestly, it’s not an easy answer.

Friends, I’ve sat down to write many times over the last year. I’ve actually written several reports that addressed the gradual, disturbing drift I’ve been observing during Trump’s second term, but in the end, I didn’t have the heart to publish them.

Why not publish them?

Well, because there was an even more disturbing trend that seemed to be running parallel among many of my fellow patriots. Whereas in recent years most of the MAGA crowd held a sharp skepticism toward all things government, I began to see a disheveling sort of blind allegiance build around Trump’s ever evolving agenda.

In essence, whatever Trump said was “good” was good, and whatever Trump said was “bad” was bad. Critical thinking seemed to be suspended, or worse, usurped by sycophancy. Suddenly, the only measure of one’s patriotism was whether or not you accepted and agreed with whatever Trump was currently pushing.

Thus, we’ve stumbled into a twilight zone, wherein anyone who voted to Make America Great Again is now just expected to go along with whatever Trump says.

Examples abound.

We were expected to believe Trump when he farcically claimed the Epstein files were nothing more than a “democrat hoax.” We were expected to accept that Trump’s “Big Beautiful Bill” was a fiscal masterpiece, even though it actually increases government spending, adds trillions to the deficit, and didn’t do a damn thing to curb any of the rampant fraud and reckless spending uncovered by the Department of Government Efficiency. We were expected to support the sudden regime change in Venezuela.

Unfortunately, rather than remain skeptical and ask questions, it appears the critical thinking of most conservatives has simply been swept away in the euphoria of all the so-called “winning.” Simultaneously, it appears that loyalty to Trump and his narrative has slowly become the only benchmark for determining what’s right and wrong.

If Trump says it’s right, then it’s right.

If Trump says it’s wrong, then it’s wrong.

Apparently only Donald Trump knows what is best for America.

We are expected to believe that his every action serves only to advance American interests—even if it seems impossible to comprehend his plan.

Horseshit.

Some people believe it, but I certainly don’t.

To illustrate this growing divide in the ranks, one night I asked a group of patriots why we were all of the sudden running military operations in Venezuela, instead of say, addressing the well-documented government corruption right here at home. They looked at me like I was an apostate, which confirmed my suspicion that any dissent to Trump’s agenda was now considered taboo. Unfortunately, if you disagreed with any of Trump’s decision-making, you were no longer considered a patriot.

Quite disturbingly, blind allegiance now seemed expected in many MAGA circles.

All of this disgusted me, and it still sits heavy on my heart.

That’s ultimately why I failed to publish the previously written reports. I knew that most of the audience would balk and revolt against my skepticism of some of Trump’s decisions. I knew that I could not compete with the cult of personality and clever propaganda that was emanating out of the White House. So, rather than rock the boat, damage relationships, and cause division, I felt it was better to remain silent.

At the time, it seemed wiser to sit back and see how things played out. Maybe I was wrong. Maybe my friends were right. Maybe Trump was making the best decisions. Maybe he actually was advancing the America First agenda, even in Venezuela, despite my growing doubts and the mounting evidence to the contrary.

Maybe.

Then we went to war with Iran. Now, in just over a month, 365 service members have been wounded (including Army, Navy, Marines, and Air Force casualties), and 13 Americans have been killed in action. Many more people have been killed throughout the region, including hundreds of children and thousands of innocent civilians.

We are told that this is all necessary and good—and we are expected to believe it.

But wait a minute here: why are we at war with Iran in the first place? Donald Trump campaigned heavily on a promise of “no new wars” and ending the “endless wars.”

What we are witnessing is the exact opposite of what he said he would do.

That’s a massive shift, so what is the justification for this war?

Does it matter that the Trump administration still can’t get their story straight?

More importantly, how do you think this is all going to play out? Do you think the Iranians are just going to give up? What are the chances that a jihadi terrorist cell seeks revenge on American soil? Do you honestly think Trump’s rhetoric is going to bring greater peace? Or, do you think it’s more likely to escalate retaliation?

For context, let’s consider Trump’s ever-so-inspiring Easter Sunday message:

Bomb power plants and bridges? Open the f*n’ Strait, you crazy b***s?

Personally, I’m not impressed. That doesn’t strike me as particularly presidential, even by Trump’s fairly low standard, nor does it seem appropriate given the sanctity of the day. Indeed, I’d tend to agree with Tucker Carlson’s critical take on this one:

“You’re tweeting the F-word on Easter morning promising the murder of civilians? This is vile. This is evil. On every level. A promise to use US military to destroy civilian infrastructure that people use every day? That is a war crime. A moral crime. Innocent people will die. That is unacceptable. It is immoral. It can never be justified.”

Tucker created a 2-hour YouTube video titled Trump’s Desecration of Easter and a Warning to Christians Everywhere, and he goes on to suggest the unthinkable:

“Desecrating Easter was the first step toward nuclear war.”

Obviously I hope he’s wrong, but then again, if you start connecting the dots…

Let’s zoom out.

Why do I feel betrayed by Trump?

I voted for him three times. I was a Trump-endorsed delegate to the Republican National Convention. I’ve been a fan of much of what he has done, and I’ve been content to “agree to disagree” whenever I’ve had a difference of opinion.

In short, the good has far outweighed the bad—until things started to change.

When Trump declared that the Epstein documents were a Democrat hoax, it was a massive red flag for me. While campaigning for re-election, Trump had suggested that he would release the documents, presumably because holding high ranking pedophiles accountable for their predatory child sex trafficking was a critical issue for the vast majority of his base. Go figure. But then he flipped the script.

Why is anyone even talking about this Democrat hoax anyway? Idiots.

Much to the chagrin of millions, there hasn’t been a single person arrested. There has been zero accountability for documented crimes against children. We’ve been told to look the other way and stop bringing it up—and again, we’re expected to play along.

That same story holds true for the documented fraud during the stolen 2020 election, the orchestrated fedsurrection on J6, the various crimes against humanity perpetrated during covid, and so on. There is a pattern here that is plain to see: what is important to the American people, i.e. accountability for documented crimes and sticking to campaign promises, is clearly not what is most important to Donald Trump.

Thus, rather than prioritizing election integrity, criminal accountability, eliminating gross amounts of already exposed government fraud, or imposing any sort of fiscal restraint—all of which are absolutely critical to Making America Great Again—Trump has instead made a steady march toward increasingly inexplicable actions that do nothing to address these massively important issues.

Now, am I wrong for pointing this out?

“Oh but Luke, what about the border security? What about rounding up all the gangbangers? What about Trump’s impressive list of accomplishments? Surely you cannot deny all of that!”

HERE’S THE THING: I am not denying that Trump has accomplished many things.

I am not saying that everything Trump has done is bad, or that his every decision is wrong. I am not suggesting that Trump is inherently evil, nor am I suggesting that he has intentionally deceived us—though at this point, that is an open question.

However, just as it is fair to acknowledge his many accomplishments, it is also fair to acknowledge that some things don’t add up, is it not?

When Trump campaigned so heavily on “no new wars,” I took him at his word. Clearly he has broken his word. In my mind, sending the U.S. military into Venezuela for a rapid regime change and quick capture of their oil reserves was the first blow. We were told that this was necessary to stop the flow of drugs into America, but I believe that is an insult to the intelligence of any clear minded person.

Then, when Trump started sending American troops to die in Iran and told us that it was for our own good, that was the straw that broke the camel’s back. Why in the hell are we going to war with Iran when we have so many major issues right here at home?

At first, Trump tried to justify this war by claiming that Iran was an “imminent threat” and we needed to destroy their nuclear capabilities. Evidently he had forgotten that just last summer, in July 2025, he was taking a victory lap and bragging that his administration had already “completely destroyed” Iran’s nuclear sites.

FACT:

So much for the imminent threat justification, right? And, just in case there was any doubt, let’s not forget what Tulsi Gabbard, Director of National Intelligence, recently told congress in her 2026 Annual Threat Assessment (March 18, 2026):

“As a result of Operation Midnight Hammer, Iran’s nuclear enrichment program was obliterated. There has been no efforts since then to try to rebuild their enrichment capability. The entrances to the underground facilities that were bombed have been buried and shuttered with cement.”

It seems to me like Trump and Gabbard are on the same page—and that Iran did not pose any sort of “imminent threat” to America. Perhaps that’s why the story changed.

Now we are being told, and expected to believe, this war is really all about peace— that all of this bombing and destruction is to ensure “freedom” for the Iranian people:

• Trump says he wants ‘freedom’ for Iranians

• Trump promised freedom for Iran

• Trump tells Iranians the ‘hour of your freedom is at hand’

Again, I’m not buying it.

Besides, what about freedom for Americans?

You know, freedom from a corrupt, overbearing, and bloated bureaucracy? Freedom from the burden of billions upon billions of dollars in wasteful spending and government fraud? Freedom from the tyranny of stolen elections? Freedom from the relentless propaganda and gaslighting that is tearing apart our country?

What about putting American First?

What’s happening right now is nothing of the sort. In fact, it’s just more of the same. It’s endless wars and regime changes. It’s wars for oil and geopolitical dominance.

Meanwhile, our own beloved Republic is rotten to the core.

The corruption continues unabated, undaunted, and unphased by Trump’s 2nd term.

It makes me want to puke, almost as much as the day I watched Trump praising the CEO of Pfizer, in the White House no less, calling him “one of the great, great people.”

No mention of Pfizer’s toxic injections killing and maiming millions of people, the subsequent turbo cancers, myocarditis, or any of that nonsense. Just raw praise for the man who helped make Operation Warp Speed one of Trump’s greatest achievements.

Please note that Trump is still proud of pushing these injections, recently calling them “one of the greatest achievements ever,” even as they continue to kill people.

Seems kind of evil to me. Maybe there was a reason Trump refused to put his hand on the Bible during his swearing in after all? Kind of makes you think, doesn’t it?

Eh… I’m sure that’s all just a coincidence.

Until next time…

RESIST WE MUST!!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Life is interesting.

Before I begin, I’d like to apologize to the friends, family, and long-time subscribers who have so faithfully encouraged, supported, and followed along with me on this four-year learning journey. Facts being what they are, life has not allowed adequate time for me to crank out proper daily reports, and for that I’m sorry.

This is something that I’ve been struggling with.

Whereas in the past, I was able to spend four to six hours a day reading and researching, then writing and recording, that is a luxury I no longer have.

It is what it is, and I’m sure many in the audience can relate.

When I was a younger man, I used to wish there were 30 hours in a day and 10 days in a week—operating on the false assumption that if that were the case, I should be able to accomplish at least half the projects I had on my plate. The wiser perspective came slow, and it came in the form of a question.

True or false: there is always enough time?

The answer, no matter how I wrangled with it, was invariably true. There is only time and what we make of it. Wishing for more time was a splendid waste of mental and emotional energy that inevitably generated stress and ate at my ability to function.

Next came the lesson of letting go, and that has proven to be the most difficult lesson of all. Letting go comes in many forms, and it is widely applicable to everything in life, from the big and monumental changes to the little things that clutter up daily living.

This time last year, I was working in radio as a news director for five local stations. I’d also been running an hour-long weekend show for over a year at that point. One memory I recall, with fondness, was recording the Torch Report Weekend Review in my car at a pull-out alongside the highway in central Washington, before zipping back to the arena to watch my daughter compete in an equestrian event.

My days were long, with morning news hitting the wire by 5 a.m. and the many meetings that I was assigned to cover often going to 9 p.m. This schedule ultimately proved to be incompatible with raising a family, and I knew I had to let go.

To top it off, I was getting paid a paltry $2,000 a month for the effort, which was a far cry from a living wage. I’d originally justified this as a sort of initiation, a putting in my time, proving my commitment, and showcasing my talent, with the expectation that sowing these seeds would yield a fun and fruitful career in radio.

In reality, looking back on the experience, I was grossly under paid and way over-worked. It wasn’t meant to be. I had to let go and move on—and that was sad.

People in the local area had come to appreciate hearing my voice. Everyone said I did a great job and they missed the show. In other words, I was letting people down by letting go of radio, but in my heart I still knew it was the best thing for my family.

I was grateful for the experience, the taste of radio, and I may still pursue this path once the nest is empty. As fate would have it, freeing up my schedule allowed for more time and experience in the political arena. I was honored to be elected as a state and national delegate, and I got to make several trips to Washington DC to bump elbows and engage with panels of politically ambitious movers and shakers.

For the record, I am not a politically ambitious mover and shaker.

I had very reluctantly stepped into the political arena, not seeking status or an office for myself, but to better understand the process and how the system worked. I sought to learn how local uproar might be pushed through to political impact. At that point I had attended hundreds of meetings, via news reporting, at the city and county level, and even a handful of national meetings I was invited to attend.

Through all of this, my eyes were opened to the vast complexity of problems that beset us. Citizen activists were at a significant disadvantage, by design. The cogs of the political wheel were specifically calibrated to ground down any opposition to the status quo. It was just as I had always expected: the entrenched two-party establishment didn’t give a damn about the peasants.

All they cared about was maintaining and gaining more power and control.

Hence, the vexing situation.

With a nod to the current political circus, I’d point out that despite all the “winning” there is still essentially zero accountability for the many heinous crimes that have been perpetrated against the American people. Still, the majority of patriots have been pacified by the election of Donald Trump. Most conservatives are too busy trying to keep up with the break-neck speed of each passing news cycle to keep the bigger picture in mind — and the enemy knows this.

It disgusts me to hear conservative pundits squawking about trivial matters, always chasing the latest “news” the way a dog chases a bone. When I started the Torch Report, it was never my intention to regurgitate what everyone else was talking about. Indeed, my aim was just the opposite: to expose the bigger issues that were being ignored, like the Great Reset, toxic injections, commie infiltration, et cetera.

Unfortunately, due to certain irrevokable elements of human nature, choosing to ignore what the majority of people were talking about translated into painfully slow growth. The issues I’ve brought to light have been “fringe” in nature — like Algorithmic Social Interventions and mind control, for example — though they are imminently more important than the dominant narratives. On top of that, much of what I’ve had to say has been throttled and censored, because, well, I’ve stubbornly insisted on addressing the issues that don’t play well with the algorithms.

If one were to ask me at the outset of this project, writing on Substack and publishing a daily podcast, I would have anticipated the audience would be much larger, and that the efforts four years in would be adequately compensating the time invested.

That is not the case.

Thus, as life would have it, I’ve had to invest myself in more fruitful endeavors in order to make ends meet. And so it is, I’ve not had the time to continue cranking out reports at pace — which as I’ve said, is something I’m struggling with.

Let’s zoom out.

I am not naive enough to believe that I can change the whole world. My ego is not big enough to think that my meager musings are going to change the course of history. My intention, in contrast, has always been to share what I was learning, to shine light on counter-narrative perspectives, in a way that might propagate the tiniest of ripples in the public psyche. My desire has been to stimulate curiosity and conversation.

This is an extension of my overarching intent to elevate awareness, which has been the driving factor in my life for much longer than all the political stuff.

Being somewhat detached from the news and commentary for the last couple of months, while working away day after day to make my own little world go round, I suppose some part of me has regressed to this higher purpose. While I’ve addressed the various angles of elevating awareness in many prior reports, and maintain that the elevation of awareness at the individual level is the most essential element of any winning political strategy, in the absence of daily immersion, I felt a disconnect.

To be brutally honest, nobody really misses my daily reports. If I were abducted by aliens, everything would continue moving along just as it always has. I am but a spec in the cosmos, and this is a fact that I am quite comfortable with. The Torch Report, though I’ve poured my heart and soul into it, is ultimately inconsequential.

The question I’ve pondered this morning is this: do I need to let go?

If I cannot do it justice, if it’s not paying the bills, is all this effort to create daily reports just a grand exercise of ego? Do I think my perspective is really that important? Am I serving the people, or am I serving myself in all of this?

My heart has always been a heart of service. I’ve served every community I’ve ever lived in, in one way or another. In some places I’ve been Pastor Luke, tending to the spiritual needs of the flock. In other places I’ve been hailed as a healing guru — “Guru Luke” as one doctor claimed — teaching the ancient secrets of yoga and meditation to the community.

In each of these modes, my focus was always to lift people up, to help them heal, grow, and thrive in life, regardless of their circumstance. It has been much the same in the political arena too, albeit with a different bent. My purpose in fanning the flames of the liberty movement has been to lift people out of oppression, by elevating awareness to the stranglehold of tyrannical government regulations.

Much like guiding people in prayer and study, similar to teaching people how to heal mind, body, and soul, this political elevation of awareness always involved presenting practical solutions to real world problems. The effort was born of necessity, and seeing a need for both inspiration and strategy, I set my mind to task.

But that was then, and this is now.

Much like the passing of seasons, like letting go of the church and the labels that came with it, like letting go of the yoga studio and the labels that came with that, I am faced with the reality of similar circumstances, where it feels like life is taking me in a different direction. No longer am I a radio host, I’ve had to let go.

Time constraints have forced me to let go of producing daily reports and podcasts.

Has the time come to let go of the Torch Report?

I squirm at the thought of it.

It makes me sad to think about.

I don’t want to let go, that’s for sure.

What I want is for this effort to be meaningful and bear fruit — but in the absence of such fruit, I must contend with reality. Wishful thinking doesn’t provide much consolation. Like my grandma always said:

“You can wish in one hand and s**t in the other and see which fills up faster.”

Rooted in the effort to serve my local community — “Goooood morning Goldendale!” — now I wonder if this crazy train has run its course. Or, perhaps the train needs to pull into a new station and pick up some more people. I’m not sure, that’s the point.

What I do know, is that for the immediate future, things cannot continue running as they have. There’s not enough steam in the engine or time in the day.

Thems the facts Jack.

Friends, thank you for hearing me out. I had to get that off my chest. I don’t know what the future holds, but I believe the future is bright. For all the painful lessons of letting go that life has served, the greatest take away is that there’s always something more in store—but we have to be brave enough to let go before we can embrace it.

We have to be willing to enter the unknown.

That’s where the mystery unfolds.

For now, I will write as time allows, continue to focus on the bigger picture, and strive to keep the spirit of resistance alive. As always, remember: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

This will be fun.

Today I would like to make up a new religion.

I mean, why not? People have been making up religions since the dawn of time, right? There is a clear historical precedent, as every cult inherently builds their own wacky belief system, fabricating their twisted delusion out of little more than thin air and wild imagination. In that spirit, let’s proceed with a bit of humor.

Imagine, if you will, that in some obscure corner of the internet a meme popped up, suggesting that round rubber tires are a divinely inspired gift from God. Furthermore, the source of this story cites studies, anecdotal evidence, and divine revelation as proof that burning round rubber tires is pleasing to God.

But burning round rubber tires is more than just a pleasing sacrifice to God. According to the lore, these gifts from God soak up evil spirits as they roll along, generously transporting from one magical place to the next.

The tires sacrifice themselves to protect us from the evil spirits, and in doing so, they get degraded over time. Once their protective shield has been sufficiently worn down, God has directed his followers to burn the round rubber tires in a splendid display of pyro-spiritual worship. Doing so brings a bounty of blessings for the true believers.

Being devout means gathering as many sacrificial tires as possible, stacking them high, soaking them in gasoline, and lighting the refiner’s fire. The thick black plumes are proof that the tires have absorbed many evil spirits, and that these dark forces are now making their way to final judgment before the throne of God himself.

Now, the sacrificial season is upon us.

The pyre has been lit.

The beautiful plumes of thick black smoke beckon believers from all around to gather in celebration of this divine ritual. Praise be to God for cleansing us of the evil spirits!

And then the cops show up.

Some pagan neighbor, confused and lost in the deceptions of the enemy, called in the fire. They told the police we were burning a huge stack of tires. They complained that the air had become toxic, not realizing the odor was the release of these evil spirits.

What’s a believer to do?!

The cops are not believers. They’ve never read the sacred texts. They don’t understand the spiritual battle that is waging all around them. Instead, they insist on putting out the fire and writing a big fat ticket for air pollution. Against every protest, this heavenly mandated spiritual sacrifice, this releasing of evil spirits by the sacrificial burning of round rubber tires is abruptly ended by blind worldly ambitions.

Lord forgive them for their transgressions!

Let’s zoom out.

That hypothetical thought experiment was meant to illustrate the fact that human beings will believe damn near anything.

The Climate Cult believes that blocking out the sun will save the planet.

They believe that if they don’t block out the sun soon, the whole of humanity will suffer in the hellish inferno of a burning planet caused my man made climate change.

They decided, through many decades of research and experimentation, that the quickest and most economical way to block out the sun is to spray reflective chemicals in the sky. They have set about forming more clouds and geoengineering these clouds to be more reflective. They’ve even been playing with nanoparticles.

Unlike the fictitious religion of burning round rubber tires, everything I’ve just said about the Climate Cult is irrefutably true and substantiated by empirical evidence.

Here are some more current articles on this idiotic idea of blocking out the sun:

• Why Billionaires are Obsessed With Blocking Out the Sun

• White House Floats the Idea of Blocking Out the Sun

• 60 Scientists Are Trying to Block the Sun - Popular Mechanics

• Harvard Scientists Begin Experiment To Block Out The Sun

• Bill Gates Venture Aims To Spray The Atmosphere To Block Out the Sun

With that stage set, let’s consider the implications in greater detail.

First, I want to emphasize the religious nature of climate hysteria. Those who adhere to the farcical belief of anthropogenic climate change and man-made global warming believe that we are in an existential crisis. They believe this just as much as a Baptist believes the Bible, but with even greater conviction and zeal.

Evidence of this fact is all around us.

Second, when it comes to convincing someone that their religion is a bogus story that’s been made up to control them, true believers are not easily swayed. In fact, the most devout followers will reflexively reject logic and inherently become hostile towards those who seek to liberate their minds from such delusions.

This pattern is predictable.

Thus, attempting to explain to the climate crazies that blocking out the sun is a very, very bad idea, inevitably falls upon deaf ears. They are not going to listen to the thousands of PhDs and Nobel Prize scientists who have painstakingly demolished their distorted world view—so they sure as hell are not going to listen to the ignorant peasants protesting their insane sun-blocking, chemical spraying schemes.

The third thing I’d point out, is that this fanatical climate cult is operating on a moral imperative. Much like the Jehovah Witnesses, Latter Day Saints, and Christians in general believe they have a divine directive to spread their beliefs, so too do the radical environmentalists believe they must indoctrinate and assimilate the masses.

Climate deniers are blasphemers. They are blinded by their ignorance. They speak lies and spread misinformation, and therefore, they are a threat to the whole of humanity.

Hence, the moral imperative to spread the truth about the climate crisis, while simultaneously working with religious fervor to block out the sun. Nonbelievers will never understand why such drastic measures are an absolute necessity, which is why they must be converted or controlled.

One must realize, that through their eyes, they are trying to save us from ourselves.

Sound familiar?

When it comes to raising public awareness about the very real efforts being made to block out the sun, this is what we are up against—but it’s more than just that.

The Climate Cult has deeply embedded themselves within the media, academia, and government institutions. The breadth of their influence, depth of the funding, and sincerity of their collective convictions should never be underestimated.

But on top of all of that, these fanatics have successfully leveraged these positions of power to capture a large portion of the public psyche. As you well know, they’ve been hard at work for decades convincing the masses their cultish story is true.

As a result, a great percentage of the population has passively accepted their narrative. Many well-meaning and otherwise normal people have been infected with the toxic environmental ideology. Though these normies may not explicitly be on board with blocking out the sun, they implicitly accept the need to save the planet.

This is the target audience.

Like the millions of liberals who are slowly waking up to just how batshit crazy the radical Left has become, we need to fan the flames of liberation by pushing this scheme to block out the sun into the center of public discourse.

We need to push the discussion of chemtrails into the light of day.

Pulling from the facts that were documented in yesterday’s report, I’d like to quickly recap, in simplest terms, exactly what’s happening. The logic looks like this:

• The science of making clouds has been around for almost a hundred years.

• Making more clouds that are brighter and more reflective cools the planet.

• Cooling the planet with more clouds requires spraying chemicals in the sky.

It’s not a difficult concept to grasp — we just need to become comfortable saying it. Furthermore, we need to become comfortable explaining that there are a lot of crazy people in the world who believe that blocking out the sun will save the planet.

If that statement evokes a blank stare, you might be talking with a bonafide climate crazy. If it causes a person to pause long enough to think it through, you’ve got your foot in the door. Is blocking out the sun really going to save the planet?

Doesn’t the sun give life to the birds and the bees, the flowers and the trees?

Isn’t the sun essential for life on earth to function?

Can you imagine what would happen if humanity was plunged into darkness by a wild geoengineering nanoparticle experiment gone wrong?

And say… have you happened to notice all those strange lines in the sky?

The need for tactical conversations is critical.

To build the level of public support needed to legislate against chemtrails, we need to start the conversation not talking about chemtrails. That conversation comes later.

In fact, there are several contingent conversations that need to be had.

With a hat-tip to the comment on yesterday’s post from “Forced Subscriber,” we need to consider the possibility that whatever they are spraying in the sky might not exclusively serve to block out the sun by geoengineering more reflective clouds.

In reality, if left unchecked, whoever is spraying our skies could be spraying us with whatever the hell they want. The possibilities are endless, especially when you consider they’ve openly admitted to exploring the use of “engineered nanoparticles.”

My mind darts to previous reports about the unbelievable sounding space-based weapons systems used for “mood management and mind control” (per the congressional record), as well as the neurostrike brain weapons developed by the CCP.

Clearly the global cabal is hellbent on controlling us all, and if it were possible to spray chemicals that would subdue and dumb down the population, I don’t think for a second they’d hesitate to do so. It’s quite possible they already are.

If you think about the ill-effects of putting fluoride in drinking water and lowering the public IQ—which is currently, and finally, being exposed and opposed by informed citizens across the country—then it’s not much of a stretch to consider the use of spraying chemicals in the sky for a similar purpose.

• What's Happened Since A Judge Ruled Water Fluoridation Is Lowering IQ?

• Nebraska lawmakers consider removing requirement for cities to add fluoride

• Florida lawmakers looking to ban fluoride statewide

• Louisiana lawmakers will consider removing fluoride from public drinking water

I’m sure you get the point.

What I’d like to emphasize in closing, is that while the political theater keeps the general public enthralled, the enemies of humanity are hard at work advancing their various causes. They’ve been at it for more than a century, and though Donald Trump represents significant pushback from We The People, the “secret cabal” of global elites are not going to be so easily defeated.

They operate in the shadows, wielding an unimaginable degree of power and influence. They have a vast network of NGOs working in cahoots with governments all around the world, and they have billions of useful idiots convinced that this unholy alliance of public-private partnerships is working for the greater good.

The Climate Cult may have been rattled, but they are still running strong.

Collectivists are still working night and day around the globe to assimilate the masses into the collective hive-mind. While patriots might rightly bask in the glory of all the current winning, we’d be wise to keep our eyes on the prize, defending our personal liberties and constitutional principles while tackling the insidious plot to block out the sun and other anti-human shenanigans head on.

We’ve got a helluva lot of work to do to defend ourselves from the advancing crazies. It will be a never ending task. Eternal vigilance is in order, and as always:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s been a blur.

The last couple of weeks I’ve been busier than a one-legged man in a butt-kicking contest. But, as promised, I’ve continued to dig into the complexities of weather modification. There is a long and documented history of government research and funding of weather modification techniques that dates back to at least the 1940s.

To provide just one of many tangible examples, the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation took an explicit interest in weather modification back in 1947. Shortly thereafter, the Bureau funded Project Skywater in order to develop “large field experiments and programs to test the practical application of seeding technology.”

From their own archives:

“Project Skywater complemented the general research program already initiated by the National Science Foundation as well as the specific weather programs studying hurricanes at the National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration and fog dispersal at the departments of Defense and Transportation.”

I’m dropping that link straight out of the gate to negate any accusations that government weather modification is some sort of crackpot conspiracy.

Clearly that’s not the case.

It is a 100% proven and irrefutable fact that cloud seeding and other weather modification programs have been being deployed for decades, and we’d all be wise to wrestle with the implications. To drive home the legitimacy of this issue before moving forward, please consider these additional sources, which further substantiate just how mainstream and extensive weather modification programs have become:

• American Meteorological Society’s Early History of Weather Modification (1968)

• NOAA National Weather Modification Policies and Programs (1979)

• NRC Status of US Weather Modification Research and Operations (2003)

• CIA Survey of Weather Modification (Released 2013)

• U.S. Government Accountability Office Report on Cloud Seeding (2024)

Again, we must confront the fact that the science of “cloud seeding” is legit, and that this technology has been being used for much longer than people realize.

But does that mean that conspiracies about “chemtrails” are real?

We’re not there yet.

Setting aside the fact that the government is trying to play God, many useful idiots will make the case that all of this weather modification is entirely benign. You see, the government is just trying to help the farmers and all of this spraying stuff into the atmosphere to change weather patterns is really for the greater good—honest.

It’s always for the greater good, isn’t it?

That said, given the cold, hard fact that weather modification is a thing, I’d like to turn our attention to the fanatical environmentalists who are trying to block out the sun—but first, let’s connect a few rudimentary dots to prime the logical mind:

• Cloud seeding forms clouds, duh.

• Clouds block out the sun by reflecting sunlight.

• Some people are trying to block out the sun to “save the planet.”

With that in mind, it’s not that much of a stretch to think that the radical environmental cult of today might be using these tried and true techniques of weather modification to advance their own insane Net Zero agenda, is it?

Quick story.

I’m outside every day. I live out in the country with a panoramic view. I look at the sky a lot. Sometime last summer, I started noticing a lot of strange lines in the sky, and these strange lines were definitely NOT some new flight pattern.

The lines were so strange, I started taking pictures of them:

As I started paying attention, I noticed there were often two planes flying a pattern making parallel lines, then they circle back and make a big crisscross in the sky. Strange indeed. Stranger still, the lines seemed to disperse in a weird sort of way.

These certainly did not look like normal clouds, and they seemed much lower and lingered much longer than the typical contrails left by commercial flights:

Now then, I have to tell you, I’ve met a lot of people who have been all over the “chemtrails” issue for a long time. I’ve always taken it with a grain of salt—not dismissing the possibility of someone spraying chemicals in the sky, but not really knowing what to do with it.

While talking about chemtrails is a hip and important topic in some circles, it’s a subject that gets zero traction and plenty of ridicule in others.

Regardless, I was definitely watching planes flying in repetitive patterns, making strange lines in the sky. What’s more, there was quite often—but not always—about a two-day delay before the weather would change. The temperature would drop, the clouds would roll in, the wind would pick up, and many times it would rain.

I mentioned this pattern to a close friend, and he made the same observations.

So, the question became inevitable: what the hell is going on up there?

As alluded to in several recent reports, I believe these strange lines in the sky are most likely related to experiments that are currently being conducted to block out the sun in my local area—and believe me, I know just how ridiculous that sounds!

That’s why this report has been slow in the making. In order to do it right, I had to spend the time digging in and not just chasing rabbits down the rabbit hole.

IF these experiments are happening, there HAS to be proof.

It’s not enough that social media is all-a-twitter about #LOOKUP.

It’s not enough that people across the country are posting pictures like this:

And it’s also not enough that people all around the world have been documenting these abnormal flight patterns in flight tracker apps like this:

The fact is, there is a preponderance of evidence documenting such occurrences.

Research indicates there are a bunch of radical environmentalists who are attempting to block out the sun by spraying chemicals into the atmosphere.

FACT.

In reality, this has been happening for much longer than most people realize. Many useful idiots want to casually dismiss these unnatural lines in the sky as nothing more than contrails—condensation trails—but the wise can see through the lies.

Again, this is not speculation or conspiracy.

This disturbing reality is very well documented.

On that note, if you’ve been with me, you know I’ve called out the government’s weather modification programs before. Again, they’ve been around for decades, as spelled out in the following reports:

• TR 399 - Government Seeks to Block Out Sun

• TR 584 - Globalist Gaslighting Lights Up the Night Sky

• TR 634 - On the Weaponization of Weather and Geoengineering Elections

For today, I want to provide some more specific examples to emphasize that this is not a joke. This is not a test. This is a very serious issue that needs to be addressed head on, immediately. We cannot sit idly by while a bunch of environmental wackos obsessively try to block out the sun.

That is entirely unacceptable — and yet, in certain circles, the proposition of blocking out the sun to save the planet is accepted as gospel.

As a case in point, consider the Marine Cloud Brightening Program and “small-scale field studies” (in eastern Washington?) being conducted by Washington State University. One look at the lady running the show, and you can tell that she’s a radical fruitcake who’s just giddy about the idea of blocking out the sun:

“Sustained small changes in cloud cover or in the amount of sunlight reflected by clouds have the potential to change climate both locally and globally.”

It’s worth noting that “emergency weather modification” is authorized in the Revised Code of Washington, the experiments are undeniably underway, more are coming, and there has already been pushback in some local communities.

Here’s the proof:

• RCW 70A.10.200 - Program of emergency cloud seeding authorized. (See also Chapter 278, the original Act on Emergency Cloud Seeding from 1981.)

• UW studies a drastic way to cool a warming planet, cloud brightening

• Yakima Basin irrigators explore cloud seeding as a possible option

• UW cloud brightening experiment on hold while Alameda investigates impact

Cloud brightening and cloud seeding are not the same, but they do go hand in hand. Seeding explicitly aims to make it rain (i.e. Project Skywater), while Marine Cloud Brightening aims explicitly to block out the sun and cool the planet. Regardless, both techniques spray chemicals into the sky, both techniques form more clouds, and these geoengineered clouds inevitably block out naturally occurring sunlight.

Let that sink in.

Taking it a step further, the Wilson Center — which claims to be “Congressionally Chartered. Scholarship Driven. Fiercely Nonpartisan.” — discusses WSU’s marine cloud brightening in the broader context of Solar Radiation Management. They highlight other studies being conducted around “stratospheric aerosol injection,” which is just a fancy way of saying, “spraying s**t in the sky” to block out the sun.

According to the Wilson Center:

“…stratospheric aerosol injection, would involve throwing reflective particles into the upper atmosphere. The particle might be sulfur dioxide, or, in some formulations, calcium carbonate or perhaps an engineered nanoparticle, with delivery most likely by a fleet of high-flying aircraft.”

Emphasis added.

Spraying nanoparticles into the sky?Well gosh, that kind of correlates with what all those crackpot conspiracy theorists have been trying to tell us, right?

According to WeatherGeeks.com, the “secret” to effective cloud seeding is using the right chemicals, namely silver iodide, potassium iodide, and sodium chloride. Other sources cite the use of barium and aluminum to achieve the same effect. Still more studies involve injecting “sulfate aerosol precursors and designed nanoparticles” into the atmosphere, in order to save us all from the sun.

• Weather Engineering and its Undesirable Side Effects on the Environment, Natural Resources, Agriculture and Human Health

• Reflecting Sunlight to Cool the Planet – MIT Investigates Solar Geoengineering Proposals

• Assessing the direct occupational and public health impacts of solar radiation management with stratospheric aerosols

• Jets to spray Welsbach particles (aluminum oxide) into the atmosphere

That last link indicates that the US has agreed to spend $50 billion to advance some jackass “50-years Shield Project” (presented by Edward Teller, father of the hydrogen bomb) as a proposed solution for so-called global warming.

These people are not stupid, they are insane.

What’s more, these radical environmentalists tout all this weather modification as a “fast, cheap, and imperfect method” of cooling the planet. But unfortunately, even as they try desperately to block out the sun, they’re quick to inform us that global society will still have to get to Net Zero if we REALLY want to save the planet. Geesh.

Nevertheless, they’re rapidly hammering out the details to make it happen.

“…a program that would ramp up to a cooling impact of around 0.3 degrees Celsius could be achieved for about US$2.25 billion per year over an imagined 15 year lifespan. This kind of price tag makes stratospheric aerosol injection look a good bet in brute economic terms.”

What’s $2.25 billion for blocking out the sun, compared to the billions more spent on other absolutely asinine and ridiculous programs funded by our government?

What’s important to grasp, is that there is a lot of money being funneled into this fanatical idea. MIT says they could “start soon if they start small” in deploying this ominous idea of spraying chemicals into the atmosphere to block out the sun.

These geniuses have calculated it would only take about 100 airplanes to pull this off:

“Consequently, full-scale deployment would require a fleet of novel aircraft—a few hundred in order to achieve a 1 °C cooling target.”

While MIT tries to make the argument that such a fleet would take a decade to assemble, I believe this is a foolish assumption and an intentional head fake. How difficult would it be for a bunch of radical environmentalists with deep pockets to retrofit a few hundred airplanes and start spraying today? C’mon man!

As noted above, they are already doing this. Thus, at this point, I believe they are just trying to formalize the process and solidify public support for this outrageous scheme. Quite predictably, there is no shortage of buy-in from the radical Climate Cult.

The good news is, there are now seven states that have banned “chemtrails” and other forms of geoengineering, including “cloud seeding, weather modification, excessive electromagnetic radio frequency, and microwave radiation.” Some conservative states like Tennessee are rocking the boat by tackling this issue head on:

• Tennessee legislature passes bill banning 'chemtrails': What to know

• Tennessee passes 'chemtrail' bill banning airborne chemicals

• Tennessee lawmakers vote to ban geoengineering

That’s outstanding.

These laws formalize opposition to the idiotic fantasy that somehow blocking out the sun is going to save the planet. This legislation also legitimizes all the “conspiracy theories” by legally codifying opposition to this very real, very dark science.

Personally, I’d point to this outstanding effort to defend the very air we breathe as a clarion call to action. They are spraying our skies — there is no doubt about it.

But we CAN fight back, and we CAN win, as demonstrated by these state legislatures.

BUT HERE’S THE THING:

Most people are still completely clueless.

There are not nearly enough people questioning this poisoning of our skies. There is a stigma about chemtrails that desperately needs to be overcome.

As we’ve seen, geoengineering, weather modification, cloud seeding, solar radiation management (including the use of nanoparticles), and spraying chemicals into the sky is all publicly available information. We need to be talking about this stuff, raising awareness in our communities, and making sure our elected representatives are properly informed and willing to take a stand against this insidious scheme.

What are the long term effects of spraying all these chemicals on the unsuspecting masses? What are the long term effects of successfully blocking out the sun?

Questions abound. We should all demand answers.

Please consider this a primer on the subject, share it far and wide, and remember:

RESIST WE MUST!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

They can’t hide it.

Right now, woke lefties are defending foreign gangbangers and violent criminals from being deported, firebombing Tesla electric vehicles, demanding that judicial activists flagrantly ignore the Constitution, and continue freaking out and having a conniption fit over Donald Trump’s presidential mandate to Make America Great Again.

As predictable and entertaining as this may be, there is something else going on here that needs to be addressed. Relative to the climate crazies’ idiotic efforts to block out the sun (a full report of which is still forthcoming), the connection that needs to be made is that there are millions of Americans who have completely lost their minds.

The same way these useful idiots are being stirred up against Trump’s commonsense agenda, they will inevitably be stirred up to support the most radical environmental policies imaginable—up to and including blocking out the sun.

What could possibly go wrong?!

While I continue to be stretched thin, I’d like to skip another rock across the pond of prior thought, connecting the dots between heavily indoctrinated support for the radical environmental agenda (i.e. blocking out the sun) and the other deranged perspectives and behaviors that are on full display in the America left today.

This insanity has not just spontaneously erupted. It has been carefully cultivated, using sophisticated scientific techniques that will make your skin crawl.

TR 401 - Meat Eaters Must Rise Up brought to light declassified deep state research on psychotronic warfare and other modern versions of the dark arts. It positions meat-eating, liberty loving Americans as the firm resistance to the global green agenda.

Today, I’m sharing Torch Report 402, because it gets directly at why and how people have been conditioned to become so detached from reality. It is critical to grasp how thoroughly the mind can be manipulated. This report will help you wrap your head around why so many people appear to have lost their ever-loving minds.

The implications of this report are massive. Please enjoy.

TR 402 - The Transformation of Human Consciousness

This is how the global elites are capturing and conditioning the minds of the masses.

Yesterday’s report took an unexpected twist into the absolutely outrageous sounding “space based systems directed at populations for the purpose of mood management or mind control.” Please keep in mind, these words, this technology, this system of mind control, comes directly from some very disturbing government reports. The fact that this technology was being researched in the 1980s raises serious implications.

The purpose of this report is to connect this disturbing technology to the globalists’ ongoing effort to “fundamentally transform” human consciousness. This too, as crazy as it sounds, has been being researched extensively for a very long time.

I first reported on the “transformation of human consciousness” back in TR 332 - The Sad Demise of American Values. The question being explored was: how can it be that Americans’ perspectives have changed so dramatically in such a short amount of time? The first thought was that it was due to ideological subversion and scientifically based communist mind control techniques.

It turns out it was all of that and more.

Now, before I go any further, I want to take a step back and qualify this perspective.

I am fully aware of how crazy it sounds, at least to the average citizen, to be talking about communist mind control. Many people might choose to tune out or casually dismiss what I’m saying as some sort of delusional crackpot conspiracy—but to do so would be a perilous mistake. The truth is, as thoroughly documented in my special report on Communist Mind Control, this is a very well researched science.

FACT.

And of course, it’s not just the Communists who are using these proven, scientifically based mind control techniques—they’re just the one’s who first perfected the practice. How else could they enslave the masses under authoritarian centralized control?

Personally, until recently, until my post-pandemic research, I had no idea.

I was just as clueless as the next person about mind control, until I read a half-dozen books or so on the underlying psychology and expanded my understanding:

Since the start of the year, I’ve dug into much more material than just what was in those books. That was just the beginning of my study. I’ve shared a lot about all of this in the 100+ reports since, but the tiny sliver of what’s been shared pales in comparison to the full compendium of relevant information available.

I am providing this context for two reasons:

• I am willing to risk my reputation to say things that other people may be afraid to say, and I do so with absolute confidence that what I am saying is verifiable truth.

• The greatest threat of clinical brainwashing is the killing of curiosity, menticide, when people become unable to ask questions and examine the available facts.

To challenge this, my intention is to throw everything on the table.

My hope is to inspire people to talk about this stuff. We need to be talking about this.

How is it okay for a small group of people to be purposefully brainwashing the masses, without masses even knowing it? To me, that’s evil. And yet, that’s exactly what’s happening, whether we’re talking about it from the angle of state propaganda or weaponized AI and Algorithmic Social Interventions. That’s why the information I stumbled on yesterday—the space based systems for mind control—compelled me to follow up on this fundamental transformation of human consciousness.

It’s a double-edged sword.

Much like neuroplasticity opens up the possibility of life-long learning and the ability to retrain our brains toward more efficient, productive, and predictable positive patterns, this examination of transforming human consciousness opens the door to considering how we might use these revelations to our own advantage.

As quoted from the CIA’s report on Psychic Warfare:

“Man’s greatest potential remains a prisoner of man. Only a fraction of the human mind is currently used. Limitless mental capabilities are just waiting to be accepted, developed and understood.”

That’s a good thing—unless of course some evil mastermind taps into this potential to advance his own selfish, anti-human agenda, aka “dabbling in the dark arts,” to quote the government report. The flip side of this is that we each have the same latent potential, and that means we can seek and potentially unlock powerful solutions by becoming better acquainted with our own inner consciousness.

This is precisely the reason I’ve long said that the only solution to political chaos is an elevation of personal, inner, spiritual awareness. It's the elevation of awareness that leads to the expansion of human consciousness, according to the science. I first came to understand this through my study of yoga and meditation, but the political connection came in TR 332, when I was studying this transformation of human consciousness in a research paper from the Journal of Consciousness Studies.

The 2010 research paper was titled, “Worldview Transformation and the Development of Social Consciousness,” and the study presented this informative visual:

Note that human consciousness—your consciousness—is “passively shaped” outside of awareness, as in without your realizing it, by “biological, social and cultural factors.” These are the embedded beliefs that drive our behavior.

Emphasis on embedded.

The global elite understand the science of this conscious transformation very well, and it is precisely this science of embedding “shared beliefs, values, and social attitudes” that predicates their efforts to develop cosmopolitan global citizens.

Just to drive the point home:

Worldviews are shaped by factors that lie outside of conscious awareness, and these worldviews shape a person’s experience of reality. That’s what they’re targeting.

This shaping of consciousness is rooted in what the scientists call “transpersonal psychology.” In a nutshell, this phenomenon connects people with a “broader sense of self that expands beyond the individual.” This is the scientific underpinning of the collective hive-mind, it is very real, and it is absolutely destructive.

Such transpersonal consciousness “expands social consciousness” beyond the natural world. This is where personal beliefs—embedded by the cabal—get replaced by “collective beliefs” and subsequently become detached from reality.

The mind ceases to make direct observations of the natural world (or the facts at hand), and instead begins to accept embedded suggestions and interpretations as if they were actually reality—and personal beliefs and behaviors follow suit.

The entire process is facilitated through a deliberately initiated physiological shift, via an intentional change in emotional state, that leads to brain entrainment. This creates a “measurable coherence” that intensifies the individual’s shift of consciousness into a “sincerely loving or caring state.” This is the classic “feel good” stuff that heightens suggestibility and leads to people doing stupid things for the greater good, like this:

Friends, again, this is the actual science behind brainwashing.

In this intentionally intensified “sincerely loving or caring state” the masses are easily primed to sacrifice themselves for the sake of the collective. This is the basic biological function that has been driving cult mentalities since the dawn of time. Scientists say this “transformation of worldview” leads to a sense of “grounded belonging,” even up to the point of drinking the collective Kool-Aid.

It should come as no surprise, but should not be overlooked, that this study on expanding social consciousness and transforming worldviews is intended to develop “global citizens.” This is the cosmopolitan perspective discussed in TR 338:

It’s important to point out their pedagogy here, how their method of intentional education (i.e. indoctrination) utilizes “inclusive dialogue” and “lived experiences” to facilitate this conscious transformation. They’ve been integrating this into K-12 education for decades, without informing parents that what they were really doing was transforming their children’s consciousness and hijacking their humanity.

Their objective is to “develop different identities” and the results speak for themselves, but unfortunately this rapid rate of change is just ramping up.

Tying it all together.

It should go without saying that it’s not just the commies who know how to hack and manipulate people’s minds. Our own government excels at this science just as much as any other, if not more.

The issue we face now is that a small group of people, who have their hands on the levers of the most powerful technologies ever created, are now using this science to transform human consciousness at the global scale.

Just to be clear, this is menticide on a massive scale that was never before possible.

If we entertain the possibility, based on our own government’s reports, that they have the ability to manipulate moods and impose mind control with advanced technologies that may or may not be “space based,” we’ve got a serious situation on our hands.

While many people may be wondering what we can do about the rampant and blatant political corruption, my question is this: What can we do about this shady subconscious manipulation of humanity?

Just to bring it back down to earth and make a practical connection, this conscious transformation is directly related to the forthcoming global digital IDs and global digital currencies—per this previously reported study: “The post-pandemic, socially conscious transformation of American banking in a digital world.”

I mention that to emphasize how the global cabal is using these techniques of mind control and conscious transformation to convince the masses to accept living in inescapable surveillance, embrace state censorship, and simply ignore the potential genocidal destruction of remnant populations who reject all this insanity.

The current political environment seems to indicate that we are quickly approaching these “final” solutions. Indeed, the stakes have never been higher. They’re about to break out the “big stick” to beat us into compliance—that much they’ve admitted—the question is:

“Can man resist a government bent on conditioning him?”

The answer is YES, and RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s review.

Friends, the last week has pulled me in so many different directions, I haven’t had time to put together a proper report. That said, I have been working on a full report on Solar Radiation Management — aka blocking out the sun — and I’m looking forward to doing a proper deep dive on the subject.

I’m sure that many of you have seen the strange lines in the sky.

With that in mind, as I’m working on that report and juggling about a billion other things, I’d like to share TR 399 - Government Seeks to Block Out Sunin its entirety today, as a primer for what’s to come. This report was originally posted July 3, 2023.

We’ll be taking a much closer look at what the hell is going on once I have the time to do it proper justice. Thank you for your patience.

For now, please read, listen, enjoy, click the little heart and share!

TR 399 - Government Seeks to Block Out Sun

French riots. Canadian wildfires. Climate lockdowns.

What the hell is going on in the world, right?

Could all of this somehow be connected?

I’m going to thread this all together, but first I want to bring attention to this:

So, the government is using YOUR money to figure out how to block the sun. FACT.

To any rational person, that should seem absolutely outrageous. Who the hell do these people think they are? But more importantly: who the hell is going to stop them before they do something terrifyingly stupid, like try to block out the sun?

This is all so utterly insane, it is difficult to comprehend. That’s by design. When things seem so strange and out-of-whack it elevates “free floating anxiety” which then heightens suggestibility. If they can keep the masses guessing, then the masses keep looking for answers. And who can the masses trust, if not their beloved government?

Damn fools anyway.

By the way, if you were to search for “blocking sunlight” on the White House website, you’re not going to find anything. Instead, you’d need to search for this little doozy: Congressionally-Mandated Report on Solar Radiation Modification. It is there you will learn that the Biden-Harris Administration is fully focused on “advancing environmental justice” in cooperation with “international partners.”

They claim there are no plans underway at this point, but stress any “potential” program must encompass the “societal as well as the scientific dimensions of solar radiation modification”—i.e. how people might react to the government blocking out the sun, because hey, what could possibly go wrong, right?

Interestingly enough, the press release of this “congressionally mandated” report linked above, states quite bluntly:

“…there are no plans underway to establish a comprehensive research program focused on solar radiation modification.”

That is a lie.

If a curious peasant were to drill down far enough to find the actual report, the truth would be revealed:

“This Research Plan focuses on improving understanding of the potential impacts of SRM. … This Plan draws from the published literature on SRM, research currently underway, and other reports identifying priorities for SRM research.”

What do we learn here? Two important facts:

• “This Research Plan” directly rebuts the press release “there are no plans”

• “This Plan” draws from literature and research that is “currently underway”

The executive summary of the 44-page report states that all of this research would “help to prepare the United States for possible deployment of SRM by other public or private actors.” The implication here is that the U.S. government is aware that other entities may jump on this crazy train too, so they better figure out how to deal with it—will they lead by example, or will they get left in the geoengineered solar blocking dust?

The 44 page report refers to climate change over 60 times. They emphasize “international cooperation”—which translates to global governance—outline the various ways of building consensus and “socializing best practices,” and then refer to the U.S. Global Change Research program that has been in place since the Global Change Research Act of 1990. Have you ever heard of that before? Me neither.

Here’s the link to their suspiciously named website: GlobalChange.gov

The site is a treasure trove of globalist propaganda and cultish climate slogans. I’ll do a deep dive on this site at a later date. What stood out to me today was the fact that the Department of Homeland Security just became the newest member of the cult, the first agency to join the committee in almost two decades:

What, pray tell, does the Department of Homeland Security have to do with climate change? Well, according to the announcement:

“DHS brings unique expertise to USGCRP, such as its experience in preparing our Nation for and responding to more frequent natural disasters. The addition of DHS’s invaluable insights and perspectives will help USGCRP better connect critical climate information to the people across the country who are facing increasing risks of climate change.”

I smell a rat.

The language alone is gobbledygook—rife with words that have a “hidden, higher meaning and socialistic interpretation”—but here it’s who’s behind this merger that is most disturbing. It is the utterly dishonorable Alejandro Mayorkas, whom lied to congress about the Disinformation Governance Board, who has been instrumental in destroying our country by allowing human traffickers and hard drugs to flow across the southern border, and who rightly deserves to be impeached for high crimes against the nation—THAT is the guy behind this merger with the Global Change committee.

The climate cultists working for Global Change claim that DHS has “invaluable insights” that will help “better connect critical climate information” to people across the nation. What are they really saying here?

Did you know that the Department of Homeland Security has been monitoring social media as part of the Situational Awareness Initiative since at least 2015? As reported way back in TR 120, these initiatives are aimed at sniffing out “white supremacists” and “hate crimes” under the guise of the Domestic Terrorism Prevention Act. In other words, DHS is functioning as a weaponized federal agency that is deliberately targeting political opposition to the current tyrannical regime.

Combined with the impetus behind the allegedly disbanded (but quickly rebranded) Disinformation Governance Board—who’s entire mission is to seek and destroy political dissent in the name of keeping people “safe” from misinformation—the reason for this latest leftist alliance begins to be clear.

DHS will provide Global Change with “valuable insights” via their national surveillance programs, and they will “better connect” government climate propaganda with people across the country by censoring any dissenting perspectives. It would be foolish to think that this isn’t already happening.

This is a mere formality—a public declaration of their ever expanding assumed authority that most of the public knows nothing about.

Let’s circle back.

France is on fire due to five nights of violent protests, prompting some to claim that “France has fallen,” even as the French President Emanuel Macron continues to blame video games and demand social media censor the protests. With over 700 injured cops, French Patriots have taken to the streets to help restore justice. Their bravery should be inspiring to the world, and their chants resonate with your soul:

“Blue, white, red, France belongs to the French!”

France belongs to the French, just as America belongs to Americans. The same could likely be said for the 400+ other agitated protests happening around the world today.

The globalists are orchestrating this chaos to justify government crackdowns and greater degrees of centralized control, which they enforce via an increasingly inescapable surveillance state and more heavily militarized police force.

Unless force is met with force, it’s checkmate.

The great irony is that we are told to believe that the “climate crisis” is driving this societal chaos, at least according to The Science, which brings it all full circle.

We are told to believe that climate change is causing the Canadian wildfires—not arsonists, like some Canadian officials claim. Meanwhile, Washington state officials have declared that we’re going to be in the epicenter of wildfires in the northwest this summer, because of “what we’ve done to the atmosphere.”

Naturally, the government’s solution is to try to block out the sun and ban hamburgers just in time for the 4th of July. We could probably laugh if they weren’t so serious.

But wait…

A thought crosses my mind: Extreme wildfires block the sun right?

Yes, that’s right, according to National Geographic, extreme wildfires cool the planet:

Officials are investigating claims of arson, but no arson is ever caught. Then there’s that whole drone-deliverable Flamebot 9000 thing. Now multiple states are reporting that this so-called wildfire smoke smells and tastes like chemicals.

They’ve already said we need climate lockdowns on par with the pandemic lockdowns EVERY TWO YEARS in order to save the planet. Now we’ve got air quality alerts over toxic smoke that has people masking up and staying locked in their homes.

The coincidences just keep stacking up.

Think about it: if these people are crazy enough to honestly entertain the idea of blocking out the sun, what are they not willing to do in order to save the planet?

Oh yeah, and all of this hype just so happens to coincide with the National Wildland Firefighter Week of Remembrance. The observation is held annually from June 30 to July 6—which is awesome in that it honors those who have fallen fighting fires to protect our communities—but it’s strange that it coincides with so much propaganda.

Biden says he’s met with firefighters who are working day and night as the fires “get larger, more intense, and more difficult to control because of climate change.”

The way that it’s being portrayed reminds me of how they elevated nurses to hero status during the pandemic, because they were risking their lives to keep people safe. The solution is more money and state surveillance, no surprise there, but the template and timing of it all… that’s got me scratching my head.

The global cabal claims that climate change is driving societal chaos.

Could the global cabal be the one who’s driving this climate change?

I’d love to know what you think. Stay curious friends!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s compare.

They say you can’t compare apples to oranges, but in reality, you sure as hell can.

Apples come in a large variety of colors, shapes, textures, and sweetness. Oranges on the other hand, being generally round and orange, have much less variety in these attributes. Apples have woody stems, and they make good pies. Oranges, not so much.

The list could go on, but that’s not really the point.

The human ability to compare and contrast is at the root of our discernment. We must be able to discriminate between the various qualities of people, places, and things we encounter in our environment — good, bad, or neutral — if we really want to thrive in life. In fact, such sound judgment is essential to our survival as a species.

But that’s not really the point either.

THE POINT IS, due to decades of cultural conditioning and a gross degree of social engineering, the general public’s judgment and level of discernment is woefully low.

This lack of judgment is a major impediment to restoring our Republic.

Why?

Because without sound judgment, without the ability to compare and contrast, the ability to discern discrepancies and accurately discriminate against lesser choices, then we are destined to follow the path of folly that’s so well-trodden by our feckless leaders.

Indeed, we’ve been stumbling blindly down this path for years.

One need only to consider the warped perspectives running rampant right now, like the belief that boys can be girls, that men can menstruate (not joking, see below), etc., to grasp just how badly the public’s discernment has been broken. I’m fully aware that there are millions of people who can see through these lies, but that does not dismiss the fact there are millions of people who do in fact cling to these delusions.

You’ll note in the studies below that our government, the globalists, and their gigantic network NGOs are actively funding the cultivation of such insanity:

• Jewish Male Menstruation in Seventeenth-Century Spain

• The Medical Reason For 'Male Menstruation' In Ancient Egypt

• Acknowledging That All Genders Can Menstruate Doesn’t ‘Erase Women’

• 'Not all menstruators are women': According to trans and nonbinary folks

• USDA Grant to Study 'Trans Men's' Menstrual Cycles

• Degendering Menstruation: Making Trans Menstruators Matter

• The Menstruating Male Body - The Blood Project

It’s all absolutely insane, but none of this is by accident.

Similarly, and more importantly, millions of people are still desperately clinging to the delusion that CO2 is bad for the environment, and that “man-made global warming” is an existential threat to the planet. Those in this camp are even more dangerous than all the rabid trannies combined, because they believe they have a moral imperative to “save the planet” by significantly reducing the human population and taking total control over every aspect of our lives.

They believe in the “climate crisis” just as much as a Baptist believes the Bible.

Unfortunately, even though Trump and his team are standing up to this delusional thinking, I’d dare to say that the simple majority of Americans, by population, are still fully invested in the narrative. The so-called “climate crisis” is very much alive and well in the minds of the masses, and of course, in many of our elected leaders.

As I was saying in recent reports, the Great Reset is still very much upon us.

In judging which is the greater threat, transgenderism and transhumanism versus the manufactured climate hysteria, we need to wrap our heads around a few numbers. According to Gallup, 7.6% of Americans identify as LGBTQ (as something other than heterosexual), and this percentage has literally doubled over the last 10 years.

Meanwhile, Pew Research indicates that some 69% of Americans are still on board with the climate agenda, accepting hook, line, and sinker the need for society to be “taking steps to become carbon neutral” by implementing the globalists’ arbitrarily contrived deadlines and Net Zero initiatives.

Agenda 2030 and the 2050 deadlines still loom on the horizon.

Thus, while the readily apparent insanity of gender confused ideologues is an easy target to mock and make an example of, the number of these strange and deranged useful idiots pales in comparison to the climate crazies. What the MAGA movement must realize, is that these climate crazies are the real army that we’re up against.

It is those who are infected with the “climate mind virus” — and not just the “woke mind virus” — that are set to do the most damage to the American way of life.

It is they who seek to take control over local resources, locking up land with massive industrial scale “green energy” projects and regulating our way of life into oblivion.

Moreover, it is the Climate Cult that is being used to push the anti-human depopulation agenda. They have been meticulously indoctrinated to believe they have everything to gain and nothing to lose by pushing for the elusive Net Zero, which the founder of Green Peace himself has admitted will end millions of lives.

“If they actually achieve Net Zero, at least 50% of the population would die of hunger and disease.” —Dr. Patrick Moore

Some would say that’s the point.

As you may know, I’ve documented this dark depopulation agenda many times before:

It is not a stretch to say that the radical, fanatical environmentalists are willing to do damn near anything to save the planet. They will glue themselves to tarmacs, sit in the middle of the road to stop traffic, and push the most ridiculous policies to advance their collective fantasies. These fanatics are incredibly motivated to do stupid things, and many of them are highly active in the political process at the local level.

Meanwhile, most American patriots are happy and content with all the “winning,” falsely believing that Donald Trump is going to be able to put a stop to all of this.

This naive optimism is dangerous, as it overlooks the great deal of work that needs to be done to confront the climate agenda at every level. We need to confront the climate agenda as it seeks to worm its way into local policies and ordinances, and we need to confront the crazies who support this nonsense in the court of public opinion.

We need to elect fighters at the county and the state levels, who are willing and able to articulate the bogus nature of the climate narrative, and stand firm in the fire of liberal scorn that ensues. We need to communicate, at every level, the idiocy of believing in a so-called “climate crisis.”

In short, we need to drive this meme into the grave, as quickly as possible.

Now is the time.

One might think the solution would be as easy as educating people about the global network of over 1900 scientists and professionals, many of whom are Nobel Prize winners and PhDs in their respective fields, who adamantly REJECT the climate crisis narrative. Indeed, the Climate Intelligence foundation has released a report titled The Frozen Climate Views of the IPCC, that dismantles the bunk science one stat at a time.

But unfortunately, most people will never read it.

Beyond that, something I’ve noticed about building support for public pushback, is the tendency for people to get in an uproar about something, for a little bit, only to go back to their business of rat killing before any meaningful change takes place.

I’ve seen it in the opposition to wind turbines and industrial solar. I’ve seen it in opposition to so-called smart meters and the “safe and effective” vaccines. I’ve seen it in opposition to gross government overreach and outright political tyranny.

When people know that what’s happening is wrong, they stand up and say something. They get angry and emotionally involved. But, when nothing comes of speaking out, most people end up feeling defeated, as if all the pushback was for nothing.

ZOIKS!!

That is a losing strategy if there ever was one.

Unfortunately, this tendency is predicated upon predictable human nature, which is why it has been thoroughly exploited by the powers that be for a century or more. In fact, this natural tendency to tune out and let go of grievances has been calculated into the process of systematic societal transformation.

The Delphi Method, Horizon Scanning, and Vertical Integration are all being deployed daily to extract consensus and acceptance from unwilling peasants, at the local level, in your county and hometown. FACT.

Which is why we need discernment now more than ever before.

It is critical that America First patriots keep their eyes on the ball.

Today, we awaken to headlines like these:

What do you think? Have the globalists released the Kraken?

World renowned analyst Charles Nenner certainly thinks so:

Trump Will Face War & Depression

But me personally?

I’d say wait and see — but don’t wait idly.

There is a steady stream of good news coming out of the Trump administration, like the potential for DOGE savings to be issued to taxpayers in the form of a stimulus check, the new Energy Secretary moving us away from 'Quasi-Religious' Climate Cult Policies, and woke Ivy Leagues being brought to heel by freezing federal aid over their insidious indoctrination schemes and anti-American agendas.

It’s all good stuff.

However, this does little to salve my broader concerns.

Along with the myriad issues that seem to be getting swept under the rug by all the winning, like an honest investigation of the J6 Fedsurrection, I’d point to this headline out at Revolver News as case in point for what I’m getting at:

Trans vet gets government-paid vaginoplasty, then hangs himself a month later…

The point is, the public psyche has already been poisoned.

Millions of people are completely out of touch with reality.

Thus, millions of people still believe that Biden’s economy was booming, that Trump’s tariffs and Musk’s cuts are driving the markets into a recession, that men have a right to compete against women in sports, that the planet is in an existential crisis that demands drastic actions to “proportion” the population and impose draconian regulations and top-down authoritarian control over our everyday lives, and so on.

What’s a patriot to do?!

We need to be discerning.

We need to discern the difference between actionable intelligence and entertaining distractions. We need to discern the degrees of impact that can be had by investing our time and effort into things like public meetings versus social media. We need to discern the distinction between what might happen, and what’s actually happening.

Above all else, we need to discern what can be done about it, at the personal level.

What can you and I do?

Well, there is much to be done.

I think we need to prioritize and coordinate our efforts to push back on the things that are impacting us most directly at the local level. I’ve got a lot more to say about that, including prioritizing and pushing to the center some fairly “fringe” ideas, but alas, I’m out of time for today. I’ll rip the lid off that can of worms in the next report!

In the meantime, remember: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

In the beginning…

The whole world had gone mad.

Reflecting on it, everywhere we looked people were covering their faces with worthless face diapers, recoiling from handshakes, afraid to stand too close, scared of crowded spaces, and following all sorts of absolutely ridiculous new “rules” — like social distancing with those stupid little stickers in the stores, getting testing like lab rats with those nasty little nose swabs, contact tracing, quarantines, and on and on.

What’s more, at the peak of this insanity, now nearly five years in the rearview, people were not allowed to visit their loved ones, go to the movies, go to church, enjoy family dinners, walk in the woods, play in the parks, et cetera—and MOST people, by far, went along with it the whole damn time.

I was not one of them.

I never got swabbed or accepted these new rules. I didn’t follow those stupid dots. I’ve never been tested for Covid-19. I’m not going to rehash or recount it all now, but I wanted to briefly reflect on the covid plandemic, shamdemic, scamdemic, because that’s the context for when the Torch Report started.

That’s where I’m coming from when I say, “RESIST WE MUST!”

With that in mind, it seems impossible to account for everything that has happened in life, from the personal to the national levels, since March 2020. I’d suggest taking some time to reflect on it, to reconnect with what life was like, for you personally, before the whole world got turned upside-down.

I went to March 2020 in my Google photos, and it was a disturbing time warp.

Remember this?

I remember thinking: why are people panic buying toilet paper for a respiratory illness? There were SO many things that didn’t make a lick of sense—but at that time, I still didn’t have a clue about how far the rabbit hole would go. On that note, it’s probably worth taking a little trip a little further down memory lane:

• March 11, 2020: The Day Everything Changed - NPR

• Timeline of the COVID-19 pandemic in March 2020

• CBS year in review: Top news stories of 2020 month-by-month

“Those who forget the past are doomed to repeat it.”—George Santayana

February 2020 had been a highly eventful month. Bernie Sanders had won the Democrat primaries in New Hampshire (because nobody liked Joe Biden) and the Iowa caucuses were subsequently delayed. Donald Trump had been impeached by the House but was acquitted by the Senate. Political theater consumed the news.

Outside of that, for the low-information voters, February 2020 had been peppered with stories about mass shootings in multiple places, swarms of killer bees, “ruptured gas lines” in Texas, leaky sewage in Florida, and news that the Boy Scouts were going bankrupt—but that was all just the noisy din of headline news.

The real story was that Donald Trump was rocking the political establishment, and both parties, in cahoots with the global cabal, were desperate to stop him.

To further set the stage, consider the fact that on February 12, 2020, the economy was booming and the stock market was at a record high. PresidentTrump had delivered record-low unemployment and prosperity to the American people. His MAGA base was energized, support among Black and Latino voters was surging, and his reelection seemed virtually inevitable.

Meanwhile, sleepy Joe Biden wasn’t leaving his basement.

Nobody liked Kamala Harris (remember, she was the first candidate to get rejectedin the primaries), so it looked like ‘Crazy Uncle’ Bernie Sanders was going to sweep in and successfully steal the spotlight from the establishment’s sock puppet candidate — but of course, the DNC (aka Hillary Clinton) was having none of that!

• Inside Hillary Clinton's Secret Takeover of the DNC

• Leaked emails show how Democrats screwed Sanders

• Wikileaks Proves Primary Was Rigged: DNC Undermined Democracy

• DNC betrayed Bernie Sanders and the rest of America

Under no circumstances could the globalists who were pulling the strings behind the entrenched, entirely corrupted two-party political establishment allow the American people to actually choose their own president.

They had a plan.

Having successfully run the Event 201 pandemic dry run in October 2019, the largest psyop in human history was set to commence, just in time to thwart Donald Trump’s reelection. The stage was set, and the first domino had been tipped:

With all of this in mind, while most pundits are still talking about Trump’s tremendously important and impactful speech to Congress (understandably), I’d like to drop this video of Trump addressing the nation back on March 11, 2020.

This was, as NPR put it, “the day that changed everything.”

I strongly encourage you to watch the video, and consider the fact that the same man is now sitting in the same office, under entirely different circumstances.

Think about how QUICKLY everything changed.

For the record, I thought Donald Trump did a masterful job of schooling the Democrats on Tuesday night. I loved how he trolled them. My favorite line was the one about how all the liberals had been squawking about needing new legislation to secure the border, “but it turns out, you just needed a new President.”

BOOM!

I damn near spit out my wine when he said that. I had to laugh out loud.

It was classic Trump, and it was delivered perfectly.

Soak it up, yes, but please don’t forget how quickly things can change. Please don’t lose sight of what’s happened, what’s in motion, and what’s not in the headlines.

Even as I was pulling references for this morning’s report, trying to go back and search out historical records of what actually happened back in 2020, I immediately hit the wall of Algorithmic Social Interventions.

My feed was full of “Trusted News Initiative” sources, and there wasn’t a dissenting, counter-narrative perspective in sight — it was all canonized globalist propaganda, which is pretty odd if you think about it, and deeply disturbing.

As I have said many times before, they’ve been re-writing history in real-time. You and I both know that the vast majority of people are never going to go digging around for something other than the state sanctioned truth. Most people are simply going to believe what they’re told. Worse yet, as discussed, this passive behavior has been intentionally conditioned for decades and our society now suffers accordingly.

Long-time subscribers know I was calling out state-based propaganda and manipulative algorithms long before it was revealed that the USAID was funneling tax dollars to propagandize the American people, or the Twitter Files and Google Leaks confirmed the Deep State was orchestrating election interference.

On January 20, 2022, in TR 41 - Are Our Elections Legitimate?, during the thick of the unrelenting pandemic propaganda, I made the following observation:

“Since the start of all this chaos, COVID-19 has had significant political implications. The crisis tanked the economy, thrust then-President Trump into turmoil, and radically altered the 2020 presidential election. This in turn, generated even more uncertainty and confusion, and ushered in the current corrupt and incompetent administration.

Could this have been the plan all along? (Hint: Fauci predicted it in 2017)…By the time of the 2020 elections, people had been living in fear for almost a year. Life had been turned upside-down, businesses had been shuttered, masks and social distancing had been mandated, and lockdowns had become common place. This led directly to unconstitutional changes in voting laws, and the most rampant voter fraud our country has ever faced.

This then led to questionable elections, which then led to January 6th, which continues to divide the country and plunge the public even further into uncertainty and chaos. We now know that the supposed “insurrection” was being instigated and orchestrated by government operatives. We know that people are being held in solitary confinement, as political prisoners, without trial or bail. And we know that the next wave of COVID swept all of this information into the dust bin of history, as the public once again was bludgeoned with relentless propaganda.”

At that point, there were very few people questioning the various narratives. That’s precisely why I started the podcast, because it had become painfully obvious that there were not enough people resisting the insanity of it all. If more people didn’t wake up and start pushing back, then tyranny would establish a permanent root.

The reason people weren’t pushing back, was because of the incessant propaganda:

“…to this day, too few people question the connection between COVID and events at the capital.” —Torch Report 41

It’s hard to believe that was over three years ago… 639 reports later, it feels like I’ve learned a lot about how and why things got so crazy, but it also feels like most people are still operating in the fog of gaslighting propaganda—present company excluded.

Think about the liberal’s support for more war in Ukraine. Think about the obsession with DEI, child mutilation, and the sickening transgender nonsense. Think about the gross degrees of corruption and fraud. Think about the political establishment’s concerted effort to undermine Trump’s dismantling of all of this and more.

Friends, I sincerely believe that Donald Trump is exactly the kind of leader that we need to correct course and Make America Great Again. There is no denying that he is highly focused and effective, or that he’s learned many lessons from all the political persecution and lawfare. He knows how the game is played now, and he’s playing it at the highest possible level.

That said, for all of the excitement and winning, I can’t shake the feeling that something else is afoot. Everything that has been on the table remains on the table. Much like the globalists conspired months in advance to bring down Trump with a pre-planned pandemic, I suspect they are busy preparing their next move.

They may tank the economy and blame it on Trump. They may push forward with the next plandemic, unleashing a weaponized Bird Flu. They may take another stab at assassination. They may plunge the world into a global war. Whatever their ploy, the thought that they’d just give up and go home seems inconceivable to me.

While on the one hand it seems prudent to resist getting sucked into the Doom Loop, on the other hand, it feels like we need to resist getting all doped up on hopium.

We have momentum. We can win.

But we are certainly not going to win if we expect Donald Trump to solve all our problems. He’s doing great, but he can’t do it all. The globalist agenda is still being implemented at the local level. The global bankers still have all their cards. Digital currency, digital IDs, and a full-on commie social credit system are still on the docket.

Trump has made it perfectly clear that the American Dream is back in style. Millions of people are once again feeling excited about the future—but that’s only half the story. Millions of useful idiots and Marxist minions are still among us. Liberal lawmakers and activist judges are still in positions of power.

Weaponized algorithms are still censoring and controlling the flow of information. Globalist propaganda is still warping the very fabric of reality. Millions of people are still asleep, wholly unaware that the Great Reset is still very much upon us.

At the end of the day, this is where the battle lies.

We are in a war of perception and beliefs. We must fight with our words before we fight with our fists. While it’s tempting to think we can simply beat some sense into people, that strategy is severely shortsighted. If we really want to Make America Great Again, we need to win more hearts and minds—millions more.

In the long run, this is the only winning solution.

The mid-terms are coming. This fight is far from over. Educate people, especially your local and elected leaders. If you’re not already, get in the fight, and stay in the fight.

There’s never been a better time to wake people up.

Tell everyone you know: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

I’m curious.

I’ve always been curious. This morning I heard a new birdsong, a seasonal migrator of some sort, and I was immediately curious about what new bird this was. Was it one that I would recognize from last year? If so, I might be able to firmly pair the song with the bird, and brand it in into my mind. But then again, it was a new song, and I felt fairly certain I hadn’t heard it before. What could it be?

All of that went flying through my mind in an instant, but rather than grabbing the binoculars and setting out on the hunt to scratch that curious itch, I decided to plant my butt down and do some reading. There’s a lot happening in the world.

Here are some of the things that I will not be talking about today:

• EPSTEIN FILES TODAY: AG Pam Bondi Announces Thursday Release As 250 Victim Names Redacted

• GENE HACKMAN, WIFE, DOG FOUND DEAD IN HOME

• Zelensky To Visit White House But Minerals Deal Still Up In The Air

• The Liberal Meltdown Continues and Is Glorious (but Also Dangerous)

• President Trump Signs New Executive Order on DOGE — here’s the direct link to IMPLEMENTING THE PRESIDENT’S “DEPARTMENT OF GOVERNMENT EFFICIENCY” COST EFFICIENCY INITIATIVE

• Federal Officials Identify ‘HUD Employee’ Who Broadcast AI Video of Trump Kissing Musk’s Feet in HUD Cafeteria – Escort Individual from the Building

• Floyd Mayweather Jr. Shocks the Left: Boxing Legend Defends Trump, Declares ‘Best President We Ever Had’

• BREAKING: IRS to shutter 120 offices nationwide

• Military Contractors Pitch Trump on Plan to Enlist a ‘Private Citizen Army’ to Help Carry Out Mass Deportations

• Neo-Nazis targeted majority-Black town. Locals launched armed watch.

It’s not all good, it’s not all bad, and it’s all a little crazy. One would be forgiven for not being able to keep up with it all, or not even trying. To keep so many moving parts held in the mind at the same time would be exhausting, if not impossible.

Of course, there’s even more going on than just the above headlines, and that’s always the case. Generally speaking, it’s what’s not being talked about in the headlines that poses the greatest risk to everything we hold dear. The steadily, stealthily advance global cabal is always on the march. Remember, they have “a world to win.”

The ends justify the means.

In light of the current upheaval, given DOGE is gutting the federal bureaucracy and Trump is moving faster than the media can keep up, it only makes sense that the entrenched ruling class would be getting increasingly desperate to cover their collective asses and do whatever it takes to cling to whatever power they still have.

Death threats are becoming mainstream. Many pundits are claiming that the Deep State is in full-blown panic mode, as the respectable Darren Beattie points out:

Deep State’s boldest move yet to protect their own—the panic is real, and it’s getting scary…

“[T]he FBI is actively destroying files—wiping servers clean—to ensure damning evidence can’t be recovered… suggesting that this cover-up could include information tied to Epstein and even attempts at subversion against the American people.…

Everyone knew this was coming.

The Deep State was never going to slink off quietly into the night. But as this dangerous chaos unfolds, it’s also a defining moment for President Trump’s America First A-Team to prove they’re more than just talk. Words aren’t enough—it’s time for action, and the stakes couldn’t be higher.”

(Emphasis added)

I’d like to point out two things here:

• Not everyone knew this was coming. In fact, millions upon millions of people have been completely blindsided by the corruption that’s been revealed, and millions more still remain completely ignorant to all that’s happening. It’s important to keep in mind how little the average citizen pays attention to politics.

• It’s true that those who’ve been keeping track saw this coming, and it’s true that Trump’s team has to prove they’re more than just talk (as if they haven’t already). Words are not enough to right this ship, we need drastic and sustained action—the only way out is through—and it’s true that the stakes couldn’t be higher.

Our Republic hangs in the balance.

Which brings me back to the ongoing analysis of the new narrative that somehow MAGA has been hoodwinked and co-opted into supporting the “authoritarian transformation” of America. This narrative positions Trump, Musk, and DOGE as acting on behalf of the “tech elite,” in an end-game strategy for total control.

For those who may not have been following along, you can get up to speed here:

• TR 675 - Beware of the Snare (Part 1): The Next Massive Psyop has Now Been Deployed

• TR 676 - Beware of the Snare (Part 2): Peering into the Ultimate Deception

• TR 677 - Beware of the Snare (Part 3): Is there a Baby in the Bath Water?

To continue dismantling this sophisticated narrative, let’s return to Erik Wikstrom’s masterful piece of propaganda, The Triumph of Technocracy | Part 2: The Ultimate Deception. As I’ve made clear, there is a great deal of truth in his writing—and a great deal of “ultimate deception” that’s aimed squarely at curious, skeptical peasants.

Ironically, jumping to the end of his essay, Wikstrom agrees with Beattie:

“The time for gradual awakening is over. The window for action is closing fast. This is the Endgame. The choices we make right now, the actions we take, the strength we show – it all matters more than we can imagine.

We can do this. We must do this. The alternative isn't acceptable.

The question is: Are you ready to level up? To stand firm regardless of the cost?”

Again, there is a lot of truth there. This is good stuff. Like my friend was saying, we’d be wise not to throw the baby out with the bathwater.

However, let’s not lose sight of the premise, and instead, take a closer look at what this call to action is aiming to do. To grasp the intent, we need to step back and consider the emotional priming sprinkled throughout the essay.

This screenshot should give you the gist:

“The time to fk around and find out is OVER… Let me be crystal f*g clear: There is NO ROOM for "maybe Trump's a good guy" or "maybe if person X comes into office..." That kind of thinking isn't just naive anymore – it's dangerous.”

I’m just as quick to call out the false hope as anyone—as I like to say, hopium abounds. That said, look at the language. Look at the passion. Look at the rage on that monkey’s face, and realize the author is attempting to tap this primitive instinct.

He speaks of the “terrifying brilliance” of the tech elite’s supposed plan to first co-opt, then systematically eliminate the resistance with a new, much more lethal bioweapon. He pushes the idea that this new bioweapon will specifically target the people who resisted the covid vaccines, but only after this resistance is used to facilitate the destruction of democracy via full-throated support of Trump, Musk, and DOGE.

The thought of it is truly terrifying.

Could that ever happen? Sure.

But don’t let it ruffle your feathers, because that’s exactly what the storyline is meant to do. It’s a fresh iteration of fearmongering, a new invisible enemy, something that’s terrifyingly possible, that most people have never considered.

In short, it’s meant to prime survival mode, elevate cortisol, and shut down critical thinking. Put differently, it’s meant to thrust patriots back into the darkness of perpetual doom and gloom, and put an immediate end to any sense of optimism and hope. There is “NO ROOM” for such dangerous thinking.

It’s been over a year since I wrote TR 423 - Beware of the Doom Loop, but the lesson still stands. Don’t let the enemy use fear to control you. Don’t live your life as if it’s the end of the world. Don’t squander the time you have always waiting for the next shoe to drop.

The world keeps turning, the sun keeps burning, and life is still good.

Furthermore, the spirit of freedom is on the move. The public now has an appetite for reconciliation and accountability. Through the last election, We The People spoke loud and clear, and Donald Trump was given the directive to clear the foxes out of the henhouse, expose the corruption, and gut the bloated beast of bureaucracy.

Elon Musk also has a directive from the American people: to apply his considerable genius to the singular task of eradicating wasteful spending and clawing back billions, if not trillions, of our hard-earned tax dollars. What’s come to light so far has been hideous, the initial savings have been huge, and people love what he is doing.

So, it is within that context—within the context of all the “winning”—that we must consider Wikstrom’s timely and forceful (ALL CAPS) denunciation of hope. He claims that there is “NO ROOM” for the suggestion that “maybe Trump’s a good guy.”

That’s ludicrous. Even people who don’t like Trump, like what he’s doing.

As I’ve made clear in prior reports, against all odds, Trump has brought the country together from across the political divide. He’s focused public attention on the culprits of corruption and delivered as much as could be delivered on his promises to take massive action on behalf of the American people. He’s only five weeks into his second term, and there’s no denying the fact that he’s been a very busy man.

“Promises made. Promises kept.”

The subversive suggestion that Trump is merely a pawn in some grand satanic plot to kill off American patriots is, well, subversive. Again, it’s seductive and provocative.

One who reads the Wikstrom articles might feel enlightened by his insights, disturbed by his conclusions, and motivated to adopt his framework for what’s “really” going on.

Personally, I do not.

My efforts in addressing this new narrative head-on stem from a strong desire to defend the minds of my fellow liberty loving Americans, my fellow patriots, my fellow members of the MAGA movement from covert psychological attacks. I am compelled to speak out against this new narrative, because I believe it is a psyop—and that perspective is predicated on a great deal of research and a thorough understanding of the intent and mechanism of such operations.

I’ve documented the discrepancies in his writing, exposed the unlikely timeline and rapid traction of this new narrative, and shined light on his underlying intentions. I’ve also acknowledged the truth in his words, where appropriate, and gone line-by-line to split hairs and demonstrate how these truths have been couched in false premise and lead to foregone, misleading, and outright false conclusions.

I think that perhaps the most prescient statement Wikstrom makes is this:

“With comprehensive psychological profiles of the resistance demographic in hand, the tech elite could now design the perfect narrative – one that would transform their greatest opponents into unwitting allies. Their AI-driven analysis provided a complete map of the resistance psyche, allowing them to craft a message so perfectly calibrated it would be almost impossible to resist.”

Swap “tech elite” for “global elite,” and he’s nearly spot on.

The enemies of freedom have weaponized artificial intelligence and undoubtedly used it to profile and track the resistance. I don’t doubt that this “complete map of the resistance psyche” is currently in the hands of some great evildoers.

I don’t doubt that it is being used against us.

I think Wikstrom’s writing is a perfect example of what that looks like. It’s a message that’s so perfectly calibrated, it’s almost impossible to resist—but resist we must.

Resist the urge to get swept up in this new narrative. Resist the appeal to your primal emotions. Resist the suggestion that we’re all going to die if we don’t do something drastic. Resist getting pulled into another rabbit hole of endless and scary what-ifs.

Resist the concerted effort to kill your buzz and squash your hope.

Right now, American patriots have every reason to be optimistic and feel good about what’s going on. It’s not perfect, and it’s surely not all as it seems, but acknowledging that does not imply we should abandon the belief that we are in fact winning, at least for now. It’s okay to believe in a brighter tomorrow.

That said, this war for control of hearts and minds is far from over, we’ve got a lot of work to do, and there is a long, steep road ahead of us.

Stay wise patriots… and remember: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s do this…

In the interest of time, I’m going to skip the introduction and truncate the recap. Suffice it to say there is a new narrative making the rounds, suggesting that Trump, Musk, and DOGE are facilitating an “authoritarian transformation” on behalf of the “tech elite” for the purpose of gaining total control over the whole of society.

I’ve called b**t and tackled this narrative head on in the last two reports:

I’m going to move forward today, making two assumptions: 1) that you are up to speed on the source materials (the origins of this new narrative); and 2) that you’ve been following along and have either read or listened to both of the last two reports.

We’ve covered a lot of ground and discussed a lot of details, drilling down on the language used, the obvious omissions, and what I believe to be the underlying intent of a pair of articles written by Erik Wikstrom.

On February 15th, Wikstrom wrote an article titled, “Checkmate: The Triumph of Technocracy— How Trump, Elon & the Tech Elite are paving the way for a Brave New World - And what it means for all of us.”

In just over a week, he has over 200 likes and comments:

Which is REALLY impressive, given that he only launched his Substack two weeks ago:

It turns out there are many Erik Wikstroms in the world, and some of them are PhDs, CPAs, and college professors — all of whom have a long and well documented online presence — which is why it struck me as odd to find this Erik Wikstrom’s substack sitting at #2 in the search results, linking to none other than his one-week-old article suggesting that Trump, Musk, and DOGE are facilitating an “authoritarian transformation” on behalf of the tech elite:

What a fascinating coincidence.

How does this guy seemingly come out of nowhere and skyrocket to the top of the search results with a two-week-old Substack? How does he get so much traction and engagement so quickly? Like I side yesterday, I smell a rat.

It’s also very curious to me that Wikstrom has gotten so much traction having only written three articles on Substack in English — plus his very first article, which was written in Swedish. Yet another curious coincidence, is it not?

It seems only fair to point out that I have been writing on Substack consistently since November 2022, publishing over 750 posts (including 677 Torch Reports), and my traction at this point is still nowhere near Wikstrom’s:

Maybe he’s just a much better writer than I am.

Maybe he’s great and I suck.

Maybe.

Or, maybe, like I said yesterday—maybe, just maybe—this guy is affiliated with, or working on behalf of, one of the groups that are feeling most threatened by DOGE.

The timing of his launch, the target audience and sophistication of the propaganda, the instant traction, the mysterious nature of the man himself, the occult symbolism in his profile picture, shooting to the top of the search results, his first post being in Swedish, all of it, seems to smack of something suspicious, doesn’t it?

But let’s not get lost in the weeds here.

I’ve said from the beginning that Wikstrom’s writing is thorough, and that it contains many elements of truth. I’ve used words like “provocative” and “seductive” to describe his style. I’ve gone line-by-line through sections of his essay, demonstrating how solid truths are being couched in false premise, which is classic misdirection.

He’s connecting “very real dots,” I said yesterday — nodding to the fact, again, that much of what he says is true — but he’s connecting them in an intentionally misleading way. Think about how in school different kids connect the dots differently.

Most kids did something like this:

But there was always that other kid who did something like this:

Same dots, different picture.

And so it is with the reality of our situation.

I heard from a good friend yesterday, whom I love and respect, who was adamant that I don’t “throw the baby out with the bath water” when it comes to Wikstrom’s articles. My friend made the point that he’s not all wrong, and that we’d all be wise to remain skeptical of what’s going on, to stay curious and open to opposing perspectives, instead of just getting sucked into the hype and hoopla of all the “winning.”

My friend is 100% correct, and I’d like to honor his exhortation by focusing for a moment on the elements of truth that make Wikstrom’s writing so compelling.

Rather than rehashing the first piece, I’ll start today with a section from his second article: The Triumph of Technocracy | Part 2: The Ultimate Deception — How the Pandemic Sorted, Profiled, and Set Up the Resistance for the Perfect Trap.

“In Part 1, we examined how Trump, Elon and the tech elite are orchestrating a transformation of society through strategic chaos, weaponized AI, and the dismantling of democratic institutions.…What we're about to explore might seem counterintuitive at first. After all, if you're implementing a system of total control, wouldn't you want to crush resistance? Silence dissent? Instead, we've witnessed the opposite – a strategy that deliberately awakens resistance, confirms suspicions, and appears to validate every conspiracy theory.

The truth about the pandemic – more accurately described as the plandemic – goes far beyond the usual narratives of totalitarian control or even depopulation. It served as something far more sophisticated: the most extensive psychological profiling operation in human history. Every lockdown, every mandate, every restriction was designed not just for control, but to identify, study, and ultimately co-opt those who would resist control.”

Sounds pretty good, right?

He called out the “plandemic” and said the lockdowns and mandates were all about control, right? He brings up totalitarian control and even depopulation. This guy is speaking my language man! — and not by accident.

But let’s back up… thoughts happen fast.

First, he says “we examined” how Trump, Elon and the tech elite are orchestrating an authoritarian transformation of society through strategic chaos, weaponized AI, and the dismantling of democratic institutions. NOT TRUE.

That is a false premise and a predetermined conclusion.

All he did was present a false narrative in a persuasive fashion. There was no critical examination of the underlying intent, assumptions, or omissions in that article. It was all intentionally glossed over. The real examination came in TR 675.

Moving on, he uses the classic “this might seem counterintuitive at first” schtick, followed by what seems like a straight forward question everyone can agree with:

“After all, if you're implementing a system of total control, wouldn't you want to crush resistance?”

Who would argue with that, right?

Forgive me, but allow me to try…

I’ve thought long and hard about exactly that question. What does it mean to crush the resistance? Think about it through the lens of the Art of War. It’s better to convince your enemies to join your side than it is to destroy them outright, better to capture their resources intact, rather than destroy everything in sight.

“Supreme excellence consists in breaking the enemy’s resistance without fighting.”—The Art of War

Thus, if you are a global evildoer looking for total control over a reduced population, the best thing to do is break up the resistance without any real fighting. This strategy is vastly different than “crushing the resistance,” as Wikstrom suggests.

This strategy, to infiltrate and break the resistance, has been on the books for eons. It is precisely the strategy that I’ve called out over and over again, by pointing out the Algorithmic Social Interventions, institutional indoctrination, social engineering, and subconscious taming of humanity—all of which has been happening for decades, and all of which has now been accelerated by weaponized AI.

For a good refresher on these strategies, consider reviewing these reports:

So no, I do not agree that the enemies of freedom are looking to crush the resistance. I believe they are looking to reprogram the resistance—and that they’ve been doing so for decades—and to that end, I believe Wikstrom is seeking to advance this cause.

Again, I think it’s a psyop that’s meant to confuse people, reshape perspective, and propagate bogus ideas that divide the liberty movement.

“Ah,” you say, “You must be one of those diehard MAGA freaks who think Donald Trump was ordained by God and is above reproach!”

FALSE.

Anyone who’s been with me for any length of time knows that is not true.

But let’s get back to the meat of the matter:

“…we've witnessed the opposite – a strategy that deliberately awakens resistance, confirms suspicions, and appears to validate every conspiracy theory.

The truth about the pandemic – more accurately described as the plandemic – goes far beyond the usual narratives of totalitarian control or even depopulation. It served as something far more sophisticated: the most extensive psychological profiling operation in human history. Every lockdown, every mandate, every restriction was designed not just for control, but to identify, study, and ultimately co-opt those who would resist control.”

Line-by-line:

• “We’ve witnessed a strategy that deliberately awakens resistance, confirms suspicions, and appears to validate every conspiracy theory.” Is this true? Maybe. It’s a bold assumption at best—the suggestion is that that strategy was to awaken the resistance—but how can this be true, if every ounce of censorship and algorithmic intervention was directed at concealing the truth? The resistance arose organically, against the best efforts of the tech elite and the Deep State to tamp down any truth about covid origins, false testing, toxic injections, etc.

• “The plandemic served as something far more sophisticated: the most extensive psychological profiling exercise in human history.” TRUE. I’ve been calling this out for years, all the Sentinel Surveillance and Social Listening (using the globalists’ AI-infused EARS), which have long been deployed by the “secret global cabal”—not the “tech elites” that he holds up in his strawman argument. Please keep in mind, they have been using these technologies to control “emerging” public perceptions. I have written about it extensively.

• All the covid insanity was “designed not just for control, but to identify, study, and ultimately co-opt those who would resist control.” Maybe. That said, I disagree that the intent was to co-opt those who resist control. Sure, it might have been meant to study them and flush them out, so they could more easily be targeted, siloed, and reprogrammed, but to claim the aim was to co-opt the resistance is something entirely different. The suggestion here establishes the false premise that those in the MAGA movement supporting Trump, Musk, and DOGE are unwittingly supporting an authoritarian transformation, which I flatly reject.

In short, that paragraph presents many layers of illusions and deception. There is truth, yes, but there is also falsehood. By twisting the two together, the author seeks to by-pass critical thinking and foment acceptance of his forgone, fictitious conclusions.

I cannot emphasize enough that everything Wikstrom is accusing Trump and Musk of doing, was already underway long before these two arrived on the scene. They are being targeted as scapegoats for an insidious plot that very few are even aware of.

By targeting those who are currently targeting the gross fraud and corruption that has helped to fund and facilitate this plot for decades, Wikstrom is misdirecting attention away from the real powers that be. I believe this is deliberate deception.

Again, I’ll point to the sophistication and thoroughness of his well-written narrative, coupled with his faux humility (“Am I Crazy Here?), as strong indicators that he knows exactly what he is doing. This is not some naive commentator who has suddenly connected the dots in a new and improved way. Moreover, the statistical improbability of his instant success and incredible search ranking suggest he is not working alone.

I, on the other hand, am working alone. I am just an ignorant peasant doing the best I can to wrap my head around things, cut through the fluff, call out the b**t, break through the narratives, and present meaningful content (based on thousands of hours of research) to help you develop your own informed perspective.

Friends, if you’ve been with me for awhile, you know that I claim the Torch Report is the “truth you can trust,” not because I ask you to take my word for anything, but because I do an insane amount of research to deliver the primary sources that you need to dig in and decide for yourself.

I don’t use AI to write my reports. When I sit down to write, you get whatever comes out. It’s real. It’s raw. It’s relevant. You can go back through years of my writing, over 675 reports, and see that I am consistent, honest, and sincere.

That said, I appreciate your grace with any typos that slip through, as I usually don’t have the time to go back through and edit. I am also exceedingly grateful for those who share this content, as I am not active on social media.

To all the free subscribers and especially the supporting members of the Patriot Club, you make my heart soar like a hawk!

Two more things, on the house keeping front:

• I’m a better speaker than a writer, so if you haven’t listened to the Torch Report, you should. It’s not an auto-generated audio, it’s me, in the flesh, pouring my heart out to the world. I try to keep the podcasts around 20 minutes long, so you can enjoy them on your lunch break or commute. Please share.

• Of all the subscribers to the Torch Report, there are only a handful who take the time to click the little heart and “give me some love.” THANK YOU!! For those who don’t, it’s not that hard. If you click the heart and it asks for your email, it’s not asking you to re-subscribe, it’s asking to confirm your email. You’ll get an email confirmation that links your phone to your subscription, so you can then click the heart at will. If you get bored, go to the archives and click lots of hearts. I’d be lying if I said Wikstrom’s instant success (250+ likes) didn’t irk my ego!

On top of all that, I’ve got a day job and it’s time to get going.

Thank you for reading/listening/joining me on this learning journey.

Until next time, remember: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s continue…

This is the second report analyzing the fresh narrative that Donald Trump and Elon Musk are ushering us into a techno-dystopian hell, per a plan that was mapped out by the “Hidden Philosopher” Curtis Yarvin, wherein the “tech elite” gain total control.

In yesterday’s report, I outlined how solid truths are being woven together with a series of false premises to present the seemingly thorough and somewhat plausible conclusion that Trump is the “perfect pawn” for this unprecedented power grab.

Along with many not-so-obvious hints and socialist tells, the author misdirects attention by attributing the implementation of this evil plan to none other than Elon Musk and the DOGE team that is currently rocking Washington DC:

“The Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) serves as the vehicle for this transformation. Under Elon Musk's direction, what's presented as modernization reveals itself as RAGE in action.…As Yarvin himself expressed it: ‘To install a new operating system, you must first shut down the old one. RAGE is ctrl-alt-delete for the state.’”

I smell a rat.

Isn’t it ironic how this new narrative just so happened to crop up right as DOGE began to expose massive Deep State fraud and cut off funding to the myriad apparatus that have long been used to bolster and enrich globalist hegemony?

Given the complexity and timing of the propaganda, I strongly suspect the author is an asset of one or more of the groups most threatened by these developments.

As I pointed out, by demonizing the “tech elite”—specifically Elon Musk and any of the tech bros who supported Trump and Vance in the 2024 election—the author is directing attention away from the real global power players, say like the UN, WEF, WHO, IMF, World Bank, Bilderberg, Davos, Rothchilds, Soros, and so on.

The question that comes to mind is: who’s using who?

Do you think a handful of “tech elites” are using the long-established and deeply entrenched global power players to advance a fascist corporate state?

Or, do you think the “secret cabal” of global elites are using the Silicon Valley billionaires and the fancy new tech to advance their plans for a New World Order?

Logically speaking, which is more likely?

In analyzing the narrative, the language used, the thinly veiled political slant, and the sophistication of the writing, it is my opinion that the perspective being presented is an intentional psyop. That is, I believe the thoughts that are being introduced are targeting critical thinkers in the liberty movement, with the intent of destabilizing support for DOGE and stirring up doubt and dissention in the ranks.

The source material for the following discussion can be found in this pair of articles, written by Erik Wikstrom:

• Checkmate: The Triumph of Technocracy — How Trump, Elon & the Tech Elite are paving the way for a Brave New World - And what it means for all of us

• The Triumph of Technocracy | Part 2: The Ultimate Deception — How the Pandemic Sorted, Profiled, and Set Up the Resistance for the Perfect Trap

** My original analysis of those articles is found here:

Today, I’d like to start out by emphasizing Wikstrom’s obvious political slant. Though it may not be obvious to many at the outset, given his expert use of common MAGA parlance to build rapport and disarm readers, there are many clues dribbled throughout his writing. Several of these tells were brought to light yesterday.

When every “bad actor” just so happens to support the MAGA movement, it raises the suspicion that the author is failing to conceal his bias. He pretends to be on the same team, but his words paint a different picture.

Consider what he has to say about JD Vance:

“JD Vance represents a particularly sophisticated placement. With his strong connection to Peter Thiel [a tech bro who supported Trump], working-class background and Yale education, he moves seamlessly between worlds.

When he speaks of "reforming bureaucracy," he uses language that sounds harmless to most but signals a darker agenda to initiates.”

Have you ever listened to JD Vance?

His language sounds harmless, but I bet you didn’t know his straight forward words and folksy tone are actually the signal of a much darker agenda, at least “to initiates.”

But who the hell are these supposed initiates, anyway?

I’d suggest these “initiates” are none other than the people who read the Wikstrom articles and accept what he says. The initiates are those whom accept this new narrative, who’s critical minds are incapable of identifying and rejecting the memes—quite likely military grade memes, by the way—and thus, their minds become infected with this new way of thinking.

This is memetic warfare.

As a result, these initiates then propagate this narrative. They share the articles, which disseminate the germinating thoughts, and spread the infectious ideas through casual conversation. They’ve bought into the belief, and the belief then begins to drive their behavior, specifically by stirring up emotion in opposition to Trump, Musk, and DOGE—all because they’ve received a new “quantum of information” that has been presented as a secret key to seeing things “as they really are.”

Again, this is like catnip for the conspiratorial mind.

Further pushing the assertion that Trump, Musk, and DOGE are trying to facilitate the “ultimate power grab” in their fascist pursuit of “total control over society’s future development,” Wikstrom says the following:

“Unlike traditional authoritarian transformations that moved slowly to avoid resistance, this operation shows no such caution. …

While media focuses on political drama, the real transformation proceeds:

• State functions transfer to private control

• Democratic processes yield to automation

• New control systems install piece by piece…

Each implemented change creates dependencies that make reversal increasingly difficult:

• Digital payment systems replace traditional banking

• Corporate platforms supersede government communications

• Private infrastructure displaces public services

• AI systems become essential for basic functions

By the time the transformation becomes obvious, the new system will be too deeply embedded to easily dislodge.”

Again, we see both truth and false premise being interlaced, and again we see the author’s political bias in the underlying sentiment. The easiest way to identify the pattern in his sentiment is to view it through the lens of good and bad. What’s being presented as good? What’s being presented as bad? What’s this guy saying?

We are being told that what’s happening right now is an “authoritarian transformation.” You see, it’s not that Trump was elected to Make America Great Again. It’s not that he’s working with Musk to hack through decades of corruption and expose the massive fraud and decades of egregious spending and public fleecing.

What we are actually witnessing, if one were to accept this new narrative, is a carefully orchestrated, exceedingly complex, perfectly timed, highly advanced strategy for the “tech elites” to take total control over society.

That’s the narrative—that’s what this guy is saying.

But take a step back. Notice how, upon hearing that narrative, the mind gets caught up in considering whether or not this could possibly be true. It’s at least possible, isn’t it? I mean, a lot of what this guy has to say is spot on—he even talks about the Hegelian dialectic and the New World Order!

And yeah, sure, a lot of these “tech elite” billionaires are clearly just trying to get more money and power, being the greedy capitalist pigs that they are. It’s not that much of a stretch to think they might be trying to make a move to advance a new sort of “corporate state” so they can have their fascist way with America.

It’s all quite plausible.

But don’t take your eyes off the ball here. Retrace the thoughts. Where did this thought come from? What is the premise of this thought? The thought was suggested by this new article that came out, and the premise is that Trump and Musk are driving this authoritarian train—and don’t forget about JD Vance and his dark and sinister agenda!

BUT… wait a minute… what the hell did that guy just say?!

Wikstrom said that this “authoritarian transformation” looks like State functions transferring to private control; Corporate platforms superseding government communications; Private infrastructure displacing public services.

Think it through.

State control is good, private control is bad. Government controlling public communications is good, private platforms facilitating communication is bad. Being dependent upon the State to provide public services is good, but providing private sector solutions is bad.

Correct me if I’m wrong, but isn’t this the exact opposite of actual reality?

You may recall yesterday, after I pointed out how liberals have flip-flopped on so many issues, I warned emphatically: CONSERVATIVES BEWARE!

We are all susceptible to being manipulated in this way.

Is Wikstrom’s twisting of words not the perfect example of this?

He is skillfully suggesting that the government is the solution to our problems, while pointing to greedy corporations and private capitalist pigs as the boogeyman.

Sound familiar?

Perhaps he is unfamiliar with the words of Ronald Reagan:

Like I said before, similar to omitting the real global power players in favor of propping up the “tech elites” strawman, I do not believe Wikstrom’s siding with government solutions is naive or accidental—I believe that it is fully intentional.

If you think about how thorough his writing is, and how meticulously the narrative has been crafted, it seems highly unlikely that he’s ignorant to the wisdom of our Founding Fathers and their explicit efforts to establish a limited government.

Instead, I believe he is working to directly undermine and subtly attack those who are working hard and fast to reconcile our runaway government with this original intent. He’s doing so by unleashing a sophisticated psyop that’s aimed squarely at the critical thinkers who are supportive of DOGE and the broader MAGA movement.

Honestly, it pisses me off.

Wolf in sheep’s clothing!

I’d like to call out another despicable characteristic of this scheme, the faux sincerity and self-deprecation that’s meant to draw the skeptics further in.

In the beginning he says:

“I sincerely hope I'm wrong about this analysis – in fact, I pray that I am.”

B**t.

At the end, after skillfully presenting five stages of well thought out propaganda, he says this:

“I hope deeply that this analysis is wrong. That the pattern I see is an overreaction, an exaggerated interpretation of coincidences. Because if it's right, we're witnessing the most sophisticated coup in human history – one that uses our desire for change to eliminate the very possibility of freedom.”

Again, b**t.

He doesn’t “hope deeply” that he’s wrong.

He knows damn good and well that he’s wrong. The “pattern” that he sees is not an overreaction or exaggerated interpretation of coincidences, it’s an intentional connecting of very real dots, in an intentionally misleading way.

To suggest we are witnessing the “most sophisticated coup in human history” is absolute hogwash. We’ve already witnessed the most sophisticated coup in history—it was the 2020 election. Lamenting that “our desire for change” is eliminating the very possibility of freedom is also a farce.

What is it that we want to change?

We want to change the decades of political corruption and public extortion by routing out the subversive commie agents and government cronies who have long been running the show. It is they, in cahoot with Rockefeller’s “secret cabal” of global elites who are vying for total control over a reduced and subdued population.

Are the tech elites in on this? You bet your ass, many of them are.

But, I highly doubt they are running the show. To accept that premise would be to ignore hundreds, if not a thousand years of history or more, let alone the political shenanigans that have transpired over the last several administrations.

Wikstrom goes even further to profile and implicate the MAGA crowd as being ignorantly complicit in his second piece, but again I’ve run out of time. I will rip apart his shoddy suggestion that Trump and Musk are dismantling our beloved “democratic institutions” in tomorrow’s report.

For today, I leave you with this little teaser:

“With comprehensive psychological profiles of the resistance demographic in hand, the tech elite could now design the perfect narrative – one that would transform their greatest opponents into unwitting allies. Their AI-driven analysis provided a complete map of the resistance psyche, allowing them to craft a message so perfectly calibrated it would be almost impossible to resist.”

There is a lot of truth in that statement. Think about it. Wikstrom’s message is so perfectly calibrated, it’s almost impossible to resist—and to that I say:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s interesting.

Actually, it’s absolutely fascinating, at least to me, to watch the mind-bending unfold in real-time. Just yesterday, I was enjoying a conversation with an adept individual who did a masterful job of pointing out many of the great ironies of our time:

• Liberals declaring that free speech is a “free-for-all hellscape,” that it was “weaponized free speech” that caused the holocaust.

• Liberals demanding more funding for more war, essentially signing a death warrant for millions more Ukrainian and Russian young men.

• Liberals stomping their feet, protesting, and doing everything they can to stop the gross degrees of government waste, fraud, and corruption from coming to light.

The list could go on, but the point is easily made: every position being taken right now appears to be precisely backwards to everything liberalism used to stand for.

Conservatives beware.

It’s always easier to point out flaws in someone else’s thinking, than it is to examine and identify potential flaws in our own. It’s just a human thing we must acknowledge.

In reality, there are a great many people who will never examine their own thinking, because they lack the maturity and awareness to do so. We might make a generous assumption and say that perhaps 80% of the population lacks the requisite faculty and inclination to thoroughly question themselves, leaving roughly 20% of people who at leasthave the capacity—though whether they use it or not is another question.

From the angle of psychological warfare (aka psyops), the 80% are basically sitting ducks; they are low-hanging fruit that are easy to pick off and push into accepting any given narrative. Again, I’m being generous here.

Considering the effectiveness of the COVID-19 psyop, it would appear the percentage of people susceptible to being ensnared in abject insanity is well over 90%.

Thus, for those perpetrating the psyops, their target audience would be the 10-20% of people who, in theory, might have the wherewithal to remain independent and critical, as opposed to being assimilated into whatever narrative is being pushed.

In other words, some minds are more resistant to military-grade memes than others. Remember that in the context of memetic warfare, DARPA and the Deep State have the ability to create memes that guarantee the propagation of an idea—but saying that for the umpteenth time today, another angle of reflection emerges.

Properly understood, scientifically speaking, a meme is a “quantum of information.” With that fresh in mind, it’s this little tidbit of information that gives rise to the infectious ideas that then, quite predictably, spread throughout the population.

First comes the info, then comes the idea.

That’s critical, and it’s easy to grasp by imaging yourself going for a walk in the woods. As you are walking along, your mind wanders this way and that, thinking about everything and nothing all at the same time. Think of this as unstructured thought, it’s just the mind doing what the mind does, endlessly.

All at once you smell something. It’s a sweet smelling flower. As you continue walking, the scent grows stronger, and you begin to hear the loud buzzing of honey bees—but you still can’t see the bees or blossoms that they are buzzing on.

Your mind now has a quantum of information, the scent and the sounds, other sensory inputs, and an unfathomable number of mental constructs (cumulated through life experience, education, etc.) that it uses to generate ideas.

The mind uses these ideas to form a story.

There’s a cracking of a branch in the woods up ahead and your heart starts to pound. You remember stories about how bears like honey, and all at once you know you’re not alone. Your nice idea about taking a picture of the fuzzy bees harvesting beautiful blooms immediately gets scrapped.

Now you’re thinking about finding a sharp stick and a tree to climb.

Your mind is racing as you break off a dead branch and climb a nearby tree. You might begin thinking about living to tell the heroic tale of how you defended yourself against the ferocious bear, when all at once, there’s new information.

From your perch in the tree, you see a fellow nature lover down below, some 20 yards away, crashing through the brush with a camera, trying to get a good shot of the beautiful blossoms on a wild lilac tree, buzzing with bees. There is no bear in sight.

Startled by the sound of you climbing a tree, they look up and shout, “Well hey there, I didn’t expect to see anyone else out here! What are you doing in that tree?” Relieved and slightly embarrassed, your mind spins up a story: “Oh, yeah, I could smell the lilacs and heard the bees, and I thought I’d get a great aerial shot from up here!”

Such are the wiles of the mind.

Moral of the story: first comes the info, then comes the ideas, and a self-justifying story always ensues.

Let’s zoom out.

Informational warfare works by hijacking these built-in mechanisms of the mind. The truth is, we are all susceptible. We are hardwired to process information and create stories that help us make sense of things. It’s the intentional usurpation of this process, wherein the powers that be or some other external force aims to “make sense of things” for us, that we must remain constantly aware of.

How can liberals have been so easily duped into defending and advocating for positions that run entirely contrary to everything that liberals used to stand for?

They were fed new information. This new information came with new suggestions that planted the seeds of new ideas, which then gave rise to new stories that ultimately justify their complete flip-flop and abandonment of prior convictions.

Like I said at the outset: conservatives beware.

There is new information being circulated through patriotic circles, new suggestions making the rounds, that are meant to give rise to new ideas about what’s happening right now. There is a new story being spun up, and I believe, personally, that this new spin is little more than a massive psyop meant to divide the liberty movement.

The gist is this: Donald Trump and Elon Musk are paving the way for a new technocratic, global digital governance that will ultimately enslave us all.

Some of that should sound familiar, if you have been with me, because I’ve been calling out this nefarious push towards global digital governance for years, pointing out that the path to this techno-dystopian hell (Future Earth) is paved with good intentions.

The twist in this story, is that it’s Trump and Musk who are ushering this in, and that it’s patriotic Americans who have been duped into cheering them on.

I don’t buy it, but the narrative has been so meticulously crafted, it must be addressed head on. I was introduced to this narrative when a good friend shared a pair of articles written by Erik Wikstrom, linked here:

• Checkmate: The Triumph of Technocracy — How Trump, Elon & the Tech Elite are paving the way for a Brave New World - And what it means for all of us

• The Triumph of Technocracy | Part 2: The Ultimate Deception — How the Pandemic Sorted, Profiled, and Set Up the Resistance for the Perfect Trap

Both pieces are well-written and rather lengthy, giving them a feel of thorough thinking that threads in many assumptions that instantly appeal to patriots. This type of intentional disarming is common in psychological warfare.

Consider the opening paragraph of the first piece:

“I invite you to temporarily set aside your preconceptions about how the world works. I know this may run counter to everything you believe, everything you think you know about what's happening in our world. The truth goes much deeper than the surface-level chaos we see in the headlines. I sincerely hope I'm wrong about this analysis – in fact, I pray that I am. But if I'm even partially correct, we are witnessing one of the most sophisticated power grabs in human history.”

Temporarily set aside your preconceptions—not a bad idea!

This may run counter to everything you believe, everything you think you know about what’s happening in “our world”—sure, question everything, right? That’s a solid precept, but note how this phrase is intended to introduce doubt about what you think about our world.

This is a positioning statement meant to assert dominance in the narrative.

The truth goes much deeper than the “surface-level chaos” we see in the headlines—no s**t Sherlock, thanks for stating the obvious, but why? Why state the obvious? First, to build rapport and indicate we’re on the same team by emphasizing a common refrain in patriotic circles. Second, to prime the truth seeking instinct of hardcore skeptics. The phrase “the truth runs much deeper” is like catnip for a lot of people.

Immediately upon reading the headline, “How Trump, Elon are paving the way for a Brave New World,” many people in the MAGA movement would immediately tune out and dismiss the story—but not all.

That’s not who this article is meant for.

This article is targeting the 10% with new information and suggestions meant to change their perspective on what’s going on. Rather than cheering for what Trump and Musk are doing, readers are being groomed to flip the narrative.

Line by line, a truth is stated, followed by false premise.

• “The technological infrastructure required for total control has finally matured. Artificial Intelligence has reached the sophistication necessary for algorithmic governance. The social and political chaos we're experiencing isn't random – it's orchestrated to create the perfect conditions for this transition.” —TRUE.

The next line:

• “Consider this: Elon Musk alone controls enough wealth to simultaneously fund eight Manhattan Projects, maintain a private army of 100,000 elite mercenaries for a decade, or fund the entire United Nations for 14 years. But this isn't about money – it's about power. The tech elite already have more wealth than they could spend in multiple lifetimes. What they're pursuing is something far more ambitious: total control over society's future development.” —FALSE PREMISE.

There are a lot of psychological tells in that paragraph: controlling wealth, Manhattan Projects, private mercenaries, all presuppositionally bad from a socialist perspective, and the could-be-used-for-good suggestion of funding the UN for 14 years—but instead “this isn’t about money, it’s about power.”

By demonizing the “tech elite”—who are admittedly an easy target—the author is directing attention away from other global power players, say like the UN, WEF, WHO, IMF, World Bank, Bilderberg, Davos, Rothchilds, Soros, and so on.

Claiming that the tech elite in general, and implicating Elon Musk in particular, as pursuing “something far more ambitious”—i.e. total control over society’s future—is a strawman argument. There is no mention of the global cabal and their ilk, or those who have been working to bring this Brave New World into existence for centuries.

Given the sophistication of the article, I do not believe that was by accident.

In fact, I’d like point to this profile pic to pique some curiousity as to where the author’s allegiance may ultimately lie. Note the symbol within the symbol:

The circle-triangle-square-circle is a powerful symbol known as the Philosopher’s Stone, which has many different interpretations and applications, many of which lie firmly in occult practices, but I’m not chasing that rabbit here today.

Say’s the author:

“The genius of their strategy lies in its complexity. Like a masterfully played chess game, every move serves multiple purposes. What appears as chaos is actually a precisely choreographed sequence of events. What looks like resistance is often part of the plan. Even this analysis, should it reach a wider audience, would likely be dismissed as paranoid speculation – which is exactly what makes the strategy so effective.”

Hook, line, and sinker.

Their genius lies in their strategies, which are so complex, no mortal peasant can comprehend—except the iniates.

It’s like a masterfully played chess game and every move has multiple purposes—but how many people identify as chess masters? How many people think that many moves ahead? Clearly you need someone to do your thinking for you!

What looks like resistance is “often” part of the plan.

I want to emphasize the word “often,” because is softens the statement and makes it more palatable. Staking out some assumptions here, let’s assume that the MAGA movement is the populist resistance to the tyrannical top-down control of a bloated and corrupt federal bureaucracy. What “looks” like resistance—the MAGA crowd turning out in the millions to elect Donald Trump—is actually a calculated part of the chessmasters’ strategy.

I actually do not dimiss that possibility—however, what I do reject, is leaping to the conclusion that those who believe Trump and Musk are exposing corruption, are actually being bamboozled into supporting the “tech elites” plan for total control.

Wikstrom does a good job of outlining many of the patterns at play. He calls out the Hegelian dialectic of problem, reaction, solution. He rightly identifies weaponized AI as being the game changer in the ongoing power struggle for total global control.

His writing is smooth and coherent, even seductive.

He then goes on to expose the so-called “Hidden Pattern.”

“We're witnessing more than a political realignment or technological revolution. This is a fundamental restructuring of society – a transformation that uses our legitimate frustrations with failing systems to implement something far more controlling.…To understand how this transformation operates in practice, we need to examine its most visible manifestation: the carefully orchestrated performance centered around Donald Trump...”

“A figure so improbable, so controversial, so seemingly chaotic that no one could suspect his role was precisely choreographed.”

The perfect pawn?

The author goes on (and on, and on, and on—more on that in a minute):

“Like a masterful illusion, the audience focused so intently on the obvious conflict that they missed the real transformation occurring backstage. While everyone watched Trump versus the "deep state," in the shadows, the real players methodically positioned themselves to assume control of society's fundamental functions.”

I agree with this statement. I believe it is true.

That said, I disagree, strongly, with the suggestion and conclusion that “the real players” are the Silicon Valley elites (i.e. Musk). It’s not that I’d deny many of the tech elite are vile criminals and Marxist sociopaths, it’s just that there are much bigger fish in the sea. These ambitious upstarts have nothing on the global influence and power of secret societies, global bankers, Black Nobility, old school aristocracy, etc.

Who’s using who, here, do you think?

Consider the author’s conclusion:

“Behind the money and influence flowing into the Trump campaign lies a set of radical beliefs and a dark agenda. …Elon Musk and his growing empire represented the visible spearhead of this movement.”

Can you see the narrative? Donald Trump won because of the dark money flowing out from the tech elites. Elon Musk is just the tip of the spear—and they’re using Donald Trump and his administration like pawns on a chessboard in order to advance their own dark agenda, all the while American patriots are too stupid to realize they are cheering for their own demise.

The essay goes on and on, like I was saying, which is actually a sales tactic. It covers objections from every angle, and gives a compelling closing pitch by exalting the “hidden philosopher” that no one’s heard of, as the real evil genius.

You see, DOGE was actually formed to implement RAGE and advance the tech elites master plan. They’ve got a blueprint, a strategic network, an accelerated timeline, and the perfect defense. The peasants think they are saving democracy, while they’re actually trying to destroy democracy and build a new corporate state.

You know, fascism. It’s always fascism, isn’t it?

What a coincidence that this is the ultimate boogeyman, right?

Anyway, I’m already long, so I’m going to save Part II for tomorrow. Until then, stay skeptical, question everything, and remember: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

That didn’t take long.

Can you imagine being the President of the United States?

I can’t.

Furthermore, I cannot imagine what it must feel like those first few critical weeks, or what it would be like to have to pick a team of people whom you must trust to make major decisions that will impact the lives of millions of people.

How many people do you know that you could trust like that?

There are approximately 25 cabinet positions that each president needs to fill, with each pick having to withstand public scrutiny, congressional hearings, and senate confirmations, per Article II, Section 2, Clause 1, of the Constitution.

I dare say that is not an easy job to do—the picking of people.

In the DC swamp, the number of parasites swirling around whispering poison into politicians’ ears is unimaginable. Like a bad game of telephone, the subtle suggestion that so-and-so is a qualified and trustworthy candidate quickly makes the rounds. Lifetime swampers and ambitious staffers are all vying for their spot, trying to elbow their way up to the table of power. Deceit and treachery abound.

Who do you trust in that situation?

Sure, vet and verify, but if you really think about it, even the most careful selection process could still churn up a bad apple or two, right? Of course.

I’m just trying to lay some groundwork here, to emphasize the fact that nobody is perfect and that in such a complex and fast moving environment, mistakes get made.

And so it was, I saw this headline:

Trump's Labor Secretary Pick Is a Commie Fox in the MAGA Henhouse

Says Stephen Kruiser of PJ Media:

“Trump’s nominee to be the next Secretary of Labor is Lori Chavez-DeRemer, one of the worst Republican nominees for a Cabinet position in recent memory. Seriously, this was a phenomenally bone-headed choice by Trump; it's a serious buzzkill for those of us who have been enjoying the MAGA high since January 20.”

After calling out Lori ‘Hugo’ Chavez-DeRemer for her Big Labor bias, commie proclivities, ties to Planned Parenthood, and other MAGA transgressions, Kruiser tells apologists what he really thinks:

“If you’re still in the "let Trump cook" camp, you should grab a bib and a plate and get ready for the steaming piles of commie horse manure that you’re going to be served if Lori Hugo Chavez-DeRemer makes it into President Trump’s Cabinet.”

(Emphasis mine… kudos for the creative writing.)

Personally, I’m not that invested in this pick, and as much as it pains me to say it, I do still “trust the process”—at least a little bit. I trust that Trump’s a smart guy, that he’s surrounded himself with smart people, for the most part, and that he’ll make a smart decision here, whether I agree with it or not.

It’s not that I don’t think he’s capable of making a mistake, or that his every decision is above reproach, or that I think he’s playing 4D chess, or any other form of starry-eyed, star-struck delusions—it’s just that I believe he’s willing to listen, learn, and adjust accordingly, as any good leader does.

He’s also willing to stand his ground, which is another critical leadership quality.

Ultimately, it’s not my decision to make. I’m not too sure what to think about the decision that has been made, but honestly I don’t give a damn. I’m not looking for a gripe, and I’m not going to waste another breath on it.

This petty stuff will work itself out.

Now, about that “steaming pile of commie horse manure.”

That steaming pile of commie horse manure has long been sown into the Swamp. This fertile manure has already grown many crops, yielding a mighty bounty for the CCP for decades. This is not speculation, this is fact.

I’ve been calling out the commies for years, and anyone who knows anything, knows that a great number of our politicians, on both sides of the aisle, have already long been compromised. Those who have been with me may recall how obvious the infiltration is, as epitomized by this picture from a recent trip to DC:

That’s a communist flag in front of the White House. Looking at that picture today, it still feels just as wrong as it did the day I walked up and snapped the shot.

In my mind, this picture represents everything that’s wrong with America.

We’ve lost our ideological mooring. Too many people, millions of liberal Americans, have been conditioned to accept and support socialism—which, for the average citizen, is indistinguishable from Communism and Marxism.

But, as all red-blooded Americans know, these systems all seek to consolidate power and control in the hands of the state. Their core tenets are that of centralized planning and top-down control. It’s the idea that the State knows what’s best, and the peasants have a duty to fall in line. Of course, it’s always for the greater good.

It’s for equality. It’s to level the playing field. It’s to rein in the reckless free market and punish all those greedy capitalist pigs who are destroying the planet.

It doesn’t matter how detached from reality these ideas are, millions of minions are pining for these utopian fantasies. As always, they believe the ends justify the means. These are the useful idiots who are being leveraged against liberty loving Americans, so that the commies can “win the battle of democracy” and radically transform our nation by destroying “every aspect of existing society.”

That comes straight out of the Manifesto, as I’m sure many of you know. I’ve covered this many times before, so I’m not going to take the time to do so now.

Instead, I’d like to point out a theme I picked up on in today’s headlines. Along with the commie fox in the MAGA hen house story, there was this story out at Fox:

Schumer spotted posing for photo with CCP official as warnings swirl about China influence

And then there was this headline over at Drudge (the link goes here):

Everywhere I looked, it seemed like I was seeing commie red. It kind of reminds me of when I was writing about the “Real Red Wave,” exposing the many tactics being deployed by the CCP to capture American institutions, as well as the public narrative. This could all just be coincidence, I suppose, but it struck me just the same.

It would be foolish to underestimate the degree of communist infiltration.

It would also be foolish to overlook their main strategy, which is to divide and conquer. This is done through the manipulation of language and emotion. By changing language and stirring emotion, the enemies of freedom — global commies, state bureaucrats, etc. — turn people against each other.

That said, communist infiltration might best be understood as an infestation of erroneous and self-destructive thinking. It’s like the woke mind virus, which in this analogy, is little more than a subvariant of the broader Socialist Strain. In every case, no matter the name, the outcome is the same. Once infected, such thoughts subvert critical thinking and assimilate individuals into the Collective Hive Mind.

Another effect of such memetic infections, is the psychological damage caused by what amounts to quite literally tearing minds apart. People get confused and uncertain, which heightens suggestibility. They get stressed out and anxious, which further shuts down the ability to critically analyze available data.

The result is the mind collapsing out of exhaustion into a pre-determined, siloed perspective. At this point, embedded ideas proceed to exacerbate groupthink and elevate the sense of hostility toward those who think differently.

What’s important to realize, is that this isn’t just happening between the Left and the Right. The most pernicious applications of this scientific manipulation, lies in turning allies against each other by peeling away low propensity thinkers into increasingly bizarre worldviews that are rife with indefensible illusions.

In essence, those who deploy these tactics — commies and bureaucrats alike — are incessantly chipping away at would-be opposition, dividing liberty loving Americans into smaller and smaller and increasingly isolated groups. This, in turn, shatters unified fronts that carry the potential for enforcing actual reform.

Using Trump’s pick of Lori Chavez-DeRemer as an example, think about how quickly the big name pundits in the patriot movement have picked up on this. All of a sudden, millions of people are being hit with the reality that Trump may have made a big mistake. Maybe he was naive, maybe he was duped, or maybe it was intentional.

Either way, the outcome elevates suspicion and riles dissention in the ranks.

This tiny fissure, which may seem insignificant at first, then allows other streams of thoughts (many of which are weaponized memes) to infiltrate one’s thinking. Maybe Trump really is a Trojan Horse? Maybe he’s just an actor and this is really all just a big scam that’s meant to accelerate the forthcoming New World Order?

The point is, however, who the hell knows?

I don’t believe those statements are true, but many people, with every misstep being dog-piled by conservative pundits, the ranks of suspicion are bolstered.

Maybe this whole “winning” episode is scripted. Maybe it’s meant to stir up the violent revolution that has been meticulously primed and laying dormant for decades. Maybe, as some suggest, this is all being orchestrated by ‘Tiny Hats’ or billionaire Tech Bros who are pushing the peasants toward the edge of a tech-dystopian cliff.

Maybe.

Or, maybe Donald Trump is just a man on a mission, hellbent on Making America Great Again, and all of these swirling speculations are meant for nothing more than casting dispersion on the process, distracting and dividing the liberty movement.

Which seems more feasible to you?

My contention is that we need not speculate on such trivial matters. It’s like candy for the conspiratorial mind. It’s like crack-cocaine for those looking for a boogeyman.

Are there communists infiltrating the Trump administration?

You bet your ass there are—but for everyone of them trying to slither their way in at this point, there are thousands already embedded within the bureaucracy.

More importantly, by dropping the labels and just looking at intent, we can see that Marxist/Socialist/Communist ideology has long had deep roots in American thinking, from the level of the general public to the heights of political prestige. Furthermore, these infectious ideas have long been promulgated on Capitol Hill, across the political spectrum, and have been steering our public policy for decades.

So, where does that leave us?

Are we lost in the fog of a fake reality, marooned on an island of false hope, stranded in a sea of fictitious solutions?

Perhaps.

But let’s not get ahead of ourselves. The situation is bad, but it’s incrementally getting better (if we consider fraud coming to light a positive development), and above all of this, life is still good. Spring is just around the corner. It’s an exciting time to be alive.

To maintain the energy needed for this long, uphill battle, it is imperative that we remain rooted in reality, grounded in gratitude, and balanced in perspective. Eyes wide open, we must question everything and hold fast to that which stands the test of time. The truth exists, whether we know it or not, and nothing is as it seems.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Boom.

Elon Musk just dropped another bombshell DOGE report revealing that 20 MILLION PEOPLE over the age of 100 years old—some of whom are said to be over the age of 140—are actively collecting Social Security benefits. On top of that, the report indicates Social Security has over 394 million people in their database, while the U.S. population is a mere 334 million, yielding a shocking 60-million-person discrepancy.

The skeptical peasant may wonder if this points to the presence of 60 million illegal aliens being issued social security numbers so they could collect our tax dollars?

Regardless, Musk claims “this might be the biggest fraud in history.”

“Yes, there are FAR more "eligible" social security numbers than there are citizens in the USA. This might be the biggest fraud in history.”—Elon Musk

To the point I was making yesterday, about how people should be hopping mad about this absolutely gross degree of fraud and corruption, check out this sentiment from the comments section:

Think about how every single time anyone even mentions looking into the runaway train of entitlements funneled through Social Security, Democrats start running around like their hair is on fire, screeching about how Republicans are trying to kill grandma. Do you really think it’s possible that this level of fraud could have been happening, obviously for decades, and nobody knew what was going on?

Is it any coincidence that the acting commissioner of Social Security has just “stepped down” after failing to block DOGE from exposing this heinous corruption?

How many of 60 million fabricated social security numbers do you think have managed to make their way onto democrat voter rolls?

Again, speaking to the point I was making yesterday, the American people should be absolutely outraged, regardless of their political affiliation. Unfortunately, millions upon millions of American men have been feminized to the point they lack the sack to push back. In fact, sports media mogul Clay Travis humorously called this out on a recent University of Chicago Institute of Politics panel, much to the shock of the many liberals in attendance:

“Democrats for men are p*ssies, and Republicans aren’t.”

He explained, in a refreshingly manly fashion:

“Who is the most masculine Democrat right now in America? [Gay] Mayor Pete? Nobody’s like, oh, [Gay] Mayor Pete, he’s a badass.”

Pure gold—but unfortunately, it wasn’t well received. The liberal feminists on the panel thought he was making a “gay joke,” no doubt a sign of his toxic masculinity.

Signs of the times I suppose. It’s funny, but not funny, considering the implications. One must keep in mind that these feminized liberal men still vote in droves—and since they know they’d inevitably lose without help, they’ve allied with an army of illegals, freaks, and environmental wackos to help them win elections.

This brings up a point that I think all too often gets overlooked. It’s been awhile, but long-time subscribers may recall the gist ofTR 269 - Country Folk vs The Global Cabal, which emphasized the population disparities between red-blooded rural counties and the big, blue, metropolitan cesspools.

The largest 20 counties in the U.S. are home to over 60 million people.

Conversely, 80% of the counties in our nation have less than 100K people.

Think about that.

This cuts to the bone of America’s political divide.

Take a look at this graph:

Along with showing massive fraud and a rigged 2020 election, wherein the “most popular sock-puppet ever elected” beat Trump by some 7 million votes, it also shows Trump winning the 2024 popular vote by a margin of merely 2 million or so voters.

The point is, this margin of victory is undoubtedly decided in urban areas.

Coming at it from a different angle, just to dork out on the numbers for a moment, 2,533 counties have a population of LESS than 100K. That’s 80% of the 3,143 counties in America, if you do the math, which means that we are an overwhelmingly rural nation. But, even IF every single one of these counties had a 100% voter turnout, and 100% voted conservative—which is 100% statistically impossible—that still only amounts to a drop in the pond of all potential voters.

This is why politicians tend to ignore the rural peasants.

Nevertheless, so as not to be dismayed, we rural Americans do have a major part to play in the saving of our nation. By virtue of not being in an urban area, by not being inundated with the 24-7 socialist propaganda being pumped into the metro areas, we have the distinct advantage of retaining some vestige of the original American Spirit.

Also, by being more grounded in Natural Reality, as opposed to living in a concrete jungle, we are more apt to retain the natural attributes of being men and women, hold fast to the timeless values of faith and family, and have greater resilience against the woke mind virus.

That means that rural America is a repository for original American thinking.

“It’s a free country, do what you want.”

My philosophical itch wants to parse the distinction between Natural Reality—that which exists independent of human interpretation—and reality as it is percieved by the masses, but I’m going to refrain for today. Instead, I’d like to turn attention toward some of the propaganda that’s being spewed in the headline news.

Let’s zoom out.

First up, let’s take a look at the spin coming out of Fox News:

It is hugely disappointing, but not at all surprising, that Fox is still pushing the Russia! Russia! Russia! sentiment. What do you think Americans are supposed to think and feel when they read the headline, “Putin eyes electing puppet president”?

Keep in mind that Fox is a mouthpiece for the globalists’ Trusted News Initiative. They are bed-buddies with NATO, the MIC, and all the neo-con warhawks.

The impression is that Putin is bad, and that Trump is about to betray the great defender of democracy, Vlodymyr ‘The Jackass’ Zelensky. In the image, Zelensky looks puzzled yet determined, Putin looks smug and condescending, and both men are leering at Trump, who’s expression appears, well, somewhat orange.

In case you haven’t been keeping track, the United States helped overthrow the democratically elected president of Ukraine by funding and facilitating a successful Color Revolution back in 2014. You can read the Ukraine Special Report if you are unfamiliar with this history, it’s lengthy, but it lines out all the details and the key players involved:

Between then and now, for the last ten years, the U.S. Deep State has built over 40 biolabs in the country and used them as a launch pad for a proxy war against the alleged Evil Russian Tyrant. Details on the biolabs and the connection between all of this and the Biden family crime syndicate are in the following reports:

• TR 290 - Time to Take Off the Gloves

• TR 295 - Sock Puppets, Crack Pipes, & Hookers

• TR 512 - They Are Fabricating Reality in Real Time

More recently, in TR 618, I uncovered an even more disturbing connection between the Deep State and the corruption in Ukraine:

In a very fascinating twist, according to the CIA, there may have been “mass production of psychotronic generators” happening in Kiev, as far back as the early 1990s. Add that tidbit to the 46 known US funded biolabs scattered throughout the region, and the entire narrative surrounding Russia and Ukraine gets sketchy.

So, never mind the fact that Zelensky has CANCELED ELECTIONS to stay in office, or the fact that he’s just a paid actor and coked-out globalist we, Fox News will have you believe that it’s *Putin who’s eyes are on “electing a puppet president.”

Cue the howls of protest and the need for even more funding for Ukrainian corruption—despite the fact that Zelensky himself has admitted that he has no clue where the $100 billion of taxpayer dollars already sent have gone:

“…today we hear from the United States that America has given Ukraine hundreds of billions, 177 billion to be more precise. This was the exact figure that Congress supported or voted for... Look, I, as the president of a belligerent country, am telling you that 100 billion of these 177 (billion), or 200 (billion), even some people say, we have never received. When they say that Ukraine received 200 billion during the war to support the army and so on, this is not true. I do not know where all this money is.”

Straight from the horse’s mouth.

Many, including comedian Rob Schneider, have suggested that these missing billions have been blown straight up his nose:

" Zelensky is obviously a cokehead. All the signs are there. You give him a billion dollars, and the next week he's broke. He’s always wearing the same dirty t-shirt… he’s always saying delusion s**t like ‘I’m going to defeat Russia.’ " —Rob Schneider

On a more serious note, referencing none other than the USAID’s own website, we can see the long-arm of the global cabal hard at work in Ukraine:

“Since 2014, USAID/OTI has supported the country’s transformation to a modern, democratic country… by supporting fact-based media, which provides alternative narratives on national unity and the country’s ongoing transformation.

USAID/OTI partners with Ukrainians to expand acceptance of a pluralistic civic identity based on common values by supporting actors that promote unity, inclusion, and democratic reform. By empowering moderate actors…

—PAUSE: Zelensky was an actor who played president on TV, FYI.

Continuing on from the USAID:

“The program’s three objectives are to:

• Build acceptance of a diverse Ukraine;

• Increase confidence in positive, democratic change; and

• Increase media narratives about unity and positive change.

… An external evaluation of this initiative found that USAID/OTI’s work contributed to an identity shift and increased tolerance for western-leaning attitudes over the past three years.”

So there you have it. The Deep State overthrew the Ukrainian government, installed a cokehead actor (more commonly known for playing the piano with his dick) as president, and then set to work transforming the Ukrainian public psyche by increasing media narratives (aka propaganda) to build a diverse and inclusive Ukraine.

They even go so far as to tout this cultural “identity shift” as a one of the “tangible dividends of the reform process.” Americans take note!

It’s sad if you think about it.

It’s infuriating when you realize they’ve done the exact same thing right here at home.

There’s a lot more happening in the world than can be covered in a single report, like the $4.7 trillion dollars that DOGE discovered has disappeared into an untraceable government black hole, the world’s largest religious gathering becoming “trans inclusive” after much protest, and the imminent dangers of the forthcoming global digital IDs, but we’ll have to set that all aside for today.

I’d like to end by circling back to the beginning.

Not only are we seeing “the greatest fraud in American history” coming to light, we now know that we have collectively been subjected to the greatest, most sustained psychological operation ever conducted in human history.

In a nutshell, we have been fleeced in a scientific fashion.

We’ve been lulled to sleep by the droning distractions, lied to, stolen from, and walked on by the boots of tyrants and corrupt politicians who’ve squandered our wealth and destroyed our way of life in their never ending quest for more power and control.

Like the anonymous comment made at the outset, We the People should be pissed.

The penalty for treason is still on the books.

Stay wise friends, and keep a keen eye out for any sort of real accountability. In my mind, that is the only metric by which we can measure our success in restoring the United States of America.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

I love the winning.

I’m not sure if you’ve seen any of the footage of Team USA putting the smack down on the Canadian hockey team after they booed the National Anthem. There were three fights in the first ten seconds, where some good old boys drop the gloves and then dropped those smug Canadian cucks to the ice, beat their ass, before going on to out play them at their own game, winning in a decisive 3-1 victory.

It was glorious.

The Gateway Pundit has a great article showing the highlights:

The feedback on social media was stellar, and there are a lot of video compilations out there, but if you’ve got a few minutes, watch this 3-minute video—with Free Bird blasting in the background, and hard-hitting All-American footage playing across the screen, it’s enough to bring a tear to any patriot’s eye!

The American Way is back in style.

“We’ll put a boot in your ass, it’s the American way!”—Courtesy of the Red, White, and Blue

I am reminded of a touching story, from the days when my family and I hailed from the great state of Idaho. It was Veterans Day in my daughter’s sixth grade year, and we were at the school assembly. The gymnasium was brimming with patriotism, and being a vet myself, I stood alongside many other brave men and women who had served their country in hellholes around the world and right here at home.

As slides played across the screen, the students came up to claim their vets. As my daughter stood in front of me, I put my arms around her and had my hand on her heart. It was beating with American pride. The tears in her eyes brought tears to mine, as the whole place sang “I’m proud to be an American, where at least I know I’m free. And I won’t forget, the men who died, who gave that right to me!”

The emotion in the room was palpable.

Thinking back on the sweetness of that moment, what sticks with me the most was how much those kids loved their country. They were truly proud to be Americans because they had been raised to believe the very best about our country, as all kids should. As veterans, we embodied for them what love of country is supposed to look like: it’s fearless self-sacrifice to serve and protect and defend the freedoms of all.

This morning, when I ran across that patriotic video linked above, I felt the same wave of emotion that I feel when I look at that picture. It is a very distinct feeling, a beaming of pride, a chest-pounding I AM an American, and I will fight to the death to defend my family, my freedoms, and the country I love.

Don’t fk with the U.S. of A!

I’m certain that is what those hockey players were feeling too.

You boo my flag, I’ll beat your ass!!

… and so they did.

Growing up in Alaska, I played hockey. More memorable than any of the games was the “locker boxing” that went down after practice. With nothing but hockey gloves and helmets—which didn’t stay on long—and of course, a group of rowdy, testosterone filled teenage boys hooting and hollering and cheering us on, one young man after another would square off to determine, definitively, who the top dog really was.

Many years later, after my time in the Army (which, in full disclosure, involved a lot of bar fights and some unsanctioned boxing), I found myself confronted by a couple of bad dudes in a small town bar. They seemed hellbent on picking a fight, because I was an outsider, just passing through, but passing through on their turf.

I turned to the bigger, uglier one and said: “You look like you might be the top dog around here. Where I come from, I’m the top dog, so how about I buy you a beer?”

That went over just about how I expected, and in a flash, it was on. It’s common these days to hear people say FAFO—F**k Around and Find Out—and that’s exactly what happened. It sure as hell wasn’t my first rodeo, he swung, I ducked, and before I knew it people were dragging me off the guy and throwing me out the back door.

To the man’s credit, he wasn’t about to give up. Even though I had just been pounding his face into the floor, as they grabbed me and dragged me off, he grabbed ahold of my leg and proceeded to lay a wicked horse bite on my thigh. I kneed him in the face with my other leg, he let go, and out the backdoor I went.

Ah, the good old days.

Here’s the point: that whole scene was as American as apple pie.

American men are meant to be fighters. We are meant to be fierce and fearless. We are meant to be mighty protectors, to stand up and literally FIGHT for what’s right.

“You’ve gotta fight, for your right, to paaaaaaarrrtay!”—The Beastie Boys

In the natural world, it is the righteous aggression of good men that maintains balance and upholds justice. Without this righteous aggression, the balance tilts towards those who will rape and pillage the village, who exploit our children, steal our money, and trample our rights.

In other words, without righteous aggression, politicians and criminals run amok—which is exactly what’s been happening, is it not?

If it’s not already perfectly obvious, this is why socialist democrats have been demonizing “toxic masculinity” and wussy-fying young men for generations. The entire transgender nonsense is the hideous and embarrassing culmination of this, wherein young men have been so heavily indoctrinated, they willingly castrate themselves and yearn to breast feed babies.

It’s disgusting. It’s wrong. It’s evil.

Backing off from the extreme, we still see in the mainstream men who are cowards, who cower before their feminist wives, their bosses, and the criminal elements of society. We see men who are too chickenshit to stand up to the thugs who steal and smash things in broad daylight, who disrespect the flag and destroy things at will.

They’d rather video a woman getting dragged off and raped than risk getting hurt by doing the right thing. It’s despicable.

“All it takes for evil to prevail is for good men to do nothing”—Edmond Burke

Of course, this is mostly an urban phenomenon. Another song comes to mind:

“Try that in a small town.”

Isn’t it something, how rural Americans seem to have retained the original fighting spirit? Isn’t it true, that now more than ever, we need this fighting spirit to rise?

While Trump and his team continue to clean house in the political arena, wiping the mat with the pansy-ass, snowflake liberal lawmakers and lifetime bureaucrats who’ve been diligently destroying our country for generations, I believe the real fight for justice has yet to be had. Treason abounds, and real accountability is unlikely to be upheld by the corrupted courts and endless legal bickering.

Those who have been intentionally attacking the country we love deserve to be punched in the face, or worse. There needs to be, in my peasant mind, a righteous ass-kicking if we really want these punks to be put in their place.

Lest I be misperceived as simply stirring the pot, these two timeless quotes from Thomas Jefferson come to mind:

• “God forbid we ever go twenty years without a rebellion.”

• “When governments fear the people, there is liberty. When the people fear the government, there is tyranny.”

In reaching for the right words, I wonder what percentage of American men still retain this spirit of resistance. I wonder if, at some point in the future, the men of rural America will realize just how badly they’ve been abused and bamboozled.

I wonder how long they will standby silently, as more and more crimes come to light.

The American people should be outraged at what DOGE has uncovered. Rather than hopping up and down like we’re cheering for our favorite sports team (the MAGA movement), we should be hopping mad about what has been done.

The historic indignation over “taxation without representation” should be the only precedent we need to consider, to see clearly how terribly we’ve been wronged.

Consider a few items from the latest list of treasonous and wasteful spending of your hard-earned dollars, from the USAID alone, according to the White House website:

• $1.5 million to “advance diversity equity and inclusion in Serbia’s workplaces and business communities”

• $70,000 for production of a “DEI musical” in Ireland

• $2.5 million for electric vehicles for Vietnam

• $47,000 for a “transgender opera” in Colombia

• $32,000 for a “transgender comic book” in Peru

• $2 million for sex changes and “LGBT activism” in Guatemala

This is just the tip of a very sickening ice burg.

DOGE—the infamous Department Of Government Efficiency, for anyone who may have been living under a rock for the last month—has uncovered a gross degree of corruption, including thousands upon thousands of unconstitutional regulation that have been implemented by unelected bureaucrats.

It’s not just wasteful spending, it’s been a treasonous takeover of the American way.

But, while there is a fairly civil reckoning taking place, the reality of the situation is that the perpetrators of these crimes are simply being released back into the wild. In fact, internet searches for “bleach bit” and “criminal defense lawyers” have skyrocketed in the Swamp since this federal purge began.

In other words, the criminals are looking to conceal their crimes—they’re planning on getting away with it, and there’s no doubt they’ll regroup and strike again.

Meanwhile, MAGA continues to be mocked by the media and high-profile schmucks like Tom Hanks, and leftist calls for violence continue unabated. One Brooklyn “comedian” has even gone so far as to openly call for assassination:

“Listen, all the Elon/Trump stuff is getting to a point, man…somebody’s gonna have to just throw their life away on this. Just kind of take one for the team.

Somebody’s just got to go in there and make history. You know who you are; just buck up and do your duty.”

Take one for the team?

Clearly this a*e is not on Team USA.

Same goes for millions upon millions of so-called “Americans.”

The socialist rot runs deep.

Which is why, before all is said and done, I believe natural order must be restored. What that looks like exactly, I’ll leave up to the imagination. We are a nation at war, and though the pot is bubbling hot, it’s yet to completely boil over.

“The essential American soul is hard, isolate, stoic, and a killer. It has never yet melted.”—D.H. Lawrence

I suppose seeing those hockey players instilling some much-needed respect stirred something up in me this morning. I am reminded of what it feels like to get punched in the face, and what it feels like to fight back and win.

My warrior spirit roars: “Give me liberty or give me death! I will live free or die!!”

That IS the battle cry of the American Spirit.

And all at once I sense that the hardest days are ahead of us. Will we have the fortitude and resolve to defend the Constitution and fully restore our Republic?

It’s probably a good time to contemplate what that might actually look like. This is a game for all the marbles, and before it’s all over, it’ll probably come to blows.

All that said, there is still a peaceful path forward.

If you’re reading and willing to fight, you might consider reflecting on what it will really take to defeat tyranny, for good, and what you can do now to make that happen:

Remember, resistance is the spice of life, and therefore, RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

The Times They Are A-Changin’

It’s Friday, and there are a couple of things that have been on my radar that I’ve been keeping on the back burner. One is the looming risk the powers that be might try to yank the rug out from under Donald Trump by intentionally tanking the economy. The other is the gradual drip, drip, drip of fearmongering headlines about bird flu.

Granted, most people in the MAGA crowd are probably not staying tuned into these stories, because they’re too busy keeping track of all the winning. However, we’d all be wise to stay loosely apprised of what’s being fed into the minds of the masses, and also keep tabs on the more astute financial analysis provided by clear-minded thinkers.

Along with a hefty dose of liberal lawmakers screeching about America being in a “constitutional crisis” and their growing calls for violence—one jackass Democrat has openly called for the use of weapons against Musk, live on CNN—the other major thread of thought that’s being sown into the left’s collective psyche is that Trump’s funding cuts are going to exacerbate the bird flu into an “existential crisis.”

I’ll give you a taste of what many lefties are reading:

• How America lost control of the bird flu and raised the risk of another pandemic

• Bird flu crisis: Trump, Biden officials begin talks on outbreak

• Eggs Hit by Bird Flu Crisis as Farmers Lose Flocks to Virus

• "No Eggs, No Eggs, No Eggs": Severe Rationing In US Stores Amid Bird Flu Crisis

• Why has California declared a state of emergency over bird flu?

• As bird flu ravages poultry industry, the damage spreads

• New strain of bird flu is detected in a Nevada dairy worker, CDC

• Ohio reports first human case of bird flu: Here's what to know

• Migrants are on the front lines of the bird flu crisis

• Will Trump's Diminished Data Sharing at CDC Hamper Bird Flu

• U.S. Bird Flu Cases Surge in Early 2025

To be clear, I believe this propaganda is laying the groundwork for another pandemic. Whether or not they actually pull the trigger and try to use the pandemic playbook to undermine Trump between now and the midterms is a matter of speculation. These recent headlines point toward the possibility:

• The U.S. Is Not Ready for Bird Flu in Humans

• Expert concerned U.S. not prepared for bird flu spread in humans

• Under Trump, we could be flying blind when it comes to bird flu

• Avian flu in America is a political problem and a health threat

• Is bird flu the next global pandemic?

• Deadly H5N1 bird flu becomes an 'existential threat'

• Is Trump Ready for Bird Flu?

If you’ve been with me for a while, you may recall I’ve been documenting the perfectly timed release of this steady drip reaching back into last summer. TR 635 - Bird Flu, Bread Crumbs, & More Bizarre Coincidence outlines the stories leading up to the election, by date, which includes cats and dogs infecting their owners and other cross-species infections that have led to over a dozen human cases and counting.

I have a nagging suspicion that algorithms are being deployed to gauge the public reaction to these stories, and that once they feel like they’ve got enough traction to launch into full-blown pandemic mode, they won’t hesitate to do so—but they have to prime the minds of enough useful idiots first, in order for the psyop to take.

The narrative surrounding the second issue, the use of a financial collapse to thwart Trump’s winning, has also been carefully constructed. You might remember all the talk of how Trump was inheriting a “remarkable” economy leading up to the election, as noted in my Election Day post:

• The next U.S. president could inherit a booming economy.

• The Next President Inherits a Remarkable Economy

• The Next President Inherits A Very Strong Economy

• America’s strong economy: The next president will have a lot to work with

• 2025 Could Be a Great Time to Be President, Economically Speaking

I then contrasted this egregious gaslighting with the harsh reality of the real financial situation:

• The probability of a recession now stands at 35% - J.P. Morgan

• Americans fear the end: Economic collapse looms largest on the nation’s mind

• 85% Chance of Recession in 2024, Highest Since GFC: Economist

• U.S. Economy on Track for Major Crisis in 2024

• The US economy has defied recession forecasts for years. Is this time different?

Of course, the economy didn’t collapse into a major crisis in 2024—which naturally leads to the question: what are the chances that it’s going to happen in 2025?

I’d say that it’s more likely than not, but then again, I’m just an ignorant peasant speculating on things way beyond my pay grade. But, within this vein, here is some of what the “experts” have been saying over just the last week:

• Inflation came in hotter than expected in January

• Jobs report shows slowdown as companies are acting like 'they're in a recession'

• The success of Elon Musk's D.O.G.E will send the US economy into a depression

• Will Donald Trump sink the US economy?

It kind of seems the writing is on the wall, doesn’t it?

Regardless, right now insiders are claiming that the Deep State has finally met its match with Elon Musk—maybe… but I think that as Musk continues to move quickly and works to “delete entire agencies,” we are going to start to see the true extent of just how far the ruling class will go to protect their own.

Each day DOGE continues to uncover rampant fraud, like Biden’s illegal immigration funding machine, for example, and they have begun investigating the bureaucratic stooges who’ve grown fat off decades of systemic corruption. This is great news.

Meanwhile, Donald Trump just unleashed Mel Gibson to pull a Braveheart on the pedophile elites lurking in Hollywood, which seems to have Mickey worried:

My hope is that Mel exposes the darkness for what it is—which is pure evil—and manages to save more exploited children from Hollywood’s Satanic practices.

It will be fascinating to see how many rich and powerful people are ultimately caught up and implicated by these heinous atrocities. At any rate, what we are witnessing is a full-frontal assault on leftist institutions. It’s exciting and long overdue, but, as I’ve been saying, there is no doubt in my mind that it will come at a cost.

Other pundits are starting to tune into this fact too, asking the very real question:

Where Are the Protests and Riots Over Trump, Musk and DOGE?

They’re coming.

There’s no doubt in my mind they’re coming. What remains to be seen, in my mind, is which of the Deep State tactics get deployed in tandem. As we’ve seen, it appears that bird flu and economic collapse might well play into it.

Of course, there’s also the disturbing possibility that the Deep State goes straight for the throat by orchestrating a major false flag, successful assassination, or some other drastic measure that’s meant to shock the public back into submission.

Matter of fact, I ran across an article this morning that had a video of Mike Benz reading straight out of the CIA’s assassination manual—which probably has nothing to do with the 2,400 “newly discovered” JFK files that were just released, but the timing is interesting to me just the same.

Dark possibilities abound.

The good news is, for the time being, the winning continues to pick up speed:

• Trump is scheduled to meet with Putin (even as the Dems claim that he “literally appears to be negotiating on behalf of Putin”);

• RFK Jr. has been confirmed as the new HHS secretary (even though Mitch The Glitch McConnell voted against him);

• Tulsi Gabbard, Kristi Noem, and Pam Bondi have been sworn in as Director of National Intelligence, Secretary of Homeland Security, and U.S. Attorney General respectively (these women are set to kick some serious ass);

• Some 75,000 federal employees have taken Trump’s buy-out offer, ahead of his Feb. 11th Executive Order forcing agency heads to “promptly undertake preparations to initiate large-scale reductions in force.”

On top of all this, and so much more, Trump has flexed his executive muscle with a flurry of some 98 executive actions as of yesterday, February 13th—which has the Democrats scrambling and the bureaucratic parasites scrambling like cockroaches.

(Click here for the official White House list.)

It’s an exciting time to be alive.

Friends, there is so much happening so fast, it’s impossible to keep up with it all—which, of course, is precisely the point. This is why the Trump Team is moving hard and fast, to outpace the Deep State and their media allies. It’s all good stuff, but it does ratchet up the tension and sense of desperation among establishment figures.

I think of what’s happening kind of like cornering a wounded animal.

There is no telling what their next move might be.

That said, it’s snowing and I’ve got work to do. I’ll leave you with a few lines from the Great American Bard, Bob Dylan, who I didn’t realize had won the Nobel Prize in literature. I’m sharing this because it was the song in my head when I woke up this morning, and I think it speaks to the moment in a foretelling sort of way:

Come senators, congressmenPlease heed the callDon't stand in the doorwayDon't block up the hallFor he that gets hurtWill be he who has stalledThe battle outside ragin'Will soon shake your windowsAnd rattle your wallsFor the times they are a-changin'…The line it is drawnThe curse it is castThe slow one nowWill later be fastAs the present nowWill later be pastThe order is rapidly fadin'And the first one nowWill later be lastFor the times they are a-changin'

Thank you for reading The Torch Report. Please take the time to click the little heart and give me some love, subscribe if you haven’t already, share with your family and friends, and have a wonderful weekend!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Echo chambers.

All I hear when I listen to the news, when I tune into both liberal and conservative pundits, when I flip through the stories and videos on X, are a whole lot of fading echos. I hear the echos of thoughts that must have come from somewhere, but that 99% of the time are certainly not coming from the people flapping their gums.

How do I know this?

Because they are all repeating the same phrases, using the same words, and even mimicking the same emotional intonations and facial expressions.

This mimicking is perfectly natural human behavior. It starts in infancy and continues throughout our entire lives. We cannot help but to mimic, to pick up on words and phrases, or begin mirroring the emotion and expressions of others. There is no shame in doing so, because we are biologically hardwired to do exactly that.

In fact, this phenomenon is pervasive throughout the natural world, throughout the infinite variety of animal and plant life, right down to the cellular level. The science of all of this has been thoroughly studied, and the implications are astounding.

BUT… what does any of this have to do with Donald Trump, DOGE, and getting our country back on track, right? I’m sure that’s what you’d like to know.

The simple answer, is that our biological predilection for mimicry is being exploited by the global cabal through the use of memetic warfare. Put differently, the powers that be are hijacking human nature, at the deepest levels, to consolidate control.

As I watched a bit of the DOGE committee hearing this morning, what struck me the most was that neither side was listening—for the most part, they were all just mimicking and regurgitating the talking points fed to them by staff, who in turn likely pulled the language from “trusted” news sources, which have become the wellspring of globalist propaganda.

Before proceeding, I want to make a few things perfectly clear:

• There is almost always a thread of truth in any propaganda.

• Propaganda is a tool that is used by powers on both left and right.

• Propaganda itself is not synonymous with memetic warfare.

To the last point first, the way that memetic warfare works is by introducing a thought that has been scientifically calculated to capture attention. This is why DARPA spent millions of taxpayer dollars developing Military Grade Memes that guarantee these carefully calculated infectious ideas will spread.

Once these mental worms infect the mind, once these scientific memes take hold, they skillfully direct one’s attention toward the targeted thought, while simultaneously defending against attacks from logic and counter-narratives. This is done by using specific language to activate certain parts of the brain and emotionally charge the mind, thereby shutting down the ability to think for one’s self.

Along with heightening suggestibility, and thus susceptibility to further deception, this form of mental attack also begins to crowd the mind as the memes (again, in the scientific sense) rapidly replicate in order to propagate and spread. The result is mental pressure, which often manifests as blurting out regurgitated talking points.

I’ll venture to guess that most people have never thought about thoughts like this, because most people are not acquainted with the science of memetics. To give you a taste of the longstanding science, consider this excerpt fromTR 301 - Memes, Memetics, & Mental Warfare:

“As I began to dig into this new world of memetics, I learned that the origin of the word “meme” stretches back to the turn of the 20th century… Decades later the definition of a meme settled somewhat loosely to mean “a unit of information residing in the brain that is the mutating replicator in human cultural evolution.…The strongest memes – those that replicate in the most minds – are the ones responsible for creating human culture.”

Keep in mind, memetic science existed long before the internet. In fact, I was first introduced to the idea by a book titled Virus of the Mind: The New Science of the Meme, written by Microsoft engineer Richard Brodie back in 1996. Brodie used the term “virus of the mind” way before people started noticing the “woke mind virus.”

The Journal of Memetics was an open access, peer-reviewed academic journal that was active between 1997 and 2005, ran by globalists from MIT and elsewhere. Soon after, military departments began integrating this new science into tactics for psychological warfare, and by 2012 we had DARPA’s military-grade memes that could “assure propagation of an idea” and “influence beliefs in a scientific way.”

Please take a moment to let these disturbing facts stick firmly in your mind.

Now let’s take it one step further.

Consider the implications from the following slide on DARPA memetics:

What do we learn?

• “Memes can be transmitted without true communication. The sender can pass memes to the receiver using deception…”

• “Memes might be diffused through a population without overt imitation by receivers…”

• “Memetic mutations [changes in thought] can be directed by purposeful human decision-making as well as by random processes…”

• “With directed (Lamarckian) processess, memetics becomes analogous to genetic engineering.”

In other words, under control of the deep state and global cabal, evildoers are capable of using the science of memetics for the purpose of genetic engineering.

And no doubt they are.

Honing in on the unfamiliar term Lamarckian processesses for a moment, the science here is that of how an “inheritance of acquired characteristics” passes from one generation to the next. In the context of thought, the implication is that memetics (infectious ideas) pass from one generation to the next as well.

More importantly, just like genetic blue prints get recycled from one species to the next—think about the bone structure of a hand also being in the fin of a whale, for example—so too do structures of thinking get passed along, not just from one biological generation to the next, but from one news cycle to the next.

Memetic evolution happens at the pace of racing thoughts, in a virtually identical manner as viruses mutate from one infection to the next. Mind boggling.

Which brings me back to the rat race, the DOGE hearings, and the “soft civil war” that is currently ripping our country apart. Just as people are willing to kill and die for their religious beliefs, many people can be radicalized to the point of killing and dying for their memetic beliefs—that is, for the infectious ideas that are driving them mad.

Every time you see a purple-haired minion erupt on social media in an uncontrollable emotional outburst, you are witnessing the very real effects of memetic warfare.

Same goes for those screeching about DEI being dismantled, environmental policies getting eviscerated, and men being told they can no longer compete in women’s sports.

At every turn, we see the effects of memetic warfare on full display.

The point I’m trying to make today, is that these people have been intentionally infected by subversive, destructive ideas, for the purpose of both genetic and social engineering. Their brains have literally been rewired, to advance the globalists’ anti-human agenda (mass depopulation) and destabilize Western society.

The destabilization of Western society and destruction of the United States is necessary to implement Global Digital Governance and impose the techo-dystopian hell known as Future Earth—their words not mine—complete with the inescapable global surveillance state erected to enforce socialism on a planetary scale.

In all truth, even with all the winning, America is woefully unprepared to contend with this issue—which accounts for so much of the smugness among the elite.

The memes that undermine American culture are already in circulation, mutating and spreading at an incomprehensible rate. No amount of government restructuring is going to stop this process from playing out. What’s in motion will stay in motion.

The result will be nothing less than violence in the streets.

I’ve said as much in several recent reports, but Larry Klayman, attorney and founder of Judicial Watch, dropped a piece today that really spells it out. Titled The Left Will Push Violent Revolution Against Trump, Klayman says this:

“We are going to be in a violent revolution, potentially in short order. . . . The Left is pushing too hard right now, and they are going to start the violence like they did with Antifa and Black Lives Matter. Look what happened in Philadelphia when the Eagles won the Super Bowl. Lawless, leftist thugs burned down Broad Street. . . . This is a situation that can only spin more wildly out of control the more Trump pushes. . . .It’s getting to a very dangerous phase. . . The Left wants us dead — they really do. They want to have complete control. Now that control has been taken away from them in an election, they are not going to go quietly. If they don’t get what they want in court, and they probably won’t, they are going to be violent, and this could ratchet up more and more.”

The more I think about this terrible and likely potential through the lens of memetics, I am persuaded that it cannot be any other way—and that those who’ve sown these radically divisive thoughts have known exactly that, for a long, long time.

Having revisited my prior research on memetics, with the reality of this being genetic engineering fresh in my mind, I wonder about possible solutions. Democrat leaders have notoriously called for the formal deprogramming of Trump supporters, which is an absolutely heinous suggestion that I would not dare reciprocate.

However, we have to do something.

We have to do more than mimic all the winning. We have to do more than talk in circles about things that have already been said. As entertaining as it is, this is fruitless in the face of the forces that we are up against.

They’ve poisoned countless minds with this dark science, and the poison is still spreading. The emotional contagion is real, and it’s really about to erupt.

Reflecting upon Nature and nature’s ways, perhaps blood-letting will prove to be the natural remedy for this wholly unnatural problem. Only time will tell. In a poetic sense, it seems fitting that the Tree of Liberty, parched as she may be, may still hold the answer after all these years.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Take a guess.

What do you think the summer of 2025 is going to be like? Do you think it will be a 1967 style Summer of Love, or a 2020 style Summer of Rage?

Obviously, I only ask this rhetorical question to get your wheels turning. When wrapping the mind around all that’s in motion, to the best of our limited abilities, we’d be wise to look ahead, just a little, to speculate on where this is all going.

Looking too far ahead, things get clouded by uncertainties. It’s hard to imagine, for example, where the world will be in 2030, at the culmination of the Great Reset. How many countries are going to steam roll common sense and usurp the will of the people to comply? Right now in Great Britain, they’re doubling down on the stupidity of Net Zero policies, and banning the sale of gas and diesel motors by 2030.

The UK farmers are pushing back, descending upon Westminster with their tractors, yet again, but will they be able to stop the insanity?

Part of me wonders if Americans living under similar tyranny in blue states will ever take their lead and mount similar demonstrations—but I won’t hold my breath.

That said, at the end of last year I recall reading an article about the “most important thing” that nobody was talking about, which called out the Great Reset specifically. It was good enough, I had to look it up, because the perspective bears repeating.

After casting aside the “big stories” like the war in Ukraine, Gaza, the elections, advances in artificial intelligence, the author drills down through the “sound and fury and all that signifies” to deliver some important substance:

The Big Story Of 2024 That Nobody Is Talking About

“No, the important story of 2024 was The Great Reset.

Remember that? It was this pan-global supranational plan to tear down and then rebuild society in a “sustainable”, “inclusive”, “fair” and “secure” way that would – totally accidentally – eradicate civil liberties and individual freedom for every single person on the planet.

It was all the rage a few years ago, you might remember. But when it didn’t go over too well with a lot of people, the powers that be dropped the subject and there’s been very little talk about it since 2022.

Does that mean it’s gone away?”

I’ll reiterate the question: just because nobody is talking about the Great Reset, does that mean that the globalists have abandoned their agenda? Has the global cabal been thwarted by the election of Donald Trump? Have they disbanded and accepted the error of their ways?

Of course not.

What every American needs to realize is, the fact that we elected Donald Trump as president doesn’t mean that these people are going away. These are very powerful people, and their so-called “secret cabal” is deeply entrenched in global affairs.

They have collectively been conspiring against the United States for decades, perhaps a century or more, and their tentacles reach much farther than most people realize. It is necessary to hold this macro-level perspective in mind when evaluating the rapid series of events that is currently taking American politics by storm.

Celebrate the winning, but don’t take your eye off the ball.

Yesterday, I wrote about the intentional stoking of racial division and the Democrats launching their “soft civil war.” Today, I’d like to point out the many calls for violence, protests, and “fighting in the streets” being made by democrat politicians:

• House Minority Leader Hakeem Jeffries, D-N.Y., is calling for widespread resistance to Trump’s agenda, stating, “We are going to fight it legislatively. We are going to fight it in the courts. We’re going to fight it in the streets.”

• Congressional Representative Kweisi Mfume (D-MD) used the same language yesterday, riling up his supporters for a “street fight” against all things MAGA.

• Meanwile, Rep. LaMonica McIver (D-NJ) tells her unhinged constituents “we are at war,” screeching into the microphone, “God damn it, shut down the city!”

Examples abound, and then right along side them, the media is fanning the flames:

• Out of power, Democratic lawmakers take to the streets to rally opposition against Trump

• Trump-Musk Overreach Has Ignited the Opposition. Viva La Resistance!

• Thousands across the U.S. protest Trump policies | PBS News

• Democrats shift to fighting stance to confront onslaught of Musk and Trump

• 'Blow this place up': Frustrated Democrats want the Senate to fight

• Democrats Promise War in Streets to Stop Trump, Musk

• Democratic calls for anti-Trump forces to take to the streets

So again, I ask you: what do you think this summer is going to look like?

Can you see how the enemies of freedom are mobilizing? Can you see how the media is fanning the flames? Is it not obvious that they are looking ahead and already planning to unleash all hell?

Let’s return to the macro-level perspective: how might all of these protests, which will undoubtedly turn violent, by design, be leveraged by global forces?

What are the chances that all of this violence is being orchestrated by global forces?

What strings might the globalists pull to capitalize on this coming violence?

The answer is: we don’t know.

What we do know, is that they’ll never let a good crisis go to waste. We do know that they are aligned with, and funding, the anti-American forces within our own borders.

We also know that financial analysts are warning of a massive global recession in 2025, and that fiscal retaliation by global bankers is certainly on the table.

Same goes for a cyberattack of some kind, or another bioweapon of some sort.

But trumping all of that, we also know that Donald Trump and his team are going to fight like hell against any and all of the above—pun intended. We also know that the American people have a fresh appetite for drastic, unprecedented action, which means there is a significant chance that something truly unexpected might happen.

Worming its way into my mind is the possibility of more assassination attempts.

Just today, the FBI says it miraculously found 2,400 new records related to the assassination of JFK. After all these years, what a strange coincidence, right?

One might wonder if it will take them another 60 years to miraculously find all the files relating to the two Deep State assassination attempts on Donald Trump.

The point that needs to be made here, is that Donald Trump is precisely the kind of leader that we need to help restore the Republic—and he is precisely the kind of leader that globalist forces fear the most. This puts him in a very dangerous position, which we know he is well aware of.

Let me ask you: can you imagine if Trump was actually taken out?

How might that all play out?

There is no way of knowing for sure, but we can know for certain that it would be ugly. It would plunge us into the darkest of days, and very few would be prepared. The chaos that would be unleashed would reshape the whole history of humanity.

And isn’t that what the globalists are trying to do, to reshape the whole of humanity?

Indeed they are, but while the “ends justify the means,” the truth of the matter is that this group of elite evildoers actually prefer more methodical methods for achieving their goals. Think Algorithmic Social Interventions, Vertical Integration, and the social engineering on a planetary scale. Think Military Grade Memes, Fifth Generation Warfare, and thought control with scientific precision.

Think global control at the local level, and realize that it’s already happening. Realize that Artificial Intelligence is capable of changing political beliefs, and keep in mind the end game is total control over a reduced population of Cosmopolitan Peasants.

In other words, whether or not Trump is taken out, or whether or not he ultimately proves successful in correcting course for the foreseeable future, these vectors are still very much in play, and the cabal still has a plan to conquer us all.

I’m not trying to be a negative ninny or piss on the winning parade, I’m just trying to recalibrate perspectives, because these things are not going away. Just because they are not being talked about by the vast majority of pundits, certainly does not mean these forces are not coming to bear on how all this plays out.

That’s where you and I come in.

To be on the cutting edge of societal evolution—to borrow a phrase from Maha Rushi—is a lonely place to be. It means that you are often one of the few putting words to thoughts that have yet to spark in the consciousness of the masses, the first among family and friends to see reality for what it is and warn others of what’s at play.

In my mind, there really is no more important role. This is how we elevate awareness, by pushing such thoughts back into the public discourse, time and again, by reminding people there’s more to the story and there’s more going on than what’s being talked about in the daily news cycle.

As the author of The Big Story Nobody is Talking About says:

“We need to have “object permanence” in politics as in all things. Something doesn’t cease to exist just because you can’t see it anymore. The world doesn’t vanish when you close your eyes.

The Great Reset is still the plan.

It’s still happening. It’s just distributed now. A compartmentalized strategy uploaded to the cloud, everywhere and nowhere. A million nanobots working a million angles to change a million tiny rules and build a million tiny cells.”

Well said.

While it’s easy to get excited and enraged about what’s coming to light, the higher mind must understand that what’s taking place is a great awakening at the lower rungs of society. To the extent that all the “bombshell” revelations provide fodder for shock-and-awe headline news, they are mere distractions and tacit confirmation that all is not as it seems for those who’ve long known this to be true.

It feels good to be right, but just as you’ve been well ahead of the curve in so many ways, for so many years, so too must you recommit yourself to leading the way for those who are only now seeing the light. We need to lead them from where they are at, to seeing what’s really going on. It’s not time to become flippant and dismissive, saying “see, I told you so,” and it’s not time to simply pat ourselves on the back for seeing through the fog of the last administration.

Instead, it’s time to lean in, get loud, and be heard. While the left gears up to fight in the streets, we need to gear up for board meetings and townhalls. It’s not as sexy and exciting, but that’s where the real battle is still being fought.

Run for city council or the school board. Show up to meetings. Write letters to the editor. Call your congressman. Comment on bills in the legislative session.

Know this: the Great Reset is more than just an onerous geopolitical agenda. It is a subversive collection of thoughts that have been carefully sown into the public psyche and meticulously woven into public policy. They are everywhere all at once.

These thoughts cannot be fought in the streets, and they need not be. To do so would be to play the enemy’s game, and lose. For while one might busy himself with bloody knuckles, the real blood-sucking b**s are wearing suits and ties, hiding behind a shroud of formality, and hoping to hell we fall for their ploy.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Losing sucks.

Watching the Super Bowl yesterday was painful. I’d gone into it hoping to watch Patrick Mahomes make history by leading the Chiefs to a three-in-a-row victory. The reality that played out was hard to watch, as the Eagles defense stomped the piss out of the Chief’s offensive line and made Mahomes look like a school boy.

At any rate, that wasn’t even the worst of it.

Everything from opening with the so-called “Black National Anthem”—which I thought sucked, but honestly didn’t realize that’s what it was—to the worst half-time show in Superbowl history, featuring an all-black cast jerking around sporadically while some punk mumbled into the microphone about “colonizers” and how “they ain’t like us,” the entire thing seemed to be an in-your-face display of divisiveness.

Not shown on TV was the fact that Travis Kelce took a knee during the National Anthem (which was butchered by another black singer who, rather than singing the song as it is, decided to put his cultural ‘spin’ on the song, thereby ruining it for millions of Americans), the fact that Taylor Swift was mercilessly booed by the crowd, and that at some point Donald Trump simply got up and walked out of the game.

It was the worst Super Bowl ever.

In my mind, this was the left flexing the fact that they still have a firm grip on the media, the NFL, and many other of the mainstream institutions of American culture. Underneath that, I believe this was a very direct attempt to stir up racial tensions.

Because what else do the Democrats have in their playbook, right?

Right on cue, MSNBC is pushing this garbage:

‘Potentially devastating’: gutting of federal workforce hits Black America hardest

But wait, there’s more:

• Trump's America First policies spark concern among Black Americans

• Trump's America First agenda poses challenges for Black Americans

• Black Americans express fears, resolve after Trump's victory

• Trump's policies and their impact on Black communities

• How Bad Things Are About to Get For Black People - The Root

• Trump's policies: A threat to civil rights and Black Americans

Have you had enough of it yet?

How about the NFL Superbowl ad that featured a black female running over the top of and humiliating a bunch of ignorant white brutes? Did you catch that one?

Are you locked onto the theme here?

Over at The Hill this morning, they offer to illuminate the “6 hidden messages” in Kendrick Lamar’s pathetic half-time performance—all of which I’m sure 99% of Americans missed, because a) they’ve not been indoctrinated into so-called “black culture,” and b) because they couldn’t understand a damn thing he was saying.

In the spirit of diversity, let’s let the educated crackers over at The Hill elevate our cultural awareness. Here are the cultural cues you probably missed:

• Samuel Jackson, dressed as Uncle Sam, was actually playing an Uncle Tom, which “refers to Black Americans who turn their backs on the Black community and culture and willingly embrace subservience to white Americans.” No doubt this is a dig to the millions of black Americans who voted for Donald Trump.

• The performance was really all about “the revolution,” with Lamar rapping about how “the revolution is about to be televised; you picked the right time but the wrong guy.” While other more notable rappers have endorsed Trump, this jackass certainly isn’t one of them, which makes The Hill just giddy.

• For those who didn’t catch it, the entire stage setup was meant to depict black people dancing around in a prison yard. “As the rapper and his all-Black dancers spun around the field, it soon became clear they were performing in a prison yard. The set was designed to highlight the issue of mass incarceration and the racial disparities of those behind bars.”

• While some people were praising the Red, White, and Blue colors of their outfits, the message being portrayed was that America was founded by a bunch of racists. “At one point during the line-up, the dancers all bent forward, lifting their backs in the air… the move was meant to indicate how America was built on the backs of Black Americans during slavery.”

Shortly after, the dancers separated, standing in two groups on either side of Lamar. The image of the divided flag seemed to speak to political divisions around the nation, to which Lamar alludes with the line, “it’s a cultural divide.”

It is in fact a cultural divide.

It is an intentional cultural divide, just like all the LGBT nonsense and the despicable DEI agenda. Right in the middle of the Super Bowl, an event which brings Americans of every stripe and color together to watch and celebrate the phenomenal performance of athletes of every stripe and color, the NFL trots out a mid-grade rapper to insult the American people and stoke racial division.

Tennis star Serena Williams strutted onto the stage — “crip walking” no less — during the performance of Lamar’s song “Not Like Us,” which The Hill informs us was a “diss” to her ex-boyfriend (as if anyone gives a f*ck about that). But what this lesson in cultural enrichment failed to emphasize, was the lyrics of the song:

Ayy, Mustard on the beat, hoDeebo any rap nigga, he a free throwMan down, call an amberlamps, tell him, "Breathe, bro"Nail a nigga to the cross, he walk around like TeezoWhat's up with these jabroni-ass niggas tryna see Compton?The industry can hate me, f**k 'em all and they mamaHow many opps you really got? I mean, it's too many optionsI'm finna pass on this body, I'm John StocktonBeat your ass and hide the Bible if God watchin'

That’s some pretty wholesome stuff, but it gets even better:

Once upon a time, all of us was in chainsHomie still doubled down callin' us some slavesAtlanta was the Mecca, buildin' railroads and trainsBear with me for a second, let me put y'all on gameThe settlers was usin' townfolk to make 'em richerFast-forward, 2024, you got the same agenda…No, you not a colleague, you a f****n' colonizerThe family matter and the truth for the matterIt was God's plan to show y'all the liar

“You a f****n’ colonizer”

How’s that for some All-American poetry? I love how in Lamar’s twisted mind it’s “God’s plan” to show whitey their wicked ways.

Now, today, as if it was somehow divinely orchestrated, we have a sympathetic Black Pastor out of Chattanooga, Tennessee openly calling for violence:

“And I will say to you beloved, no one likes violence, but sometimes, violence is necessary. When Elon Musk forces his way into the United States Treasury and threatens to steal your personal information and your social security check, there is the possibility of violence.

Sometimes the devil will act so ugly that you have no other choice but to get violent and fight.”

Of course, being the wise man of God that he is, Reverend Steve Claudle he stops any critics in their tracks by invoking the Word of God (sort of):

“Well, someone might say, Reverend you know you shouldn’t be talking about violence. This isn’t the Christian thing to do. Well, I will say why not talk this way, because Jesus did. Jesus said in this verse, didn’t he? The kindgom of heaven suffers violence, and the violent take it by force. The kingdom of God is a warzone. It is a battlefield. You did know this, right?”

This man has 40 years in ministry and a Doctor of Ministry Leadership degree from New Orleans Baptist Theological Seminary, so surely he knows what he’s talking about, right? Obviously I’m joking, but this whole kerfuffle does illustrate the slippery slope of religious beliefs and division I’ve been hammering on lately.

People who believe they are speaking for God can convince themselves of anything, and the people who believe God has anointed them are all but destined to go along. This is how people get radicalized and convinced to sacrifice themselves in an act of terror, with the firm conviction that the violence was ordained by God.

Is there any denying these pour souls believe and have faith in God? They believe sofirmly and have somuch faith, they’re willing to kill themselves and others—with a clear conscience and sincere conviction that God will reward them for their efforts.

And it’s all justified by scripture.

Let that sink in.

The average Christian’s faith pales in comparison. FACT.

At any rate, let’s get back to the point:

We are at war.

The Brownstone Institute dropped a piece this morning, titled “A Soft Civil War,” which opens with the following observations:

“The establishment at all levels has never before faced such disruption. Whole institutions are tumbling by weight of exposure to the hot fires of public judgment.…The revelations are coming so hard and fast that it is not humanly possible to keep up. … Where this ends up no one knows but there is no question that the accounting is finally here.”

Impossible to keep up indeed. I’ve thought about trying to chronicle all the winning, and the pushback, but it’s beyond my time constraints—and besides, it’s kind of what everyone else is trying to do, so I’ll just try to stick with the bigger picture.

The author goes on to claim that this massive disruption has ignited a “soft civil war” that is destined to reshape our nation forevermore. I’ve made it clear that we’ve been at war for years at this point, but Brownstone has a unique take:

“A telltale sign of civil war occurs when one is no longer sure who is in power.

Is it the judges blocking access to the books, the bureaucracies burrowing in, the media trying to revive all the old tropes, and the swaths of ruling elites who participated in the pillaging of the public over five years? [try five decades!]

Or is it the renegade forces of MAGA/MAHA/DOGE that are deploying every tool to purge and disrupt?

Both sides claim the mantle of power. Both sides know that everything is at stake. They are prepared for a fight to the death.”

Emphasis added.

Who’s in power now?

While it may be tempting to claim that Donald Trump is in power, the gross display of racism being rubbed in the face of millions of patriotic Americans reminds us where the real power lies. The real power lies in manipulating public perception.

When it comes to wielding that power, the media masters are still in charge—and there is zero chance that they and their handlers are going to go quietly into the night.

Fresh out today, Democrat Senator Chris Murphy is dutifully pouring fuel on the fire, telling the lapdog media and the ignorant masses that we are in the most serious constitutional crisis the country has faced, arrogantly asserting that “the President is attempting to seize control of power, and for corrupt purpose.”

As ridiculous as this gaslighting is, millions of people believe it, just as surely as a Baptist believes the Bible—you know, just like Reverend Steve Claudle.

Meanwhile, even as Trump demands answers about his would be assassins and turns DOGE loose on the Pentagon and Department of Education, those with their eyes wide open, who haven’t been sucked down the rabbit hole of swirling and distracting media narratives, are still grappling with a lot of other “burning questions.”

How can it be that we are where we are? How can it be that so many people can be in such denial of reality? How can it be that leftist media outlets are still trying to divide us on race and gender? How can it be that with all the “winning” so many people are still throwing a fit over the unprecedented accountability?

The answer is human nature.

Don’t underestimate stupidity, and don’t think for a second that the decades of cultural indoctrination is suddenly going to fade away without first rearing its ugly head. As Kendrick Lamar informed us, “the revolution is about to be televised.”

“You picked the right time but the wrong guy.”

You picked the right time, eh? What could he possibly mean?

I’ll go out on a limb and speculate that what he’s really saying, is that they are ready for the fight—that the Deep State, Democrats, and radical Marxist minions are all ready to fight to the death for their revolution.

The question is: are we?

Are you?

Friends, I have the nagging suspicion that things are about to heat up. In this soft civil war, I think we’d be wise to be ready for anything.

This is going to be a very interesting year.

RESIST WE MUST!!

The Torch Report is a reader-supported publication. To receive new posts and support my work, consider becoming a free or paid subscriber.

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s continue…

Yesterday, in TR 666 - Trump's Plan to Eradicate anti-Christian Bias has Direct Ties to Religious Corruption, I called out Trump’s spiritual advisor, Paula White, for her direct ties to gross religious corruption—and as expected, I lost subscribers because of it.

So be it.

Also in that report, I made the effort to stimulate critical thinking regarding how one might perceive the government’s role in promoting religion, specifically by providing examples of what might feel like “foreign” religious practices such as Buddhism, Hinduism, and Islam. I pointed out that though adherents of each faith worship God in their own different ways, each group (Buddhists, Hindus, and Muslims) also has a strong contingency that supports Donald Trump and America First policies.

I was emphasizing that just because these people believe differently, does not make them our enemies. Many of them are, in fact, our political allies—and in this fight-to-the-death for the American Republic, we really do need all the allies we can get.

With that in mind, it is commonly said that there are no more divisive issues than politics and religion. Much of our culture has long considered these two topics to be taboo in polite conversation. This is no accident, I believe, as neglecting these subjects in “polite conversation” allows for deep, natural divisions to fester.

Left unchecked, these deep, natural divisions will naturally lead to the death of our Union. United we stand, divided we fall, as you well know.

Thus, all at once, the need arises to address these deep, natural divisions head-on, and deal with the taboo topics that so many people are too timid to talk about.

To do so, we need to make plain two intertwined vectors of thought. The first vector is that of faith, belief, and religious practice. The second, is that of faith, belief, and political practice. The common threads should be obvious to all.

The power of faith and belief are well documented in scientific literature. As alluded to yesterday, the benefits of having faith and believing in God (or a higher power) are numerous, ranging from an increased sense of well-being, to greater psychological resilience against stress and a measurably greater ability to heal injury and disease.

This is miraculous to me. It’s like magic. It’s divine. Though scientists, using the empirical scientific method, have proven conclusively that this correlation exists, they still have a very poor understanding of why faith and belief have such a profound impact on the physical, mental, and spiritual health of human beings.

Is it too much of a stretch to suggest that we were designed that way?

If one were to reject the notion of Intelligent Design, or reject the belief that we have been created in the image of God, and instead intentionally stick to raw evolutionary explanations, logic will again lead to the same conclusion.

The positive impact of faith and belief clearly exists in objective reality, undeniably, and the mechanisms of this phenomenon are still shrouded in mystery.

Personally, I chalk this mystery up to the Eternal Enigma, to that which exceeds the mind’s ability to comprehend—but that’s just me.

It’s true that there are many things we can know, that we cannot explain, right? For example, one need not understand exactly how a microwave internally functions, to push the button and pop some popcorn.

This is an apt analogy to faith.

One need not understand how the universe, multiverse, or cosmos functions—pick your preferred label for the Sum of Everything that is—to grasp the very real benefits of spiritual practice. Faith, prayer, worship. These have an undeniably positive impact on our daily lives, an impact that we can both feel, perceive, and document.

But here we must square off with a reality that many religious groups struggle to accept. Different faiths, different prayers, and different forms of worship all produce an equivalent degree of positive impact—an impact that can be felt, perceived, and documented objectively, regardless of the religion involved.

This is quite profound, is it not?

So, if various faiths and religious beliefs are producing the same physiological and spiritual benefits—which is a boon for humanity, mind you—then who’s to say that one religion is morally superior over any of the others? Certainly not me.

I can have my own preferences and faith. I can have my own beliefs and convictions. I can even study scriptures and ancient texts to flesh out my head-level understanding of how all of this stuff works—but I cannot deny the fact that people with entirely different beliefs, based on entirely different texts, experience the same effects.

To deny that reality would be a woeful degree of arrogance and self-deception.

Thus, I believe that honesty compels us to acknowledge this reality, and that humility compels us to accept it. I believe that honoring the various spiritual expressions of humanity is the proper path forward.

This is the virtuous path: honesty, humility, and honor.

Of course, you obviously do not have to believe as others do. You do not have to accept their beliefs as gospel, abide by their dogma, or honor their Gods. That’s not what I’m saying. What I’m saying is that we need to accept the fact that each of these groups are engaged in fruitful spiritual expression that brings peace, joy, and a deeper meaning to their lives—regardless of what you or I think about it.

It is said in the Bible, “My ways are higher than your ways and my thoughts than your thoughts.” Is it not possible that God is speaking to different people in different ways?

With that said, in so much as faith and belief play out in the grand display of religious and spiritual practices observed around the world, so too do these intriguing behaviors—faith and belief—play out in the political theater. Indeed, faith and belief play a profound role in political practices around the planet. Unfortunately, these forces can, in many instances, be pointed to as the root cause of geopolitical chaos.

Here we must reach for a higher perspective, to properly frame the issue, and we must do so with honesty, humility, and honor—lest our efforts be in vain.

Let’s zoom out.

Similar to the myriad religious beliefs that undeniably exist, there are also myriad political beliefs in every corner of the planet that are held with equal conviction. While a strong case can be made that there is little distinction to be made between beliefs in religious and political dogma, on a very subtle note I disagree.

I place faith and belief in God, in something divine, in worship and prayer, as an inseparable aspect of our shared humanity. It is an instinctual expression of the spirit within, something that animates us at the subconscious level to seek a deeper meaning and explanation for our existence.

In this sense, I see spirituality as an extension of Natural Reality.

Conversely, I hold faith and belief in the State, in political reality—which comes complete with worship and prayer (albeit in a secular form)—as something entirely different. This is an environmentally conditioned phenomenon that has arisen from the growing complexities of human interaction.

Spiritual expression has existed since the dawn of time, but political expression as it is today, arrived on the scene much later in the course of history.

In this sense, I see politics as an extension of human thought, which is something very different and often at odds with Natural Reality.

To be fair, I see organized religion just the same.Organized religion is an exercise of thought that often confuses and restricts the natural expressions of spirituality.

But, to the point, political reality does in fact exist, and political tensions exist because of it. And again, the same can be said for the reality of various religions—various religions do in fact exist, and religious tension inherently exists because of it.

Think of Holy Wars, Jihad, and the Great Crusades, and you’ll get what I’m saying. Religious wars are no different than one country waging war upon another, or for that matter, the entire world imploding into conflict due to political tensions.

What we find, upon closer inspection, is that human beings can be easily compelled to kill one another over different beliefs—that is, over different thoughts.

Is there a solution to this persistent, plaguing feature of humanity?

Maybe not.

But, then again, I do believe we can get a long way toward peace and stability by walking the virtuous path. Living with honesty, humility, and honor will do a lot to diffuse divisions and tension, be they religious or political in nature.

Distilled to a simple phrase of common parlance, the solution is “live and let live.”

Of course, that will never work, so long as religious and political dogma rule the day. It would be naive to think, “can’t we all just get along.” The answer is obviously no.

But WHY?

Why can humans beings not coexist in peace and harmony?

In theory it’s possible, and in reality many people do in fact live in peace and harmony, with people who have wildly different beliefs about God and politics. America has been proof of this fact for nearly 250 years. This is true, is it not?

So then, we might inquire: what is the agitating force that causes people to rise up against one another?

The answer can be uncomfortable.

Religion, which when layed bare is nothing more than a collection of indoctrinated beliefs, is clearly a guilty culprit. The same holds true of the State and various political narratives, which is just another collection of indoctrinated beliefs.

What we find here, is the human mind being yanked this way and that by conflicting thoughts—and it is these conflicting thoughtsthat are really driving conflict.

Immediately my mind races toward military grade memes and memetic warfare, toward the infectious ideas (thoughts) that are being intentionally propagated to sow religious and political divisions. But alas, I will sidestep this science for today.

Deeper understanding of humanity reveals that our thoughts are fickle and fleeting. Our thoughts can be changed causually, indirectly, or quite intentionally. This is a fact that is not to be overlooked or taken lightly.

Wisdom provides even greater insight: our thoughts can be changed by either internal or external forces. As spiritual creatures, we have the ability to create and cultivate our own thoughts, beliefs, and mental reality. This is an internal process.

In the absence of this self-direction, the State and its purveyors gladly step in, as will religious leaders who are eager to convert you to their system of belief.

At stake in all of this is a battle for control. Who controls you?

It may be a leap, but I believe that to the extent that an individual lacks self-awareness, they inherently lack self-control, and therefore self-determination. In turn, this invites control by nefarious external forces, by people and entities that seek to control the individual and exploit them for selfish gain.

Again we find organized religion and politics working the same beat. In a very real sense, both are working to beat the mind into submission using dogmatic teachings that turn people against each other, for the purpose of power and control.

I know that sounds harsh, so as not to be misunderstood, I do believe that both organized religion and political movements can and do play a benevolent role in society. Religions provide spiritual guidance and spur a sense of charity. Politics provide legal guidance and spur a sense of civic responsibility.

Both are necessary for society to function.

Without spiritual guidance, sensible charity, legal parameters, and civic responsibility, it is likely that humanity would tear itself apart in a dark display of our worst impulses and instincts. Of course, even with each of these factors in place, even with government and religion, we might still succumb to the same fate, unless we can self-arrest by elevating awareness at the personal, social, and societal level.

This is critical.

Elevating awareness is the ultimate solution.

Elevating awareness increases empathy, and empathy unlocks the answers to societal woes. It does so by stimulating mutual respect for objective reality. Put differently, empathy leads to an understanding and acceptance of human diversity—that we are each incredibly unique individuals who are not, and never will be, the same.

This gives rise to the realization that freedom is the most good for the most people.

That implies both religious and political freedom.

If people want to worship God by slaughtering goats, that’s not my cup of tea, but as long as you’re not slaughtering my goats, go ahead and worship how you’d like.

If people want to live in a socialist commune, have at it, just don’t expect to claim my private property or force me to play along—but still, you can live how you want.

Underlying these simple examples lies an awareness that different people think differently, and though I may disagree, it’s not really my place (or worth my time) to argue about it. Their beliefs are their own, and I’m okay with that.

Also underlying these examples, is the justification for laws and regulation.

However, due to the length of the report at this juncture, I will sidestep the political science of this justification for now as well.

Let’s wrap it up.

Friends, I sat down at the keyboard this morning with an open heart. I’ve written the words as they’ve come, some 2,000+ at this point, and I have much more to say.

There are layers upon layers of conditioned perspective that must be peeled back to get at the most accurate perception of life’s religious and political complexities. It may seem like a pointless philosophical romp to some, but rest assured, my mind is striving toward solutions. Why?

Everywhere we look we see chaos, contention, and division—even, and perhaps especially, in the midst of all the “winning.”

While I am truly grateful that Trump, Musk, and the rest of the All-American team is kicking ass and taking names, and while I’m thoroughly excited about the political reckoning that is taking place, I am also looking to the horizon. How might this movement to Make America Great Again get derailed?

The answer is division.

It’s going to take time, as in more than one administration, to truly correct course. Even as Trump cleans house, the thoughts that divide We The People are still as pervasive as ever. We’ve had hints of unity, which allowed us to win in the last election, but immediately it feels as if this unity has come under direct attack.

While the political division between left and right is as stark as it’s ever been, it is the religious division that I fear the most—for it is this form of division that is most difficult to defend against and overcome. History has proven this repeatedly.

In searching for words, a poem flows out:

Behold the thought that’s seldom sought,That brings the mind to bare,On fleeting truths not often caught,In emotion’s clouded glare.

We are but one in a single way,Not in feelings or belief,But in seeking peace that doesn’t sway,In spiritual relief.

The words we use and means we choose,To salve this mortal wound,Reflects the truth of mind bereft,Of answers to the clues.

Could it be that each of we,Inherent in ourselves,Can touch divine without the mind,Leaving thoughts upon the shelves?

Could it be Divinity exceeds the mind itself?

When thoughts lead into conflict,When brains do human things,Our hearts still know the powerThat displays through everything.

And herein lies solutions,For the world and all our woes,If we’d only grasp the conceptOf how together it all flows.

God only knows, and so it goes,We grow through pitch and pain,Toward the light of truth and proper use,Of our gifted human brain.

No two are the same… think about these things.

Rejoice in the being of you. Reflect on the differences between family and friends, try to walk the virtuous path, and your heart will be glad that you do. So said the sages down through the ages, the path is trodden and true.—

And that is the message of my heart for today! Friends, I hope you all have a fabulous Friday and a wonderful weekend. Thank you for your time and support of the Torch Report, it means a lot. I’ll get back to the astute political commentary next week.

I wish you all the best.

Sincerely,

Luke

The Torch Report is a reader-supported publication. To receive new posts and support my work, consider becoming a free or paid subscriber.

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s fitting.

Some time back a good friend asked if I’d do a special report on Satanism for Torch Report 666. We laughed about it, and I said maybe. It seems remarkably fitting that the front page headline news on The Hill this morning was this:

I know a great many Americans are excited and thoroughly grateful about this development, giving praise to God for Trump’s leadership, and celebrating the long overdue reconciliation to traditional American values. I agree.

However, as covered in a recent series of reports, I believe this is a slippery slope. Indeed, I believe this is a very slippery slope, but not for the reasons you might think.

To spare the need for reiterating much of what I’ve recently documented and explained, I’d point your attention to the reports below. The common theme among them pushes three important distinctions:

• The Founding Fathers made an explicit effort not to include Christianity in either the Declaration of Independence or the Constitution of the United States.

• They did this knowingly and intentionally, even though the majority of them were in fact men of strong Christian faith.

• The reason was simple and perfectly logical: they understood the government should have no power to push a religion or infringe upon personal convictions.

As discussed during that series of reports, I understand that this is an uncomfortable reality for many Christians—and yet it is reality just the same. Tackling the debate over whether or not we are meant to be a “Christian Nation” is equally uncomfortable, and I received no shortage of blowback on the assertion that, upon reviewing the documents to ascertain the Founders’ intent, the answer is unequivocally no.

To get up to speed on this conversation, please review the following reports:

As covered by The Hill, while speaking at the time-honored National Prayer Breakfast, Donald Trump said he was going to establish a commission on religious liberty that “will work tirelessly to uphold this most fundamental right.” Good.

His plan is to appoint Pam Bondi, the recently confirmed Attorney General, to a task force assigned to “eradicate anti-Christian bias” and stop “all forms of anti-Christian targeting and discrimination within the federal government.” Good.

Trump said that he also intends to create a White House Faith Office, led by his personal religious adviser Rev. Paula White, who is a television evangelist who pushes “prosperity theology.” Hmmm.

More on this lady and her way of thinking in a moment.

Trump’s vision, in his own words, seems perfectly sincere:

“While I’m in the White House, we will protect Christians in our schools, in our military, in our government, in our workplaces, hospitals and in our public squares. And we will bring our country back together as one nation under God.”

Do we need to protect Christians from persecution in the public square? Well, unfortunately, yes. Christians have been mercilessly mocked, shunned, and ostracized by liberalized American culture for decades—at least in some places, though certainly not all. I doubt people in the Bible Belt have felt an equal level of persecution.

But let’s just cut to the chase here:

Should people be free to share and talk about their faith, without fear of being fired or flagged for differential treatment by their employers?

Well, let’s think it through.

What if a Buddhist had a Buddha statue at their desk and shared the secrets of mindfulness meditation with a stressed out coworker—would you be okay with that?

What if a Hindu displayed a portrait of Ganesha and shared testimony with a teammate about how praying to Ganesha had removed countless obstacles in their life—would you be okay with that?

Let’s take it one step further:

What if a Muslim member of the team quietly and dutifully dropped to perform Salah prayers, and when a curious coworker asked about it, they explained they were praying for blessings upon the office—would you be okay with that?

THINK ABOUT IT.

I intentionally included images with those examples, to emphasize just how foreign different religions feel to the average American. You might take a moment to ponder each picture and take note of any thoughts or emotions that may come up.

Now consider the fact that there are 1.2 BILLION Hindus in the world, and approximately 1.9 BILLION Muslims.

That’s over 3 BILLION people who believe very, very differently than most Americans. But, to be fair, we must also acknowledge there are millions of devout Hindus and Muslims right here in the good ol’ U. S. of A. This is an undeniable fact.

All combined, these two groups total nearly 8 million Americans. (7,823,884)

Think about it.

Are these 8 million people a threat to our nation?

Before you answer, consider these headlines:

• Hindus for America First endorses Trump

• Delhi Hindu Group Offers Prayers for Trump's Safety

• Hindu American groups praise Trump for promising to protect rights

• Hindus for America highlights growing support for Trump

• Why Donald Trump is winning over many American Hindus

From the Muslim side:

• Nearly a third of Muslim-American voters back Trump

• Trump earns endorsement from 'highly respected' Muslim leaders

• Muslims for Trump: Unveiling Unexpected Support

• Why Muslim leaders are backing Trump for president

• 'Muslims for Trump' Launches Initiatives in Key Battleground States

Are you shocked?

In the 2024 election, Donald Trump won the popular vote by approximately 2.5 million votes. He did this largely by building support among various groups that have previously been a sure bet for Democrats, including Black, Latinos, Hindus, Muslims, Atheists, and many others.

The takeaway should be clear: these people are our political allies.

That’s why I so painstakingly made the effort to explain the dangers of religious division in those prior reports. This fragile coalition is necessary to restoring our Constitutional Republic. We cannot win elections if we allow ourselves, as liberty loving Americans of all different convictions, to be religiously divided.

FACT.

Now then, let’s circle back to Trump’s intent to re-unite our country as “one nation under God.” Please note that, following in the footsteps of the Founding Fathers, this statement is explicitly not Christian in nature.

Saying “one nation under God,” is very different than saying “one nation under Christ”—and this critical distinction is precisely why the Founders phrased the statement as they did. It was no accident, and the reason for it is profound.

People of all different faiths believe in God, admittedly in their own unique ways.

Rather than bickering about whether or not these different faiths are believing in the same God, or in the right God—which is a perfect recipe for division—we’d all be wise to humbly accept the absolute sincerity of these different beliefs.

At the biological level, the neurological impact of faith looks the same, and for the record, the positive impacts of faith are scientifically founded:

• What religion does to your brain — “…the neurophysiological effects of religious belief are scientific facts that can be accurately measured.”

• Influence of religious aspects and personal beliefs on psychology — “…among religious parameters, the individual cognitive aspects of religion, but not the organizational ones, show the greatest effect.”

• Religious and Spiritual Biomarkers in Both Health and Disease — “…the relationship of religion and spirituality with healing is a remarkable and unanticipated current developed within academic medicine.”

• Effects of Religion and Faith on Mental Health — “…post-analysis of 24 studies and a systematic review of another 200 showed a consistent and consistently positive relationship between mental health and religion. Moreover, a total of 454 more recent studies describe how Religion/Spirituality have been found helpful for people coping with various stressful situations and symptoms, natural disasters and diseases, and various adverse life situations, bereavement and end-of-life conditions.”

The Proof is in the Pudding.

God is good. Faith is good. Life is good.

People of wildly different religious beliefs can all agree that this is true.

People of wildly different religious beliefs can also agree on the principles of limited government, fiscal restraint, individual rights, and personal freedoms.

Has anything I’ve said been wrong?

It may be controversial to stand up for people of different faiths, but I believe this is in fact the very core of what “religious freedom” actually means.

The alternative, which is a state promoted religion, is antithetical to human freedom.

Let us never lose sight of that fact!

Now then… about Paula White and the White House Office of Faith… there’s just something icky to me about TV evangelists oozing their charisma upon the desperate and needy in order to enrich their own coffers.

“Give us some money, and God will bless you!”

“If you give us your very last dollar, he will bless you even more!!”

PUKE.

Per Paula White’s website, you need to put “first things first” and be obedient, honoring God by sending her your “first fruits”—aka your cold, hard, pre-taxed cash.

Buyers beware, Paula White, boasting one of the largest congregations in the United States, has a track record of squandering contributions on trivial things and not paying the church’s bills. This has led to bankruptcy and foreclosure on several church properties. For example, when White was the senior pastor of New Destiny Christian Center, the Evangelical Christian Credit Union claims the church owed $29 million.

Where did all the money go?

Ironically, in 2007, when Republican Senator Chuck Grassley was charged with investigating the “alleged opulent spending” of six media-based ministries, he found that the church Paula White operated used tax-exempt ministry funds to pay nearly $900,000 for a waterfront mansion, spent over a million dollars on salaries for family members, and also paid for the Whites’ private jet.

All in the name of the Lord, of course.

Kind of leaves a nasty taste in your mouth, doesn’t it?

The point I want to leave you with is this: to believe that Christians are somehow morally superior to other liberty loving Americans is painfully naive. Christians are just as fallible and easily corrupted as every other human on the planet.

Let’s not try to pretend otherwise, and by extension, let’s not confuse our religious and political missions. As I’ve been saying, to do so would be the peril of our Republic.

To be continued…

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s see…

Of the many incredibly entertaining stories that are out today; of the many rapid fire decisions that are being used to deliver blow after blow to the bureaucratic blob; of the many, many examples of Donald Trump and Elon Musk winning on behalf of the American people, where should we start?

Yesterday, I mentioned in passing that the USAID was full of reckless, feckless, immoral spending, and that it was used for funding the network of NGOs that have long been weaponized against the American people. Today, news is out that these shysters have been funneling millions of dollars into leftist news outlets like Politico and the New York Times, who in turn run the Deep State’s state-sanctioned narratives.

Darren Beattie, the mind behind Revolver News, who just picked up a spot in Trump’s State Department, has two excellent articles out today drilling down on this issue.

Explaining how Trump’s rapid action is overwhelming the media establishment, Beattie spells out exactly how the Deep State coordinates with the mainstream media in a military-style Mission Control in order to dominate public messaging. Then, after laying out the details, he offers this sobering reality check:

“Trump’s rapid-fire style isn’t just effective—it’s a wrecking ball to their machine, and he needs to keep it up. …

But here’s the real takeaway: we need our own command system. No more of this “high road” nonsense, where we sit on the sidelines like Paul Ryan, clutching our pearls and mumbling, “That’s not who we are…” Meanwhile, the left plays dirty, and they win, and win, and win, and win.

We need a system that beats them at their own game and gets our message out to the American people. Social media has been a game-changer for us, which is exactly why the left is so desperate to censor and control the internet. We’ve built a solid base there, but it’s not enough. If we want to stay competitive in this brutal political landscape, we have to go bigger. Because like it or not, this battlefield isn’t changing anytime soon.”

I want to emphasize that last line, because even though good things are happening fast, as I was saying yesterday, the algorithms are already in place and the public has already been conditioned to trust their media masters. To take Algorithmic Social Interventions from a nebulous concept and provide a more tangible example, I ran a quick search on “trump usaid” and the results speak for themselves.

Note the top sources being fed to the American people:

It is no coincidence that taxpayer funded propagandists are at the top of the list. NPR, Politico, the Associated Press and the rest of their ilk are all bellied up to the trough, and they sure as hell wouldn’t bite the hand that feeds them.

But that’s just the top of the list. Perhaps there are conservative sources a little further down? Here’s the screenshot of the additional results, all the way down to the “Can’t find what you’re looking for?” nonsense at the bottom of the search. Scanning the list, you will find more AP, USA Today, Time, BBC, CNN, the Wall Street Journal, more NPR, Reuters, and more New York Times.

What you will not find, is a single conservative news source.

That’s how Algorithmic Social Interventions work.

If you can’t find what you are looking for sifting through the spoon-fed drivel, you have the option to provide feedback, say by pointing out the heavy leftist slant in the search results or perhaps recommending an alternate set of sources (which very likely is used to train the algorithms on what not to feed the American people)—and if you must, you can click to see “more results” that look much the same as the first.

They are making it as difficult as possible to find opposing perspectives.

Now then, astute observers may have also picked up on the media’s coordinated messaging surrounding Trump’s gutting of the USAID — What is the USAID, and why in the world would Trump “want to get rid of it,” “want to close it,” “want to end it,” or be “poised to close it”? Surely there has to be an explanation, right?

No doubt low-level thinkers will want to know, and by feeding them leftist propaganda from state-funded sources at the top of the search results, the puppet masters can quite effectively control “emerging” public perceptions.

In other words, as I’ve said many times before, they are controlling what the public thinks before their thoughts are fully formed.

The implications of this are deeply disturbing, especially in light of the very real neurological and emotional impact, which both rewires the public’s mind at the biological level, and simultaneously, systematically drives behavioral change.

Behold the threat of Algorithmic Social Interventions and weaponized AI.

This is just one of endless examples.

What’s key to realize, is that even with all the winning, these algorithms are already in place. Thus, while Trump and Musk may be able to tag-team a WWF style assault on the USAID, and perhaps cut funding to some of these nefarious state-funded propagandists, the real devil lies buried in the computer code that very few people can even comprehend.

And like Beattie said, “like it or not, this battlefield isn’t changing anytime soon.”

So let’s zoom out…

Right now, the battle for the minds of everyday Americans is being won by algorithms. Algorithms are the guts of artificial intelligence. Weaponized AI is, in a nutshell, nothing more than a set of algorithms that have been coded to push the globalists’ agenda by controlling the public’s perspective and behavior.

I cannot emphasize the importance of this enough.

Even though we are winning in many different arenas at once, by dismantling DEI initiatives, defunding corrupt federal agencies, and finally flexing our economic might against parasitic nations that have long been exploiting the U.S. taxpayer, we are still not winning in the messaging department—as Beattie so keenly pointed out.

Consider it from another angle: while patriotic Americans are relishing the sweet taste of victory and justice and continue to cheer on Trump and his team, they remain generally (or wholly) unaware of how the real game is being played.

If your social media feed is chock-full of winning, congratulations, you are on the winning side of history, but you must realize that enemies of freedom are being fed an entirely different narrative. This headline says it all:

Protests against Trump and Project 2025 are planned in cities across the US

What’s this? Protests are being plannedin cities across the country?

You don’t say. Did I not just spell out that all of Trump’s winning was set to trigger the leftists’ socialist revolution? Perhaps it’s all going according to plan, as I suggested?

There are a couple of other noteworthy points of propaganda from the AP screenshot. First, top right, the Associated Press boldly declares that it “sets the standard” in political reporting. You might think of it as them quarter-backing the narrative, but in reality, it’s the algorithms that ensure they drive the central messaging.

The second thing I’d like to point out, in passing, is the street cop who’s standing there looking like a d*s as a horde of useful idiots are flying foreign flags in American streets. This impression is intentional. Leftists hate the cops, so any chance they get, they look to portray them as inept and incompetent—and many of them are.

But the deeper, subconscious impression being sown into the minds of the agitated minions who will eagerly lap up this story, those who are no doubt preparing themselves to actively participate in this orchestrated social upheaval, is that law enforcement is helpless in the face of cleverly fabricated un-righteous indignation, and of course, they are hopelessly outnumbered by the proletariat hordes.

Again, the message to leftists is: now is the time.

When one begins to view the news through this lens, and consider the starkly different narratives being used to create wildly different perceptions of reality, there is a creeping sense of unease that inevitably arises.

Holy st—THAT’s how they’re going to pull off this Color Revolution.

Or at least that is how they are going to try to pull this off.

On that note, Kirk Schlichter was out with a piece today, reminding every American that right now we are in a “battle to the death” with the Deep State and their media allies. If they lose, they lose for good, and it will take them a generation or more to regroup—and therefore, they are going to use their considerable collective might to thwart the America First agenda in any and every way possible.

If it’s riots they want, then it’s riots they will get. We’ll see how it goes.

But, that said, Schlichter points out that the greatest threat to Donald Trump and the MAGA movement is not these outed anti-American forces, but in reality it’s the enemy within—he claims the greatest threat is actually other Republicans.

It’s worth pondering his point. It’s also worth keeping tabs on our representatives and senators, and perhaps reaching out to communicate the need to stand firm.

And yet, with all of the above on the table, there is still more to consider. Domestic affairs and political theater are but one battlefront. The global cabal has many tricks up their collective sleeves, and now more than ever they’re likely to pull a fast one.

That’s what came to mind when I saw this outlier today:

Human bird flu infections are spreading. It’s mutated into the first ever “severe” case in the United States, and now, right on cue, another “potentially deadly zoonotic virus” has been detected. What do you make of it?

Perhaps the puppet masters’ controlled opposition (Fox) is tipping the cards?

Don’t think for a second that the globalists’ are going to take all this “winning” lying down—and don’t doubt for a second their ability to overturn the apple cart.

Most importantly, don’t lose sight of the fact that they are the ones with their hands on the real levers of power, namely the international banking cartels and their army of international NGOs like the WEF, the UN, et cetera. While Trump targets the U.S. Deep State, these commie forces are undoubtedly scheming behind the scenes.

We won’t know their next move until they make it.

It’s an exciting time to be alive.

Stay wise and keep your powder dry patriots.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

There’s something there.

The political theater unleashed in the wake of Trump’s historic Deep State disruption is exciting and wildly entertaining, is it not?

Democrats are running around like their hair is on fire, doubling down on DEI, protesting the common sense cutting of reckless, feckless, immoral spending funded through USAID, and belligerently blocking traffic while waving Mexican flags in the faces of hardworking Americans who have simply had enough.

These people are idiots.

More accurately, these people are heavily indoctrinated idiots.

That said, don’t think for a second that the puppet masters don’t know what they’re doing. They are stirring up a revolution, a Color Revolution, using a tried and true playbook that banks on enough useful idiots being whipped into an emotional frenzy. What we are witnessing right now is just the beginning of what’s to come.

There are many American Patriots who have seen this coming, and many who expected that it would have actually commenced prior to the election, in an all out effort to keep Trump out of office. However, as I’ve stated before, my suspicion was that the Deep State and the global cabal, knowing they could not keep Trump out of office, even after two shoddy assassination attempts, have actually been working for months to move the necessary pieces into place for precisely this moment.

If the titles of those three reports don’t make it perfectly clear, as we were ramping up to this historic third election of Donald J. Trump, my mind was looking beyond what seemed inevitable, in an attempt to ascertain what comes next.

Going back a little further, to TR 561 - Super Tuesday & the Fate of Our Nation, I posited the unpopular question: Is Donald Trump the Deep State’s Trojan Horse?

Fleshing out the perspective:

“Don’t stone me. Hear me out. Conservatives have proven to be too polite and restrained to mount any sort of opposition to the rampant political corruption and repeated smacks-in-the-face coming out of Washington DC. Every indication is that conservatives as a whole have lost their appetite for violence, no longer embody Jefferson’s spirit of resistance, and have no intentions of watering the Tree of Liberty.

That would be too uncomfortable. That would be extreme. No self-respecting suburb conservative wants to risk their career or reputation for such silly little things like a stolen election, a massive invasion, or the death of the American Dream.

But the Left on the other hand, those guys are straight up thugs. They’ll knock out a little old lady in broad daylight, just for the hell of it. They’ll rape your women and children and laugh about it. These Leftists are as radical as they come, and they sure as hell are not afraid to use violence to intimidate conservative snowflakes—I mean c’mon, they’ll torch cop cars and run police out of their own damn precincts!

Can you imagine how unhinged the Left will be if Trump gets reelected?”

Can you see it now? Can you see just how quickly the unhinged Left has become even more unhinged? Do you recall that woke indoctrination has been scientifically proven to make people more hostile and aggressive?

Consider, for a moment, that the puppet masters—i.e. the global cabal, for whom the entire U.S. Deep State are mere formidable foot soldiers—have a firm grasp on human nature, a strong grip on the social psyche, and all the technological tools that they need to facilitate an exacting degree of chaos all across the country.

Consider the possibility, that from their perspective, things moving right along, according to well-thought-out plans, toward their ultimate end goal.

I’m well aware that current news cycles seem to fly in the face of this speculation. I know that everywhere we look right now, the corrupt DC establishment seems to be scurrying like cockroaches, trying to impede justice and prevent their myriad treasonous transgressions and documented crimes from coming to light.

But these are just low-level fools. They are tools in the hands of the much darker, more powerful forces that have been ruling the planet for decades. FACT.

And so it is, I believe we would all be wise to temper our expectations. We need to realize that winning the election was but one battle, major as it was. We need to remain vigilant in the face of a much longer war, and we need to realize the strategies and antics that will inevitably be used against us.

For the record, I am impressed by the speed and laser-like focus with which the Trump administration is moving. Dismantling the USAID cuts off funding to the network of NGOs that have been weaponized against American interests. The fact that he is said to be targeting the Department of Education next is a thrilling prospect. There is a lot of good stuff happening, and it’s happening fast.

But, even in the face of all this winning, great dangers are looming on the horizon.

One often overlooked facet in this war for global control are the impressionable youths, whose “minds of mush” are so utterly saturated with the woke mind virus they are completely incapable of discerning reality, let alone thinking for themselves. These are the useful idiots we see protesting in the streets.

These are the soldiers that are being called to war as we speak.

To activate the agitated psyche of these useful idiots is easy-peasy. They have been primed for this occasion all their lives. All that needs to be done now is feed them a relentless stream of triggering stories that cement their resolve to rise up, with violence, and overthrow the “rotten and illegitimate” system.

“The Communists disdain to conceal their views and aims. They openly declare that their ends can be attained only by the forcible overthrow of all existing social conditions.” —The Communist Manifesto

Note the banner in the screenshot below, being used to block traffic in San Diego. It says, “THIS WHOLE SYSTEM IS ROTTEN AND ILLEGITIMATE,” which, to my point, somehow justifies some young black-clad punk aggressively assaulting an innocent commuter who’s probably just trying to get to work.

It’s also worth noting that bystanders are already pointing out that many of these protesters are actually being bussed onto the scene, and they are probably getting an invigorating Marxist pep talk on the way. It’s also quite likely that many of them are actually paid agitators, courtesy of George Soros, et al.

Even the L.A. Times admits such paid antagonist do in fact exist.

But here’s a little twist.

If one were to “fact check” the accusation that “paid protesters” have been present and largely responsible for the chaos in the streets and on college campuses across the country, the narrative is that this accusation is being used to “delegitimize” the sincere and supposedly morally righteous outrage that’s being poured out.

Says PolitiFact:

• Police, city and university officials nationwide have blamed “outside agitators” for campus protests but have provided little evidence for their claims.

• Law enforcement experts say police often consider “outside agitators” to be people who move from city to city and are paid to be agitators.

• Historians say government and law officials commonly use the “outside agitator” narrative to delegitimize protesters and their demands.

Their article then goes on to systematically “debunk” the very valid claims that paid agitators have been brought in to stir up rage, which have been made by college professors, local law enforcement, and even New York City Mayor Eric Adams. By doing so, they have fortified the denial of reality in the minds of useful idiots.

The full extent and impact of such malicious manipulation should never be underestimated. I believe the problem is much more pervasive than the vast majority of Americans realize. Very few people have any handle on just how distorted the public’s perception has become, or more importantly, how it has happened.

We cannot see algorithms, but we see their effects daily. Still, very unfortunately, it is literally impossible to quantify the scale of manipulation. We cannot see the social media feeds of every American, let alone the junk and propaganda that’s being spoon-fed to the hordes of useful idiots who are currently being activated.

They are living in a world that is very, very different than you and I.

Their worldview, as is ours, is most prominently shaped by the invisible Algorithmic Social Interventions (ASI) that I’ve warned so much about. Keep in mind that ASI is a technical term and this technology has been in use for more than a decade. Most telling, the stated purpose of Algorithmic Social Interventions is nothing less than controlling “emerging perceptions” and “optimally targeting and enhancing social and behavioral interventions to achieve policy or community-level goals.”

Think about what that means.

Long-time subscribers may recall the fact that ASI deploys so-called “Sentinel Surveillance” and “Social Listening” — think of AI sentinels (i.e algorithms) sifting through the infosphere in search of public dissent and disinformation — with the explicit goal of directing “behavioral change” at all levels of society.

This technology is currently being deployed at scale, at the global level. It has been steadily refined for at least the last 15 years, and it actually has roots in Google’s research on “AI for Social Good,” which dates all the way back to 2007.

Think about THAT.

In many ways, as I ponder the path forward and what comes next, I cannot help but feel like the damage has already been done. The algorithms have already long been in place. The public has already been trained to trust the fact-checkers and experts charged with protecting their delicate, farcical delusions. Generations of youth have been steeped in social justice, radical environmentalism, and Marxist Critical Theory.

The enemies of freedom have long been forged.

Their resolve has been fortified and their appetite for destruction has been primed.

Now is the time, in their twisted minds, to unleash the revolution. With a rabid racist, rapist, convicted felon, and despicable capitalist in the White House, with White Supremacists, misogynists, and xenophobic MAGA bigots running amok, trampling and unwinding all their hard won progress, how could they not rise up?

Time will tell, but don’t underestimate their delusional rage.

I suspect all of this winning will come at a cost.

Indeed, refreshing the Tree of Liberty always does.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

As the world turns.

I’ve been thinking long and hard about the Black Hawk helicopter that was flown directly into passenger Flight 5342, killing a total of 67 over the Potomac near Reagan International Airport. As I said in the last report, this was clearly not an accident.

Also, as predicted, the mainstream talking points are that of miscommunication, understaffing, and incompetent DEI hires. I can understand the political angle of pushing this narrative—why let a good crisis go to waste, right?—but honestly, I believe this is all intentional misdirection, at least in my skeptical mind.

Now, on top of the terror over the Potomac, and along with the stealth fighter that fell out of the sky up in Alaska, we have another high-profile plane crash in Philadelphia. This plane was a medical flight transporting a pediatric patient and her mother.

They were Mexican nationals, and everyone on the flight died.

As expected, this has only poured fuel on the DEI fire. And, similar to the other two recent crashes, there are elements of the story that don’t really add up.

For example, footage of the plane crash shows that it was coming in hot, as if the plane was being flown at full throttle directly into the ground. Typically this does not happen if there has been a mechanical failure, which raises some serious questions.

Many people have commented that the footage looked more like a missile strike than a plane in distress, and videos of the crash site in daylight apparently show there was zero plane debris—except perhaps for some uncharred, staged props.

But, unfortunately, as with the Black Hawk being flown directly into the passenger jet and the $100 million dollar stealth fighter dropping like a rock out of the sky, we are not likely to ever get a satisfactory answer. We’ll never know what really happened.

Which, of course, opens the door to wild speculation—hence the long, hard, thoroughly thinking it through. Could all of these crashes somehow be related?

When I first heard about the Terror on the Potomac, I pondered the possibility of whom might have been on that flight, and whether or not shutting down Reagan International might have interfered with any of the proceedings on Capitol Hill, such as the confirmation hearings.

It turns out the pilot of the Black Hawk was a woke female pilot with Biden connections, who has since had her social media scrubbed by the powers that be, but never mind all of that.

Upon further reflection, I am more certain than ever that this was an act of terror, and I believe there are only two possible explanations for what happened:

• The pilot of the Black Hawk intentionally targeted and crashed into Flight 5342.

• The Black Hawk was hijacked and remotely flown directly into Flight 5342.

We’ll never know the answer, but either way it was not an accident, which begs the question: Why?

One theory that came to mind, was that this was a real-world demonstration of the Deep State’s superior ability to strike anyone, anywhere, for the purpose of instilling fear into the political class in general, and into President Trump in particular.

It’s as if to say: look we can hijack these AI-enabled military birds and use them to bring down a plane carrying high profile passengers in or out of the Capitol, anytime we want, and there’s not a damn thing you can do about it.

You’ve been warned.

Similarly, regarding the stealth fighter tumbling out of the sky like a poorly made paper airplane, it’s as if to say: look, I know you think you’ve got superior air power, but we’ve got weapons that can drop this world-class fighter like a rock, and again, there’s not a damn thing you can do about it.

In both of these instances, a reasonable explanation might be that a hostile adversary, like China or Russia, was flexing their capacity to strike at will. Alternately, and more likely in my mind, is the possibility that this was an inside job meant to demonstrate the Deep State’s capacity to retaliate against Donald Trump.

Again, we’ll never know.

That said, regarding the medical flight that hit the streets of Philadelphia like an incoming rocket, it is difficult to think there was any real value to either one of these hypothetical culprits. In my mind, what happened in PA was something different.

If it was a terror strike, there were many more high-profile targets available in Pennsylvania’s most populated city. So maybe it was just an accident, right?

But that still doesn’t provide a satisfactory explanation as to why the plane was pointed almost straight down and flying at full throttle—if it was a plane at all.

Grasping at potentials, it seems reasonable to think that if the pilot had had a heart attack (say from getting the clot shot), and then slumped forward onto the stick, it would produce the spectacular vertical crash as recorded. Of course, that still doesn’t explain the lack of debris, or the fact that it looked just like a missile.

Others are speculating that this crash/strike has something to do with Mexican cartels, but again, do you think we’ll ever get a straight answer?

Of course not.

Regardless, it’s certain to keep people busy guessing.

And maybe, just maybe, that’s the point.

Let’s zoom out.

What do we know for sure?

• We know that we don’t know what really happened.

• We know that Donald Trump is pissing a lot of people off.

• We know that our enemies may see now as the time to strike, before Trump fully gets up to speed and has all the pieces in place to really clean house.

We also know that, for the average citizen, whatever might happen in various locations around the country happens a long way from home, which means that we are reliant upon the news and social media to put together the pieces.

On that note, we also know that the algorithms are the gatekeepers of reality, and that Algorithmic Social Interventions are actively working to keep us all in the dark.

We know that highly advanced Artificial Intelligence is warping reality in real-time, and that the average person is really ill-equipped to discern this manipulation. And on top of all that, we know this issue is going to get much worse before it gets any better—if it ever does. This is the Trojan Horse in our current circumstance.

Right now, as the Brownstone Institute recently opined, everything is at stake.

Long time subscribers may recall prior discussion about the potential we are living in a “post-truth era.” These words come directly from the mouth of the global cabal, and though I adamantly disagree with the suggestion that truth no longer matters, I fully understand both the premise and the implications of such an assertion.

This issue was more fully explored in TR 298:

Obviously, objective truth does in fact exist, whether we are aware of that truth or not, and it is a hallmark of Fifth Generation Warfare to conceal and confuse this truth as much as possible. The result is to leave our heads spinning as we sift through the slew of stories that don’t add up. All the while, the cabal keeps marching on.

Fortunately, the Trump administration will continue to advance as well, as it makes a full-court press to Make America Great Again—but make no mistake, these two forces are on a collision course.

It’s the globalists versus the nationalists, and the showdown is going to be epic.

Perhaps it’s an awareness of how the global cabal operates that fuels my skepticism about all these plane crashes. There are very powerful forces in the world who will do anything to keep their power. But more than anything, these recent “tragedies” remind me of just how rare discernment actually is in the general population (present company excluded), and just how vulnerable we are to informational warfare.

As you know, the sinister “secret cabal” understands and exploits this fact daily.

“Some even believe we are part of a secret cabalworking against the best interests of the United States… If that's the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”—David Rockefeller

The truth is, there are forces on earth that are greater than Donald Trump. Though he is undeniably a formidable force in and of himself, and though he has built an all-star team of American badasses, we’d be foolish to lose sight of just how powerful the enemy actually is. With that in mind, I think it’s possible that this recent spate of plane crashes is intended to remind people in high places of exactly that.

To be fair, it could be that these incidents were all coincidences, that they each have a reasonable explanation, and that DEI and understaffing may or may not have had something to do with it. Either way, focusing on these events does nothing to advance the cause of liberty, nor does it do anything to interrupt the slow roll of insanity.

This just happens to be what people are talking about right now—or at least what they were talking about last week—but it certainly won’t be what people are talking about this time next week, two weeks from now, and so on.

The point that I’m driving at, is that by gripping our attention with these sensational stories, and threading one sensational story into the next, our ability to remain focused on practical and tactical strategies is made all but obsolete.

As the Monday morning news cycle kicks off, we hear of Mexican nationals shutting down traffic by rioting in San Diego, Salem, and Seattle; we see Musk’s Department of Government Efficiency dropping the hammer on USAID, even as Zelensky claims he has no idea where 60% of the $177 billion in aid from the United States actually went; there are rumors that the “Bird Flu Crisis” has entered a new stage; we learn that hedge fund billionaires are actively betting on an economic collapse; we find Mitch ‘The Glitch’ McConnell claiming that Trump’s tariffs are going to hurt the American people, and of course, the DC establishment doing everything they can to thwart the will of the people. It is simply impossible to hold the entire spectacle in mind.

And that’s the point.

We can know for certain that under the cover of this relentless deluge, the sorcerers of central control are working their dark magic—let there be no doubt about that.

Sensational national headlines are a mere distraction from the greater threats that we face. Understanding that we are in a global war for total control, the future of humanity hangs on our ability to stay sane and remain focused on what we can actually do to resist the psychological and regulatory capture, at the local level.

Talk to people. Share the bigger perspective. Every community is a battlefront in this epic war for hearts and minds. Now is the time to play offense. If you’re not already, get involved. Enjoy the spectacle, but embrace the work that needs to be done.

Our children and grand children’s future depends on it.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

What’s next?

This morning we awake to in-your-face, shock-and awe headlines about a major tragedy in the DC metro area. An Army Black Hawk helicopter flew directly into American Flight 5342, with 64 people on board, including several high profile figure skaters who were flying back from the National Championships in Wichita.

Preliminary reports indicate there were no survivors.

My heart goes out to everyone touched or tangled up in this tragedy, especially those who lost loved ones. It is a stark reminder that bad things happen every single day, and for that reason, if no other, we all should be grateful for the lives we live.

That said, when I see the national media in lockstep on a major issue, I cannot help but think “false flag” — and it turns out there are plenty of facts to support this speculation, but first, consider the optics of what is impacting the public psyche:

NOTE: Fox News and CNN are both part of the insidious Trusted News Initiative.

On the one hand, it is understandable that these major media outlets would be covering a national tragedy. On the other, it is how they are covering the tragedy that I would like to draw your attention to.

CNN says, “all aboard feared dead after jet and helicopter midair collision.”

Words matter. Let’s break it down: first there is the emotionally gripping “all feared dead,” which instantaneously plays tricks on the mind, evokes a massive wave of sympathy, and essentially short circuits critical thinking.

Then comes the misleading suggestion that this was a “jet and helicopter midair collision.” How unfortunate that a jet and helicopter had a collision, right? Especially when everyone on board died, this is a major tragedy.

But note the order of words, “jet and helicopter,” and consider the omission of the highly relevant fact that the helicopter, an advanced military helicopter with an unimaginable degree of maneuverability, flew directly at, and into, a passenger plane that was coming in for a landing at Reagan International Airport.

There is exactly no chance that this happened by accident.

This was 100% a calculated trajectory.

And yet, all over the news, we hear of how “a jet collided with a helicopter.”

THINK ABOUT IT.

As you can see from the front page of The Seattle Times, even local newspapers are using the same language, that everyone is feared dead because an American Airlines jet “collided” with an Army helicopter—clearly that’s the narrative.

Now, within less than 12 hours of the event, Fox News is already running headlines about the “investigation,” which is preemptively going to focus on this tragedy as if it was a great, big, terrible, “misunderstanding” between the aircraft.

This is a perfect example of master propagandists working hard to push all the buttons they need to push in order to heighten suggestibility and program the public psyche. In the clip above, for example, we have “hear the first words,” which is a trick of Neurolinguistic Programming (NLP), hacking into the primal sensitivities of “auditory communicators,” whom comprise some 20% of the population.

Another 20% of the population is hard-wired to process information kinesthetically—aka “kinesthetic communicators”—and these individuals are immediately impacted by the words “3 soldiers,” as their minds can easily envision and embody the mental archetype of a soldier. Thus, they empathize, and therefore sympathize, with the three soldiers going down on a Black Hawk helicopter.

Again, the mind is sucked into story, without triggering logic or skepticism.

As for the rest of the population, the 60% who are wired to primarily process information in a visual way, all the shock-and-awe headline and wreckage captures their attention almost perfectly. Indeed, it’s designed to do so.

This is how sophisticated propaganda works.

That said, let’s zoom out, because there are facts that are not being conveyed in this highly scripted communication. Consider this:

So, apparently the Deep State can remotely control Black Hawk helicopters from 300 miles away, and this is a cool new technology they just so happened to have proudly displayed, in DC, just weeks before the election. Fascinating.

But wait, it gets even better:

“Using a tablet connected via a data link to the helicopter 300 miles away in Bridgeport, Connecticut, Lockheed Martin Rotary and Mission Systems President Stephanie Hill controlled the UH-60. While safety pilots were present inside the cockpit as per FAA regulations, the helicopter autonomously performed take off and hover, before flying a circuit and landing again without pilot input.”

This is all part of the new MATRIX technology developed by DARPA. Of course, that’s the same DARPA that spent a bundle to develop Military Grade Memes, for those keeping track. But surely they would never use any of these high-speed technologies to advance the globalist agenda for total control, right?

Here are a few more articles on the MATRIX:

• Lockheed Martin MATRIX™ Technology Aircraft Autonomy System

• DARPA Awards $6M Contract to Equip U.S. Army Black Hawk with Advanced Autonomy

• DARPA Installs MATRIX on UH-60MX Black Hawk

• DARPA to test autonomous flight capability on Army’s Black Hawk helicopter in 2025

Interestingly enough, there was another military plane that went down in Alaska this week. Evidently, an F-35 stealth fighter jet had an “inflight malfunction” during the landing phase of the flight at Eielson Air Force Base. The pilot safely ejected, but the $109 million-dollar bird dropped out of the sky like a rock.

The footage is disturbing, and unfortunately, it wasn’t the only one.

It turns out the F-35 has also recently been equipped with AI capabilities, similar to the recently equipped F-16s. However, with the F-35, the goal was ultimately to allow the plane to simultaneously control a swarm of drones in order to achieve “integrated air dominance.”

According to military experts, AI-equipped, unmanned fighter jets are the way of the future—and at this point, they believe the U.S. still has air dominance:

“…military operators say no other country in the world has an AI jet like it, where the software first learns on millions of data points in a simulator, then tests its conclusions during actual flights. That real-world performance data is then put back into the simulator where the AI then processes it to learn more.

China has AI, but there’s no indication it has found a way to run tests outside a simulator.”

China has AI, obviously, but they must be way behind, right? Right.

It’s quite the coincidence that just yesterday I was discussing how China’s game-changing DeepSeek AI is a major threat to everyday Americans—not because of autonomous fighter jets, mind you, but because of the mental manipulation that is being perpetrated on the unsuspecting masses, using weaponized AI, similar to DARPA’s military grade memes.

In reality, we are all sitting ducks for such powerful technologies.

Personally, I’m a lot more concerned about the memetic warfare, than the military planes being hacked, dropped like a rock, or flown into passenger planes.

In this vein, briefly revisiting some information unearthed in TR 405, I’d like to emphasize the need to prioritize the threat of memetics in public conversation:

…just to be clear, I’m not out on a limb here. Even the academics think that we should be taking memetics seriously:

I also want to point out that the science of “memetic engineering” has such powerful implications, the U.S. military has been studying and deploying memetics as a weapon of war.

I won’t dive deep now, but for further study, see the following:

• Institute for Defense Analyses: Memetics Overview & Baseline Models

• Military Intelligence Professional Bulletin: Memetic Warfare - The Future of War

• USMC School of Advanced Warfighting: Memetics in US Military Operations

*It would be wise to keep in mind that weaponized AI is now deploying these tactics.*

The point is this: for all the talk of the military using Artificial Intelligence to fly fighter jets that can simultaneously control a pack of drones—which is truly terrifying and equally remarkable if you let it sink in—the real “Future of War” is in fact mental in nature. Memetic warfare needs to come front and center in public conversation.

Just like this morning’s sensational headlines have immediately laid grip to the public’s attention, thereby obfuscating more significant events that we will likely never know about, the battle we find ourselves in now is one of perception.

Though it appears that this game of “us versus them” is a contest between competing militaries on the global stage (of which there is an element), the real “us versus them” is a contest between wide-awake citizens and the “secret” global cabal.

It’s a battle for the control of humanity, and it’s playing out in each of our minds right this very moment. Can they control what we think about? Can they control how we feel? Can they control what we focus on and how we behave?

Why yes, yes they can—but only if we let them, or if we remain unaware of their cunning manipulation.

My skeptical mind wants to connect the dots between the Black Hawk being intentionally crashed into a passenger plane with high-profile passengers (most of whom we have not heard about, and probably never will), and the shutting down of DC’s busiest airport. What impact might these flight interruptions have on the confirmation hearings that are taking place this week, for example?

We are assured that the confirmation hearings for RFK, Tulsi Gabbard, and Kash Patel continue as scheduled, but that does not preclude other complications that may be secondary to the terror attack at Reagan International Airport.

And yes, I’m calling it a terror attack, because hey, let’s call a spade a spade, right?

According to award-winning investigative journalist Thomas Paine, the Black Hawk took off near the CIA headquarters and then accelerated and targeted Flight 5342:

As Flight 5342 was descending to land, the helicopter turned directly at the plane, rose in elevation, and accelerated to create a deadly collision over the Potomac.

Not an accident.

Sadly, as Paine notes, it’s definitely not the first time the Deep State has brought down a passenger plane, and when all is said and done, it probably won’t be the last.

Keep that in mind when you encounter the memes out there today—the memetics, the infectious ideas—like the suggestions that this catastrophe was somehow caused by “miscommunication,” or worse yet, by incompetent DEI hires. Beware the narratives that are being parroted by the talking heads, even conservative pundits.

Memetic warfare is a battle of perception.

Be a warrior. Stand your ground, speak the truth, and liberate your friends.

This situation is clearly not what it seems!

RESIST WE MUST!!

Please share:

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s like the wild, wild West.

This week, while I’ve been working on an exciting new project, I haven’t had an adequate amount of time to crank out a report. That said, I have been keeping tabs on the news, and, amidst all the hoopla and smackdown, there has been a very interesting development—namely, the CCP announcing an earthshaking new AI, DeepSeek.

News of this new high-speed, low-cost, LLM (Large Language Model) artificial intelligence rocked the stock markets on Monday, with headlines like these:

• Chinese startup DeepSeek rocks the AI industry

• China AI hopeful DeepSeek rocks Wall Street's magnificent seven

• China's DeepSeek rocks Wall Street with cost-efficient AI model

• Markets Get Deep-Sixed By DeepSeek

• What is DeepSeek, the Chinese AI company upending the stock market?

China “rocks” the markets, eh? Hmmm…

Of course, there were untold millions of Americans who rapidly, and dutifully, downloaded the “open source” DeepSeek — i.e. free to the public with allegedly transparent coding, so everyone can see how it works — for themselves.

Tech hounds were lauding the fact that a small Chinese startup had just upended the AI industry, that they’d made all their code public, and they were leading the way in liberating the masses from the grip of big tech. Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella says that DeepSeek’s open-source AI is “super impressive” and there are inumberable stories about how this development is a wakeup call for the warmongering imperialistic U.S. government and their greedy capitalist Big Tech friends.

At least that’s the story.

Once again, it appears China is acting as a “role model” for the world.

Fascinating.

Pushing the narrative even further, there were others who were pointing out the fact that U.S. semiconductor sanctions—which were ostensibly intended to slow the Chinese progress on artificial intelligence—may have actually backfired:

How the US may have unintentionally helped create an AI monster in China

Do you see it?

Tarriffs and sanctions are unfair, but fortunately, in the end, the poor, victimized Chinese, who were clearly being bullied and exploited by the mean ‘ol Americans, we’re able to overcome the adversity, make the U.S. look bad, knock the big dogs off the top, and achieve an “impressive” underdog victory.

It’s kinda like a movie script, right?

Donald Trump had been in office for exactly a week, he was sucking up all the air in the room, and then all of the sudden, wham, the Chinese upend the apple cart—and the Leftist media is pointing out it’s probably all his fault, per CNN:

With that stage set, I’d like to point out three immediate observations:

• DeepSeek created a sensational storyline that took attention away from Trump, if only for a moment, and calls into question his use of sanctions and tarriffs.

• DeepSeek created chaos in the markets, which in turn created “panic” in certain sectors, causing the world’s richest to lose an astounding $108 billion in a day.

• DeepSeek created a high profile “national security concern” that perfectly justifies our own Deep State dumping billions into the MIC coffers.

It’s just a little too perfect.

On top of that, it seems just a little too obvious. It checks all the boxes and has all the hallmarks of a well-timed media hit job, which in the mind of this skeptical peasant, implies the global cabal is behind the curtains pulling the levers. And while all of this is happening, while I’ve been immersed in the exciting new project, the back of my mind is screaming at me that something doesn’t add up.

It only took a couple of days before the U.S. Navy banned the use of DeepSeek “in any capacity” over security concerns—and it took less time than that for inquisitive techies to realize the DeepSeek is really just an extension of the CCP:

• DeepSeek AI App Demonstrates Pro-CCP Bias, Influence

Duh. That, too, seems like it would be painfully obvious to anyone who wasn’t drinking the globalists’ Kool-Aid. That said, let us never forget the words of the infamous master of wit, George Carlin:

“Think of how stupid the average person is, and realize half them are stupider than that.”

The point that I’m getting at, is not only how easily the public is duped, but also how easy it is for the Chinese Communist Party to exploit the American people, compelling millions upon millions of them to download mentally manipulative spyware (like Tik Tok), this time DeepSeek, under the guise of a free gimmie that’s being hailed as if it’s for the greater good.

Right.

The result here, is that the Chinese now have far greater access to the inner workings of the American mind, they’re sucking up massive amounts of data that is being analyzed by what some are claiming is the most powerful Language Learning Model in the world (which I highly doubt is true), and nobody really knows their end game.

No doubt it’s for the greater good, something like selling communism to the unsuspecting peasants who’ve already be preconditioned to believe the government is really here to help, to be a protector and provider for the people. It’s really not that hard to see how advanced artificial intelligence could talk the average idiot into accepting pretty much any narrative the programmers chose, is it?

“People are stupid.”

BUT HERE’S THE THING:

What’s the solution to this sudden rise of Chinese AI?

Is it for the U.S. government to fund the development of an even more powerful AI?

And what of the rest of the world and their development of AI?

It only makes sense, since people are already talking about it, that these new forms of artificial intelligence will be used to rapidly increase the rate of new developments. Programmers can now have the AI whip out advanced computer language coding in a matter of seconds, and then they just get to play around with the so-called “paramaters” of the output—as in, “thou shalt not question the narrative.”

Regardless of which entity is creating the code, there is a predictable firewall that gets coded in, such that the AI cannot question or harm it’s creator. Moreover, the implicit biases of the coders (or their bosses) inevitably worms its way into the program. By extension, the artificial intelligence then worms these biases into the public mind.

And, as I’ve said many times before, that is the real threat of weaponized AI.

If we conceive of the battle for planetary dominance as a battle for the hearts and minds of humanity, it is easy to see there is no greater weapon than having advance artificial intelligence reprogramming the public pysche on a planetary scale.

Not only is this their end game, this is precisely what is already happening.

For those who may need a primer, or a refresher, you’ll find the facts here:

• TR 216 - The Threat of AI

• TR 225 - Has AI Been Weaponized?

• TR 226 - The Greatest Threat of All

• TR 246 - Peacefully Enslaved By Machines?

• TR 413 - What Could Possibly Go Wrong?

• TR 442 - How Weaponized AI Hurts Us All

• TR 484 - The Accelerating Threat of AI

Perhaps the silver lining in the DeepSeek scenario, is that it might shine some light on the threat of weaponized AI, if only in a very limited and narrow sense. The goverment will squawk about how this is a threat to national security, when in reality, it is an existential threat to the future of humanity—regardless of which government is in control of the technology.

When the government inevitably says, “We need more money to make more powerful AI, so we can be even more helpful than ever before,” please don’t trust them.

While it’s easy to visualize a Terminator lEike scenario, wherein super intelligent machines are merged into super powerful robots, which then ultimately turn on humanity (to save the planet from human destruction, of course); I believe that the real threat lies in the subtle but steady transformation of human consciousness that is being facilitated by these technologies, which is process already underway.

While the masses are entertained by the political theater, or eating their popcorn, watching Netflix, or cruising social media, the powers that be are using advanced Fifth Generation Warfare to neurologically rewire the human psyche on a planetary scale. FACT. It’s mind boggling to think about, but it’s happening.

Thus, as it slowly comes to light the that this incredible new DeepSeek technology is little more than a tool of totalitarian control, even as David Sacks, Trump’s AI and crypto czar, claims all the Chinese have really done is just rip off Chat GPT, stay keen to the fact that there is always more going on than meets the eye.

It is no coincidence that last week in Davos the global elites declared that the threat of AI may even be greater than the fabricated threat of climate change.

• The Real Threat Of AI: WEF Global Risks Report 2025

• Davos 2025: AI, Cyberattacks, and the Executive Imperative for Resilience

• Cyber Insights 2025: Artificial Intelligence - SecurityWeek

• Citing 'Shadow of Evil,' Vatican Warns About the Risks of A.I.

• Shadow AI, Cybersecurity, and Emerging Threats: Davos 2025

Now, with Trump at the helm of American initiatives, the climate crisis narrative may finally be dismantled. Countries around the world will follow his lead.

That means that the global cabal has to pivot.

Artificial intelligence is clearly what comes next.

The problem is, they’ve already been at it for decades, and most people remain none the wiser to the ways these technologies are already being used against us.

Behind their extensive Public-Private partnerships and inumerable NGOs lies an army of global socialists who are hellbent on homogenizing the whole of humanity. They seek to enslave the masses in their own minds, and now, they clearly have the technology to do so.

It’s only a matter of time. As I’ve said many times before, beware:

“The commies are taking over the world!”

…and right now, they’re using DeepSeek to do it.

Of course, that’s only part of their ploy, so stay wise my friends, and remember:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Resolved.

I awoke this morning thanking God that we are not a Christian Nation. I’d like to say that I’m joking, but I’m not. That said, having immersed myself in the Founder’s intent for the last couple of reports, I wholeheartedly agree with George Washington and Thomas Jefferson — I lament the lack of religious and moral instruction that has so terribly degraded American society over the last several decades. Please do not misunderstand my heart.

And yet, like these great pillars of the American Spirit, I am equally certain that the state should have no authority to intrude into our spiritual lives, nor should the state have any role in imposing religious beliefs upon public life. State promoted religion is absolutely antithetical to a free society, which is why I believe the nation was not founded as a Christian nation, as bore out by the founding documents.

If you are new to the audience, or you find yourself reflexively rejecting this conclusion, please, I humbly ask, review the following reports to better understand where I’m coming from, and why this conversation is so very important:

To be very clear, I am not attacking Christianity, or any other religion, or even a lack of religion, and I am not suggesting that religion has no place in a free and prosperous society. I am making an important distinction, as did our forefathers, with laser focus and a unifying intent, between our religious and political missions.

Thus, we find a fork in the road.

There is a very real need to heal American society by virtue of religious and moral instruction. Here we need spiritual leaders to step up, and make relevant to modern society, the moral lessons endowed by the various religious traditions.

From a Christian perspective, evangelicals need to evangelize. Spread the good news. Share the story of Christ and testify to the power of Jesus in your life. Treat every interaction as a ministry, as an opportunity to plant seeds. Pray with people.

You would be amazed at how powerful praying with people can be.

That said, do not despair when you encounter nonbelievers. Do not be pushy. Do not be stuffy. Do not be prudish, pretentious, or Holier Than Thou. Remember, your role as a Christian is not to forcefully convince people to adopt your beliefs, but instead, to be the salt of the earth. Minister thoughtfully, with kindness and compassion.

Plant your seeds wisely, per the words of Jesus:

“A farmer went out to sow his seed. As he was scattering the seed, some fell along the path, and the birds came and ate it up.Some fell on rocky places, where it did not have much soil. It sprang up quickly, because the soil was shallow.But when the sun came up, the plants were scorched, and they withered because they had no root. Other seed fell among thorns, which grew up and choked the plants. Still other seed fell on good soil, where it produced a crop—a hundred, sixty or thirty times what was sown. Whoever has ears, let them hear.”

Understand that many people may not be ready to receive the message—and that many others will never accept the message, because, like Thomas Jefferson, they reject the Biblical stories of Creation and Jesus Christ as a path to Salvation.

And that’s okay.

If you think about it, it has to be okay in order for a free society to function.

That’s the point that I’ve been trying to make. Pray about it.

From a more philosophical perspective, those of “peculiar mind” whom seek and are successfully able to deduce morality from Natural Law—sans the religious context—should likewise commit themselves also to sharing the good news.

In this context, the good news is that you do not have to go to church to be a good person. In fact, the good news is, you do not have to adopt religion to believe in God. But, whether you believe in God in the grandest sense, or not, you do have a moral obligation to yourself, your family, your community, and your country.

Within this framework, with both believers and nonbelievers sharing a positive and uplifting message, we find traction for the spiritual edification of society. That is, we find a practical approach to imparting meaningful moral lessons to the masses, regardless of their religious persuasion.

At the center of both approaches, indeed, the very root of morality itself, is the judicious discernment between right and wrong. There is good, there is evil, and all it takes for evil to prevail, is for the good of humanity to be emotionally divided by mental (religious) constructs and seduced into apathy.

Does this not sum up the current state of society?

Evil has been on the march since the dawn of time, but in recent memory, it appears to have been gaining momentum and amassing great power. Evil seeks power and control. Evil seeks to harm others for sadistic pleasure or selfish gain.

One need not invoke Satan to make this observation, but I do believe the in-your-face rise of Satanism in America is a testament to just how bold evil has become.

Evil is cunning. Evil is seductive. Evil is poison.

Evil is the force that seeks to rob you of your birthrights as a human being.

“We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness.” —The Declaration of Independence

Life, Liberty, and the pursuit of Happiness.

In my mind, this is one of the most powerful phrases ever written. Contained within these words is the wisdom of the ages, distilled into common language.

There is great depth in each word. Consider the right to life, for example.

While Christians in the modern era will undoubtedly affix this truth to opposing abortion and fighting for the unborn, it should go without saying that these words were not penned for that explicit purpose.

This affirmation to the right to life would be better understood through the lens of Natural Law, as it was intended. You, as a living, breathing human being, have an inalienable right to life—to remain living, and to live accordingly.

The implication is that no one, and especially not those who organize and refer to themselves as “the government”—i.e. the ruling class—has the right to interrupt or end your life, without due process (that’s the tricky part).

Some people deserve to die. Let us not forget:

“To everything there is a season… a time to be born and a time to die, a time to plant and a time to uproot, a time to kill and a time to heal…” —Ecclesiastes 3

One might wonder if God saw fit a time to kill the unborn, say to save the mother’s life or for some other heavenly enigmatic reason, but alas, that is beyond this report.

Nevertheless, the right to life exists, empirically, in Nature, regardless. The right to life is hardwired into humanity and it manifests as an irrepressible instinct to survive—that’s what makes it inalienable, just like the right to liberty.

Just as surely as you have an instinctual urge to survive, giving rise to your irrevokable right to life and self-defense, you also have innate qualities that make you an infinitely unique individual. You instinctively differentiate yourself from others, because you are not the same as any other person on the planet.

You own your personal preferences and proclivities, and as such, you cannot help but be your own unique self. Your unique individuality will express itself, again instinctively, whether you are thinking about it, or trying to, or not.

This is another inseparable aspect of human nature, and therefore, Natural Law.

The beauty of America as founded, is that our government was meant to be restrained by the Constitution, so that no ruling class could impinge upon your personal expression, or violate your individual liberty, again without due cause or process.

Here, it seems appropriate to quickly address the human tendency for hedonistic self-indulgence, which at once highlights the dark side of human nature and the perceived dangers of unfettered freedom, while alluding to the need for moral instruction.

Does the right to individual liberty, and by extension personal happiness, imply that your neighbor has the right to take what is yours and make it there own? Are they free to do so, if it makes them happy? Of course not.

And yet, if you think about it, they are in fact free to do just that.

Criminals prove this point each and every day, and this is just a petty matter. Think of murder, rape, child abuse, and other heinous crimes, and realize that the perpetrators of this evil are, in fact, free to act upon their evil impulse. That is, there is no “law” that can actually stop them from acting upon this impulse. This is free will.

Which is why there is a time to kill, mind you.

But the bigger point here, is that I believe this is what John Adams was getting at when he declared the Constitution was made only for a moral and religious people.

“Our Constitution was made only for a moral and religious people. It is wholly inadequate to the government of any other.”—John Adams

The Founder’s knew that establishing a free society, without moral restraint, would prove disastrous. Given the difficulty in developing moral restraint without religious grounding, at least for the majority of people, this would be a self-evident problem.

It’s not rocket science. I believe this is why George Washington, after confirming that morality could in theory be maintained without religion (by “peculiar” minds), he ultimately concluded that “reason and experience both forbid us to expect that National morality can prevail in exclusion of religious principle.”

But here’s the twist:

Can you imagine if the government tried to force everyone to go to church on Sunday?

Can you imagine if the government tried to force everyone to accept Jesus Christ?

Can you imagine if the government tried to force everyone to read the Bible?

How is this any different than the government trying to force people to embrace Marxism, accept radical environmentalism, or read the New York Times?

There is no difference.

Both instances conceal an evil impulse behind the veil of good intent.

The evil impulse is that of trying to control the personal convictions and behavior of other people, via the brute force of government mandates. Put differently, it is the impulse to suffocate the diversity of individual expression and force conformity.

Both seek control of the human spirit.

And both God and our Founding Fathers knew better.

May we each take this wisdom to heart, roll up our sleeves, and work together to unite our nation in the spirit of freedom. Let’s plant the seeds of Liberty, rather than sowing seeds of division, and set to the task of healing our great nation, with humble hearts, one meaningful conversation at a time.

P.S. I’ll get back to crushing the commie cabal next week… until then:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

The reckoning has begun.

On Monday, January 20, 2025, Donald J. Trump was sworn in as the 47th President of the United States. It was a historic day, filled with historic speeches, historic promises, and historic action. Everything about it was just so… historic.

In less than 24 hours, Trump pardoned over 1,500 J6 prisoners, commuted the sentences of Stewart Rhodes (Oath Keepers founder), Enrique Tarrio (Proud Boys leader), and others. He also revoked the security clearance of the 51 “intelligence officials” who blatantly lied to the public, peddling Hunter Biden’s laptop as Russian disinformation during the rigged 2020 election.

On his first day in the Oval Office, Trump also signed executive orders withdrawing the U.S. from the World Health Organization, pulled us out of the Paris Climate Accord, and declared a National Energy Emergency, in order to allow American companies to “drill baby, drill.” On top of this, he declared an emergency over the invasion at our southern border, formally recognized that there are only two genders, revoked EV mandates, gutted DEI, rescinded 78 Executive Orders signed by Biden, and reinstated Schedule F, making it easier to shitcan worthless federal employees.

Oh, and he renamed the “Gulf of Mexico” to the Gulf of America.

That’s not the full list—but it’s not a bad start, right?

As David Strom pointed out, perhaps Trump’s greatest accomplishment with all these schock-and-awe executive orders, is that he has shifted the Overton Window.

Americans cannot help but notice the fact that major changes are happening fast, or the fact that most Americans are absolutely thrilled by these much needed changes.

Trump is delivering on his promises. For all the commentary out there, I think The Epoch Times has a great overview of the myriad policies that have been set in motion. As far as summing up the momentous occasion in a single sentence, I agree with Musk’s comment that Trump’s victory marks a “fork in the road of human civilization.”

And of course, let’s not overlook the hand of Providence:

“I was saved by God to make America Great Again.”—Donald J. Trump, Inaugural Speech

Whether you believe that statement is true, or not, one cannot blame Donald Trump for believing this way. His life was spared by a millimeter. He overcame unimaginable obstacles and insurmountable odds to ascend again to the Oval Office, and he carries the hopes and dreams of millions of Americans who have been praying for this day.

So much has happened so fast, it all still feels surreal.

For what it’s worth, I actually received an invitation to attend the Inauguration Ceremony, the Inaugural Parade, and the Liberty Ball, but ultimately declined.

It would have been a memorable experience, no doubt, but there was something in me that hesitated—I was still wary of the “hung election and civil war” that had been predicted. I was skeptical that this would be a smooth transition of power. I was on high alert for Leftist agitation, assassination attempts, Antifa rioting, etc.

In short, I didn’t want to risk getting caught up in chaos three-thousand miles away from home, and I knew that nobody was going to miss me. I’m just a peasant.

That said, as the Trump administration abruptly yanks our country back on track, I can’t help but reflect on the many terrible things that did not come to pass over the last year or so. None of the ominous predictions seemed to materialize. No hung election. No civil war. No rioting in the streets. No deep state assassination. No jihadi terror cells unleashing coordinated attacks. No crippling cyberattacks on the grid.

No drone strikes. No nuclear war. No World War III.

Reflecting on this fact, it occurs to me that the vast majority of Americans were never even aware of these threats. They never worried. They never prepared. If any of the worst case scenarios had come to pass, the majority of people would have been caught woefully off guard and thrust into a catastrophic world of hurt.

But that didn’t happen, so let’s get back to reality.

Let’s zoom out.

Fearmongering is a tried and true tactic of psychological warfare, as I am sure you are aware. Not only that, fear inducing headlines have a way of laying grip on the psyche, making them a formidable marketing strategy. It’s clickbait, pure and simple.

It’s not that none of these bad things will ever happen, it’s not that there is no need to be prepared, it’s just that while those of us who are aware of threats are getting prepared, the world keeps turning, and there are all sorts of other bad things that actually are happening, all around the world as we speak.

Of course, I’m not just talking about the human tragedies that transpire on the daily without so much as a murmur among the masses. Murder, rape, arson, child trafficking, and all manner of evils are an embedded aspect of humanity. We can no more expunge these evils from the course of history than we can force everyone, everywhere, to jump on the Trump train and work to Make America Great Again.

These are simple, immutable facts that we must take into account moving forward.

There are evil people doing evil things, and we can’t necessarily stop that from happening. We can, however, prioritize our resistance against this ever-present evil, by calling it out and working together as communities to take out the trash, so to speak. On this note, Trump’s expansion of the federal death penalty may serve as a deterrent to some, but I believe the real work lies in rehabilitating society.

Why are there so many sick and deranged people? Why are so many people so willing to commit heinous crimes against their neighbors? Why are so many people willing to release these criminals back out on the streets, to prey upon more innocent victims?

A strong case can be made that this is all a direct result of the moral degradation of American society. As more and more people have fallen away from religion and faith, forsaking the Golden Rule and mocking Christian principles, it only makes sense that greater degrees of evil would follow.

Indeed, we were warned long ago:

“Our Constitution was made only for a moral and religious people. It is wholly inadequate to the government of any other.”—John Adams, Founding Father

Tell me then, does this statement imply that we are to be a Christian nation? Are we to infer that our Founding Fathers meant for us to adhere to Judeo-Christian principles, that as Americans we are meant to promulgate religious teachings?

The answer for many people, perhaps a majority, is a firm yes.

What’s interesting about that fact, is that Republicans and Democrats alike flock to church for their weekly dose of moral instruction, which is absolutely a good thing. It’s fascinating that people who hold diametrically opposed political views still finding meaning, value, and moral grounding in their faith and fellowship.

Setting aside the complexity of those mental gymnastics, I want to return to the question: does the fact that both Democrats and Republicans both regularly attend church mean that we are a Christian nation?

Again, I am fully aware that the answer for most in the audience is a hard affirmative—yes, we are a Christian nation—but, as I’ve been digging at the last couple of reports, I believe there is another perspective that we, as a nation, would be wise to consider. Moreover, I believe that it is imperative that we, as individuals, communities, and a nation at large, revisit the founding documents to ascertain whether or not we were founded as, and intended to be, a Christian nation.

As previously articulated, I believe failure to do so would be a perilous mistake, because I believe that religion is being used as a wedge to divide our country. Thus, in order to maintain momentum and stand against the evils of our time, it is critical that we set aside religious bickering and unite in the spirit of freedom.

We cannot ostracize those with different beliefs.

With that stage set, wading deeper into the minds of the men who so brilliantly fabricated the Declaration of Independence and the Constitution of the United States—both documents which rather conspicuously lack any Christian reference—I’d like to pull into the conversation the prescient words of George Washington.

In his farewell address as the first President, he says this:

“Of all the dispositions and habits which lead to political prosperity, Religion and morality are indispensable supports. In vain would that man claim the tribute of Patriotism, who should labor to subvert these great Pillars of human happiness, these firmest props of the duties of Men and citizens. …And let us with caution indulge the supposition, that morality can be maintained without religion. Whatever may be conceded to the influence of refined education on minds of peculiar structure, reason and experience both forbid us to expect that National morality can prevail in exclusion of religious principle.”

The man was a genius, was he not?

Washington echos Adams by emphatically stating religion and morality are “indispensable supports” to political prosperity. To be clear, that’s not the same thing as claiming we are or we are meant to be a Christian nation, but it does drive straight to logic that without religious and moral mooring, society quickly unravels.

Why is that?

Here I think we find an indirect insight.

Washington points to religion and morality as pillars of human happiness.

When someone is unhappy, they are not on their best behavior. They might be angry, jealous, or vengeful, for example. They are less likely to care about others, let alone be compelled to actively participate in civic affairs for the betterment of the community.

This resonates deeply. For many years my personal motto has been “happy people make the world a better place,” and there is no denying that an uplifting fellowship and inspiring message goes a long way toward planting and watering the seeds of personal happiness. Hence, the reason that so many people on the Left and Right still attend church, even though religious observance in general is still in decline.

That said, given the growing percentage of Americans who claim no religious affiliation (over 20%), I think George Washington’s tacit acknowledgement that “morality can be maintained without religion” deserves a closer look.

“…let us with caution indulge the supposition, that morality can be maintained without religion. Whatever may be conceded to the influence of refined education on minds of peculiar structure, reason and experience both forbid us to expect that National morality can prevail in exclusion of religious principle.”

Here I believe he is speaking to his fellow theistic and atheistic compatriots, referring to “minds of peculiar structure.” Such peculiar minds may indulge the supposition that morality can be maintained without religion, and may even be able to vigorously deduce this fact from natural law, BUT, “reason and experience” forbid the conclusion or expectation that a national morality can prevail without religious principles.

Put differently, yes, morality can exist without religion—but no, we will not have a morally grounded Republic without religious principles. Why?

What’s he getting at here?

I speculate that the underlying realization is that most people need moral instruction. That is, most people are not of peculiar mind, meaning that most people are not going to lounge around contemplating the finer points of moral philosophy. In other words, most people are not, like Thomas Jefferson, going to rewrite the Bible in order to extract moral principles from the stories contained therein.

Instead, most people will understandably seek wisdom and council from spiritual leaders (the clergy, pastors, etc.), because most people are perpetually looking for answers, precisely because most people are not sure what to believe.

This is human nature. As humans, we all have questions, and we all share a need to make sense of what’s happening in our lives. This is a timeless truth.

With that in mind, many Americans today would probably be shocked to realize that Thomas Jefferson, one of the most beloved Founding Fathers, was quite unequivocally not a Christian. Per his own correspondence, historians note:

“Jefferson rejected the notion of the Trinity and Jesus’ divinity. He rejected Biblical miracles, the resurrection, the atonement, and original sin (believing that God could not fault or condemn all humanity for the sins of others, a gross injustice).”

So tell me: would Thomas Jefferson claim that America is a Christian nation?

More importantly, would Thomas Jefferson, with his explicitly un-Christian beliefs, be welcome in your circle of patriotic friends? Would he be welcome in your church? Would you be willing to sit down and hear him out on his “abiding commitment” to the separation of church of state?

Or would you reflexively reject this man, because his beliefs were so different?

No one in their right mind would question Thomas Jefferson’s love of our country.

He is, in my mind, the quintessential American. He fiercely advocated for uniting our nation on the principles of Nature and Nature’s God, without the religious debate.

As we celebrate the historic nature of Donald Trump’s victory, as we work diligently to get our country back on track, as we strive to reinstitute the constitutional principles that made America the greatest nation on earth, I again, unabashedly, assert the need to refrain from confusing our religious and political missions.

Our national reconciliation is not to any given religion, but instead, to the shared values, enshrined in our founding documents, that ultimately set us free.

As for the religious division… RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s begin.

“In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God.”—John 1:1

In yesterday’s report, TR 657 - Shining Light on Spiritual Division to Defeat Political Tyranny, I stated that America is not a Christian nation, pointing to the pluralistic beliefs held by many Americans who, though they may not share in the Christian faith, absolutely love our country, cherish our constitution, and are on the front lines fighting for life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness in the midst of political chaos.

My point was this: look around.

Religion is in decline, unfortunately, and the number one reason many Americans are hesitant to hop on the conservative bandwagon is precisely because they do not share the same religious Christian convictions that the majority of conservatives do.

• In U.S., Decline of Christianity Continues at a Rapid Pace

• Christianity in the U.S. is quickly shrinking

• Religion is less important in the lives of many Americans

• Why People Are Rejecting Religion—and How to Draw Them In

• Religion's Sudden Decline: What's Causing it, and What Comes Next

In the most practical sense, the implication of this undeniable fact is that in order to form a winning coalition, we absolutely must make a distinction between our religious and political missions. I believe that Donald Trump successfully did just that, pulling people together of different faiths, or no faith at all, which is why he’s set to be inaugurated for his historic second term in just a few short days.

However, riding the high of a massive political victory, claiming glory be to God for Trump’s against-all-odds success in making it back into the White House, there is a growing chorus of self-righteous preening coming out of the Religious Right.

This, I believe, is a recipe for disaster. I believe it is a trap.

Furthermore, I believe it is an intentional undermining of American unity, along the lines of the intentional subversion and fracturing of political movements discussed in TR 655 - Crushing Divisive Narratives. In that report, Josh Stylman offered us a keen insight on how this “systematic fragmentation” of resistance happens:

“…subtle redirection begins. Just as they slice society into ever-smaller fragments along political, racial, and cultural lines, they splinter truth movements into competing camps. Unity becomes division. Action becomes debate. Resistance becomes content.”

The subtle redirection begins.

Knowing that I’ve stirred the hornet’s nest by taking an unpopular stance, stating that America is not a Christian nation, I’d like to take a moment to articulate why, exactly, it felt important for me to push this point of distinction. Why go against the grain and potentially offend many of my subscribers, family, and friends?

Well, my willingness to engage the debate and step into this uncomfortable space was prompted, in part, by headlines like these:

• TRUMP WINS — GLORY BE TO GOD - Charlie Kirk

• WAYNE ROOT: I’ve Studied Politics Since 1964. Trump’s Victory was Much More Than a Landslide. It was a Miracle from God.

• America Under Satanic Attack – Mark Taylor

Don’t get me wrong, I like Charlie Kirk, Wayne Allen Root, and Mark Taylor. I believe these are wise men with good things to say. I am not disagreeing with them in principle, nor do I entirely disagree with their perspectives—BUT, I do disagree with making Christianity the clarion call for conservative politics.

This disagreement is not coming from a place of malice, but of concern, because I believe that pushing religion into the center of the political arena is a losing strategy. It really doesn’t matter what I personally believe about God’s role in the 2024 election or the rise of Donald Trump—what matters is that this narrative is entirely off-putting, even repulsive, to the many people who, sans religion, are our staunch political allies.

I want to pull in a few more headlines before doubling down on this assertion:

• Donald Trump Suggests He Was Literally Anointed by God

• Half of evangelicals believe Trump is anointed by God

• Belief by churchgoers that Trump was 'anointed by God' on the rise

It should go without saying that the godless Marxist heathens, who worship the state and generally live in utter denial of reality, are licking their lips about this.

What easier way to sway non-religious Americans—of whom there are millions—away from Trump, MAGA, and conservatism in general?

Here we must understand the power of words. If you drop the phrase “anointed by God” in front of someone who doesn’t believe in God, or even someone who does believe in God, loosely, but who doesn’t buy into religion, what’s the reaction?

It’s cringe. Ouch.

The thought is: “I don’t want anything to do with these people.”

How do I know this?

Because I talk to people. Lots of people. I talk to Methodists, Mormons, and Wiccan Magis. I talk to Atheists, Agnostics, and Apostles of Christ. I talk to Buddhists, Yogis, and spiritual seekers young and old. I talk to New Agers, Old Schoolers, and everyone in between. I talk to them all, because I love the conversations.

One time I even spent nearly six hours talking to a Muslim man that looked just like Osama Bin Laden, on a flight from Singapore to San Fransisco. Though the two of us obviously had many conflicting religious convictions, by the end of the flight we had found kindred spirit in one simple fact: God is good.

We didn’t agree on the definition or name of God, on who had or had not been annointed by God, or on what God’s plans were for the future of humanity—but nevertheless, we both agreed that God was good. It was fascinating.

Regarding the many other schools of thought that I’ve interacted with, my introduction to people who believe differently than I do came through military service. There I was, 18-years old, sharing blood, sweat, and tears with people who had wildly different beliefs. These were my brothers in arms. They would lay down their lives for me, and I would do the same, even if we disagreed about God.

This experience had a profound impact on me.

There had been a period in my earlier life where I was combative in conversations about faith. I wanted to nitpick and disprove the beliefs of those who disagreed with me. It took some maturing before I realized this was just my ego, and furthermore, that it was actually harmful. I was literally hurting people by dismantling their beliefs, just because it was something different than what I believed in. No bueno.

At that point in life, I vowed to myself to be kind and curious, not combative, to listen to people’s stories, to value their perspectives, and to respect their beliefs, even and especially if I wholeheartedly disagreed. I sought to learn, with humility, from the various spiritual paths that I happened to come across.

The lessons were, to me, profound.

Perhaps most prominent was the lesson that people—that we as human beings—all need to believe in something. Every person I have ever met has their own personal beliefs about life, about death, about God. In this I see something beautiful, I see the human spirit seeking to connect with its Source.

This spiritual seeking transcends time and location. It is not geocentric, and therefore, the various flavors of spiritual expression differ from place to place. Given that America has long been the “melting pot of the world,” it only makes sense to me that I’d bump into these different spiritual practices from time to time.

And, having made my peace with God, I’ve never felt threatened by the experience. Perhaps there are lessons from this experience that might enrich your own spiritual journey? Either way, let’s get back to the political implications.

Let’s split some hairs.

As you might expect, I recieved some feedback on my stance that America is not a Christian nation. I always love feedback, so if you ever feel inclined, let me have it.

On the one hand, there were people expressing appreciation for my willingness to “go there” and defend my fellow, non-religious, liberty loving Americans. One man, an atheist friend of mine, shared the writings of Nietze, and how Nietze’s philosophy was deeply intertwined with music and the mathematical composition of the universe, similar to how I was using music as a bridge into yesterday’s discussion of beliefs.

This is how he, and others, can philosophically derive the constitutional principles of limited government and free society, without the aid of religious texts or heavenly mandates.

On the other hand, understandably and as expected, the greater portion of feedback was from those who disagreed, from those who sought to inform me that I was wrong, that America was in fact a Christian nation, or that at the very least is was founded upon Christian principles as expressed in the Bible.

To this point, a dear friend of mine made the effort to articulate the nuance embedded within the discussion—that though we are undeniably a diverse and pluralistic society, our nation was in fact founded on Christian principles, because these were the dominant cultural values at the time of our nation’s founding.

This is all good stuff, and I do not disagree, but it does bring to mind a few points worth making. I recently lent a book titled The Godless Constitution to a fellow veteran, who, like myself and many others, was wrestling with the rise of Christian dominance in conservative politics. He, too, felt that this pushing of religion as the central spectacle was sowing division, with potentially catastrophic consequences.

So let’s address the question directly:

Was America foundedas a Christian nation?

The answer, in my mind, much to the chagrin of many, is unequivocally no.

I love God with all my heart, I do not lean on my own understanding, and I seek to acknowledge and honor God in all my ways—and yet, I state that as a fact.

The reason I do not believe we were founded as a Christian nation is fairly simple. Read through the U.S. Constitution, and you will not find the word God a single time.

Why?

Scholars have debated this fact since the founding, but I believe its because the Founding Fathers understood the divisive nature of religious beliefs. They understood that for a free society to function, it necessarily required a divorce from dogmatic dictates—because who would support a government that forced them to accept beliefs that were contrary to their personal convictions?

The Declaration of Independence speaks of “the Laws of Nature and Nature’s God,” and makes clear that every citizen’s inalienable rights are “endowed by their Creator.” In declaring their independence, the Founders also appeal to the “Supreme Judge of the World” and allude to a “firm reliance on the protection of divine Providence.”

Do these words indicate that America was founded as a Christian nation?

Again, for me, the answer is no. Let me explain.

First, given that the Constitution does not mention God, it should be clear that our government was not founded as a Christian government. The reasons for this are numerous, I’m sure, but the act of leaving God out of it was clearly intentional—especially when you consider the strong Christian faith of many of the Founders.

As for the phrases contained in the Declaration, let’s take them one at a time:

• “The Laws of Nature and Nature’s God” — the Bible says that all Creation cries out for the glory of God. It’s one of my favorite passages. But if you think about it, all of Creation does not cry out the Gospel of Jesus Christ. Indeed, if left alone in the woods, immersed in the wonder of Nature, while one might come to a deep and profound appreciation for the divine nature of Creation, and subsequently come to an intimate spiritual connection with their Creator, there would be a distinct absence of anything pointing to Jesus Christ as Lord and Savior. Thus, the Laws of Nature and Nature’s God are distinctly not Christian.

• Similar logic applies to the rights that have been endowed by our Creator. Why did they not say these rights were “Given by God” or explicitly state that they were our God-given rights? Acknowledging a divine Creator and appealing to the “Supreme Judge of the World” are not the same thing as acknowledging Yahweh, Jesus Christ, and God’s final judgement of humanity. Again, I can only believe that this was intentional, and again, explicitly not Christian.

• As for the “firm reliance on the protection of divine Providence,” we have yet another example of the absence of invoking Christianity or calling God by name. There is no mention of the Lion of Judah, or how “if God is for us, who can be against us.” There is no mention of Psalm 23, of Christ the Redeemer, the Captain of Salvation, the Good Shepherd, the Holy Spirit, or the Light of the World. There is no statement suggesting that God was delivering our nascient nation from Evil—only the genuine, if slightly generic, reliance on divine providence.

Scouring the founding documents and noting the explicit lack of reference to Christianity, I can only conclude that our nation was intentionally not founded as a Christian nation. This, I believe, was both wise and necessary.

Surely the faith of the Founding Fathers compelled them to pray about this. In doing so, with sincere conviction about their political mission, it seems abundantly clear that their inspired words, guided by the hand of Providence, made every effort to actually avoid injecting their Christian faith into our founding documents.

That is, these wise statesmen and devout Christians fully understood the need to make the critical distinction between their religious and political missions.

I believe those of us who sincerely want to Make America Great Again should look to their example in our efforts to restore the Republic. We were founded as a country of free individuals. Free to speak our minds, free to assemble, free to defend ourselves, and free to worship — or not — however we choose. Therefore, let’s unite the country in the original spirit of freedom, and resist the urge for religious pomp.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

And so it is.

Lest I squander your attention, let me just cut to the chase.

As the Santa Ana winds continue picking up speed, threatening to plunge Los Angeles into even greater chaos, as political pundits frolic and pick apart Jack Smith’s egregious final report on Trump’s “unprecedented criminal effort” to overturn the rigged 2020 election, and while the media makes a spectacle of Pete Hegseth, Pam Bondi, and other Trump cabinet confirmations, my mind is a million miles away.

There are ample opportunities to follow these stories, so I’m not going to waste time covering these issues today. I’m also going to sidestep the fact that the global elites are meeting in Davos right now, plotting out the rest of your life. Instead, I want to reach into the recesses of timeless contemplation, digging far beneath the surface of appearance, and stir up a more meaningful, even sacred sort of conversation.

As I write, I am listening to Malte Marten tapping his handpan in a melodic invocation of the Present Moment. The sound is glorious and uplifting.

There’s just something cool about the sound of that instrument.

Leading into the conversation, humans have known since the dawn of time that music can transport us into different states of mind. Music can evoke emotion, energize or calm our nervous system, and enrich our existential experience in a very visceral way.

Music is a timeless sort of magic.

Have you ever thought about how music brings people together?

Through music, we connect with something other than mind. We can feel rhythms and sounds ripple through our bodies, impacting our biology in very profound ways. Music can move us physically, mentally, and spiritually, in an involuntary fashion. It can stir up something inside us, something that transcends words and language, something that draws us into the present moment with a heightened state of being.

It’s no wonder, then, that music has been used as a form of worship in cultures and religions around the world, which is a curious fact that beckons the question:

Where does music come from?

Before answering, I want to frame what follows in practical terms. Music brings people with wildly different beliefs together in a meaningful way. In this sense, music might be thought of as powerful medicine. Beyond that, music helps us get out of our heads and connect with what’s real in the present moment—and all of this helps to reduce stress and make life better in every way.

As I think about the state of the world right now, with all the stress and chaos, my mind is constantly in search of solutions. In order to find solutions, we must first properly identify the problem we intend to solve. Of the myriad problems that are plaguing society, I believe that intentionally sown division is the greatest, by far.

By turning people against each other, We The People are divided in ways that make us easy to manage, thereby rendering us ineffective at opposing and overcoming the globalist agenda. I’ve previously discussed this intentional division, this bifurcation of society, along political lines, honing in on the rural/urban divide and the warring factions within the major political parties.

Today, I want to focus more specifically on the spiritual division that is fracturing American society, turning allies against each other, and I believe, being used to intentionally undermine our national unity. United we stand, divided we fall, right?

Back to the question:

Where does music come from?

Personally, I believe that music comes from the soul—how about you? Naturally, if music comes from the soul, one might wonder: where does the soul come from?

Obviously this question will come with its own set of answers, depending on your personal beliefs, upbringing, and cultural background. Regardless, surely we can all agree on the fact that different people will answer that question differently.

Such deeply spiritual questions about one’s own existence appear hardwired into the human psyche. We have a deep need for spiritual knowledge, as the world’s many religions attest. Throughout history there has been no shortage of creative answers, wrapped up and taught through traditional stories—but, though each of these stories claim to answer these primal questions, I believe the truth is more elusive.

Before proceeding, I want to make two points:

• Different cultures, and therefore different people, believe different stories, and generally speaking, everyone believes their stories hold the exclusive truth.

• The fact that people believe in different stories, that we as Americans hold a vast variety of different beliefs, is being used to divide and conquer our country.

My intention here is to probe this division, gently, to stimulate a search for unifying answers to some of life’s greatest questions. If you already have your answers, that’s fine, all I’d ask is that you proceed with an open mind. You know full well that every human being has their own unique set of beliefs, and that has to be okay.

Personally, I am of the firm belief that no two people believe exactly the same way.

Beyond the fact that some people believe in God and others don’t — and yet people in both camps value liberty and justice for all — I think that the infinite variations of beliefs within each of these camps is perfect evidence that the Truth of Existence actually exceeds any given dogma.

Put differently, I do not believe that God is contained within any given religion.

I state that out loud, well aware this perspective may be an affront to many in the audience… BUT, that said, it must be said, and I believe the case can and should be made in a way that is not offensive to those who hold tight to their faith.

If you’ve got your hackles up, remember, we’re working toward unity, for the purpose of restoring the Republic and preserving the blessing of liberty for future generations.

Don’t put God in a box.

If you know Jesus Christ as your Lord and Savior, I invite you now to take a moment, pray, and put on the full armor of God. Ask the Holy Spirit for wisdom and discernment. You are a child of God, washed in the blood of the Lamb, and nothing that I am about to say is meant to disturb, disrupt, or displace your faith in Christ.

Stand firm, and let’s proceed.

Why do I say that God cannot be contained within any given religion?

First, from an explicitly Christian perspective, I’d offer the comparison between Baptist, Methodist, Lutheran, Pentecostal, Seventh Day Adventist, Jehovah’s Witness, and Latter Day Saint’s perspectives and beliefs as a prime example. Each of these faithful followers are reading the Bible, praying in the name of Jesus, interpreting the scriptures, and coming to their own unique conclusions.

Inevitably, they end up believing different things.

Does the fact they disagree make them wrong?

If so, who decides who’s wrong?

These similar faiths share much of the same story, say the Genesis story of creation, but in the actual understanding of God and God’s will, and in the application of their faith, there are many distinct and strong, if not petty, differences of opinion.

Can you imagine if all these groups started working together to stitch the social fabric and mobilize the political will needed to reconcile our runaway government with proper constitutional restraints? It would be a miracle!

And yet these groups remain divided by their spiritual beliefs.

Which makes my point: God does not fit into any one of these religions, and yet, observation indicates that God manages to fit into each of them in his own unique way. Do you think that God judges these groups based upon the minutia of their beliefs, or does he judge them according to the faith in their hearts?

Are any one of us capable of judging another human being in this way?

Again, I’d ask you to prayerfully consider the implications.

(Atheists hold tight, we’ll get to the strict logic momentarily.)

Now then, back to the original question:

Where does music come from?

I’m curious how a person would answer that question if they do not believe in God?

Honestly, I’d like to know. Regardless, at this point I’d wager that my atheist and agnostic friends — who’ve just stomached more religious jargon than they’d typically be willing to endure — are wondering what the hell I am getting at.

What does music have to do with the current geopolitical chaos? What practical value is there in considering the origins of the creative impulse?

The answer, in a word, is unity.

We don’t have to agree about the origins of music to agree that music is good, and we don’t even have to agree about what type of music is good, to acknowledge it’s many benefits and profound impact on humanity as a whole.

Thus, we can find unity in this aspect of human experience, as different and diverse as our personal preferences may be, because in the end, music moves us all.

Could it not be the same with spirituality?

Being human, I believe, is a fantastically spiritual experience.

Not religious. Spiritual.

That distinction is incredibly important.

Personally, I believe that even people who adamantly reject religion, those who most certainly do not believe in God, are still, fundamentally, spiritual creatures.

I believe this is an undeniable truth, and invoke nothing more than direct observation of the natural world to substantiate that claim. As a human, both your body and your mind changes all the time. Moreover, you can directly observe and affect these changes, through the power of will, which manifests as personal choice.

You can observe the mind. You can change the mind.

Therefore, you are not the mind. You are something else.

Follow?

We are more than body and mind.

Direct observation reveals an inner awareness that inhabits our physical bodies and occupies our mental space. This inner awareness permeates every fiber and cell of our being, miraculously sensing, communicating, and coordinating our very existence with the world around us. One need not believe in God to make these observations.

(That said, the sheer statistical improbability of each of us having spontaneously evolved from the primordial soup with our own infinitely unique inner awareness that’s capable of exploring these thoughts does beg some questions.)

Suffice it to say, we are spiritual creatures.

However you care to interpret that, be my guest. Rather than getting caught up in the definition of concepts, let’s push on to the practical implications of this metaphysical phenomenon. Spirituality, by its very nature supercedes—even precedes—our language and cultural understanding.

From this we can deduce that different people in different places will have different spiritual beliefs, and that somehow, this is all part of the plan. It’s a cold hard fact.

As Americans, we have wildly different beliefs. This is a significant fact that is all too often overlooked. Human nature tends to assume that people in our social circles believe the same thing. Indeed, we instinctively seek out this sameness.

However, given the scale of challenges we face — everything from the Great Reset, Agenda 2030, weaponized AI, Fifth Generation Warfare, military grade memes, and DEWs, to the chemical poisoning of our foods, the EMF (electromagnetic) poisoning of our homes, and the Marxist social poisoning of our communities — the only chance we have at correcting the course of history lies in unity.

To win in the political arena, which is the only way to defeat the globalists’ political agenda (i.e. global digital governance), we need more people standing together to defend human freedom. Rather than allowing ourselves to be divided, we need to connect with people, communicate the reality of circumstance, and compel them to get involved — regardless of differing religious beliefs.

Spiritually speaking, one need not believe in Jesus Christ to believe that as human beings we were each born free. Similarly, one need not read the Bible to deduce the logic of having limited government and upholding the Constitution.

With that in mind, I believe the greatest wedge being used to divide and conquer our country is the religious wedge. In American politics, every effort is made to conflate conservatism with Christianity, and quite unfortunately, many of my Christian brothers and sisters welcome this fusion of religion and politics, falsely believing, with good hearts, that we are a “Christian Nation.”

Look around.

We are not a Christian nation. We are, at best, a nation of mixed beliefs. Like it or not, this is demonstrably true, is it not? That’s why I believe that we absolutely must stand together, with people of mixed beliefs, in order to save the American Dream.

If we fail to unite our nation on something other than religious principles, we are going to lose our country and our freedoms for good. Period.

Also, on that note, please don’t make the mistake of assuming that religion is the only source of morality. Morality can be derived from logic, and therefore, a just and moral society could be built without religion—but that’s a discussion for another time.

It is undeniable that there are good, honest, hard working people, who are not particularly religious, who don’t believe in God, who still believe in life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness. That’s why, in this epic battle for the future of humanity, we need to make a very clear distinction between our religious and political missions.

If your calling is to save souls, then you need to pray and share the gospel. If your calling is to defend the Republic, then you need to be civically engaged. Either way, success requires working with people who believe differently than you do.

That said, somewhere in between any given religious or political mission, I believe we all share a spiritual mission—the mission of raising our families, contributing to our communities, and improving the world around us. This mission, in my mind, is achieved by elevating awareness, first at the personal level, then through concentric circles of influence, from family and neighbors to states and nation, so that we can unite our country in the spirit of freedom and defend ourselves against the forces of darkness that seek to divide and conquer us all.

Awareness begets humility.

We are each infinitely unique individuals, endowed by our Creator with certain inalienable rights, equipped with our own set of personal preferences and beliefs — and by God, I believe that God intended it to be that way. I believe that God intended for us each to be and believe differently. How could it be any other way?

Thus, I believe that humility begets mutual respect. We are all spiritual creatures, spinning around on a magical planet, seeking love, laughter, and meaningful lives. We may have wildly different beliefs, but our spirits all yearn to be free.

If we accept this fact and embrace it, if we are willing to work together and stand united, despite our differences, then tyranny will be defeated.

United we stand. Divided we fall.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Take three.

Last week, I started to write up a report on the fires that are ravaging southern California. I wanted to emphasize that real people are suffering real loss, and that the heartache must be agonizing for everyone who has lost everything—and then get into the details of things that don’t add up.

Today, as the fires continue to ravage the region, going into day 6 of the gaslighting and lies, this is my third attempt to articulate a skeptical peasant’s perspective.

Over the last several days, I’ve dug deeply into the various theories about the origins of the fire. Along with the well documented accounts of arson—like the illegal immigrant lighting stuff on fire with a blow torch, for example—one of the theories in certain circles is that this is a covert operation, wherein the powers that be are using Directed Energy Weapons to burn the place down, for their own nefarious agenda.

Proponents of the DEW theory speculate that this was a massive land grab, and that it may in fact have been “clearing the area” in order to rebuild a so-called Smart City, just in time for the 2028 Olympics. In this vein, many people believe that what’s happening in L.A. follows the exact same pattern as what happened on Maui, in Chile, Canada, and elsewhere—and they have damn good reasons for believing so.

That said, even as I struggle now to put words to where my mind is at, I am not going to try to convince you that the DEW theory is true, or that it is false.

Do Direct Energy Weapons exist? Absolutely.

Did DEI and radical climate policies contribute to the crisis? Undeniably.

Is this a major Fing issue that deserves a full investigation? Of course.*

But will there be any accountability, even with all the public outcry? No.

Thus, there is little value in dwelling on the glaringly obvious issues—like this not really being wildfire season, California’s 132% above average precipitation, the 117 million gallon main reservoir intentionally being empty, fire hydrants not having water pressure and going dry, insurance companies pulling out months in advance, arsons roving the streets with flamethrowers, L.A.’s mayor being out of town for a perfectly timed trip to Africa, the three incompetent DEI hires (three lesbians named Kristin, no joke) running the L.A. Fire Department, and so on.

This is an in-your-face sort of crisis. There is clearly something else going on here, and everyone who doesn’t have their head buried up their ass knows it.

And yet, again, nothing will happen.

And THAT’S the pattern that I’d like to drill down on today.

Broad swaths of destruction have happened in broad daylight, tens of thousands of buildings were reduced to rubble, vehicles were melted in the streets, and somehow, in the entire history of wildfires, nobody has ever seen anything like this before.

If you think about it, it’s not like we haven’t had cell phones, cameras, and social media available to document the devastation from previous fires, right? So, in the last ten, twenty years, have you seen any “wildfire” destruction like this?

This fire seemed selective, skipping over perfectly combustible vegetation, and strangely enough, blue colored items. If you are curious and want to open your eyes as to why so many people believe these fires are being intentionally perpetrated using DEWs, search for “the wildfire didn't burn blue items” or “the trees didn't burn” on X, and you’ll have all the evidence you need to scratch that conspiratorial itch.

(This short 12-second video of on-the-ground footage is really case in point.)

Still, let’s not lose sight of the heartache.

Before opining any further, I’d like to briefly circle back to Josh Stylman’s Second Matrix, as unearthed in TR 655, because the words from that stellar piece are still ringing in my ears:

“In my study of communist societies, I came to the conclusion that the purpose of communist propaganda was not to persuade or convince, not to inform, but to humiliate; and therefore, the less it corresponded to reality the better. When people are forced to remain silent when they are being told the most obvious lies, or even worse when they are forced to repeat the lies themselves, they lose once and for all their sense of probity. To assent to obvious lies is in some small way to become evil oneself. One's standing to resist anything is thus eroded, and even destroyed. A society of emasculated liars is easy to control.”

The purpose of commie propaganda is to humiliate people into accepting the most obvious lies, and even force them to repeat these lies through intense social pressure.

Tell me: are we not being told the most obvious lies?

When showed images and videos of endless destruction, wherein thousands of buildings have been reduced to smoldering piles of ash—but the trees that are standing between the houses are still there, and they still have leaves—we are being told not to believe our eyes, our intuition, or our instinct.

“Trees have more water in them, moron.”

That’s the liberal comeback on social media.

Sure, but many of the leaves are still green.

Surely any fire hot enough to melt vehicles and utterly obliterate all of these homes would rapidly burn the moisture out of the leaves and incinerate them. You don’t have to be an arborist, a rocket scientist, or a firefighter to think that one through.

Never let the Left humiliate you into accepting their idiotic narratives.

Besides that, what possible explanation could there be for the blue plastics not being melted, when they too are sitting right next to the charred remains that were clearly caused by extreme heat?

It reminds me of the blue umbrellas in Hawaii, that were virtually untouched even though they were ten feet away from a blaze hot enough to melt steel.

But never mind all of that.

To be intellectually honest, I must accept the fact that there could be a plausible, non-conspiratorial explanation—you know, something other than the fact that blue items don’t absorb energy from blue laser beams.

HERE’S THE THING:

It’s very easy to get sucked into trying to figure all of this stuff out, attempting to make sense of the nonsensical, to prove the point one way or another. If you want to believe these “wildfires” are the result of Direct Energy Weapons, you will find ample evidence to support that perspective.

If you want to believe there is a perfectly natural explanation for all of this, the fact-checkers have your back. They’ve debunked all this conspiracy, and they’ll happily provide you a narrative you can use to ridicule anyone who dares to entertain the question.

Ironically, in doing so, the fact-checkers cite government sources to point out that Direct Energy Weapons do in fact exist. So there you have it. It is possible.

You get to choose your own adventure.

Let’s zoom out.

First, let’s not lose sight of the very real suffering. Try to imagine yourself in this situation. Try to imagine if some equivalent catastrophe struck your hometown.

Think about it long and hard.

Who would you turn to? What would you do? How would you get through it?

Would you turn to the government? Would you take orders, abandon your home, and do what you were told? Would you trust FEMA or whomever else was sent in?

Who would you trust as a reliable source of information?

Would you trust CNN or Fox of Trusted News Initiative? Would you trust the local news? Would you trust the public officials speaking at press conferences? Would you trust eyewitness accounts from people within the community?

Would you trust your own lying eyes?

Extend the thought: say, for example, you heard a public official speaking at a press conference on the local news, and you realized that they weren’t telling the truth—or at least that they weren’t telling the full story. What would you do?

Let’s say that something horrific was happening, that your friends, family, and neighbors all knew it, but the feds who had taken charge were keeping a lid on it, lying to the public, and denying the reality on the ground. What would you do?

Can you feel the creeping sense of desperation?

Notice how nobody is really talking about the devastation in Maui or North Carolina anymore? Do you think these people have gotten their lives back? Of course not.

The people who suffered in those catastrophes are STILL suffering. How do you think they might be feeling right about now? What’s their world like today? Where might their focus be? Do you think they’re paying attention to the political circus?

Regardless, for the rest of us, life goes on.

These heartbreaking stories are no longer in the news, so they are no longer on the mind—unless of course you happened to be personally impacted by the crisis.

What I want to wrap up with today, is the fact that there is always more going on than meets the eye. These tragedies bring the nation’s attention to a focal point. For a brief period of time everyone is focused on the fires, while everything else gets ignored.

Personally, I suspect that the speculation about this all advancing Agenda 2030 and the whole Smart City fantasy is much closer to the truth than most people would want to believe. I suspect that those who are on the ground gathering evidence of this are largely being silenced by the algorithms—that’s why there is so little footage getting out.

If you’ll notice, it’s a lot of the same scenes being circulated over and over.

Still, as some information continues to seep through the cracks, conspiracy theories keep people entertained and distracted. However, even if the worst of the worst was actually happening—even if there are lasers from space or from government planes burning the whole place down—what the hell are you or I or anyone else going to do about it?

This technology is patented, and it has already been developed.

• DOD Officials Discuss Advancing Directed Energy Weapons (2020)

• AC-130 Gunship's Newest Capability: A Huge Laser Weapon (2021)

• Directed Energy Weapons Market to Hit $15 Billion By 2032 (2023)

It isn’t a wild eyed conspiracy to think those who have invested billions into developing these new weapons would use them to advance their agendas, is it?

Maybe that’s why the Chinese are frantically painting their roofs blue? Elon Musk was discussing this with Joe Rogan four months ago, by the way, about the same time that insurance agencies were pulling policies out of southern California.

“Guess why? They know something is going to happen.”—Elon Musk

Keep in mind, as I’ve often said, what they do in one place they can (and probably will) do in another. I believe the greatest lesson we can learn from these so-called “wildfires” is that there are very powerful people, wielding very powerful weapons, who are willing and able to cause destruction on a scale that is truly incomprehensible.

If it advances their radical agenda, feeds the environmental narrative, brings Smart Cities online faster, consolidates power and control, moves us closer to Earth Systems Governance, and successfully humiliates the peasants, what’s to stop them?

Never forget: pain is all part of the plan.

RESIST WE MUST!!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Wham.

Every once in a while, when reading something so pure, so clean, so incontrovertible, so irrefutable, obvious and true, it smacks me in the brain with the weight of a Mac truck. That’s how I felt this morning when I encountered this article:

The Second Matrix: From Propaganda To Programming

I sat in stunned humility, carefully scrolling line by line, watching the words unravel the mysteries and weave their tapestry of truth. It was a retelling of what I’ve attempted to communicate myself, only with much greater clarity and grace. All at once I want to stop writing and implore the audience to read the piece in its entirety—and you should, please, read that piece—however, with humility, I’d like to explore and expound on some of what, to me, were the most impactful parts.

As the title alludes, Josh Stylman is very meticulously peeling back the layers of deception that directly impact our perception of the world and all the events in it. He maps out his own learning journey, based on years of research, wherein he first realized that many of the “fundamental facts” instilled during his formative years were little more than fabricated falsehoods.

He then pushes through to a much deeper level of insight:

“We've been humbled twice over - first in unlearning what we thought we knew, then in discovering our own certainties about new paths were wrong. Paths that appeared revolutionary led to sophisticated dead ends. Communities that felt authentic revealed themselves as engineered channels.”

This is how the liberty movement is being divided. The “we” he’s referring to is a group of friends who had set out to track down the rabbit trails of what was knowable, to commit themselves to discovering the truth, whatever that truth might be. To sketch it out succinctly, I suspect their connecting of the dots look like this:

• Whoa, everything I’ve been told about XYZ was a lie.

• I know that for certain because here’s the evidence on X (or Y, or Z).

• But after drilling down far enough on X, it leads to a “sophisticated” dead end, and therefore, more questions—turns out X wasn’t really X after all!

This process goes on forever, and as the curious mind circles back to Y and Z, it only discovers that these too have an endless degree of mystery, that there are always more questions, at the bottom of which lie even greater uncertainty—thus compelling the inquisitor to dig even deeper, until mental exhaustion eventually renders the mind useless. Stylman again hits the nail on the head:

“The hardest truth isn't just recognizing deception - it's accepting that we might never know the full story while still needing to act on what we can verify.”

This hardest truth, accepting that we might never know the full story, is exactly what I was pointing out yesterday regarding the recent veteran-led terror attacks and Shawn Ryan’s CIA connections. It is precisely because we may never know, that we each must choose who and what to believe.

At the personal level, I refer to this “we’ll never know” as the Eternal Enigma. It’s a personal term of sorts that I came to peace with long ago. And, for what it’s worth, it is the Eternal Enigma that fuels my faith—and FAITH, to me, translates as:

Following An Intuitive Trusting Heart.

I understand that different people view this differently. Sidestepping religious debate, I have lived by this understanding for most of my life. Faith, to me, in this sense, is the antidote to self-deception. Knowing that my mind can play tricks on me, I see faith, in contrast, as neither mental certainty nor emotional feeling.

Faith, in my mind, has nothing to do with blind belief. It leads to a distinctly different, much deeper, instinctual and intuitive level of knowing. Personally, I believe that faith is, in fact, a spiritual function spun out of my heart and soul, emanating from the pure awareness that permeates every fiber and cell of my being.

The reason this matters is that our intuition is rooted in something much more vast than mind. There are deeper levels of life, deeper levels of knowing, deeper levels of awareness—and we often need to access these deeper levels in order to navigate the mental maze.

But let me not get lost in the weeds.

Says Josh Stylman:

“What began as research into specific deceptions revealed something far more profound: While devastating physical wars rage in multiple regions, a deeper conflict unfolds silently across the planet - a war for the freedom of human consciousness itself. This is what World War III looks like - not just bombs and bullets, but the systematic engineering of human perception.”

If you’ve been reading or listening to the Torch Report for any length of time, these words should sound remarkably familiar. I’ve repeatedly made the point that the global cabal is making a concerted effort to transform human consciousness on a planetary scale, that they’ve been at it for decades, and that currently they are using 21st Century technologies like weaponized AI to do so.

This threat is real, and it’s really important.

However, the idea of it is so abstract, I think that it’s perhaps beyond the scope of most people’s concern. Understanding the threat, and the methods by which your consciousness is being attacked, seduced, and manipulated, goes a long way toward providing protection. With this knowledge, your inner awareness can stand guard.

That said, acknowledging that the vast majority of people are in an entirely different place, on their own learning journey, it behooves us — as ambassadors of truth in this “war for the freedom of human consciousness” — to communicate in practical terms that are readily relatable and easy to understand.

Here too Stylman does a superb job:

“The battle for our minds requires both awareness and authentic action. While they attempt to engineer behavior through chemicals and algorithms, our power lies first in liberating ourselves, then extending through direct human connection.

Their endgame - absolute mastery over human perception and cognition - reveals a fundamental weakness: they cannot fully contain liberated minds and authentic human relationships that exist outside their mediated channels. This comprehensive system requires managed opposition at every level, steering us away from genuine awakening and direct engagement.The crucial insight is this: The opposite of globalism isn't nationalism or political movements - it's individual liberty expressed through local action. Real awakening can't be programmed or scheduled. It emerges through clear recognition and spreads through genuine connection.”

Wham.

While it feels as if I’ve said it all before (relevant reports listed below), one of the greatest insights laid bare by Stylman lies in recognizing, calling out, and explaining in great detail the “managed opposition at every level.” He expertly assesses exactly how the liberty movement has been infiltrated and fragmented, and highlights the techniques by which we get turned against each other.

This is highly relevant to the recent discussion regarding Shawn Ryan and the Brunson brothers, both of which, along with any number of other tangents, have become splitting points, points where sincere patriots disagree, which then allows division to seep in.

But before we get to that, I’d like to offer a brief summary of the practical, tactical, and spiritual solutions that have been covered here, for the benefit of those who are new to the audience, as well as for personal review on the topic:

• SPECIAL: How To Overcome Tyranny (July 2022)

• TR 312 - What's Wrong With America?

• TR 347 - Awakening to Reality

• TR 410 - Human Nature Holds the Answers

• TR 498 - Wisdom, Solutions, and Peace of Mind

• TR 509 - It's Time to Talk Solutions

• TR 532 - The Power of the Human Spirit Versus the Threat of Collective Thinking

• TR 533 - The Secrets of Discernment and Learning to Trust Yourself

• TR 579 - What's REALLY Going On, and What Can We Do About It?

• TR 615 - On Politically Incorrect But Philosophically Sound Solutions

Throughout all of the above is the consistent theme: every workable solution must be rooted in an elevation of inner awareness and direct human interaction.

This is the only way we can beat the machines and reclaim our sovereignty.

It’s the only way we can defeat the cabal at the local level.

If we fail to elevate awareness and facilitate meaningful connection, the enemies of freedom will undoubtedly continue to divide and conquer us all.

Divide and Conquer.

It’s a timeless strategy, and Stylman does an outstanding job of pointing out the patterns at play in this pernicious and persistent problem. He outlines how it works, noting that the fragmentation is really a “calculated dissolution” of unity. He speaks of the deeper levels of control, wherein influential infiltrators build trust and then begin to subtly misdirect attention and lead people to “sophisticated dead ends.”

“Watch how the confidence game operates in truth movements: First comes legitimate revelation - real documents, genuine whistleblowers, undeniable evidence. Trust builds through authentic insight. Then subtle redirection begins. Just as they slice society into ever-smaller fragments along political, racial, and cultural lines, they splinter truth movements into competing camps. Unity becomes division. Action becomes debate. Resistance becomes content.

This systematic fragmentation of awakening movements reflects a deeper historical pattern - one that traces the evolution of mass perception control from crude propaganda to sophisticated biodigital manipulation.”

Again, it’s just so spot on, I stand in awe.

“They splinter truth movements into competing camps. Unity becomes division. Action becomes debate. Resistance becomes content.”

WHAM.

The truth hits hard. It has a weight of its own.

It also has its own sort of alchemist impact, which is fascinating.

When I demolished the Brunson narrative, I lost the subscribers who wanted to believe. The same thing has happened several other times as well, for example when I obliterated the Ukrainian narrative, or during the primaries when I questioned whether or not Trump was the best pick, or when I took the time to defend my liberal and atheist friends against religious zealotry, or more recently, when I picked apart the Blue Beam narrative and pointed out some red flags surrounding Shawn Ryan.

While Josh Stylman’s exposition gets into the nuts and bolts of how various movements become fragmented, I’d like to offer a few parting thoughts on why this happens—what is it in human nature that causes us to turn against each other?

The answer, simply, is ego.

We want to know the truth. We need to know the truth.

Therefore, we believe we know the truth—and anyone who denies that truth instantly becomes an enemy to our ego, and a threat to our self-identity. This is human nature, and we cannot escape it. Best we can do, in my opinion, is walk the virtuous path.

Honesty. Humility. Honor.

Honestly, I don’t really know XYZ, and I sure as hell don’t know everything. With humility, I can acknowledge my own limited understanding and limited life experience, and accept the unique and limited experiences of others as well.

Then, if I am being honest and feeling humble, I can honor my fellow human beings, even when I disagree. I can honor other people’s beliefs and cultural traditions, and do so without compromising my own. I can honor my family. I can honor my faith.

I can honor my heart… and I will continue to do so, even if in the process of speaking my mind, speaking from the heart, I step on some toes and lose some subscribers. So be it. This, in my mind, is separating the wheat from the chaff, the kindred spirits of intellectually honest and curious individuals from those who aren’t quite there.

I am exceedingly grateful for those who’ve joined me on this learning journey, who’ve been with me in the rhetorical trenches, who’ve slogged through the philosophical swamp, and who’ve been willing to question and challenge me when I had it coming. I appreciate your emails, your comments, your sources, and all your support.

Thus, it is with a grateful heart that I say today: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Alrighty then.

If you are a fellow Gen Xer, or a comedy fan in general, you are undoubtedly familiar with Jim Carey’s iconic phrase, “Alrighty Then.” The catchy quip was birthed into the comedic cosmos circa 1995, courtesy of the movie When Nature Calls. Alrighty then.

Fun fact, for all he is and isn’t, Jim Carey actually has a fascinating tale to tell about the power of focus, mental energy, and manifestation. As the story goes, he wrote himself a ten-million dollar check for “acting services rendered,” taped it to the ceiling above his bed, and then set about manifesting this reality—and it worked.

Pretty cool, right?

You’re probably wondering what this has to do with Shawn Ryan and the CIA, right?

We’ll get there, but first…

In yesterday’s lengthy screed on treason, terrorists, and the explosive new year, I attempted to drive home the point that life in the year 2025 will inevitably be what we make of it, for each of us at the personal level. The intent was to emphasize the importance of focusing our time and energy on the little things that matter most, so as to live our lives on our own terms, even in the midst of chaos.

Also in yesterday’s report, I attempted to articulate some of the ways in which my personal perspective has changed over the last few years, mostly by highlighting my inner rebellion against the incessant doom and gloom.

In simplest terms, as I tried to make clear, my inner rebel is rebelling against external control of my thoughts and emotions. Implied within that statement is the reality that we each have an innate capacity to control our own mind and emotions, internally, courtesy of our inner awareness. FACT.

To do so, we must first monitor the input of information being fed into our brains. We must observe and become aware of the mental and emotional impact of various stories and narratives. The fact that we are all being influenced to one degree or another is undeniable, but the extent to which this influence controls us is, well, controllable.

By divorcing ourselves from the perpetual doom and gloom narratives, we can regain a sense of empowerment, even in a world gone awry.

That said, in my mind it is critical to be perfectly clear about the fact that “all of the above” could potentially still happen. Everything from nuclear war to terrorist attacks to economic collapse remains squarely on the table—but each of these threats should be logically assessed and then moved to the peripheral of our minds.

According to the kung fu masters, “the chi follows the yi,” which is to say, the body’s energy follows the mind’s intent. As Tony Robbins says, where the focus goes the enery flows. Personally, I believe that this is a universal truth, and that people like Jim Carey have been tapping into it for eons.

“As a man thinketh in his heart, so is he.” Proverbs 23:7

I also believe that The Powers That Be have understood this truth, very profoundly, for much longer than most people realize. As history attests, the roots of this wisdom have woven their way through everything from ancient hermetics and religion, to the sacred secrets kept by the initiates of various sects, as well as the modern exploitation of the “dark arts” by various Deep State actors.

The purpose in pointing this out is to emphasize two things:

• As a human being, you have the phenomenal ability to manifest your heart’s desire in the material world. You can literally manipulate the universe at will, simply by focusing your mind and setting about making it happen.

• However, as a human being, your mind is also suceptible to being hacked, your attention thereby being diverted, and thus your energy can quite cleverly be channeled into serving the desires of those who seek to control you.

Let that sink in.

When the CIA spent gobs of money to mathematically map out the relationship between matter, energy, and human consciousness, I believe this is what they were after. The astounding ramifications of psychotronic warfare are still mindboggling to me, and still very much off the radar for most people, though the technology has been around—and very likely in use—for decades. (Kind of like artificial intelligence!)

With that stage set, before proceeding toward some of the more practical implications of the connection between consciousness, matter, energy, particularly as it relates to human freedom, I need to circle back and clarify something from yesterday’s report.

Actually, it was something that I said in passing in the podcast, something that wasn’t even written in the report. It was a remark I made about Shawn Ryan. I was being snarky and casually dismissed all the hype he’s created, and I’d like to explain why.

Please hear me out.

For those who don’t know, The Shawn Ryan Show has been around for about five years now. The man has an impressive resume, as these links make abundantly clear:

• Shawn Ryan SEAL: From Warrior To CIA To World-Class Podcaster

• Inside the Mind of a CIA Contractor: A Conversation With Shawn Ryan

• The Shawn Ryan Show Joins The Cumulus Podcast Network (2022)

I have many friends who have gotten a lot out of the Shawn Ryan Show, ostensibly because he delivers the goods on all things tactical thinking and self-defense. Personally, I haven’t watched any of his stuff, but over the last several days I’ve heard this man’s name almost ad nauseum—like all of the sudden he’s everywhere at once.

Hmmm….

No doubt this surge in popularity comes from the recent show wherein Shawn Ryan revealed during the recording that he had been emailed the manifesto of the Trump Hotel Tesla Bomber, Matthew Livelsberger.

Indeed, the instantly infamous Episode #155 has already racked up over 4.2 MILLION views in just three days, so I’d be remiss not to include the link:

At first glance, the optics and the visual appeal are perfect, aren’t they? What’s your impression of those facial expressions? Who do you think the target audience is here?

Anyway…

The reason I was feeling irked about Shawn Ryan was not just because he is a man with two first names—and never trust a man with two first names, right? JK!—nor was it because his impeccable service to our nation somehow managed to culminate in him operating as a private contractor for the CIA (cough, cough), it was the fact that all of a sudden people from entirely different social circles all happened to be telling me the exact same thing, at the exact same time: listen to Shawn Ryan.

It felt remarkably similar to the Brunson situation, for what it’s worth.

For the record, I still have friends who have kept the Brunson narrative alive—despite the fact that I have made every effort to point out, what appears to me, to be obvious holes in the story (and the fact that somehow it never manages to happen). That’s why, whenever I encounter a persistently stubborn perspective like this, especially among friends, it serves as a reminder of just how fickle our personal beliefs can be.

I reminds me to be humble.

I think of others who have been so certain that the rapture was at hand, and how in the exact same way I was unable to convince them that their beliefs were flawed.

“No one knows the hour or day,” I’d say, quoting the Bible — but no, they’d insist on a date, all because some trusted source claimed to have a revelation from God. Afterall, who would ever question a trusted source with direct revelations from God, right?!

The pattern here should be clear.

As human beings, we want to believe.

In fact, we need to believe — and it is precisely this need to believe that con artists of every stripe and color have been exploiting since the dawn of time.

That said, I’m not saying that Shawn Ryan is a con artist. He’s a stud, and no doubt he could kick my ass. I don’t question his 14 years of service spanning multiple combat operations as a Navy SEAL, though honestly I really have no way of verifying that information. However, I would like to point out his connection as a private CIA contractor is a red flag — and so is his meteoric rise as a social media darling on what is probably the most heavily censored platform (YouTube), and the fact that he “just so happened” to receive the manifesto of the Tesla Bomber on his show.

Maybe that’s all just a coincidence, right?

Then again, is it really so hard to speculate that Shawn Ryan, as a CIA operative, just might have been pre-positioned in his current role as YouTube star, precisely to be fed the exclusive manifesto of a fellow veteran who “just so happened” to be burnt beyond recognition—by fireworks and camp fuel no less—in a rudimentary truck bomb at the Trump Hotel in Las Vegas on New Year’s Day?

Noting that a seasoned Green Beret would probably be able to make a better bomb (say like the “never before used” bomb set off by another fellow veteran in New Orleans the day before), some people are claiming that Matthew Livelsberger was really an unsung hero, that he didn’t really want to hurt anybody, which is why he made such a lowsy bomb.

Instead, this troubled veteran was just trying to deliver a “wake up call” — that all he really wanted to do was expose U.S. war crimes and bring down the MIC.

What a hero. The mainstream stories are gushing, and therefore obscuring logic behind a shrowd of emotion, but think it through: Matthew Livelsberger was burnt to a crisp, and yet somehow his military ID, passport, and credit cards were all just fine.

Do you really buy this story?

“Authorities said a military ID, a passport and credit cards found at the scene were in Livelsberger's name, but that the body in the Cybertruck was burned beyond recognition.”

It’s amazing, isn’t it?

Tell me: what do you want to believe about this situation?

Do you want to believe that the Tesla Bomber was a disturbed and struggling veteran who spontaneously reached out to Shawn Ryan because he was a fellow vet with a massive platform who could deliver, posthumously, this “wake up call” to America?

Or, do you want to believe that this is all some sort of Deep State psyop?

How will you ever know for sure?

Furthermore, what do you make of these headlines:

• Matthew Livelsberger Had Theory About Mystery Drones

• Matthew Livelsberger Warned People About World War III

• Matthew Livelsberger photo appears to show pro-Ukraine support

• Did Matthew Livelsberger, Shamsud-Din Jabbar Serve Together in Military?

Isn’t it incredible that this one guy could miraculously pull together so many narratives, from the Chinese being behind the mysterious drones, to the imminent threat of WWIII, right down to ginning up some more pro-Ukrainan support?

And what about the strange connections between Livelsberger and the other soldier-turned-jihadi maniac behind the nearly simultaneous Bourbon Street Massacre?

On top of all of that, we’re expected to believe that yet another veteran—Shawn Ryan, the private CIA contractor—just so happened to be the lucky guy who happened to get the scoop and blast it out to millions of people who were predisposed to accepting it?

Oh, and he just so happened to publicly announce that he’d be “disappearing” for a few days before publishing the episode—and now he’s out making a public apology for stirring up the st about Livelsberger in the first place? Really?!

“C’mon man!”

HERE’S THE THING:

I don’t know what the hell I’m talking about.

I’m just an ignorant peasant, speaking from the heart.

I’m still stuck on the wild discrepencies with Thomas Matthew Crooks and the other jackass that tried to assassinate Donald Trump, but maybe I’m just slow.

The point is, while everyone is trying to make sense of the madness, while inquisitive minds are darting to and fro in search of answers, the world keeps turning and the cabal keeps marching on. Practically speaking, this means two things:

• These distractions are meant to render you an ineffective foe.

• There’s something else going on, and nobody’s talking about it.

The good news is, being the incredible cosmic creature that you are, created in the image of God, you have the ability to instantly transmute this sticky situation by simply realizing that things don’t add up, discarding the distraction for what it is, and then intentionally refocusing your mind on what matters most.

Consider the relationship between energy, matter, and consciousness.

You were born to create, not be consumed by narrative.

Pour yourself into something meaningful.

Take this story in stride and resist the inherent intrigue… it’s meant to control you.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Buckle Up.

It has been two weeks since I published TR 652 - Extended Evaluation of Project Blue Beam & the New Age Religion, on December 19, 2024.

Today is January 6, 2025, and we’ve got a LOT to cover, but first…

After cranking out daily reports for almost four years straight, I have to admit that taking two weeks off almost seems like forever. The reprieve was refreshing. It gave my mind some much-needed space to sort through the mangle of information that I’ve been cramming into it, relentlessly, day after day, ever since the pandemic first plunged me down the rabbit hole of global conspiracies.

Agenda 21. Agenda 2030. The Great Reset. The Georgia Guide Stones. The Limits to Growth, the Predicament of Mankind—you know, the depopulation agenda being deployed under the guise of the greater good, and the so-called “Sustainable Development Goals” that aim to control every aspect of our everyday lives.

Global Democracy. Digital Governance. The New World Order.

Marxism. Secret Societies. The Dark Arts. Psyops.

At this point, every imaginable evil has been equipped with weaponized artificial intelligence. We are being stalked by Sentinel Surveillance and Social Listening. We are constantly manipulated and misdirected by Algorithmic Social Interventions.

This all culminates in cunning behavioral change, subconscious taming, and a very real, very literal transformation of the mind, right down to the neurological level.

And yet, life is still good. Always. Let’s not lose sight of that!

Longtime subscribers know that I first began pouring myself into research during the early days of the meticulously planned shamdemic. That’s when I’d read 4 to 6 hours a day, scouring sources, comparing, constrasting, deducing, and developing my own informed perspective before writing a report to share what I’d learned.

At this point, it feels impossible to quantify the extent to which my mind has been stretched by this learning journey, so I won’t even try.

Suffice it to say, having learned so much about all of the above, my perspective has changed. My thinking has changed. My beliefs and behaviors have changed.

I have changed.

This is an important fact, as I’ll explain in a moment. But first, as a brief aside, I would dare to suggest that we all have changed, because the world has changed, and that’s just the way that it is. It’s said that the only thing constant in time is change itself —and yet, the more things change, the more they stay the same.

Here we are, four years after federal agents and Capitol Police ushered peaceful patriots into the halls of Congress, opening doors with friendly smiles — all of which was caught on camera and has been fully known since the day it happened — ultimately to entrap them, while police agitators started shooting people with rubber bullets and beating people with batons to stir up images of a violent insurrection.

The Deep State con job on J6 was the cherry on top of the b*t election*, wherein a half-dead sock-puppet was installed in the White House by the “most extensive and inclusive voter fraud operation in American history”**—to quote Biden himself.

As you know, the years that followed J6 ushered in the treasonous Show Trials, the rewriting of history, and the persecution of thousands of American patriots, many of whom were tracked down, rounded up, and tossed into the DC gulag for nothing more than speaking out about this abhorrent abrogation of the U.S. Constitution.

But so what, right? I mean, that was then, this is now, right?

Who cares about what happened January 6, 2021—that was so last election cycle!

Get over it Luke!

At any rate, four years later, following Trump’s historic political comeback, it’s as if none of it matters. It’s as if everything in the past has suddenly evaporated into the ether of oblivion.

In the blink of an eye, with just a flip of the proverbial switch, the public’s attention has been masterfully captured and trained onto an exciting new story.

In the last week, there have been multiple terror attacks across the heartland. These trajedies happened almost back to back—complete with all sorts of odd coincidences—and authories have warned that even more copy cat terrorists may strike soon.

Surely no American worth their salt can ignore such an explosive narrative!

And so it begins.

What happens next?!

Another cycle of gaslighting and propaganda. Another series of rabbit trails, of glaring discrepancies, of unanswered questions, of questionable connections, and so on. The leaders of this narrative are sure to boast of exclusive access, of confidential sources, of inside scoops—but you know what? Nothing will come of it.

It will be exciting for a minute, until the next big thing.

Mark my words.

Tell me:

• what happened with the orchestrated J6 fedsurrection?

• what happened with the covid crimes against humanity?

• what happened with the brazenly stolen 2020 election?

• what happened with Hunter’s laptop and the Burisma scandal?

• what happened with Hillary’s private servers, Bleach Bit, and so on?

• what happened with Nidal Hassan and the Ft. Hood Massacre?

• what happened with 9/11, two planes, three buildings, and thousands dead?

Who killed JFK?

I’m sure you get the point.

If you think about the long train of abuses and usurpations that have come and gone, and the despicable corruption that continues unchecked to this day, if you consider for a second the utterly atrocious lack of accountability and the endless absence of answers, then you will understand my jaded skepticism.

In the current news cycle, two military veterans targeted innocent civilians for slaughter, one in New Orleans, the other in Las Vegas. You’ve likely heard all the hype, as most pundits have been slathering about these atrocities for days.

Again, it’s like someone flipped a switch—and therefore, I am going to refrain from regurgitating the regurgitated facts, and attempt to stay above the fray.

I agree with those who speculate this may be another Deep State charade, that it has all the hallmarks of an MKULTRA style inside job, but who the hell knows, right?

I agree with those who speculate that these “shocking” events may be leveraged to implicate a foreign adversary—namely Iran—and used to stir up some good old-fashioned anti-Islamic sentiment in order to curry support for more endless wars in the Middle East, or perhaps even kick off World War III.

I agree that the timing, just weeks ahead of Trump’s inauguration, is remarkably suspicious, and that this sparkly new narrative comes with all sorts of enticing spinoffs—that is, that this storyline comes impregnated with a whole host of negative potentials that are sure to thrill and entertain the public psyche for weeks.

Oh my gosh, there are like SO many terrorists that have come across the border! They could just be getting warmed up!! They might have even smuggled in Iranian surface-to-air missiles and have plans to use them to blast Trump out of the sky!!!

It sounds crazy, but that’s the stage that’s being set:

• Suspected Terrorists Illegally Entering US Up Over 2,500% Under Biden

• Intel analyst says Iranian missiles smuggled across southern border

• Surface-to-air Missiles And Kill Teams In New Donald Trump Plot?

Can you imagine the chaos if something like that actually happened?

As you consider that disturbing possibility, please realize that it is precisely the high degree of emotional anticipation that makes this narrative so irresistible.

Those headlines prime free floating anxiety and beg us to stay tuned in. They compel us to sleuth out clues about what might happen next, and when. Such stories practically force us to seek answers, to listen to whoever claims to have the inside scoop, or the latest breaking revelations, or some other specialized knowledge.

Thus, I agree with those who point out that the entire situation reeks of a psyop.

But take a step back. Take a slow, deep breath.

Better yet, take three deep breaths.

Then ask yourself:

• Is this really the most important thing that’s happening in the world today?

• If everybody is suddenly talking about this, then what’s NOT being talked about?

• What are the chances that these sensational stories are really just a distraction?

Honestly, friends, I do not believe these are the most important stories.

That said, I will concede that the Deep State may use this narrative to cover up and advance their plans, in cahoots with the global cabal, and these plans may include the spectacular assassination of Donald Trump with surface-to-air missiles— because such an event would be a perfect pretense to ignite a broader war and catalyze the level of chaos needed to facilitate the hung election and civil war, as predicted — BUT… personally… I highly doubt that is going to happen.

If you’ve been with me for a while, you might have noticed this stance stands in sharp contrast to the years I’ve spent anticipating such events. This is a good example of how my perspective has shifted and changed, and it provides an opportunity to expound on something that I’ve long felt brewing, but lacked the words to articulate.

Let’s zoom out.

I recently told a friend that it feels like my inner rebel is rebelling against all the doom and gloom. I’m sick and f*g tired of people telling me that the sky is falling, that the grid is going to collapse, or what-the-hell-ever. Pick your story. I’m over it.

(Pardon the French.)

That’s how I feel. But why?

Being conscientious of the psychological wear and tear caused by Fifth Generation Warfare, understanding that we are all susceptible to the physiological impact of sustained stress and uncertainty, having been heavily engaged in William Sargant’s “Battle for the Mind” for the last four years, I am keenly aware that this shift in sentiment and perspective may indicate I’ve reached an internal limit.

So, it could be that “my give-a-damn’s busted” because my mind has been saturated with too much information for so long that I’ve become numb and begun to tune out.

Maybe.

As human beings, we’d all be wise to be aware of such limitations.

That said, having taken some time to reflect on this, there is an alternate explanation.

The truth is, I still care very much about what’s going on in the world, both globally and locally. I care deeply about the future of our country, just as I care deeply about the future of my family. The two are inextricably linked, which is why I care so much about the many vectors that are in motion that will inevitably impact our lives. This is also why I care about the slow roll of insanity, the insidious transformation of human consciousness, and the global cabal’s radical anti-human agenda.

These things are in motion and they will affect us all.

So it’s not that I don’t care. It’s not that my give a damn is busted.

It’s just that as a red-blooded, liberty loving American, my inner rebel reflexively rebels whenever it feels like someone’s trying to control me. In so much as sensational headlines and constantly evolving narratives aim to control what I think about and believe, to control how I behave and live my life, it’s that I am rebelling against.

I’m also rebelling against the fear and anxiety that seems to perpetually circulate in certain circles, particularly among the prepper community. These are my peeps, don’t get me wrong, but as I’ve pointed out before, those who are peddling the doom and gloom are typically trying to sell you something.

It’s an emotional button, an emotional game if you will, and it can be difficult to step back and see it for what it is. It’s manipulation.

Thus, to put it more succinctly, at the personal level I am rebelling against the external control of my mind and emotions—and you should too!

I’ve often said that resistance is the spice of life, and therefore resist we must.

In this new year, which will undoubtedly be chock full of wild and captivating headlines, endless edge-of-your-seat stories, and masterfully crafted narratives, I think we’d be wise to resist the urge to get sucked in.

Let’s get back to the little things, and get back to the bigger picture.

Let’s get back to life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness, even amidst the chaos.

Let’s reclaim the narrative and revise our stories at the personal level. Life is fundamentally good and the future is full of infinite positive potential.

Let’s revive the American Dream, lead by example, and be the change we want to see in our own communities.

Right now, we have every reason to be cautiously optimistic. As the days grow longer, we can know for certain that there are brighter days ahead. We can also know, come hell or high water, that this year will be what we make of it.

Here’s to making the most of it!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s continue…

Yesterday, I explained why I am not persuaded by the Project Blue Beam narrative, while painstakingly making the point that all the technologies do in fact exist to pull off such an epic global level psyop. The Project Blue Beam story, this suggestion that the Deep State is somehow going to orchestrate an alien invasion to usher in the new world order, is intriguing, and it captures the imagination, precisely because it’s a perfect blend of fact and fiction.

That said, I withhold any judgement of those who still believe in this story, much the same as I withhold judgement of those who cling to various other unverifiable beliefs. Even though I may disagree, even though I may personally dismiss this story or that, it doesn’t mean that I am right and others are wrong. Sometimes that is the case, but not always. Humility requires I accept the fact that at times, my own thinking is flawed.

This can be chalked up to the human condition. It is what it is.

If I’m wrong, tell me I’m wrong.

I think briefly reflecting on the fickle nature of thought helps defuse the tension that naturally builds up with disagreement. This creates space to proceed in conversation with curiosity and mutual respect, and it is in that spirit I’ll move forward today.

Let’s take a closer look.

One of the main features of the Blue Beam narrative, is that it aims to destroy the old religions of the world. The goal is to implement a new world religion, one in which the whole of humanity believes, as Monsat makes clear in his opening paragraph:

“The infamous NASA Blue Beam Project has four different steps in order to implement the new age religion with the Antichrist at its head. We must remember that the new age religion is the very foundation for the new world government, without which religion the dictatorship of the new world order is completely impossible. I’ll repeat that: Without a universal belief in the new age religion, the success of the new world order will be impossible!” (emphasis added)

By invoking the Antichrist as a central component in this scheme, the author reveals his own religious affiliation. Serge Monsat is warning people about a new world religion, and he is doing so from a Christian perspective, which is important.

To emphasize this point, consider some additional context:

“The first step in the NASA Blue Beam Project concerns the breakdown of all archaeological knowledge … which will finally explain to all people the "error" of all fundamental religious doctrines. The falsification of this information will be used to make all nations believe that their religious doctrines have been misunderstood for centuries and misinterpreted.”

Monsat goes on to explain that psychological preparations have been made for the public to accept this forecefully facilitated re-evaluation of history, courtesy of Hollywood films like 2001: A Space Odyssey, the Star Trek series, Independence Day, and Jurassic Park. He then goes out of his way to inform us that Jurassic Park “deals with the theories of evolution,” and “claims God’s words are lies.”

Again, he reveals his personal religious beliefs.

Why does that matter?

As I was saying yesterday, many people who are inherently skeptical of the government, who are already keen to the global cabal’s quest for total control—those who are wise to the new world order and all that that entails—are already predisposed to take the man at his word, because what he is saying aligns with their beliefs.

Extending this thought, those who share Monsat’s Christian worldview are also more likely to accept his theory as truth, largely because it aligns with prophecy. Beyond that, why would a brother lie about something so huge, right? Can’t you see he is trying to warn us about the Antichrist? Can’t you see he is defending God’s word and the Biblical account of creation? Surely this man is telling the truth!

What can be observed here, is that the Blue Beam narrative appeals to a broad swath of people, but for entirely different reasons. No doubt there is overlap between the camps, as many Christians are inherently skeptical of the government—though certainly not all—and many people who are fascinated by UFOs and aliens still retain a certain degree of religious reverence.

Conversely, there are a lot of atheists and agnostics in the public mix as well. There are plenty of people who believe that confirmation of alien life will finally obliterate the Biblical worldview, which I think is what Monsat was getting at.

Regardless, the supposed “space show in the sky” — which he claims will be “projected from satellites onto the sodium layer about 60 miles above the earth” — is meant to fulfill prophecies, relative to regional religions, before revealing to the world the new false Christ, which is apparently going to be some sort of future Buddha:

“The result of these deliberately staged events will be to show the world the new ‘christ,’ the new messiah, Maitreya [aka Future Buddha], for the immediate implementation of the new world religion.”

Pause.

This is a fantastic story, isn’t it? Can you imagine?!

Serge Monsat then claims that Project Blue Beam will use “tractor beams” to lift up an enormous number of people off the face of the earth, and “whisk the entire group into a never-never land” in order to simulate the rapture—and he is dead serious:

“We see tests of this device in the abduction of humans by those mysterious little alien greys who snatch people out of their beds and through windows into waiting “mother ships.”—Serge Monsat, 1994

Obviously, we each must reach our own conclusion on the probability of that actually happening. For now, I will suspend judgement and get to the point:

“The calculated resistance to the universal religion and the new messiah and the ensuing holy wars will result in the loss of human life on a scale never imagined before in all of human history.”

Let me ask you directly: do you think there will ever be a universal religion? Do you think it is actually possible to make everyone on the planet believe the same thing?

Personally, I do not believe that is possible. The notion seems incongruent with the nature of reality, and I don’t believe any space show in the sky is going to change that.

But that’s just me.

Let’s zoom out.

Pivoting away from the questionable Blue Beam narrative, I’d like to square off with some questionable religious narratives. I’m doing so, not to provoke a religious debate, but to draw parallels in human nature. We all believe in something.

And our personal beliefs are rooted in story, always.

It doesn’t matter how much evidence you can produce, it doesn’t matter how many experts you cite, regardless of your stance on religion and sacred texts, your beliefs are rooted in story—and so are mine—because that’s just the way that we’re wired.

Furthermore, we all believe our stories, and we will defend our stories as if our life depends on it, courtesy of that pesky psychological phenomenon known as ego.

Within this framework, it is not difficult to image a global Holy War breaking out when each religious sect watches the fulfillment of their respective prophecies playing out across the sky. Never in human history will each group have had more proof that what they believe is the one and only sacred truth.

It is also not difficult to imagine the utter dismay and hysteria that would ensue if and when these holographic projections flip the switch to reveal it’s really been aliens all along. Confusion and chaos would reign supreme, and people would be left desperate for answers. Thus, the stage would be set for acceptance of a new world religion and the global adoption of beliefs that were previously inconceivable.

That’s the story, and Monsat strongly emphasizes the critical importance of this particular component in the Blue Beam narrative:

“I’ll repeat that: Without a universal belief in the new age religion, the success of the new world order will be impossible!”

It’s worth considering. Without a universal belief in a new age religion, the success of the new world order would be impossible. Is that true? Could it be partly true?

I think about it through the lens of memetics. Some of you may recall that DARPA has developed Military Grade Memes that guarantee the propagation of an idea. Now, since it is scientifically possible to construct and disseminate infectious ideas, it is not beyond reason to speculate that a new “universal belief” could be formed.

But, setting aside my personal doubts, I’d point out that this universal belief, i.e. “the new age religion,” might actually be a different sort of religious belief, namely socialism. It is no secret that the Marxists, Fabians, and their commie ilk have long sought to make socialism a modern “scientific” religion.

As recently discussed in TR 645, the Fabians believe they “must make a religion of Socialism”—i.e. condition the masses to revere socialism with religious fervor—in order to hammer out the New World Order. This is all part of the “embedded social consciousness” that’s being used to transform how people view the world.

In simplest terms, this fundamental (scientific) transformation of human consciousness is achieved by changing people’s personal beliefs. In other words, those who are trying to drive social change are doing so by changing the stories we believe.

Put differently, they are attempting to replace one religious conviction with another. They are looking to replace Christianity, and other world religions, with the latest and greatest iteration of secular socialism. It’s a fascinating concept that has been well-developed by socialist thinkers for over a century.

For those looking to scratch that scholarly itch:

• The Religious Roots of Socialism

• Lenin on Socialism and Religion

• Socialism and Religion: Humanism into Marxism

• The Religion of Socialism

Serge Monsat claims that Project Blue Beam will usher in a new world religion that will ultimately amount to global worship of the Antichrist. In doing so, he is projecting his belief in Biblical prophecy, and reconciling it with a whole host of disturbing technologies that few know exist.

It’s a commendable thought experiment.

But, while I agree with his assessment that the new world order must be built upon certain universal beliefs, I do not believe global adoption of a new religion will ever be achieved—at least not in the classical sense. New ideas and convictions will be sown into the public consciousness, no doubt, but I do not believe everyone, everywhere is going to miraculously depart from previously held personal beliefs and worship a holographic entity being projected into the atmosphere 60 miles above the earth.

In my mind, it seems much more likely that global scale indoctrination will induce a near universal belief in socialism—and I believe that is the far greater threat.

But again, that’s just me.

Within all of this, I believe there is an opportunity to for us each to reflect on our own beliefs. We need not all believe the same things to be on the same team. Some will choose to believe in the Blue Beam narrative, others in Biblical prophecy, and many others in different stories altogether. That’s okay.

What’s important is that from time to time we evaluate our beliefs, pinpoint their origins, and do our best to reconcile our personal stories with objective reality.

Personally, I believe that we are in a global war for the hearts and minds of humanity. I believe that our consciousness is under direct and continuous attack. I believe that we are spiritual creatures, that spiritual assassination is a very real threat, and that spiritual awareness is the ultimate solution to societal woes.

I believe these truths can be deduced, logically, without invoking religious beliefs—but I also believe religious beliefs help fill in the gaps and flesh out our stories.

People believe because they want to believe—we believe because we need to believe.

The globalists have told us that we need to get over the idea that we have a mysterious soul, but I believe we need to embrace it and lean into the enigma within. What does it mean to be a human in the modern age? How might an alien invasion reshape our understanding of our own humanity? Is transhumanism our inevitable future?

There is a lot happening in the world, and we have an inherent need to make sense of it all. Contemplating timeless questions helps ground us in our shared humanity and it enriches our personal stories. In the end, we each much chose what to believe.

They cannot control us all. They cannot control my soul. They cannot control our choice.They cannot control the whole.

That’s my story, and I don’t believe some light show in the sky will ever change that.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Game on.

Over the last ten days or so, while lying low, I’ve received a lot of requests for my take on the mysterious drone situation and/or the potential alien invasion. Many who reached out have also inquired about my thoughts on Project Blue Beam, specifically whether or not this could be the opening scene in some spectacular global psyop.

The simple, unsatisfying, but honest answer is: I dunno.

I’m not sure what to make of it. I’ve been sifting through online footage, public commentary, formal press releases, and scouring decades of well-substantiated conspiracy theories, but I haven’t found anything particularly convincing.

Something weird is happening, that’s for sure, but what?

“Nothing nefarious, apparently.”—Says the Sock Puppet President

Whatever it is, I do believe it is a psyop of some sort, and it seems more likely than not that it is being orchestrated by the government. Why do I believe that?

• Because a major tactic of psychological warfare is to create confusion and anxiety.

• This then drives people to seek information and answers from “trusted” sources.

• And, given the laxidazical nature of the government’s response, I’d say they’re in on it.

Which brings me to Project Blue Beam.

Have you heard of Project Blue Beam?

I first unearthed Project Blue Beam back in TR 303 - What Are They Trying to Hide?, published February 2023. That report noted the following:

While some people have speculated that the “alien invasion” narrative is little more than a distraction… Edward Snowden claims the UFO hysteria is actually an “engineered distraction” from the bombshell report about the Baltic Sea Bombing of the Nord Stream pipelines—which was an act of war orchestrated by U.S. intelligence agencies prior to Russia ever invading Ukraine.

Meanwhile, the U.S. government is setting up a UFO Task Force to more fully and forcefully fleece the American people—utilizing their billion dollar budget to investigate the 510+ Unidentified Aerial Phenomenon that have been officially reported in recent years. Could there really be an alien invasion?

Others claim that whether they’re aliens or balloons, all this hype is really just meant to be a distraction from the impending global economic collapse.

Worse yet, some speculate that this is all part of a top-secret Project Blue Beam scheme—cooked up by the world’s secret societies, deployed by NASA, and designed to do nothing less than convince people that the alien invasion is the rapture itself, and thus allow the powers that be to take absolute control of a “fear-addled” populace.

TR 303 covers the project in more depth than I will regurgitate today, but I’d like to make clear at the outset: I’ve never been fully persuaded by the Blue Beam narrative. I’ve looked into it, I’ve dug around quite a bit, but there is just something too fantastic about it, something too improbable, too complex to make it feel plausible.

Though all the technologies do in fact exist to pull off a global psyop of such epic proportion, I simply cannot imagine it ever happening. Think it through: can you imagine every person on the planet being gripped by holographic projections in the sky, while simultaneously getting direct telepathic messages implanted in their heads—each in their own language, and according to their own religious creed?

It’s inconceivable.

And yet, according to Serge Monast, the great promulgator of the Project Blue Beam conspiracy, that is precisely what is expected to happen. Evidently, that’s the plan.

Quoting his somewhat elusive text:

“The second step in the NASA Blue Beam Project involves a gigantic ‘space show’ with three- dimensional optical holograms and sounds, laser projection of multiple holographic images to different parts of the world, each receiving a different image according to predominating regional national religious faith.

This new god’s voice will be speaking in all languages.”

Is it possible? Maybe.

BUT HERE’S THE THING:

Along with sounding unfeasible on its face, at least to the skeptical mind, I’ve scoured the internet and government archives for any mention of this so-called Blue Beam Project from NASA—and you know what I found? Nothing.

Could they have destroyed records of it? Sure, I suppose.

But intellectual honesty compels me to point out that making such wild allegations without providing a solid, verifiable primary source, smacks of b**t. Interestingly enough, even as I drilled down through Monsat’s own writing — by the way, here’s another link to his now infamous NASA’s Project Blue Beam: Fake Alien Invasion document — Monsat himself never provided a primary source.

He makes a lot of sensational claims, but he never gave any proof whatsoever that this was actually a NASA project. Unfortunately, anyone who did not immediately dismiss him as a nut, simply took him at his word. Why? Perhaps because his message and tone resonated with people who wanted to believe.

Think about how many people perenially get swept up into predictions about the rapture or other doomsday scenarios, and it’s easy to see what I mean.

Reading through his ramblings, I noticed there was just enough truth woven in, just enough verifiable fact, to give his unlikely predictions some level of plausibility.

That’s pretty much how conspiracy theories work, right?

Of corse, just to be fair, some conspiracy theories are not actually conspiracies at all. In fact, as you well know, many so-called “conspiracies” have been proven to be completely true, entirely substantiated by irrefutable evidence. Of course, that absolutely does not mean that all conspiracy theories are actually concealed truths, and if history is any indication, this distinction is often difficult to discern.

With that in mind, I’d like to note that Monsat’s language, his word choice, seems to deliberately push the buttons of people who are inherently suspicious of the government — i.e. patriots, conspiracy aficionados, and other rebellious peasants.

Consider this excerpt, for example:

“Government agencies and the corporations that work with them toward a new world order are prepared to promote anything that will help them achieve their objective of total social control. As for the question of why: For one thing, if you terrify the public and make them fear for their safety, they will allow you to implement draconian law enforcement practice, disarm them and keep extensive records on them, and they only have to tell you that it is all to protect you, of course.”

When I read that, my first thought was:

“YES! This guy gets it, he’s speaking my language, this guy knows what’s up!!

From there, Monsat goes on to talk at length about government research into mind control, all of which can be verified via unclassified government documents, and all of which further lends credibility to the Project Blue Beam speculation.

Those in the know have long been aware that governments around the world have been working on such technologies for decades. This is not conjecture or conspiracy, it is a cold hard FACT — but,I wouldn’t have believe it myself, had I not stumbled upon our own government’s space-based weapons sytems for “mood management” and “mind control” of persons and populations in the Congressional archives:

That juicy tidbit was first reported back in TR 401, which also covered government studies on weather modification and some of the CIA’s research into psychic warfare. Persuing this research led me to a deeper understanding of the ongoing assualt on human consciousness (TR 402), which was then further fleshed out and substantiated by the mainstream disclosure of China’s “neurostrike brain weapons,” as reported in TR 403—all of which dovetails perfectly with Project Blue Beam.

BUT…

That absolutely does NOT mean that Monsat’s theory is above reproach. There are many questionable assertions throughout his writing, and some of them are flat-out wrong. For example, Monsat claims that before the year 2000, all cash and paper and plastic money will have been spent and replaced by global digital currency:

“A lot of people ask when this is going to happen and how they will accomplish the visions of the Night of a Thousand Stars, and the events that will point to the days when it will begin.

According to the many reports we have received, we believe it will begin with some kind of worldwide economic disaster. Not a complete crash, but enough to allow them to introduce some kind of inbetween currency before they introduce their electronic cash to replace all paper or plastic money. … (so far so good, right?)

But to implement the worldwide electronic money system, everyone in the world who might have money in the future, will have to have a way to transfer money electronically. Before that time, everyone will have spent, before the year 2,000, all of their cash, reserves and assets.”

Everyone will have spent all of their cash before the year 2000?

Obviously that didn’t happen. But, you see, that’s the problem with predictions—some will say Monsat was correct in theory, and only wrong on dates. Fine. Fair enough. Regardless, surely we can agree, at the very least, that Serge Monsat had a wild imagination and was a bit over-confident in promoting such shocking conjectures.

Beyond that, do you see what happened there?

All of the sudden, we’re left bickering about dates and probabilities, rather than scrutinizing the legitimacy of one man’s obscure and outlandish claims.

The truth is, plenty of people have ripped apart Project Blue Beam and determined, in their minds, that it is a bonafide conspiracy theory. Unfortunately, the majority of them have also tossed the baby out with the bathwater, overlooking the authenticity of the very real, very scary technologies that Monsat suggests will be used. They casually dismiss Project Blue Beam as nothing more than a ludicrous conspiracy, without acknowledging the possibility that, however improbable, it could in fact happen.

While digging around, I found some internet sleuths positing that Monsat was actually copying storylines from Star Trek episodes that were released just a few years before his 1994 publication, furthermore suggesting that he may have been getting fed this Blue Beam narrative from Deep State spooks who were looking to cast doubt and delegitimize revelations about these disturbing technologies.

But I’d take it with a grain of salt.

Personally, I am not convinced that this has anything to do with the drone sightings that have mysteriously captured the public’s attention in recent weeks. While I cannot entirely dismiss the possibility that Project Blue Beam is legit, I really, REALLY don’t think that’s what’s going on—and yet, there’s something there.

Consider the converging vectors:

• UFO sightings have been declassified and publicly discussed at an increasing rate over the last several years, potentially priming the public for full disclosure.

• Trump recently said the drones are UFOs, and that they (the government) know exactly what the hell is going on, they are just withholding the information—potentially to prime public confusion and anxiety, or, potentially to save face, or, potentially to form and feed a larger narrative.

• Using an alien invasion as pretext for a global war to unite humanity against a common enemy, as insane as it sounds, is obviously not a new idea. This could also potentially provide cover for global economic collapse and the subsequent adoption of global digital currency, as Monsat suggests. That said, the globalists could certainly achieve this via less elaborate schemes.

• The election of Donald Trump has yet to be fully exploited or opposed by the global cabal. There is no doubt in my mind that they’ve got something up their sleeve, and I wouldn’t rule out them using a staged alien invasion or false flag nuclear war to keep Trump out of office. That said, it still feels unlikely.

I think, perhaps, the whole point is to keep us guessing.

Which leaves us to wonder: are we really facing an alien invasion? Is this just the start of a very elaborate hoax? Could these actually be adversarial drones from Iran or China, as some experts have speculated? Or, are these drones all being lawfully and legally operated, as our own government has bizarrely suggested?

Perhaps they are sniffing for missing radio active material, as has been reported?

What the hell is really going on in the skies?

In my opinion, we will not know the answer until it presents itself. It is not by accident that public attention has been so expertly captured and trained on these drones. It is not a coincidence that the public is being kept in the dark.

Personally, I am curious what this theater is meant to obscure.

One thing we can know for sure, is if every media outlet on the planet starts shrieking about an alien invasion, and all of the sudden people everywhere start hearing the voice of God in their head, it’s probably a good time to pour a stiff drink. There is no doubt we are experiencing next level deception, and honestly, we ain’t seen nothing yet.

Therefore: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Take Three.

Those words spilled out due to the multiple drafts of TR 650 that are sitting in my dashboard. I usually don’t have drafts, as each report is typically a stream of thought analysis on the information being exhumed and consumed during my daily research.

That said, having recently been gifted a treasure trove of historical books and pamphlets, and with this being the six-hundred-and-fiftieth Torch Report (which for me feels special), I have resisted the temptation to rush out and publish TR 650, prematurely, to allow adequate reflection so I can deliver the good stuff.

Thank you for your patience.

As I’m sure you know, the political circus this week has been swirling around Trump’s cabinet picks, the squawk about Biden pardoning his crackhead son (and now Dr. Fauci), and the short-lived excitement over South Korea declaring “emergency martial law” — allegedly to protect the incumbent government from the threat of communist forces coming out of North Korea — but it was all over the next day.

“Frankly dear, I don’t give a damn.”

None of this news has been compelling enough to merit comment, so I’ll leave it to the daily pundits to dabble in the drivel. I see these events as theater and distraction, and prefer to point attention toward the bigger picture of things in motion that are set to massively impact our lives in the coming months and years.

To properly frame what I’m about to say, which is grounded in government documents and the recently received treasure trove, I’d like to thread together two concurrent themes: 1) the ongoing threat of economic collapse, and 2) “the commies are taking over the world!!”

For what it’s worth, I believe the hubbub headlines about South Korea declaring an emergency over the threat of communist forces was an intentional head fake, meant to delegitimize the actual threat and reinforce the public’s ignorance on the subject.

More on that in a moment.

Regarding the ongoing threat of economic collapse, I recently heard Dr. Ron Paul being interviewed by Charlie Kirk. Wise as he is, Dr. Paul was simply rehashing things that he’s been saying for decades. While I generally agree with his insight, what struck me is that somehow the big catastrophic collapse never seems to materialize.

As I was digging through the treasure trove, there was a document titled “Economic Collapse of US at Hand,” written by Dr. John Coleman. Coleman, whom I’d never heard of, turns out to be a prolific author and ardent defender of American values. I found his Conspirators’ Hierarchy in the CIA’s library, which says this:

“In my career as a professional intelligence officer, I had many occasions to access highly classified documents, but during service as a political science officer… I had the opportunity to view a series of top secret classified documents which were unusually explicit. What I saw filled me with anger and resentment and launched me on a course from which I have not deviated, namely to uncover what power it is that controls and manages the British and United States governments.”

Dr. Ron Paul and Dr. John Coleman are both gentleman with impeccable credentials. They, in my mind, are both highly qualified sources with unique insights that are not afforded to the general population—and both are adamant that the United States has long been beholden to international bankers, courtesy of the Federal Reserve.

Both believe that U.S. economic collapse is inevitable.

This truth, this narrative, has been alive and well for well over 50 years. And, as we were recently discussing in TR 644 - On Cooked Books, Conspiracy Theories, & Russia's Ominous Warning, the narrative of economic collapse is still very active today.

And yet, again, it never seems to happen. It’s not that it won’t ever happen, it’s just that despite the best predictions of highly qualified experts, it never does.

What’s up with that?

In his numerous writings, Dr. Coleman takes a hammer to the naive notion that the U.S. and British governments are operating in the best interest of their people. He calls out the many subversive forces that have long infiltrated our once noble institutions, naming the Club of Rome, the Fabians, the Bilderbergers, and several secret societies among the many culprits.

As a side note, while these names may be familiar to many in the audience, they are still largely unknown to the public at large. Personally, I hadn’t heard any of them until I stumbled upon their dark, insidious schemes throughout my research. (Relevant reports linked above.)

As for why predictions of complete economic collapse are perpetually inaccurate, the reason I believe, is simply a matter of timing. If one were to take for granted the global cabal is conspiring to institute a New World Order, it is understood that at some point there will be a global digital currency, linked to global digital IDs—and the long overdue economic collapse is a necessary prerequisite for that to happen.

The circumstances for adoption must be carefully orchestrated, and they’ve been laying the groundwork for this transition for decades. Along with the recent explosion of WorldCoin and WorldID, some may also recall that the Federal Reserve launched their own FedNow system in 2023. In other words, the transition is underway.

These facts have been documented and discussed in the following reports:

The explosion of WorldCoin and the subsequent accusations of financial espionage were thoroughly covered in TR 466 - The Trouble With the Bubbles, which noted that despite the lies that Biden’s economy was booming, the U.S. is actually in an epic financial bubble that is set to pop whenever the hell the cabal decides to pop it.

Economic collapse would provide the perfect opportunity for this historic transition—especially if the World Bank’s bailout was contingent upon adoption of WorldCoin.

Connecting the dots to the recent b**t narrative that Trump is inheriting a “remarkable economy,” it would appear that the stage has been set. Perhaps we will see this transition transpire sooner than later, but who the hell knows.

If Dr. Coleman and Dr. Paul couldn’t call it, I won’t even venture a try.

Instead, I want to circle back to the very real communist subversion and in-your-face Marxist Cultural Revolution that is currently destroying America. This too has been well-understood for a very long time, and we have been warned repeatedly that this is the greatest threat of all to our constitutional republic.

Interestingly enough, earlier this week I stumbled across a report on international communism that was compiled by Senior Research Staff at the CIA, published June 18, 1959. It was titled, “The Socialist Commonwealth of Nations: Pattern for Communist World Organization.”

This 77-page report meticulously documents the rise of communism around the world, and then bizarrely suggests that efforts to globally organize went defunct shortly after the Third Communist International group dissolved in 1943.

Of course, communism was still destroying civilization and decimating humanity in various parts of the world throughout the remainder of the 20th century, as history attests, killing millions of peasants in the process. Indeed, communism is still seeking to devour everything good in life, all around the world today, mark my words.

But what caught me was the date, 1943, because it coincides with organizing the UN.

If one were to accept the CIA’s conclusion, the international commie cabal just sort of evaporated into thin air—and, coincidentally, this just sort of happened at exactly the same time Franklin D. Roosevelt and Winston Churchill were hammering out the charter to the United Nations, alongside Joseph Stalin and Comrade Mao.

(Details on that in a future report.)

Those who have been with me may remember my astonishment when I first realized that the United Nations was founded by a bunch of communists. It was mind-blowing, but once the dots were connected, I couldn’t help but see it for what it was.

This is the organization being used to build the New World Order.

If you have yet to connect the dots, read this report:

What must be made abundantly clear, is that this is all easily verifiable, historical fact. When I say that the communists are taking over the world, I’m not joking. This is not a conspiracy, nor is it hyperbole or speculation. This is a very urgent reality that everyone needs to grasp, because the commie cabal is very near their end game.

Layered upon the historical precedent, while patterns of communist organization persist and abound, I believe the greatest threat today lies in the fact that modern technologies (i.e. algorithms and artificial intelligence) have been weaponized to advance this cause. Whereas the old school commie agents had to infiltrate various groups to exploit emotional vulnerabilities and establish the socialist narrative, this process has now been automated and accelerated in incomprehensible ways.

In essence, the global cabal is using the tried and true tactics of emotional manipulation—hijacking the predisposition for sympathy to drive pro-socialist behavioral change, while simultaneously stirring up intergroup hostilities—to organize hordes of heavily indoctrinated useful idiots on a global scale.

This is how the battle for democracy is won.

This is how freedom gets defeated.

By building “political will” and organizing the minions against the archaic ideas enshrined in our constitution (i.e. free speech, the right to bear arms, etc.), the powers that be are driving the herd of humanity ever closer to the edge of a socialist abyss.

Personally, I believe we are closer to the edge of that abyss today than ever before.

Americans need to realize the election of Donald Trump is but a speed bump to the globalists’ progress. To believe otherwise would be woefully shortsighted. Per TR 642 - Putting Politics into Perspective, as Teddy Roosevelt was pointing out over 100 years ago:

“Behind the ostensible government sits enthroned an invisible government owing no allegiance and acknowledging no responsibility to the people.”

This is what we are up against. This is precisely what Dr. Coleman and others have sought to expose, and it is in this vein, in lieu of drive by political commentary, that I will continue to research and expose these dark forces for what they are.

Thank you for joining me on this learning journey!

Please like, subscribe, spread the word, and remember:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Like I was saying…

In yesterday’s report about how starving children are being used to advance the globalists’ depopulation agenda—which sounds crazy, I know—there was a brief foray into the psychology of sympathy and how it is being used to control people.

Beyond making people feel like “good humans,” sympathy makes people feel morally superior and can become emotionally addicting. I pointed to the woke brigade of useful idiots and social justice warriors as an in-your-face example:

“These well-meaning morons have been taught to create injustice in their minds, which stimulates sympathy and fuels their sense of moral superiority. It’s a head trip, but in their emotionally charged world, the injustice is real.”

Today, as if by some remarkable cosmic coincidence, we find this:

NYT & Bloomberg Bury Rutgers Study Showing DEI Makes People Hostile

Zerohedge sums it up nicely:

Corporate media outlets haveburied, downplayed, or otherwise shelved a new study which reveals that "diversity, equity, and inclusion" (DEI) policies cause people to become 'hostile' - essentially seeing racism where none exists.

The new study from the Network Contagion Research Institute (NCRI) and Rutgers University found that people exposed to DEI talking points about race, religion and gender form intergroup hostility and authoritarian attitudes towards others.

It’s fascinating that public indoctrination, via DEI policies, is driving “intergroup hostility” and “authoritarian attitudes,” but it’s not at all surprising. The group that conducted the study was so shocked by the outcome, they nearly tripled the sample size and ran it again, only to reconfirm the same results.

Participants who were fed the DEI narrative became increasingly hostile and wanted to “punish the offenders,” who, by design, had literally done nothing wrong. There was not even a whiff of racism in the study, except the DEI.

The conclusion is compelling:

“[DEI indoctrinated participants] were more likely to want to harm people who did nothing, due to their own imaginations.”

I suppose this might be considered the dark side of sympathy. The minions have been trained to imagine injustice, and in response, they want to harm people and punish the offenders with an authoritarian fist. Scary.

Of course, being the curious and skeptical peasant that I am, I couldn’t help but feel like this is not by accident. I suspect the powers that be, who are pushing DEI globally, have known damn-good-and-well that DEI would drive intergroup hostility. In fact, I suspect that the programs have been deployed for exactly that purpose.

In other words, those pushing the woke agenda are intentionally aggravating a bunch of indoctrinated punks, cultivating “authoritarian attitudes” and priming them to be hostile against anyone who denies their delusions. What could possibly go wrong?

Sleuthing out my suspicion, I ran a quick search and was shock at the top results:

Not only were the top results government-funded studies into the connection between empathy, sympathy, and aggression, but right there in front of me was exactly what I had suspected: The Dialectic Between Empathy and Violence: An Opportunity…

I’ve intentionally dropped the last few words of that title to emphasize a few points:

• Any time the word “dialectic” pops up, think Marxism.

• Exploiting the dialectic between empathy and violence provides Marxists with an opportunity.

• Marxists, who are largely behind DEI, Black Lives Matter, etc., are then positioned to provoke open hostilities and drive their Cultural Revolution.

It’s all there in black and white—mind the pun.

We’ve covered dialectics as it relates to the current culture war in prior reports:

TR 333 covers how the Hegelian Dialectic has directly shaped Americans’ perspectives for decades, and links this directly to Deep State shenanigans (the Family Jewels, MKULTRA, etc.), as well as to the global cabal’s eugenics agenda, UNESCO, and—surprise, surprise—the United Nations’ Food & Agriculture Organization.

Those who have been with me on this learning journey may recall that the FAO also serves to “help the emergence of a single world culture,” by controlling the food supply in order to create behavioral change—which is precisely what I was getting at yesterday, regarding how the globalists are using starving children to achieve this.

Also in that report is the friendly reminder that “global education” is rooted in the “delicate task” of developing dissatisfaction—and those are their words, not mine.

If you are unfamiliar with all of this, there is much to learn. However, for today I’d like to drill down on the intentionally exploited connection between sympathy and anger. We know that it’s been heavily studied, and we know that it’s being heavily exploited, but how exactly are people’s minds being hijacked by DEI, and more importantly, what in the hell can we do about it?

The science of how it all works is immensely complex, but drawing from the Royal Society’s investigation into the connection between these two emotions, we find a fairly straightforward explanation. After noting how anger can be elicited by “unfair resource allocations,” prompting retaliation and punishment, they spell it out:

As communicative displays, demonstrations of anger are governed by display rules; the child is socializedso that they learn when it is appropriate to display the emotion. Some social circumstances permit the display of anger, while others do not.

Emphasis added.

DEI policies are “socializing” people of all ages, teaching them that it is okay to display anger and become hostile toward the perceived oppressors.

Many studies have linked empathy and sympathy to “prosocial” behavior—which I read as “pro socialist” behavior—while other studies have shown how these emotions can also fuel “emotional contagion.”

You put the lime in the coconut and shake it all up… and voilà!

Welcome to American campuses today.

Pouring through the literature to better wrap my head around how this is happening, I was astounded at how nuanced and thorough the understanding of emotional interplay actually is. My mind leaps toward the possibilities unleashed by feeding this knowledge to super-intelligent machines, which can then deploy this science via Algorithmic Social Interventions to drive “pro socialist” behavioral change.

It’s all happening as we speak, but alas, I’ll try to stay on topic.

When I stumbled upon this chart, everything fell into place:

In a simple and yet profound display, the aggression-compassion continuum demonstrates exactly why DEI is driving hostility and aggression. DEI is instilling mental constructs of cognitive and emotional opposition to perceived injustices.

This moves an individual or group’s emotions from apathy to antipathy, animosity, and hostility, which inevitably and eventually will lead to emotional outbursts of anger.

To the naive and uninitiated mind, there is apathy about these “critical” issues. They didn’t realize that America was founded by a bunch of racist capitalist pigs who intentionally established a system to oppress women and minorities so they could enrich themselves and spread their imperialistic white supremacy around the world.

If you don’t know, you don’t care… but once you do know, once you’ve been awakened to this injustice courtesy of some b*t DEI class, well then, antipathy and animosity are sure to follow. The woke do not like the great white oppressors, and they strongly* dislike the capitalist pigs who are destroying the planet.

This intense dislike (of an erroneous idea) naturally leads to the desire to oppose the imperialistic white supremacists who are using their system of oppression to keep the colored-folx mired in their inequitable state of misery. Something must be done, thinks the woke mind, which becomes filled with unhinged hostility and aggression.

Indoctrinated thoughts lead to indoctrinated feelings, which then leads to indoctrinated behavior—all of which is completely detached from reality.

That said, it is critical to realize that the proponents of Critical Race Theory, DEI, and the rest of the woke nonsense understand exactly how this works. These militant Marxists have weaponized the process to advance their ongoing efforts to “destroy all aspects of existing society,” per the Communist Manifesto.

And again, it cannot be overemphasized, these same strategies and mindsets have already been programmed into the algorithms that are increasingly impacting society as a whole. The woke mind virus is very much digital, and that is a major problem.

Think about how much time the average person is plugged into their screen, checking their social media feeds, scanning the news, watching videos, or whatever.

Understand that the algorithms have been specifically programmed to exploit loopholes in human psychology, and drive prosocial behavioral change.

The more time spent plugged in, the greater the degree of change in one’s mind, emotions, and behavior. Worldviews are changed without notice.

This is happening on a global scale.

Worse yet, with the expanding digitization of society comes ever greater degrees of disconnect from the natural world, as well as less and less direct interaction with other human beings. More and more people are becoming increasingly isolated, dwelling more in the digital world than in the real world.

The boundaries of reality become increasingly blurred.

Imaginations run wild, projecting prolific injustices.

People become hostile because they believe the world is a hostile place, and a growing percentage become compelled to burn the whole place down. Authoritarian attitudes take charge, demanding compliance and the eradication of dissent.

History has seen it all before.

Don’t underestimate the degree to which people have been indoctrinated, and don’t think for a second they won’t act on their emotions. They have been primed for a time such as this, and even though the political theater seems to indicate a peaceful transition of power is officially underway, I highly doubt we’ve seen the full force of the cognitive and emotional opposition to Making America Great Again.

Hostile indoctrination is not so easily undone.

RESIST WE MUST!!

PS: I hope you all have a very wonderful Thanksgiving!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s talk about it.

Have you ever been so hungry that your stomach actually hurt? Have you ever been so desperate for a morsel of food, that you’d be willing to kill for it? Have you ever been so deprived of sustenance that you lost your civilized mind and once again became an animal driven by the instinct to survive?

Chances are, probably not.

Personally, I have made the discipline of fasting part of my life’s journey. I have fasted many times, sustaining on nothing but water for 6 to 10 days, or more—and even at that, I’ve never felt that sort of hunger or desperation. Perhaps that’s why my mind has been chewing on all the commercials and advertisements that come with this time of year, put out by organizations that are begging for support to “feed the community.”

There’s something there.

I know it may seem callous, and it may even be off-putting to question the sincerity of these programs, especially this time of year, but something just doesn’t sit right. There are hundreds, if not thousands of organizations working across the country (and all around the world), ostensibly working to feed the millions of people who, for whatever reason, appear incapable of feeding themselves.

That’s great.

But with all of this time and effort being invested, with all of the food donations, all the financial support and the countless volunteer hours, why does the problem seem to be getting worse? With all of the nonprofits, global NGOs, and direct government funding, why is “hunger” such a sustained and growing problem?

Are you aware that we are facing a “startling hunger crisis” in America today? Did you know that according to government reports, there has been an “alarming rise” in hunger in recent years? Consider the damning headlines:

• The 2024 USDA Food Security Report: An Alarming Rise in Hunger

• USDA Food Security Report Highlights Startling Hunger Crisis in America

• The Growing Hunger Crisis in America - American University

• Millions of families in the U.S. experience food insecurity, NPR report

• The Hunger Stats That Shames America - Newsweek

Sounds terrible, right?

According to Feeding America, the problem is so bad that 100% of counties in the United States are struggling with “food insecurity,” more than 47 million Americans are currently facing hunger, and, allegedly, 1 in 5 children aren’t getting enough to eat.

As a brief aside, it’s worth noting this do-gooder organization claims that “inequality” is a “root cause of food insecurity,” specifically because of the “long history of racism and discrimination in the United States.” Keep that in mind.

When you think about the “hunger stats that shame America”—to quote Newsweek— how does it make you feel? When you hear about children going hungry or not having access to food, how does it make you feel? When you see the bloated bellies of starving children in Africa, how does it make you feel?

Chances are, as a human being hard-wired for empathy, when confronted with images of starving children, you feel sympathy. When you hear about kids going hungry right here in America, you feel sympathy. With every radio ad, fundraising letter, and public service announcement begging for your support, you feel sympathy.

This is not by accident.

I’ve covered the insidious nature of sympathy, as it relates to emotional manipulation, in several prior reports. In a nutshell, according to psychologists, provoking sympathy promotes “prosocial” behavior. By pushing our biological buttons, the mind becomes primed for “embedded social consciousness,” which cultivates a socialist impulse.

** I want to emphasize that there is a hard science to this, as documented here:

THAT SAID,it feels prudent to contrast this narrative of a “startling hunger crisis” with the most recent data released by the CDC, which indicates over 20% of adults in America are now obese. Worse yet, in nearly half the states in our nation, the obesity rate is actually over 35%, meaning that 1 in 3 people are grossly overweight.

Tell me: how does that data reconcile with the “hunger that shames” America?

How are we to make sense of the discrepancy?

Could it be there is something else going on here?

Let’s zoom out.

It can be difficult to disarm sympathy. Sympathy makes us feel good about ourselves. It makes us feel like good humans, and it makes us feel superior in some subtle ways. Beyond that, as with all other emotions, sympathy can become addicting.

The never ending and increasingly bizarre crusades of social justice warriors provides a prime example. These well-meaning morons have been taught to create injustice in their minds, which stimulates sympathy and fuels their sense of moral superiority. It’s a head trip, but in their emotionally charged world, the injustice is real.

It’s real because they can feel it.

They feel the sympathy, whether it’s legitimately warranted or not.

This emotional displacement of reality is something that we all have to deal with as humans. It can be tricky, because our emotions are real. The emotions we feel are molecules being released into the blood stream, so we cannot help but feel them.

BUT, the stories that are stimulating the emotions may or may not be real.

That means our emotions may or may not be rooted in reality. The feelings we experience may be real, but the emotion may be based on false assumptions, provocative propaganda, or flat out lies. Unfortunately, it is precisely this sort of false emotion—feeling a certain way about something, based on false information—that the masters of manipulation seek to exploit.

Hence the cunning use of so much sympathy in socialist propaganda.

Which brings me back to the starving children.

Are there really millions upon millions of starving children in America? Really?

More broadly, is there really an alarming hunger crisis in our largely obese nation?

Or, could it be that this narrative is being used for a more nefarious purpose?

Rationally speaking, even though we’ve been completely inundated with coordinated public messaging campaigns compelling us to donate here, there, and everywhere; even though everywhere we turn we are being told there are people in need, who desperately need our help; even though this time of year we find our heart strings getting yanked in so many different directions, we should still be curious enough to ask: what’s this really all about?

Something doesn’t add up.

IF there are so many hungry people, WHY?

Why, if there are so many different government programs, school programs, church programs, corporate programs and nonprofit programs, is there a hunger crisis? Why, if there has been a sustained global effort to reduce hunger all around the world for decades, has it only gotten worse? What the hell is going on here?!

Globally speaking, the United Nation’s World Food Program tells us that some 25,000 people starve to death each day, and that 9 million people die every year from hunger.

Just as Feeding America claimed the root causes of the hunger crisis in the United States are inequality and systemic racism, the United Nations goes on to excoriate the bourgeois, essentially blaming global starvation on heartless, greedy, capitalist pigs:

“There is 400 trillion dollars’ worth of wealth on the earth today, and the fact that 9 million people die from hunger every year… Shame on us.

In the height of COVID, billionaires’ net worth increase was $5.2 billion per day. At the same time 24,000 people die per day from hunger... Shame on us.

Every hour the net worth of billionaires during the height of COVID was a substantial $216 million per hour. Yet 1000 people per hour were dying from hunger… Shame on us.”

The moral of the story here is the need for a socialist redistribution of wealth, in case that wasn’t clear. Do you think it is just a coincidence that these organizations are all harping on the same narrative, screeching that inequality is the root cause of food insecurity? Do you think they just made that story up themselves?

I believe there is something else going on here.

Think about it: what is the opposite of “food insecurity”?

ANSWER: food security.

But what is “food security” anyway — and how might it be obtained?

When the globalists use the word security, think control. This is the commie tactic of using words with a “hidden, higher meaning” that is opposite of what’s being said. Thus, properly translated, “food security” means control over the food supply.

That’s how they plan to “secure” all the food.

This is why the UN called on world leaders “to make food security a reality for all,” for the purpose of building a “healthier planet through better food systems.”

Note how controlling the food supply (i.e. food systems) has been connected with saving the planet. This is a central pillar in their plan for total global control.

Control the food supply, control the peasants. Period.

Of course, they’ve been selling this plan for decades, as if it’s necessary and for the greater good, skillfully preying upon human sympathy to elicit public support to “feed the world”—and the majority of people have bought it hook, line, and sinker.

Strategically speaking, years of localized propaganda and cyclical sympathy campaigns have been steadily building public support for the broader agenda.

Ultimately, I believe the agenda is a money laundering operation that funds socialist policies at the national and subnational levels. These policies, currently packaged as the UN Sustainable Development Goals, are designed to give governments control over the food supply (and every other aspect of our lives).

Those promoting this scheme mentally justify it in two ways:

• They believe that only the government can feed all the poor people on the planet.

• They believe the government must save the planet by enforcing “sustainable” diets.

The first premise stands in service to the second. The global elites don’t care so much about starving people, they care about controlling the food supply to save the planet. They use the starving people to elicit the emotional support for the overarching scheme, which is reducing and controlling the human population.

Says the World Food Program Executive Director, David Beasley:

“If we’re struggling today to [feed] the 7.7 billion people, imagine having 10, 11, 12 billion people on earth.”

Remember, in their own words, they are trying to “proportion” the population, and they’re convinced they “just don’t need” the majority of meat-eating peasants.

This is the Anti-human Agenda.

In the twisted minds of the global cabal, “better food systems” will lead to a “healthier planet.” Having a healthier planet necessarily means reducing the population and controlling the food supply. This is all part of Earth System Governance, for the record, but the underlying thrust is eugenics and depopulation, I assure you.

“…if everybody in the world consumed resources at the rate people in the United States, we would require the equivalent of more than five earths to satisfy their needs.”—UNICEF

As we gather to feast with friends and family for Thanksgiving this year, we should be grateful for the abundance in our lives. We should be thankful for the little things, relish the completely unsustainable indulgence, and enjoy it while it lasts.

If the globalists get their way, we won’t be feasting for long.

Enjoy your celebrations, and remember:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s jump in.

This week has been a heads-down, get ‘er done kind of week—the kind of week where I’ve paid little attention to the news, done drastically less reading and research, and poured myself into the practical projects that needed to be prioritized.

There is something honestly refreshing about physical labor, working up a sweat, and producing results you can look back at the end of the day and appreciate. It’s tangible. It’s real. It’s something that no one can take away from you. You know, the good stuff.

I’ve caught some political commentary while on the road this week, some of which was mildly interesting and entertaining, but none of which I felt like had any real substance. Now, not wanting to diminish the offerings of pundits like Glenn Beck, Dan Bongino, or Lars Larson—they serve an important role, and certainly add value to the conversation—I would like to take a shot at explaining the sense of lacking.

Mind you, I’m coming at this from the angle of the many thousands of hours of research that have been compiled in the last 646 reports, so my perspective may be somewhat unique… and take it with a grain of salt, because I am only a peasant… but it seems to me like most the pundits are really missing the bigger picture.

As a result, most Americans are missing the bigger picture as well.

Rush Limbaugh used to mock the “drive by media,” which was understood to mean ABC, CNN, CBS, MSNBC, Fox, and so on. This is the mainstream, lamestream media, which many have started calling the Legacy Media. As you know, these are the networks that dish up the spoon-fed drivel that passes for news nowadays.

They also rubber stamp and repeat ad nauseam the state-sanctioned narrative and globalist propaganda that scrolls across their teleprompters, courtesy of the onerous Trusted News Initiative. Cumulatively, this biologically rewires public perception.

If you’d like to deepen your understanding of how this works, start here:

THAT SAID, while we might realize all of this and rightly point to the mainstream media as being a complicit enabler of government corruption and an ideological enemy of American ideals, what seems to escape consideration is the fact that these Trusted News outlets are still setting the tone and topic of conversation.

Listen to your favorite pundits. Check out the articles at your favorite conservative repository. Notice how the conversation invariably links back to what’s in the news.

The curious mind might wander astray and ask: what’s not in the news?

Well, for starters, Rockefeller’s Unfinished Agenda is not in the news—along with the many other topics covered by yours truly here at The Torch Report.

By the way, for those who are not inclined to click through to the primary source, that Unfinished Agenda, produced by the Rockefeller Brothers Fund and submitted to the U.S. Congress in 1977, as “The Citizen’s Policy Guide to Environmental Issues,” directly demonstrates the bigger picture that I believe is being woefully neglected.

There is an unfinished agenda that seeks to implement a fourfold program to reduce the human population by taking control of the international food supply. If one were to read through the entire 200 pages of proposed solutions, you’d realize this agenda has been repackaged and is now being promoted as so-called Sustainable Development—aka the UN Sustainable Development Goals, or more simply, Agenda 2030.

Regardless what they call it, the goal is all about total control of a reduced population.

But alas, that’s not the point of today’s report.

You might be wondering what any of this has to do with the Evil Russian Tyrant launching hypersonic missiles or the belligerent Biden administration pushing us ever closer to World War 3, and we’ll get there, but first…

Let’s zoom out.

I’m sure you have heard of the Overton Window, but do you know the formal definition? According to the Mackinac Center for Public Policy, the think tank that actually developed the concept back in the ‘90s, here’s the meat of it:

“The Overton Window is a model for understanding how ideas in society change over time and influence politics. The core concept is that politicians are limited in what policy ideas they can support — they generally only pursue policies that are widely accepted throughout society as legitimate policy options. These policies lie inside the Overton Window. Other policy ideas exist, but politicians risk losing popular support if they champion these ideas. These policies lie outside the Overton Window.”

Mackinac goes on to explain that the Overton Window is constantly expanding, contracting, and shifting this way and that. Still, this narrow slice of perspective has tremendous influence on what gets talked about around the dinner table, and what doesn’t. This results in very few people being aware of what besets us.

Here’s how it works, much to the detriment of having a well-rounded world view or being able to organize political opposition to the overarching unfinished agenda:

• Politicians are restricted to supporting “legitimate” policies that are “widely accepted” throughout society—the ideas inside the Overton Window.

• Any politician that tries to champion any “other” policy ideas risks losing “popular support” and getting tossed out the proverbial window.

• The mainstream media covers what the popular politicians talk about.

• The pundits talk about what the media and the politicians talk about.

• The public talks about what the pundits, media, and politicians talk about.

Thus, everyone within the same Overton Window is essentially talking about the same things, none of which may actually be relevant, important, or even real. It creates circular thinking and obscures the bulk of what’s actually happening in the world.

This is relative, of course, to geography and demographics, but on a broader level, those who control the flow of information, along with those mysterious wizards who conjure up policy recommendations (like the Rockefellers), are carefully controlling the Overton Window in order to stimulate and shift public sentiment.

This is the power of The Great Narrative.

For politicians, whose entire livelihood is derived from popular support, the psychological pressure is immense: fall in line, talk about what we tell you to talk about, or else we’ll turn the public against you, take away your moment of fame, and push you into obscurity, or worse, ridicule you into a lifetime of shame and regret.

However, even though the Overton Window conceptually applies to politicians, it practically applies to us all. We can all succumb to the same psychological pressures, in big ways and small. When is the last time you championed an unpopular or new idea within your social circles?

It’s easier said than done, for sure.

With that in mind, I’d like to turn back to the current lack of substance in conservative political commentary. It is my opinion that large platforms should be leveraging their reach to inform the public about the most important issues and the most pressing threats facing humanity today, rather than simply regurgitating the most popular talking points relative to the ongoing political theater.

If asked to quickly prioritize the most important topics, I’d say this:

• Talk about the ominous threat of weaponized artificial intelligence.

• Talk about the lasting neurological impact of psychological warfare.

• Talk about the power of infectious ideas to spread throughout society.

• Talk about the sick and twisted plot to reduce the human population.

• Talk about local resistance to global tyranny.

That’s just off the cuff, so let me flesh it out a little:

• Weaponized AI is the most important threat because it is being used around the globe for many nefarious purposes, not the least of which is direct election interference. While largely being under the radar, weaponized AI is currently being used to rapidly accelerate the globalists’ overarching agenda. FACT.

• Psychological warfare has been around for ages, but Fifth Generation Warfare and other unconventional modern methods actually aim to take control of the brain at the biological level, exploiting neuroplasticity to rewire the public psyche and produce an imperceptible transformation of human consciousness.

• Infectious ideas like “the woke mind virus” are no longer random tidbits of social jargon, like a catchy slogan or hook line from a song. People should know that the power of Military Grade Memes (courtesy of DARPA) literally guarantees an idea will spread, which makes propaganda more powerful than a hypersonic missile.

• One of the sickest ideas out in the world today, is that there are too many humans and that our modern lifestyles are destroying the planet. Once this infectious idea has taken hold, it becomes the moral justification for the heinous depopulation agenda, decades in the making, that is underway as we speak.

• The only solution to saving the planet, according to infected minds, is total control over a reduced population. There have been very powerful people working for a really long time to achieve this “unfinished agenda,” and even though it’s not in the news, this agenda has already infiltrated your hometown, and it’s already transforming your way of life, I guarantee it. That’s why local resistance is a must.

In the most succinct sense, this is top-down control of our everyday lives. It’s already happening in more ways than we could possibly count, but this degree of control is only going to continue to increase—even under Trump—unless we can surmise a strategy to stop it. There can be no such strategy without a thorough understanding of what we’re up against, in terms of the enemy and their capacity, as well as a workable grip on their methods and techniques for manipulating the unsuspecting masses.

It’s for this reason that I resist tossing my two cents on top of the heap of nickle and penny thoughts, forgoing the urge to opine on the hot topics of the day.

As far as the senseless escalation of war and whatever might transpire between now and the inauguration, just remember one thing: it’s what’s happening outside the Overton Window that most impacts your life, because that’s where the real power lies.

Keep your eyes wide-open, be curious, and stay skeptical.

It’s anybody’s guess what happens next.

Regardless, RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

“It’s a small world after all.”

If you’ve been alive for more than two decades, or if you’ve ever been to Disneyland, you have undoubtedly heard the song, “It’s a Small World (After All)” — which, according to Wikipedia, is the “single most-performed and most-translated piece of music ever produced.” Fascinating.

Perhaps it is the most prolifict piece of propaganda ever produced?

The song was written in the wake of the 1962 Cuban Missile Crisis, and was first premiered along with the iconic carnival ride featuring children from around the world at the 1964 World’s Fair, before being moved to Disneyland in 1966.

To provide some additional context, I’d point out that JFK was assassinated November 22, 1963, which, for whatever reason, seems like a remarkable coincidence.

There are eerie similarities between then and now.

Revisiting this intense period of American history, scratching that conspiratorial itch, I cannot help but see the global elite’s fingerprints all over it. Looking back, it appears to me that the globalists had a plan, JFK got in the way, and thus he was removed from the equation via some sort of dark collusion between US intelligence agencies and the global cabal—hence all the conspiracies about it being an inside job.

But what the hell do I know, I’m just a peasant. It is, however, the aftermath of the event that I find most interesting. The assassination of JFK set many things in motion, not the least of which was the ascension of LBJ—Lyndon B. Johnson—and the subsequent implementation of his socialist-like “Great Society.”

So, the anti-war machine president got assassinated, and then Americans got socialist policies shoved down their throats, in the name of the greater good. Fascinating.

This is also where we got the 1964 Civil Rights Act, which is the tip of the entire LGBTQ and DEI agendas that are being used to undermine America today. These policies undermine our national unity, intentionally, to divide and conquer us all.

The assassination of JFK, and the rapid promotion of LBJ from Vice President to President of the United States, also led to the passing of the 25th Amendment, which is highly relevant to the current political situation, and reads in part as follows:

Section 1.

In case of the removal of the President from office or of his death or resignation, the Vice President shall become President.

Section 2.

Whenever there is a vacancy in the office of the Vice President [after the VP becomes the President], the President shall nominate a Vice President who shall take office upon confirmation by a majority vote of both Houses of Congress.

Section 3.

Whenever the President … is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office… such powers and duties shall be discharged by the Vice President as Acting President.

(emphasis added)

Along with all the recent scuttlebutt regarding Biden being incapable of performing his duties as president, and/or potentially stepping down so that Harris can be the first female President, there is a lot of buzz about the 25th Amendment right now. It’s worth noting that this amendment has been used several times before.

For example, Richard Nixon invoked the 25th Amendment to appoint Gerald Ford as his new vice president, after sitting VP Spiro Agnew was taken out by a political hit job. Agnew, after relentless legal persecution, ended up pleading “no contest” to a single charge of “tax evasion,” and then resigned from his position in October 1973.

Less than a year later, August 9, 1974, Nixon also resigned, again under legal pressure. Sparking the 25th Amendment, Gerald Ford was then appointed as president. This officially made Gerald Ford the first POTUS to assume office having never been elected by the people, either as vice president or as president. Fascinating.

Gerald Ford then appointed Nelson Rockefeller to fill the Vice President position.

Accepting the appointment, Rockefeller said this:

“It was entirely a question of there being a Constitutional crisis and a crisis of confidence on the part of the American people. I felt there was a duty incumbent on any American who could do anything that would contribute to a restoration of confidence in the democratic process and in the integrity of government.”

(emphasis added)

Hmmm… that language sounds mighty familiar, doesn’t it?

Interestingly enough — here’s where it gets deep — as VP, Rockefeller was immediately appointed to the Commission on the Organization of the Government for the Conduct of Foreign Policy (the Murphy Commission), as well as to the Commission on CIA Activities within the United States (the Rockefeller Commission).

The Murphy Commission set out to fundamentally transform United States foreign policy, and in my mind, the cover of their report really says it all:

Just to keep track, the assissination of JFK led to the Great Society of LBJ and the creation of the 25th Amendment, which within a decade led to several rapid fire appointments of unelected leaders into the White House (Gerald Ford and Nelson Rockefeller), who then, in 1975, launched a commission “organizing” the US government to implement “foreign policy,” all under the auspice of world peace.

This all smacks of communist subversion to me… that’s my gut instinct… and by the way, doesn’t that bird kind of look like the Fabian’s wolf in sheep’s clothing?

Let’s dig in.

Among other things, the Murphy Commission set out to reorganize the US government to promote the “administration of foreign policy” and the “means” by which this “foreign policy” would be implemented in the United States.

In other words, there were not so concerned with adopting policies, but in changing the ways in which policies were adopted. Very clever. This assignment was said to be of “urgent importance” because, at that point, the world was becoming “increasingly pluralistic.” It sounds like something straight out of the mouth of the WEF.

They go on to imply that foreign policy is the means to their ends:

“It follows that if the United States is to attain its ends in the future, it must formulate its policies with greater foresight and clarity, and implement them with high effectiveness. We believe, therefore, that it is timely and important to consider afresh the organization of the government for the conduct of foreign policy.”

Remember, according to radical leftists, “the ends justify the means.”

The Commission produced various in-depth reports, among them reports on International Economic Policy, Multilateral Diplomacy, Executive Branch Organization, and Energy Policy. There was also a great deal of attention given to the organization and roles of the US intelligence community.

Most notably:

“…the U.S. intelligence community must operate in such a manner as to command public confidence.”

Thus, it is the role of the spooks to take command of the public’s perspective, to ensure that we accept their ends, while remaining blind and confident in the state-sanctioned narrative, especially as it relates to adopting foreign(global socialist) policies that may seem unpalatable to the American people.

Again, fascinating.

There is much more in the 294-page report produced by the Murphy Commission, but in the interest of time, I’d like to turn attention to the other Commission to which Rockefeller was appointed—namely, the Commission on CIA Activities within the United States, aka the Rockefeller Commission.

Per the Library of Congress, the Rockefeller Commission was spurred by numerous and very serious allegations that the CIA had conducted “illegal operations” in the United States, directly violating the constitutional rights of American citizens.

Gosh, whoda thunk?!

Among the formal allegations were the following:

• Large-scale spying on American citizens in the United States by the CIA, whose responsibility is supposed to be foreign intelligence.

• Keeping dossiers on a large number of American citizens.

• Aiming these activities at Americans who have expressed disagreement with various government policies.

• Intercepting and opening personal mail in the US for 20 years (in 1975!).

• Infiltrating domestic dissident groups and otherwise intervening in domestic politics.

• Engaging in illegal wire-tapping and break-ins.

• Improperly assisting other government agencies.

“In addition, assertions have been made ostensibly linking the CIA to the assassination of President John F. Kennedy.”

The report concludes that:

“In some cases, reasonable persons will differ as to the lawfulness of the activity; in others, the absence of clear guidelines as to its authority deprived the Agency of a means of resisting pressures to engage in activities which now appear to us improper.”

Put differently, sit down and shut up, peasant.

Reasonable persons disagree with the alleged unlawful nature of the activity, and since there was an “absence of clear guidelines,” the Agency really had no way of “resisting pressures” to engage in activities that may appear (to peasants) to be improper.

Case closed.

Of course, there’s a lot more to the story, including recommendations to amend the National Security Act of 1947 to restrict the CIA to foreign surveillance and having them destroy the illegally kept records on American citizens—but honestly, do you think this did anything to curb their appetite for interfering in domestic affairs?

C’mon man!

Let’s connect some dots.

Today, we use the term Deep State to capture the incestuous relationship between the US intelligence community and other weaponized government agencies. We are aware that there is, undoubtedly and undeniably, dark collusion from the highest levels in the halls of congress to the deepest depths of the federal bureaucracy.

These subversive forces, which were partially exposed (but ultimately let off the hook) by Nelson Rockefeller’s 1975 Commission, are currently operating in perfect alignment with David Rockefeller’s self-described “secret cabal,” which is currently working, proudly, to undermine the United States and institute a new world order.

Elsewhere, as previously covered, we know the Rockefeller Brothers Fund directly connects the dots between eugenics, depopulation, censorship, and the global cabal’s explicitly stated objective to facilitate a “transformation in national consciousness profound enough to change mankind’s course.”

This objective is referred to as The Unfinished Agenda.

Additionally, I’ve reported on the US Government joining forces with the Rockefeller Foundation to fund the Mercury Project, which, among other things, seeks to eradicate misinformation and ensure a “healthier information environment” via heavy-handed government censorship and prolific public indoctrination.

And, while we’re connecting the dots, you might like to note that Rockefeller University also holds a patent on using radio frequencies (i.e. 5G) to activate metal nanoparticles that are capable of modulating cellular activity to drive downstream genetic transcription—i.e. reprogramming your genetic code—which sounds so outrageously absurd, I’ll drop the receipts just to prove it:

“The method herein makes use of metal nanoparticles, directed to specific cells… allowing its translocation into the nucleus where it activates the transcription of genes downstream… thus potentially providing a rapid, highly localized ‘on-off’ switch.”

— U.S. Patent filed by The Rockefeller University

As fascinating as all of this is, aside from pointing out the peculiar and persistent nature of the Rockefeller’s influence in the United States, the reason I bring all of this up is because in the mind’s of the global elite, “it’s a small world after all.” They are, in fact, orchestrating events on a planetary scale.

Last week, Russia warned of attacks on undersea communications cables.

Today, we find this headline: Mysterious ‘Fault’ Strikes Undersea Fiber Cable In Baltic Sea Connecting Finland & Germany.

This news comes as Putin tells Germany that all they have to do is “press a button” to resume oil supplies from Russia via the Nord Stream 2 pipeline—which the cabal does not want to happen—even as Germany’s radical leftist Social Democrats attempt to ban conservative political opposition in a so-called “snap election.”

None of this is coincidence.

Meanwhile, in a massively stupid “major policy shift,” our sock-puppet president has bizarrely authorized the use of U.S. long-range missiles to strike deep into the heart of Russia. Those keeping track know that Putin has already warned that if Ukraine uses U.S. long-range missiles to strike Russia, the “United States is at war with Russia.”

In fact, Putin has been pretty blunt about what he would do if this ever happened:

Right on cue, behold the fear inducing headlines:

So, the question is: will the Deep State and global cabal willfully ignite World War III to prevent Donald Trump from taking office? Or will the conflict ignite, and then Trump will inherit a wartime stance his first day in office? Who the hell knows.

What I want to reiterate today, is that there are more powerful forces in the world than whoever happens to be sitting in the Oval Office. What happens in America affects the world, and what happens in the world impacts us right here at home. In the spirit of “it’s a small world after all” — in light of all of the above — I might remix the chorus to reflect our current circumstance:

“It’s the cabal’s world after all.”

…like it or not, they are running the global show.

The global elites have been pursuing total control for a really long time, and they’re sure as hell not going to give up because Donald Trump got elected. We’d all be wise to view unfolding events through this lens, remain highly skeptical of official narratives, and realize there are many forces at play to which we are simply not privy.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you'd like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s not be shortsighted.

I have to tell you, the euphoric celebration of all things Donald Trump is, well, annoying. While the vast majority of pundits continue their hyper-giddy preening, riding on Trump’s coattails for the sake of self-aggrandizement, strutting around saying “see, I told you he’d win,” it should go without saying that there are other things happening in the world, very important things, that are going unnoticed.

It’s true that some great things happening, for sure. For example:

• Matt Gaetz has been nominated as Attorney General

• Tulsi Gabbard has been nominated as Director of National Intelligence

• Elon Musk and Vivek Ramaswamy have been selected to hack the bureaucracy down to size via the new Department of Government Efficiency

• Pete Hegseth, a Green Beret combat veteran, has been selected to serve as the Secretary of Defense

• South Dakota Governor Kristi Noem has been chosen to run the Department of Homeland Security

Trump’s list of All-Star Cabinet members continues to grow by the day, much to the chagrin of liberals and swamp creatures alike. The DC collectivists and socialist media activists are running around like their hair is on fire, screeching about how Trump’s “Cabinet Of Goblins And Weirdos” is an extinction-level “threat to democracy.” The agonizing, astringent acrimony is at an all-time high.

Trump’s 2024 election win is an extinction-level threat to democracy - Vox

Go ahead and gloat…

Those of us who have fought hard to elect American First patriots into leadership positions have every right to take a victory lap. Every single person who voted to Make America Great Again deserves kudos and a pat on the back—THANK YOU for stepping up and making this election “too big to rig.”

But don’t take your eye off the ball. Trump is not in office yet, and there is a lot of time between now and Inauguration Day. It would be foolish to assume that the entrenched ruling class and DC establishment is going to simply slink off into the shadows to lick their wounds.

There is far too much accountability at stake.

There are rumors Trump may release the Epstein and P. Diddy files.

Any number of treasonous swamp rats could be implicated, while many, many more could be charged with sedition and sent to prison for their other innumerable crimes. It’s such a euphoric possibility, it feels rapturous. Just think about how redeeming this kind of wide-scale justice would be. YES! It’s about damn time!!

“We’re going to win so much, you may get tired of winning!”—Donald J. Trump

But let’s not count the chickens before they hatch.

Let’s not lose sight of the weaponized federal agencies that continue to terrorize American patriots, such as the recent FBI raid on the pollster who accurately predicted Trump’s historic win, or the FEMA scandal wherein a supervisor directed disaster relief workers to “avoid homes advertising Trump.”

These are two of the latest examples of how the U.S. government is attacking and discriminating against American patriots. The problem has been so prolific and sustained, the House Judiciary Committee set up a subcommittee on the Weaponization of the Federal Government, which has been holding hearings all year long, bringing a mountain of damning evidence to light along the way.

But has there been any accountability? NO.

To the point, for all the warm and fuzzy feelings and hope that Trump is going to actually drain the swamp, I think we’d all be wise to temper our expectations. I’ve pointed out before how government investigations into government wrong doing only lead to government reports about government conclusions—but never to any sort of government accountability.

All most exactly two years ago, November 16, 2022, in TR 242 - Keep Your Eyes Wide Open, published shortly after Trump announced his 2024 presidential bid, in the wake of Epstein’s mysterious death, I made the following observation:

…those of us who voted for Donald Trump in 2020, who have insisted on asking the hard questions about all the “statistical anomalies” and voting irregularities since then—you know, why in the hell were the Democrats allowed to steal the election and insert a sock-puppet president—we are not the crazy ones.

We are the rational ones who demand logical answers, who are intelligent enough to think for ourselves, and who have yet to receive a satisfactory answer. Instead, every effort has been made to sweep 2020 under the rug and try and keep Donald Trump from getting elected ever again. Their efforts to destroy the man have been insatiable, which makes his announcement equally remarkable and flabbergasting.

And yet here we are. I cannot help but filter this through the lens of psyops.

Optimism? Hope? Will there be investigations and accountability? Will we really Make America Great Again? I suppose it’s possible. We should certainly try. But something just doesn’t quite sit right with all of this. It feels like a set up.

And for the record, it STILL feels like a setup. Something’s off. There’s too much happy-happy, joy-joy. I think, maybe, just maybe, we’re getting setup for complete emotional devastation, for news so terrible that it utterly destroys any hope at all.

Hopefully I’m wrong. That’s just speculation. But think about the hyper-focus on this historic short-term victory, think about the emotional roller coaster, and then think about the vindictive evil cabal that’s really running the show.

From TR 255 - What’s Not In the News Today:

It’s not exactly a secret, but the global elites are meeting this week to plan out the rest of our lives, and virtually no one is paying attention. …

Don’t think that Republicans in congress are going to conduct any meaningful investigations that will lead to any sort of accountability whatsoever. It’s not going to happen. They may pull off some entertaining political theater, but in the end, nothing will happen. They are powerless.

Our elected representatives are owned by an army of highly adept lobbyists who are skillfully doing the bidding of the global cabal.

And don’t forget about the invisible hand, the global forces forged in darkness that have fused a plethora of public-private partnerships that are infinitely more powerful than any nation state, who are deploying a vast fleet of NGOs to conquer the world under the auspice of doing good.

This is the global cabal, deeper than the deep state, and wholly superior to any other force that has ever been assembled in all of human history.

Do you think they are going to let Donald Trump ruin their plans?

“C’mon man!”

THINK.

Again, I could always be wrong. Providence may prevail. Trump may in fact have been spared by God to guide us out of this mess and rectify the situation. I understand wholeheartedly why millions of American feel that way, and yet I remain skeptical.

I remain curious.

Why is it all quiet on the western front? Why isn’t there more rioting? Why hasn’t there been the massive cyberattacks or economic collapse that have been predicted? Why haven’t we seen the next pandemic they’ve repeatedly assured us would happen?

• The next pandemic is coming. Will we be ready? - Financial Times (Apr. 2024)

• The next pandemic: not IF, but WHEN - Harvard (Sep. 2024)

• Will bird flu be the next pandemic and could it cause a lockdown? (Nov. 2024)

I’m also curious: how do current events impact the march toward a new world order? Have the globalists finally accepted defeated? Have they retreated into their luxurious enclaves, full of sorrow, ready to reflect upon the error of their ways? Will the world’s Enlightened Leaders repent of their crimes and become servants of the people?

What do you think?

“C’mon man!”

Don’t get me wrong, I’m excited for all that’s been promised by the Trump administration. I’m thrilled that Americans may have just turned the table. There is comfort in assuming the tide has turned, that momentum has shifted, that the pendulum has swung and fate is finally in our favor.

But, to be blunt, I’m not feeling it.

There are too many things that are already in motion, too many forces at play that are not being talked about. This election, historic as it may be, has just flipped a switch in the public psyche. All at once, it’s as if nothing else matters, as if everything else in the world has simply faded from the recesses of recent memory. Think about it.

It’s happened so many times before, forgive me for being skeptical.

They’ve turned a page in the narrative, to be sure, but this narrative was written in advance. What is the narrative that is being written now? What lies outside the Overton Window, just beyond the narrow purview of public information?

My mind darts to the algorithms and weaponized AI that are rapidly rewiring the minds of the masses—but that’s just me. I think about subconscious taming and the steady transformation of human consciousness—but again, that’s just me.

Perhaps more relatable, I think about wolves in sheep’s clothing.

Behold, the Fabian Window:

Look closely:

According to the Modern History Project, that wolf concealed in sheepskin is the Fabian coat-of-arms, and the Fabian Society itself is a “semi-secret organization working to destroy Western civilization.”

The motto, “Remold it nearer to the heart’s desire,” alludes to their belief that Fabians “must make a religion of Socialism”—i.e. conditioning the masses to revere socialism with religious fervor—in order to hammer out the New World Order.

Are we not there now?

The first time I’d heard of the Fabian Society was during the pandemic, while watching a documentary created by Curtis Bowers, called Agenda. In it, he lines out how, in a nutshell, “The commies are taking over the world!”

As crazy as it sounds, as many of you know, all of this is deeply connected to current events. This is what is not being talked about in the news. There are many dots that connect to this conversation, but in the interest of time, I’d like to point out one.

Consider this headline:

Trump's 'America First' foreign policy will accelerate China's push for global leadership

That article comes from the Chatham House, which was co-founded by members of the Fabian Society. Think Fabians » Socialists » Communists.

Reading between the lines, the communists are preparing to leverage Trump’s administration to advance China’s push for global leadership. At first it may seem a little backwards, given Trump’s hard line against the CCP, but viewed through the ongoing inversion of reality, it makes sense and is actually par for the course.

Says the commie-laden, Fabian Chatham House:

“A Trump administration unwilling to engage in international climate cooperation will leave China as the biggest player – with the technology and goods the rest of the world requires for the green transition.

The international influence this will grant China should not be underestimated.”

They assure us that Chinese President Xi Jinping’s vision is “one of international order, not chaos,” and that Beijing seeks to realize this vision by reshaping the United Nations into their own image (which they already are). That’s the plan.

In other words, top-down global control is slated to be implemented via “international climate cooperation,” coordinated by the CCP, courtesy of the global commie cabal, whether Trump’s in office or not—just like I’ve been saying.

They haven’t given up, and they’re not going home. They have a world to win.

They will tell you that resistance is futile, to which I like to reply:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s been a week.

So much can change so fast, and yet, for all the changes we might anticipate in the wake of Donald Trump’s historic reelection, the more things change, the more they stay the same. There is good news trickling in at a steady drip, all pointing toward getting our country back on track by putting the right people in the right positions to finally right the ship, but even at that, there is still strangeness in the air and uncertainty brewing in the background.

For what it’s worth, even a week after the election, they are still counting votes in many places across the country. In states like Arizona, where liberals control the counting, it appears they are still trying to rig the election with massive ballot dumps favoring the radical Marxists running on the Democrat ticket. It’s not over yet.

Meanwhile, flabbergasted feminists are shaving their heads and vowing not to have sex with men while Donald Trump is in office. In an interesting twist and testament to the liberal insanity, Kamala Harris’ former communication director was recently on CNN arguing that Joe Biden should resign, so that Kamala can fulfill her lifelong dream of becoming the first female installed into the White House.

Can you imagine?

As bizarre as that would be, I wouldn’t necessarily rule it out (more on that in a minute). Also bizarre, in an entertaining trolling-the-liberals sort of way, there are also stories out claiming Donald Trump Jr. has floated appointing Alex Jones as the new White House Press Secretary—“for like a month”—so that Jones can really “put these idiots in their place.”

Can you imagine THAT?!

In typical theatrical fashion, Alex Jones responded with a photo-op, posing all cocked, locked, and ready to rock, telling his audience: “I formally accept.”

As entertaining as the story may be, just to be clear, I think it was nothing more than a publicity stunt that was meant to poke fun at the snowflakes. Having Alex Jones as the Press Secretary would drive democrats and the drive-by media absolutely bonkers. It would be a glorious smack in the face, but I don’t think there was really any serious consideration. It’s just another example of Trump’s intuitive media mastery.

Alex Jones is a bombastic celebrity personality who likes to get a rise out of people. He dabbles in conspiracy for the fun and fame of it, though I’ll admit he is correct more often than not, and he’s often well ahead of the competition in calling out “conspiracy theories” that eventually prove to be rooted in cold hard fact.

Which brings me to one of his latest posts on X:

Coup Alert! Democrat Deep State Is Planning to Install Harris in Presidency Before Trump’s Inauguration, Then Trump Will Be Conveniently Assassinated, Next False Flag Terror Attacks Will Provide Cover For Martial Law to Be Declared

That headline jibes with the Harris camp’s recent comments on CNN, and the potential for Trump to be assassinated before the inauguration is certainly not beyond the realm of possibility. The same goes for a potential false flag event ushering us into martial law before Trump takes office. So, this could be nothing more than sensational fearmongering and conjecture, but then again, it could happen.

But will it? Probably not.

However, it does keep the story alive.

There are millions of Americans who have been anticipating false flag terror attacks and martial law for years, and yet, it never happens. It’s not that it won’t happen someday, it’s just that it never seems to happen. Practically speaking, it is the idea itself, and the fear and uncertainty that come with it, that serves the dark purpose of keeping people distracted, primed, and suggestible.

Beyond that, it’s a brilliant marketing ploy. Impending doom is the major motivating factor driving the multi-billion dollar doomsday prepper industry—but that’s not the rabbit I want to chase today.

There’s something else afoot.

Let’s zoom out.

In the brief Election Day note, This is what the election is really all about, I tacked on a list of conflicting headlines about the U.S. economy. On the one hand, liberal outlets were fleecing the public with the impression that Trump was going to inherit a “remarkable” economy. On the other hand, and in reality, economists have been warning that 2024 was going to be a year of recession and economic collapse.

To quickly refresh, consider these gaslighting headlines:

• The next U.S. president could inherit a booming economy.

• The Next President Inherits a Remarkable Economy

• The Next President Inherits A Very Strong Economy

• America’s strong economy: The next president will have a lot to work with

• 2025 Could Be a Great Time to Be President, Economically Speaking

And then contrast them with the reality check:

• The probability of a recession now stands at 35% - J.P. Morgan

• Americans fear the end: Economic collapse looms largest on the nation’s mind

• 85% Chance of Recession in 2024, Highest Since GFC: Economist

• U.S. Economy on Track for Major Crisis in 2024

• The US economy has defied recession forecasts for years. Is this time different?

Given this contrast, I speculated that since the economy hasn’t collapsed or had a major crisis in 2024, yet, it could potentially collapse shortly after Trump takes office:

Given all the BS about how “Biden’s economy is booming” — despite the fact that 40% of Americans are struggling to pay their bills, despite the innumerable downward revisions after the government published cooked books to prop up the sock puppet, despite the painfully persistent and historically high inflation, despite the astronomical and completely unsustainable national debt, and despite the most recent, absolutely hideous jobs report — what are the chances they’ve just been kicking the can to keep an ace up their sleeve?

Who knows.

That’s right, who knows.

However, in the same vein of this speculation, today I found it fascinating to see similar sentiment being put out by some very financially savvy analysts:

• How Do You Create A Recession? It Will Be From Years of Government Excess

• “They Just Got Handed Fraudulent Books” - Ed Dowd Confirms Our Warning That Trump Is 'Inheriting A Turd Of An Economy'

• No Easy Way Out: The Economic Challenges Facing The Trump Administration

The government printing trillions of dollars, and adding a trillion dollars to the national debt every 100 days, has destroyed the value of the dollar and will continue driving historically high inflation—in theory. In practice, the finance fairies have a mystical, magical wand that appears to allow them to defy reality at will.

We’ll see what happens.

Trump will inherit cooked books, and looked at through the lens of the Deep State and global cabal’s resistance to his administration, those cooked books are a powerful lever that could potentially get pulled at any time. Beyond just creating unflattering optics, pulling this lever could inject extreme turmoil into the markets, and in turn, inflict very real financial pain on American families.

In the treasonous minds of these subversives, the American people would then blame Trump for this pain. Though I’m sure many would be wise to the scheme, the unfortunate reality is that the media would ensure millions of minions felt that way.

As I’ve said before, in the big picture, pain is all part of the plan.

Pain makes the peasants compliant.

Which brings me to the outlier today:

Russia Issues Ominous Warning About Undersea Internet Cables

Hmmmm….

While most people are still enthralled with the outcome of the election and the subsequent political theater, there is something else brewing in the background—I can feel it in my bones. Could this be it?

You may recall from TR 640, that multiple intelligence agencies, along with their globalist allies over at NATO, were all barking about certain cyber threats that were potentially set to strike “after the election.” Could this be it?

Over the last few years, I’ve written a lot about the convergence of capacity and intent. The globalists have an arsenal of incredibly powerful tools. Now, with Donald Trump having once again stuck a stick in the spokes of their agenda, it seems more likely than not they may use these tools to lash out in a desperate effort to stop him.

That means it’s all on the table. Anything could happen, but in reality, we’re just going to have to wait and see. We have to keep working the ground game: preparing ourselves, our families, and our communities for potential calamities; pushing the political envelope, winning hearts and minds; and most importantly, making the most of each day, embracing the journey of life, and not allowing the threat of doom to steal our joy. No matter what happens, the world keeps turning, and life is still good.

And we won.

It always feels good to be on the winning team. Good things are happening, and it is an exciting time to be alive. Just keep your eyes wide open and keep your powder dry. For every action there is an opposite and equal reaction, and we have yet to see anything remotely close to an equal reaction compared to Trump’s historic win.

Stay wise patriots, and remember: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Trump won.

In what may prove to be one of the most historic political comebacks in human history, Donald Trump rode the MAGA wave back to the White House, winning the House and the Senate, the Electoral College and the popular vote, and now as president-elect, he is poised to clean house and Make America Great Again.

That’s the good news.

The bad news, as I’ve been saying for months, is that the global cabal saw this coming and they undoubtedly have a plan to deal with it. Radical leftists and militant Marxists have already begun their pre-planned “mostly peaceful” protests in cities across the country, including New York, Chicago, Philadelphia, and more.

Hate is contagious, and with liberal stooges like Alexandria Ocasio Cortez out there fanning the flames and inciting violence to “save our Democracy,” liberty loving Americans all across the fruited plains will now wait and watch as deranged, dimwitted, brain-dead democrats begin the carefully orchestrated process of unleashing all hell—with the help of their globalist backers, of course.

While many of us saw this coming, and it really is no surprise, what remains to be seen is just how quickly things escalate, and to what ends.

Also unknown, is to what the degree the Deep State will get in on the action, and whether or not hostile foreign nations will attempt to exploit our nation’s vulnerability while the half-dead, lame duck, sock puppet president is ostensibly still at the helm. The threat of cyberattacks and global war loom large.

And then there’s this, courtesy of ZeroHedge:

I wanted to drop that into the conversation as a reminder of just how warped reality has become, how powerful the collusion between the media, Big Tech, and the Deep State actually is, how far they have already gone to dupe and deceive the masses, and just how gullible and naive the tens-of-millions of useful idiots actually are.

One could stretch the memory back as far as you’d like, taking careful account of the utterly shocking and outrageous degree of corruption, the innumerable felonious crimes and treasonous subversion that’s been conducted by both elected politicians and unelected bureaucrats, and be forced to conclude one thing: there will be no accountability.

Democrats hate Donald Trump because he has been called a “threat to democracy” and made out to be Hitler ad nauseam, and, thanks to their media-induced psychosis, they sincerely believe he incited a violent insurrection trying to overturn the 2020 election. Never mind the facts, this is what they truly believe.

Because of this belief, they feel deep moral outrage, and therefore, feel entirely justified lashing out in a fit of immature emotional rage. Indeed, they’ve been conditioned to do so.

That’s what we are beginning to witness in the streets right now.

While it’s fun to poke fun at the unhinged liberal meltdown that is on full display across the media landscape, American patriots would be wise to do more than just relish this moment and revel in the defeat of the ridiculous Democrat ticket. We need to be prepared or preparing for the war that the Left is about to unleash.

It feels almost out of place to quote Bill Gates’ prediction of a hung election and a civil war—and there is no denying that he could very well have been wrong—but I do not think we’ve even begun to see the desperation of those who will stop at nothing to save their asses from accountability and bitterly cling to their unholy power.

I suspect many in the ruling class are trembling at the thought of congressional investigations and formal charges being brought against their long train of abuses and usurpations. The American people want justice, and they know it.

But, while Donald Trump and the GOP control of congress could, in theory, do a lot to deliver such justice, I, for one, am not holding my breath. It seems impossible to me, if not outright imprudent. Time and energy would be better spent focused forward.

There is no going back. We cannot undo what has already been done.

The best we can do is shine light in the darkness and expose the fraud and corruption, and perhaps establish some guardrails to prevent repeat offenses. As for the perpetrators, who very much deserve to be held accountable, they will most likely walk away, slinking into the shadows, with whispers of “next time” on their lips.

There appears to be no appetite for any other option. And, in all fairness, it would be a logistical and judicial nightmare to attempt arresting and trying by jury the many people who have blatantly and unlawfully used their positions of power to defy the Constitution, thwart the will of the people, and undermine the United States.

As entertaining and righteous as it would be, it would be a waste of time.

We’ve got bigger fish to fry.

Let’s zoom out.

Do you remember the calls for “formal deprogramming” of Trump supporters? Many prominent liberals have been unabashed about the perceived need for “re-education camps” in order to “end the MAGA nightmare.”

How do you think these people are feeling right now? Do you think they’ve had a come-to-Jesus moment and can now see the errors in their ways? Or, do you think they’ve just been driven deeper into their delusions?

• Dem. Candidate Declares That Trump Supporters Need To Be Put In Reeducation Camps

• George Conway says we are going to have to deprogram Trump supporters at some point

• Clinton calls for 'formal deprogramming' of MAGA 'cult members'

As fickle and skewed as these personal beliefs might be, such deep-seated convictions are difficult to uproot. The ego provides a veritable arsenal of rationalization and emotional justification that keeps such beliefs lodged within the mind.

Think about all the things that people, tens of millions of Americans in fact, honestly and sincerely believeabout Donald Trump and his supporters.

Ask yourself: how do such beliefs get changed?

The answer, in my mind, is that it doesn’t happen easily, and it certainly won’t happen overnight. While on the one hand it is theoretically possible to change hearts and minds, on the other, brainwashing is a real deal, with deep psychological impact.

The Left understands this, that is why they have been calling for the formal “deprogramming” of MAGA extremists. This is an inversion of reality. What they are actually calling for, is the forceful reprogramming of the American patriots who have, for whatever reason, managed to escape the clinical conditioning of relentless propaganda. There is a reason DARPA dumped so much money into developing Military Grade Memes—it’s because memetic warfare is a very powerful weapon.

Military Grade Memes, as some may recall, guarantee the propagation of an idea. These are scientifically concocted “infectious ideas” that equate directly to the “woke mind virus” that Elon Musk famously blamed for killing his son.

The point is, these mind viruses are still running rampant throughout the public psyche, and winning this election, rather than dampening the spread, has very like created the optimal circumstance for even greater emotional contagion.

I want to emphasize that the science of this has been known for over a century, and that this science is being intentionally exploited by some very bad people.

Which at once brings us face-to-face with a very challenging problem: there is a very real need to literally deprogram and disinfect the minds of millions of people.

But how?

Reeducation camps? No way. That is a darkness that cuts both ways.

Formal deprogramming? Absolutely not. Again, we must reject the premise.

The government should in no way, not now and not ever, be tasked with the objective of reprogramming the peasants, “for the greater good.” That said, there is no doubt that the powers that be have already taken it upon themselves to do just that, and on a global scale at that—BUT, we must reject such tactics, always and forever.

So what’s a patriot to do?

Tactically speaking, I believe the most strategic thing we can do is talk to people. We have to have the conversations. We have to very intentionally engage. We have to facilitate the curiosity that is needed to shake our fellow Americans awake.

I realize this may sound absurd, as we watch hordes of unhinged leftists unleashing rage upon American cities, but don’t lose sight of the bigger picture. The media is not going to turn off their lights and cameras. The propaganda is not going to go away.

The globally coordinated narrative is not going to just evaporate into thin air.

The seeds of socialism will continue to be sown. “Global democracy” will continue to be branded into the brains of global leaders. The Adaptation Agenda will continue to advance. Institutional indoctrination will continue unabated. Language will continue to be leveraged and weaponized. The incomprehensible power of modern technology will continue to be used against those who resist assimilation into the Collective.

Simply put, the minds of the masses will continue to be infiltrated and controlled.

Winning the election was a major victory, but again, it was only one battle in the much bigger war for the hearts and minds of humanity. Unless we realize and confront the methods that are being used to turn people against each other, soon, little by little, we will eventually be outnumbered for good.

Even in this moment of triumph, that fate is not too far away.

Make no mistake, we are in a full-blown culture war, and the battles are about to heat up. Some clashes will probably turn violent, but for most of us, the real fight will be between falling back into comfortable routines (because hey, we won, right?) and choosing to lean into this opportunity to engage tactical conversations.

If the tide has turned, then now is the time to change hearts and minds.

If you have friends or family who voted for Kamala Harris, who loathe the name Donald Trump, then you now have the chance to change the course of history. Never has there been a better opportunity to talk about the future of our country.

Never have the odds been more in favor of peaceful persuasion.

I understand that some people are beyond being reached, but I chose to believe that most people can still be touched with a thoughtful word. We are all humans after all.

Perpetual conflict is a lose-lose propostion. We all want peace and prosperity, even if we do not agree on every little policy. We might ask the question: what can we agree on? Stake out some common ground, and expound the conversation from there.

As a bitterly divided nation that desperately needs to heal, surely we’ve got plenty to talk about. Let’s resist the urge to gloat and get down to the hard damn work of saving out nation!

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s almost Judgement Day.

Tuesday, November 5th, is Election Day, and in theory, it will be a judgement day of sorts for the United States of America. It will likely take weeks before the final verdict is reached, and the suspense will be palpable. Personally, I anticipate more shenanigans than you can shake a stick at, more ridiculous media fleecing, and of course, a full-court press to subvert the will of the American people.

In many metros areas, there will probably be rioting in the streets.

But, at the end of the process, I believe Donald Trump and J.D. Vance will be elected as the next team to lead our country. This in turn, I suspect, will kick off a series of escalating protests and carefully orchestrated events that will grow increasingly out of control between now and Inauguration Day.

They do have a plan.

We know the media will continue with their lies and socialist spin.

We know the adversaries of the American Republic, both foreign and domestic, will continue to stoke fear and fan the flames of chaos, hoping to foment the globalist’s much anticipated political revolution in the United States—which, just to be clear, is a Marxist Cultural Revolution that’s been mounting for years.

Thus, here at the outset, peering into the looming unknown, with all the uncertainty and free-floating anxiety in the air, there are a few things I think are worth reiterating:

• Though there will likely be violence in various places, for all the talk of a hung election and civil war, for the vast majority of people life will continue as usual.

• Regardless of how messy it gets, even if radical leftists and American Patriots end up fighting it out in the streets, the ultimate solution will always be political.

• Even if Trump wins, and he does begin to really clean house, even if conservatives take the majority in both chambers of congress, the cabal keeps marching on.

The unconventional warfare will continue. The Great Reset and Agenda 2030 — though stunted by a Trump victory — will continue to advance. The invisible hand of the global cabal will continue to pull strings, and the ruling class will continue pushing the whole of humanity toward the deceptive fantasy of Global Democracy, and they will do so at all costs. The ends justify the means.

Remember, in their own words, “they have a world to win.”

They’ve been telling us for decades what their plan is:

“Out of these troubling times, our objective—a new world order—can emerge.”—George H.W. Bush, September 11, 1990

This is the big picture context.

I’ve covered this New World Order in many reports, such as TR 274 below, which considers the many vectors that are in motion, most of which are currently being drowned out by the election. That one report alone covers everything from biological warfare and the ongoing uptake of toxic experimental injections, to Critical Race Theory, the Communist Manifesto, Rockefeller’s “secret cabal,” and the global influence of secret societies such as Skull and Bones.

By knitting these threads together, the intent was to demonstrate how influences that are not on most people’s radar are converging on the worst case scenario.

There is a secret cabal, and they are working to subvert the United States. As noted in the report, Teddy Roosevelt was pointing this out over 100 years ago:

“Behind the ostensible government sits enthroned an invisible government owing no allegiance and acknowledging no responsibility to the people.”

Again, this is what we are up against.

But I’m curious: how many pundits do you hear calling out this cabal? How many are talking about this “new world order” or how those who harbor this zealous ambition might be seeking to influence and exploit tomorrow’s election?

I contend that even though very few people are talking about it, the information in TR 274, like so much else that’s been covered over the last few years, remains highly relevant to the current situation. It all comes to bear. When I think about the totality of the mess we’re in, there are so many topics that come flooding to mind, it becomes challenging to select the most important aspects to articulate.

Given the flood of new subscribers over the last couple of months, I often wonder how many are aware of Social Listening, Sentinel Surveillance, and Algorithmic Social Interventions? How many are keen to the use of weaponized AI, specifically for the purpose of election interference, that has been happening for decades?

When I think about the threat of weaponized artificial intelligence, I think about things like subconscious taming, embedded social consciousness, and the intelligent machines that are quietly driving behavioral change—all of which amounts to a sneaky and insidious rewiring of the public psyche.

How many people are aware of that?

Beyond that, I wonder how many people who are new to the audience realize that Communists have been working to unite the Democratic parties in countries around the world for over a century—per the Manifesto—or that the first step in a Communist Revolution is to win the battle of democracy?

When I think about what comes after the election, there are so many technical terms that start rattling around in my head, so many words that have a “hidden, higher meaning,” so many strategies and methods of manipulation, it is difficult to keep track of them all—and yet they are there, all 640+ reports worth in the back of my mind, pressing upon my perspective.

It makes me wonder how many long-time readers and listeners might feel the same?

Regardless, HERE’S THE THING:

In recent months, my reports have become more sporadic due to the daily juggle of life. Now, rather than writing a report each and every day, I am restricted to writing when I can. What new subscribers should know, is that for the last few years, I’ve conducted 4 to 6 hours of research each day, happily consolidated all the learning into daily reports, and then cranked out a podcast to further broadcast the message.

Simultaneously, for a period of time, I was also the news director for several radio stations, which required I take a deep-dive into local politics, combing through meeting minutes and board packets at the city and county level in multiple municipalities in different states. This gave me great insight into how the globalists’ agenda is currently being implemented at the local level, right under our noses.

The technical term for this is “vertical integration,” by the way, which has been covered in several reports. Grasping how the globalists are taking control at the local level; I’ve also sought to present practical solutions to this pressing problem:

• TR 575 - Solving Macro Level Problems With Local Level Solutions

• TR 596 - How Local Shenanigans Lead Directly to Top-Down Global Control

• TR 617 - How the Spirit of Freedom Ultimately Defeats the Commie Cabal

Thinking back, as a passionate grassroots activist I’ve done everything I could to sound the alarm about what’s going on, in the big picture, by speaking at rallies, organizing and working with local groups, supporting constitutional candidates, etc. This burst of activity led to recognition from FreedomWorks and then to several eye-opening trips to Washington DC, wherein, even as an ignorant peasant, I was very quickly able to ascertain and point out exactly what the problem was:

Reflecting on my time in the swamp, I can recall the dismay I felt my first trip out, under entirely different circumstances, with the People’s Convoy in March 2022.

On the long drive from Washington state to the nation’s Capitol, in a chain of thousands of vehicles stretching a hundred miles, with massive rallies along the way, it felt like history in the making. “We The People” were about to make our voices heard. But ultimately, as we arrived, we were ignored by the politicians, ridiculed by the press, and the road trip ended up being little more than a 6,000-mile learning experience.

They don’t care. They don’t have to. They’re not going to listen to a bunch of damn peasants.

After letting that disconcerting reality sink in, I doubled down on politics. We have to win. Failure is not an option. We have to reclaim the reigns of representative government. Where there is a will, there is a way—BUT, we cannot solve a problem that we don’t understand. So I sought to learn, to understand the process and the game as it’s being played. For what it’s worth, all of this led to having a radio show, and later, to being elected as a national delegate to the RNC.

I’m sharing all of this backstory for two reasons: 1) for the benefit of those who are new to the audience, so that you can better understand where I’m coming from; and 2) to remind myself and others how far we’ve come in this fight for the future of our country, how much is at stake, and most importantly, what we’re really up against.

It’s impossible to squeeze it all into a single report, but when I say that the global cabal will keep marching on, even if Trump wins, I mean it. This is not speculation. All of the above is in motion, right now, affecting communities all across the country. It is, therefore, imperative that we remain focused on the bigger picture, which perhaps put most succinctly, is top-down control of our every day lives.

Electing Donald Trump is only winning one (major) battle in a much bigger war.

This desire for control is coming in the form of both policy and propaganda. It is coming through the control of language and the manipulation of emotion. It comes as both subtle suggestions and overt acts of authoritarian impulse. It comes as both seduction and cunning deceit, and it’s relentless in its pursuit of ruling our lives.

This is why I like to say: RESIST WE MUST!!

Wrapping it all up, I have made it a point to drive home spiritual solutions, to elevate awareness and uplift the audience with the frequent reminder that life is still good, fundamentally good, no matter what. I’ve quoted scripture and presented a Christian perspective, but I’ve also defended my liberal, atheist, and agnostic friends, painstakingly splitting philosophical hairs to chart out common ground.

United we stand, divided we fall.

In the big picture, they are trying to divide and conquer us all. I write with the hope that by exposing the truth, it might help wake people up, so that more people might stand together against this impending global tyranny. By subscribing to The Torch Report, you will help this conversation continue beyond the election and into the new year. That said, I need a minimum of 500 paid subscribers (or a few generous donations from benevolent benefactors) to get back to doing the daily reports. If you are able to support this publication, please do, I would be deeply grateful.

As always, I’d consider it the greatest honor of all if you share this publication with everyone you know!

It is an exciting time to be alive. If you haven’t already, make sure you vote—make sure your neighbors vote—and above all else, go make the most of this beautiful day!

Sincerely,

Luke

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

(That’s a rhetorical question. Biden isn’t running a damn thing, except his mouth.)

Happy Halloween!

This morning we awaken to a world more strange and bizarre than anyone could possibly have imagined. As the sock-puppet president was putting his mouth all over innocent babies at the White House Halloween Party, Tim “The Tampon” Walz was out insisting that Biden calling millions of Americans “garbage” somehow does not undermine unity, while Kamala Harris babbled incoherently to reporters about how Trump is an unstable “petty tyrant” who is consumed with grievance, “obsessed with revenge,” and seeking unchecked power.

Meanwhile, somewhere in Wisconsin, Donald Trump was trolling the loonies:

“This Truck is in Honor of Kamala and Joe Biden” – EPIC! Trump Trolls Democrats After Getting Picked Up in MAGA Garbage Truck

Friends, I believe that for most Americans Halloween is a day of fun costumes, trick-or-treating, harvest festivals, classroom and office parties, and gathering with family and friends to kick off the holiday season. It’s a chance for people to come together and celebrate a cultural tradition that helps knit the social fabric.

We need that.

In many neighborhoods, parents will be out and about, chaperoning and talking to each other as the kids gleefully dart from door to door raking in all the loot. Reflecting on this tradition, for as long as I can remember there was always trust in the air, as there should be, because everyone was looking out for each other, keeping an eye on things, and always ready to help any wayward witches or warlocks get back to their distracted adults. Neighbors knew each other, and they trusted each other.

Are there bad people in the world who are looking to do bad things? Yes. Are there people who would abduct, exploit, and hurt innocent children? Yes. Are there people who would break into your home, steal your things, and hurt you and your family?

Yes, there always are. But most people? Most people are good people.

I sincerely believe that. There are good guys, and there are bad guys, but most people side with the good guys—even if they themselves are not willing to risk their necks to serve and protect, they sincerely appreciate those who do. It’s human instinct.

Which brings to mind the timeless quote, typically attributed to Edmond Burke:

“The only thing necessary for the triumph of evil is that good men should do nothing.”

All it takes for evil to prevail is for good men to stand by and let it happen. When the warriors stay on the sidelines and hesitate to engage, all manner of evil is sure to follow. The result is the cultural decline and chaos we are witnessing in our country today, all of which was perfectly predictable to anyone paying attention.

Indeed, Burke spoke directly to the “vain-glory” of patriots who flatter themselves into thinking that being an armchair quarterback is somehow going to be sufficient to stop the “united Cabals” of ambitious evildoers. I love that he used those words.

Here it is, in context:

“No man, who is not inflamed by vain-glory into enthusiasm, can flatter himself that his single, unsupported, desultory, unsystematic endeavours are of power to defeat the subtle designs and united Cabals of ambitious citizens. When bad men combine, the good must associate; else they will fall, one by one, an unpitied sacrifice in a contemptible struggle.”

Those who have been with me on this learning journey, know that I have researched and written extensively about the self-described “secret cabal” of globalists who are working to systematically destroy everything we hold dear. You know that this united cabal of ambitious global elites are hellbent on ruling over the peasants with a digital fist, and worse, and they will stop at nothing to achieve their evil schemes.

This election is absolutely critical to slowing down and exposing their efforts.

That said, as previously discussed, even a Donald Trump victory is not going to stop them. They are not going to give up, scraps their plans, and go home. They cannot, because they believe that they have a moral imperative to save the planet and rid humanity of useless, meat-eating “defectives,” so as to cure societal cancer. This is how they mentally justify global tyranny, as if it’s for the greater good.

To quickly refresh on their sick and twisted perspective, reading from Tomorrow’s Children, as cited in TR 285 - The Sinister Saga of the Secret Cabal:

“The defectives whom we have just been considering may be compared to an insidious disease affecting the body politic. …

It would by no means be a misnomer to call [the Secret Cabal] a Society for the Control of Social Cancer.”

American patriots have been called “irredeemable” and “deplorable” and “garbage,” among many other things. Keep in mind, these labels have been flung at us by some of the most powerful political leaders of our time, politicians who have a massive platform to influence how we are percieved by the other side.

We The People and our craving for freedom is the cancer they seek to control.

Such despicable rhetoric has been relentlessly amplified by the mainstream media, which has undoubtedly warped the minds of the mindless minions and hardened the hate-filled hearts of radicalized, militant leftists. At this stage of social conditioning, violence becomes a rationalized means to an end, and the stage for that has been set.

Consider the headlines:

• Is The Left Preparing For War If Trump Wins?

• Trump Could 'Destroy' Pentagon and Upend Rule of Law if Reelected

• ‘January 6 is going to be pretty fun’: MAGA lays out plan to subvert election

• Election Threats Persist After Far-Right Extremists Stormed the US Capitol

• U.S. Intelligence Alert: Extremists May Disrupt 2024 Elections

You see, from the Left’s perspective, should Trump win, they must be prepared to defend democracy from a petty tyrant who’s planning to destroy the Pentagon, upend the rule of law, and unleash hordes of far-right extremists to subvert the election, oppress women and minorities, and take the country back to its racist roots.

What self-respecting Antifa-type wouldn’t rise up and fight against that?

The question is: are American Patriots willing to fight back?

Burke points out that “when bad men combine”—which they clearly have—the good men must come together, stand together, and fight together, lest one by one we fall as an “unpitied sacrifice” in this ongoing struggle for human freedom.

Give me liberty or give me death!I will live free or die!!

These are the classic battle cries of the American Spirit, and whether or not such resolve still exists, whether or not America’s indomitable Spirit of Resistance is still alive and well, may soon be tested. We’ve talked about this before.

BUT HERE’S THE THING:

They want us to fight back. They are pushing us to fight back.

And we know it.

We’ve talked about the predictive programming. We’ve talked about how we are, in fact, already at war. We’ve explored how it might all play out.

Now, the anticipation is quickly reaching a boiling point:

• Half of Americans anticipate a U.S. civil war soon, survey finds

• 'Underanticipated' US civil war concerns increase

• Expectations of and perceived need for civil war in the USA

There are expectations and a perceived need for a civil war. The military is holding evacuation drills in the Capitol. Clearly, the natives are getting restless. The country feels like a tinderbox. What’s going to happen next? I don’t know!

Of course, I would be remiss not to mention that all of this nervously waiting in anxious anticipation is part of the psychological operations that are currently being deployed against us. This is unconventional, Fifth Generation Warfare. They have to keep us guessing to keep us off balance, so that we don’t organize and become associated with the righteous cause of defending and restoring the Republic.

But still, consider how the situation is being portrayed:

The public is being primed to believe that MAGA patriots are the ones who will try to overturn the election—as if Kamala Harris actually has a chance of winning—and even Fox News appears to be fanning the falsehood that she is gaining momentum:

Meanwhile, in a strange foreshadowing of what’s to come, a local ABC station just “accidentally” aired the election results—a week before the election—showing the commie Kamala Harris sweeping the pivotal swing state of Pennsylvania.

Elsewhere, we learn that ballot boxes are being burned; that there is a massive “double-voting” scandal unfolding in Michigan; that Colorado’s Secretary of State has “accidentally” leaked passwords to the state’s voting system; that citizens in deep-blue areas are receiving dozens of unopened ballots addressed to different names; and that in certain deep-red areas, people are reporting they haven’t received any ballots at all.

And that’s just the tip of the iceberg, which begs the question:

Will 2024 be a repeat of the 2020 election?

Might they actually be trying to steal this election in broad daylight?

Perhaps. But, as I’ve recently explained, I believe the plan is to “allow” Donald Trump to win, as counterintuitive as that still seems. Regardless, they DO have a plan.

Best I can tell, the plan right now is to cast as much doubt and sow as much confusion as possible. The reason is simple: to cloud the outcome of the election in the minds of both Left and Right, leaving both sides feeling justified in fighting against the other.

However it plays out, both sides will be filled with anger and primed to fight.

Add to the mix the impact of an “after the election” cyberattack, which may or may not already be planned for, and the country just might crest the point of no return.

Thus, we must prepare for the worst and expect the unexpected.

It’s an exciting time to be alive.

Above all else, remember that life is still good. Hug your loved ones. Enjoy your Halloween. Eat some candy. As always: be brave, live free, and stay wise!

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s close.

Election day is one week away. The stakes have never been higher, the momentum has never been greater, and the Democrats have never been more desperate. While Donald Trump continues to score massive publicity and public support, most recently by enjoying a humorous three-hour unscripted conversation with podcast legend Joe Rogan and holding a massive “star-studded” rally in Madison Square Garden, Kamala Harris continues to demonstrate her phony, unlikeable, demeaning character and utter detachment from reality every chance she gets.

Indeed, the contrast has never been more stark, and the subsequent gaslighting has never been more egregious. For example, New York Governor Kathy Hochul is out today claiming that the massive Madison Square Garden rally was actually Trump waiving a “white flag of surrender.”

This ridiculousness was reported at TheHill.com:

“I think he’s waving the white flag of surrender. He’s giving up, because why else would you come to New York City? You are not going to find undecided voters walking the streets of Manhattan today.”

Really?! What the hell are these people thinking?

And yet people believe it. Why? Because, if you haven’t noticed, any attempt to search for news on Donald Trump’s rallies—regardless of search engine—churns up a slew of left-wing propaganda that effectively buries anything positive about the events.

Case in point, regardless of the gaslighting, Trump sold out Madison Square Garden, which has a capacity of over 20,000 people. There were also enough people turned away outside to fill another stadium. That is truly impressive.

Of course, rather than reporting on this massive positive momentum, rather than the media recording the historic nature of this incredible coming together and uniting of the country, the genuinely uplifting and electrified atmosphere, or acknowledging the fact that millions of Americans are absolutely PUMPED about getting our country back on track, here are the top ten search results on the event:

• Trump's Madison Square Garden rally overshadowed by his allies' crude and racist remarks

• Fact-checking Donald Trump's Madison Square Garden rally in New York City

• Seven Shocking Remarks Made at Donald Trump's Madison Square Garden Rally

• Walz repeats Clinton attack that Trump Madison Square Garden event mirrored 1930s Nazi rally

• Authoritarianism Expert Breaks Down Donald Trump's Madison Square Garden Rally

• Comedian Makes Disparaging Comments Toward Latinos At Donald Trump's Madison Square Garden Campaign Rally

• Trump holds bombastic, incendiary homecoming rally at Madison Square Garden

• Donald Trump's Madison Square Garden Rally Branded an 'Echo of Nazism' After He Filled It With Fury, Bitterness and Racist Threats

• Fact check: Trump repeats numerous false claims at Madison Square Garden

• Racist Remarks and Insults Mark Trump's Madison Square Garden

We see the unsurprising mainstream narrative emerge immediately: Donald Trump is a racist Nazi, he’s a bombastic authoritarian who is spouting incendiary rhetoric, and his rally was particularly disparaging to Latinos—who, in all reality, are actually flocking to Trump, and have been for quite some time:

• Latinos, Shifting Toward Trump, Land at the Center of the 2024 Campaign

• US election: why Latino and Hispanic voters are shifting to Trump

• Trump has made gains with Latino men — why they're voting red

Of course, that doesn’t stop the hostile leftists algorithms from trying to bury the good news beneath a barrage of insults and propaganda. To prove the point, here’s what popped up at the top of the search results for “Latinos for Trump”:

Look! A Latin superstar is backing Harris because there were racist jokes at Madison Square Garden!! Trump is facing backlash for being a rabid, racist, Nazi!!!

Just joking, it’s all b*t.*

But it’s interesting to me that this headline from the New York Times popped up:

• Trump Rally Opens With Insults Aimed at Latino, Black, Jewish and Arab American Voters

Also within the top results for “Latinos for Trump,” we find PBS promoting this garbage:

• "The Rise of the Latino Far Right:" Why Latinos Are Turning Out for Trump

Rise of the Latino Far Right?! You’ve got to be kidding me. One might think they were joking, but they’re not. The worst part is, they believe their own lies.

That said, is there any wonder why so many Americans hate Donald Trump? Can you see how a couple of lunatics might have been driven out of desperation to try and assassinate him, in order to “save our democracy” and prevent the rise of a new Third Reich? I mean, somebody has to do something to save our country from this evil, heinous human being, right?!

It’s insane, but I think that the most telling part in all of this, is that DESPITE this obvious and egregious gaslighting, Donald Trump continues to climb in the polls, building greater and greater momentum, inspiring the hope that We the People can and will Make America Great Again.

The feel is that this election will change the course of history.

It’s fascinating if you think about it.

But let’s not count the chickens before they hatch.

Let’s zoom out.

Last week, I suggested that the Spooky October Surprise might just be no surprise at all; that instead of trying to drop some bombshell that might bring down The Don, they were actually moving the pieces in place for the next part of the ploy, which they’ll spring upon the unsuspecting public after the election.

This perspective was ascertained by observing the noticeable and distinct lack of shocking and psychologically gripping headlines (i.e. the eerie calm before the storm). This pique my curiosity and turned my attention toward the Deep State and the global cabal, because when the political theater becomes mundane, these shysters are always up to something, and never is it good.

It turns out, on October 16th, the National Intelligence Council declassified a memorandum citing specific threats to the election, “after voting ends.”

What a coincidence.

Understanding at the outset that any exploitation by “foreign actors” can very easily, perhaps even more easily, be exploited by rogue operatives and the enemy within, let’s consider the specifics:

“The IC [Intelligence Community] assesses that this year China, Iran, and Russia are better prepared to exploit opportunities to exert influence in the US general election after the polls close on Election Day due to lessons drawn from the 2020 election cycle. We expect these actors to at least conduct information operations denigrating US democracy through Inaguration Day.”

What do we learn? We learn that someone might exploit opportunities to denigrate democracy in the United States, after the polls close on Election Day.

Although they admit there are no evidence of “specific foreign plans,” the intelligence community speculates “foreign actors” might use cyber operations to “amplify discord” and “sow doubt” and “promote confusion” about the integrity of the election.

Wow, what incredibly foresight. NOT.

They go on to say:

“Some foreign actors may conduct activities that seek to disrupt or delay the time-sensitive and tightly sequenced series of processes and events that begin after polls close. Each step, from the tabulation of votes and certification of results to completion of the Electoral College process and inaguration, is potentially susceptible to foreign influence and interference operations in different ways.”

Just to point out the obvious, each step is also susceptible to the Deep State running their own interference—which brings to mind the words of former Deputy National Security Adviser K. T. McFarland, who blew the whistle last year and claimed:

“The FBI, Justice Department, and CIA are planning to rig the upcoming 2024 U.S. presidential election.”

It’s important to realize that even though this narrative of foreign interference is nothing new, having a whistle-blower suggest that the Deep State is going to use this narrative as a cover for their own operation is a damning revelation.

I’ve covered this before in several prior reports. If you’d like to dig in, start here:

If there is any doubt in your mind that the greatest threat to American elections actually does come from within, also check out:

There is much more proof on election interference in the archives, but for today, I’d like to connect the dots between the DNI’s projection of post-election interference (above), with the Department of Homeland Security’s 2025 Homeland Threat Assessment and NATO’s2030 Horizon Scanning and Analysis.

By connecting these dots, the collusion will become that much clearer.

According to NATO’s 104-page analysis, cyber threats that include “strategic cyber espionage, election interference, and large scale high-impact ransomware attacks” can now be considered serious enough to trigger article 5 of the treaty, and thus plunge the world into World War III.

They speak of “command and control” in cyberspace, and of “warfighting imperatives” that include achieving “cognitive superiority” by 2030—read into it what you will—but they also emphasize that some threat vectors may “unexpectedly gain greater prominence,” namely foreign election interference via cyberattacks.

Do you see the pattern there?

The NATO report was published in 2022, while the DNI memo was published using the exact same language just two weeks ago. Given NATO laid the groundwork for a cyberattack and election interference to trigger article 5—projecting such an attack would “unexpectedly gain greater prominence”—and we have the DNI projecting the exact same thing relative to the upcoming election, it causes one to wonder.

At the same time (Oct. 2nd), we find Homeland Security denouncing “white supremacists” and Domestic Violent Extremists (aka Donald Trump and MAGA patriots) in their 2025 Threat Assessment, while peddling the exact same narrative:

“Our electoral processes are an attractive target for threat actors, and we expect many will seek to influence the 2024 election cycle, while some others may seek to access or interfere with election systems. …

Foreign malign influence actors almost certainly will target democratic processes across federal, state, and local governments, aiming to affect US voter preferences, exacerbate social tensions, and undermine confidence in our democratic institutions and processes, including election operations.”

DHS states:

“US election infrastructure—including voter registration databases and associated information technology (IT) infrastructure and systems—may be targeted by a broad swath of opportunistic malicious cyber actors.”

Again, this “broad swath of opportunistic malicious cyber actors” necessarily includes the potential for an inside job—only an idiot would deny that.

They too, in perfect concert, suggest that such actions are meant for instilling fear and confusion, leading up to and more importantly “after the November election.”

Thus, the stage has been set.

With some pundits are pointing out that Trump’s rally at Madison Square Garden was “nothing short of a MAGA takeover in the heart of liberal territory,” we find others pointing out that the Desperate Deep State Wants War & Martial Law.

Now, the New York Times is pushing a fifth and final option to stop Donald Trump—essentially by overthrowing the Electoral College with a Color Revolution.

Simultaneously we find Harvard professors openly calling for radically indoctrinated leftists to deploy an extreme form of “militant democracy” in order to thwart the will of the American people and sway the upcoming election.

My mind wanders toward a hung election and civil war.

But alas, it’s only Monday, and I’ve got work to do.

Until next time:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

And so it is.

This week I have written about the eerie calm before the storm, ongoing election fraud, the rise of a Digital Stasi, strange Deep State shenanigans, and the spooky, unassuming October Surprise. I’ve posited the possibility that a Donald Trump victory may in fact be used to weaken the United States and undermine the U.S. Constitution, as counterintuitive as that may seem.

Threaded throughout has been the thought that The Powers That Be are using an arsenal of sophisticated tools to manipulate the general public in mind-blowing ways. This in turn leads to the inversion of reality we are witnessing in society today, along with the strange and deranged behavior and perspectives so prominently on display.

From the macro level, I’ve attempted to frame all of the above within the broader context of the overarching agenda—Agenda 2030—and pointed to the fact that this war is far, far from over. The 2024 election is but a blip in the larger battle.

Today, there was an excellent article out at RedState citing Tucker Carlson’s viral speech at a Trump rally in Georgia, that pulls all of this together. It’s always refreshing to hear prominent thinkers emphasizing that we’re not the weird ones, that reality has been inverted, that we are in fact at war (as previously discussed), and that this war is in fact far from over.

After lambasting the liberal insanity and pointing out the completely backwards narrative (inversion of reality), author Brandon Morse says this:

“These are the weird ones. These are the bad guys. These are the people who want to destroy something beautiful and good. They hate, they attack, and they lie.

In a perfect world, these people would be relegated to the fringes of our society, locked up in prisons for their crimes or even padded rooms. But thanks to these complicit corporations that own the big stages, all this evil, and all this weirdness, is painted as completely normal and a part of everyday life.

It's not. This isn't normal. This isn't good, and it has to go.”

It’s a very prescient point. Weirdness has been normalized, and normal people have been marginalized by the media’s grotesque warping of reality. Not only is this a terrible tragedy, it absolutely must stop. He goes on to say:

“You are the moral majority with the power to change things faster than you think. They don't want you to know that. They want you to think you're alone and powerless. They want you to think the world is theirs and there's nothing you can do about it.

It's time to prove them wrong. Get out there and vote.

And once we win, it will just be the beginning. We the people will destroy the machine they built and restore goodness and sanity to the madness. Things will change because they have to. They hope we'll go back to sleep, thinking we won the war. We won't. This isn't over. The war is just heating up. America has arrived at the battlefield.

Get ready.”

(emphasis added)

This war is just heating up and America has finally arrived at the battlefield.

Get ready.

That should be shouted from the rooftops. GET READY!!

It’s great that popular pundits are coming around to the reality of the situation. It’s wonderful that a wordsmith can spell it out so succinctly.

However, very unfortunately, very few Americans have explored, to any sufficient degree, the most obvious of questions: Get ready for what?

“This war is just heating up.” Actually, it’s been heating up for a long, long time.

“America has arrived at the battlefield.” Really? Maybe.

In reality, most people remain entirely clueless—not just to the shocking depth of corruption and the globalists’ true agenda, but also to the insanely powerful weapons that are currently being used against us and the fact that, from a military perspective, we’re already completely surrounded.

No, in my humble opinion, America has not arrived at the battlefield. This is a great motivational speech, but the rah-rah is painfully shortsighted. It would be more accurate to say that an increasing percentage of the population is waking up to what’s going on, but that’s still a painfully small percentage, and they’re only halfway awake.

Has America arrived at the battlefield? What battlefield?

What is our location on this battlefield? What is the location of the enemy? Where are all our troops? Where are the enemy troops? What resources and weapons do we have? What resources and weapons does the enemy have? What are the primary targets that need to be defended or attacked?

Perhaps most importantly: who is leading this battle, what’s the mission, and what are the marching orders for average everyday Americans?

Get out and vote. Good. DO IT NOW!

But is that going to stop the media from mindfucking the masses? No.

Is that going to stop the Deep State from colluding with Big Tech to censor free speech, push relentless propaganda, and further warp the fabric of reality? No.

If Donald Trump wins—and I do believe he will win—is that going to stop the globalists’ depopulation agenda (aka the radical environmental agenda, more formally known as Sustainable Development), or unravel their decades of carefully coordinated efforts to vertically integrate socialist policies into every level of government, social institutions, and private enterprise? No.

Furthermore, will winning this election suddenly open the public’s eyes to the century of scientifically established psychological warfare that’s being used to transform human consciousness, literally, by rewiring minds at the neurological level? No.

Are Americans really prepared to battle the sinister plans of the secret cabal? No.

Let’s zoom out.

Assuming that Donald Trump will emerge victorious, Brandon Morse optimistically writes, “They hope we’ll go back to sleep, thinking we won the war. We won’t.”

Honestly, I want to believe it, but I don’t.

Which is more likely:

• That a majority of Americans will fully awaken to the evil forces gathered against us, then sufficiently organize themselves for a long, sustained battle to retain the “political will”—i.e. winning elections at every level—in order to systematically expose and deconstruct over a century of globalist scheming? Or;

• That the majority of Americans will celebrate Trump’s victory, be dismayed when he is unable to fully drain the swamp, remain ignorant to the real threats against us, then lose interest in the fight and go back to their popcorn and Netflix?

Human beings are inherently averse to discomfort. It is uncomfortable to consider the full scope of the situation, and therefore, most will never fully consider it. Space based weapons systems for “mood management and mind control” of entire populations? Meh. That’s gotta be a conspiracy—never mind that it’s in the congressional record.

Rabid eugenicists using biological warfare to cull the herd and genetically modify humanity? Governments weaponizing weather patterns against their own citizens? A secret global cabal using weaponized artificial intelligence to reprogram the peasants on a planetary scale? No freaking way.

Who the hell would believe that crap?

Never mind that it’s all been carefully documented by myself and others—and truthfully, I would not have believed it either, until I had conducted thousands of hours of research and stumble upon these disturbing truths for myself.

All at once, these threats seem too fantastic to deal with. Despite the fact that they are real, most people would just as soon go back to eating their peanuts. They would rather stay comfortably numb and cheer for their team in the political circus.

What’s the alternative anyway? How do we fight against all of that?

The answer is local action. It’s direct personal engagement in the battle at hand. We are in a battle for hearts and minds. The battlefield is human consciousness itself.

We are fighting against infectious ideas and Military Grade Memes. We are fighting against the raw force of manipulated emotion, fighting to overcome decades of institutional indoctrination and covert psychological conditioning.

We are fighting, not just for our values, but for the future of humanity. We are fighting against the mental enslavement of the masses and the spiritual assassination of future generations. We are fighting to retain our freedom and virtue as human beings.

The Great Reset and the Fourth Industrial Revolution are upon us.

The enemies of humanity are emboldened.

They may take a short term loss and a momentary setback with the election of Donald Trump, but as I’ve already said, there’s little doubt they’ve already incorporated this into their plans. We need to lift the gaze, look further down the road, and realize that to overcome the mounting tyranny, significant sacrifices must be made.

To win this war, personal risk and discomfort will be a must.

It’s not a pretty picture or a comforting thought, but in all reality, if we are not willing to see it for what it is, consider the implications, and take appropriate actions, we don’t even stand a fighting chance. We need leaders who are informed and aligned against this bigger picture. We need to fight for local control of resources and reject the top-down control that’s being forcefully imposed upon rural America.

And again, this all comes down to direct interactions.

It comes down to taking action at the personal level, to talking to people, to voting, to showing up and speaking out at meetings, and sharing important information within our own circles of influence. We must be fearless in speaking the truth and willing to endure the shame and ridicule that is sure to follow.

Right now, today, the globalists are using advanced Horizon Scanning to facilitate a Digital Transformation by “leveraging data and artificial intelligence” to drive a “cultural transformation” that is nothing less than a Marxist Cultural Revolution.

What are you going to do about it?

Perhaps you might share this report and remind your friends:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

What comes next?

That is the pressing question on my mind right now: what’s next? What’s next in this crazy election? What’s the next bombshell news story? What’s the next narrative? On this relentless march toward global socialism, when will the next shoe drop?

There is no doubt that, if elected, Donald Trump will throw a wrench in globalists’ plans, right? Him winning would be a severe interruption to all things “sustainable development”—aka Agenda 2030—and they’ve already made that clear .

But what if there’s something else going on here?

Earlier this week, I mentioned the eerie calm before the storm. Things are quiet… a little too quiet. We know that while no one is looking the globalists are still scheming for total control, but what is the political establishment up to these days? What is the Deep State doing? What’s Soros up to? What is the puppet master’s next move?

As I’ve let that question simmer, in the back of mind there is something that keeps coming up. It’s along the lines of my previous speculation that the enemies of freedom, the enemies of America as founded, actually want Donald Trump to win.

I understand that seems at odds with the reality being portrayed in the media. Indeed, the assertion seems preposterous, ludicrous, and absurd—but here’s the thing: if they know they can’t beat him, if they have realized they cannot subdue the populist uprising he represents, then they would have to pivot their plans and strategies accordingly, right?

Never forget that the global elites plan their moves far in advance, and they typically take into account almost every conceivable contingency. It’s true that nobody can predict every potential outcome, but the global cabal are master planners. There is no doubt in my mind that they are more than prepared to roll out Plan B, C, D, E, F, or G as needed. They’re up to something, I can feel it.

It is difficult to articulate the many factors at play regarding the cabal’s master planning, but for starters, one must consider the power of weaponized AI, the globalists’ EARS (their Early AI-supported Response with Social listening tool), their Sentinel Surveillance, the advanced uses of the Delphi Method, and even their strange fascination with esoteric phenomenon such as Remote Viewing—all of this comes to bear.

Just for fun, to emphasize the cabal’s heavy advantage in planning ahead, get this:

• Unconventional Human Intelligence Support: Transcendent and Asymmetric Warfare Implications of Remote Viewing (USMC War College)

• Stargate: A SUGGESTED REMOTE VIEWING TRAINING PROCEDURE (CIA)

• An Evaluation of Remote Viewing: Research and Applications (CIA)

To put to rest any speculation that this is some kind of disproven quackery, one need only to consider that according to CIA’s own meticulous documentation, “A considerable variety of material was presented with photographic backing in support of the validity of the perceptual method.”

Thus:

“The evidence shown to us is too impressive to dismiss as mere coincidence.”

And, for the record, briefings on this research “strong emphasized” the ability for remote viewers to train others on their techniques, and dozens were in fact trained, with “various levels of claimed competence.”

If you’re inclined to chase this rabbit further down the hole, check out this more recent research, published in the journal Brain and Behavior in May 2023: Follow-up on the U.S. Central Intelligence Agency's (CIA) remote viewing experiments.

But never mind all of that.

The point is, even though there is an eerie calm before the election, it’s sure as hell not because the scheming global cabal doesn’t have a plan up their sleeves. They do have a plan, and that plan is well-informed, well beyond our wildest imaginations.

Which brings me back to speculation that they actually want Trump to win—or, from a slightly different angle, that they’ve read the tea leaves and know they cannot beat him, and therefore they’ve incorporated his victory into their long term planning.

How might the global cabal incorporate Trump’s victory into their plans?

We know at the outset that Trump’s victory must be used to advance their overarching agenda, which means it must weaken the United States and undermine the U.S. Constitution. This too seems counterintuitive to most patriots, because how could Trump winning weaken the US and undermine the Constitution, right?

Think about the observable inversion of reality we see all around us. Men can be women. Women can be men. Free speech is dangerous. War is peace. Snow is black.

(Personally, I believe this inversion of reality is somehow related to the dark arts we recently discussed, specifically to the mathematical relationship between matter, energy and consciousness. I believe it’s more than just psychological conditioning, but this too must be set aside for today.)

The way that the forces of darkness may use Donald Trump—for lack of a more expressive term—is pretty straight forward. Think about how Trump has been portrayed to the radical leftists, for going on ten years now. Trump Derangement Syndrome is real. They hate the man, and because of that hate, they are willing to do anything to stop him.

As you well know, radical leftists are not afraid to use violence.

But, in all reality, as history has shown, there is only a small percentage of people who will actually be willing to be violent, like the antifa types. However, what must be realized is that their violence will be justified in the minds of the masses, including in the minds of the media minions.

Meanwhile, the pious Right is praying for their enemies.

That’s not a bad thing, per se, but in relationship to the 2020 election, Republicans have essentially proven to be pacifists. The vast majority have no appetite to fight.

Therefore, if the cabal intends for there to be a hung election and a civil war (as Bill Gates has predicted), they’re going to have to incite the radical leftists—and what better way to do that than to allow Donald Trump to be elected?

I say “allow” him to be elected, because, let’s be honest, if they really wanted to, the Deep State could easily dispose of DJT in innumerable ways. They’ve been offing political leaders around the globe for decades, and perhaps they’ve already tried a time or two with Trump, but for whatever reason, the man is still standing.

Hence, Plan B.

Trump becomes the first “felon” to ever get reelected, leftists lose what’s left of their minds, and unleash all hell on American cities. The media fans the flames, demonizing the radical MAGA extremists, telling the whole world this is an existential battle for democracy, because Donald Trump is the equivalent of Adolph Hitler.

They’re already setting the stage.

Today CNN, citing Trump’s ex-chief of staff, is telling the public that Trump is the definition of a fascist, that he wants the kind of generals Hitler had, and that he prefers the “dictator approach to government.”

Similary, the Drudge Report is putting a face with the name, branding Hitler into the public psyche, and further implying that Trump aspires to be just like him, because “Hitler did some good things”—oh, and evidently Trump is going to blame the Jews if he loses.

It’s not that there’s any real wonder as to why these liberal rags are pushing such outrageous propaganda, but even the more moderate liberal outlets seem to be psychologically preparing their audiences for a loss, with the subtle message that the race may be “slipping away” from Kamala Harris.

As if she ever had it in the first place.

Taken altogether, the above could be an indication that the powers that be are ramping up the next phase of their strategy, namely, unleashing chaos once Trump is elected. But, given how completely clueless so many Americans are about the broader strategies at play, I suspect very few people, especially in the cities, even have an inkling as to what’s to come or what might be in store.

They could be delivering pallets of brick as we speak.

But then again, that’s all just wild speculation, right?

Here’s a thought:

What if the October Surprise is, “Surprise! There’s no October Surprise!”

What if this eerie calm is just a time to quietly get all the pieces into place for what comes next? Do you think that antifa is just hanging out in their parent’s basements, playing video games? How do you think their funders would feel about that?

• Community Bonds and Mutual Aid Sustain Anti-Fascists Targeted by the State

• The International Anti-Fascist Defense Fund: 2022-2023 Annual Report

• Anarchist Federation supports antifascists the world over

We already know these internationally funded, violent thugs are going to get a pass from the media and leftist law enforcement, so what might these punks be planning?

Can you imagine another J6 scenario, but this time with a real bonafide violent mob showing up to “defend democracy” by routing out the fascist dictator Donald Trump?

Do you think American patriots are going to take that sitting down? Or, perhaps, do you think a portion of the patriot movement will have finally had enough?

What do you think might happen if patriots do finally step up and square off in the streets with these violent criminals? What if patriots decide to defend the Capitol? Do you think the media will portray them as heroes? How might this violence play out?

On the home front, will antifa push into the suburbs and provoke mostly peaceful liberty loving Americans to defend themselves, their families, and their communities?

If only we had a crystal ball.

In the spirit of sporting speculation, take any given scenario and layer it with a cyberattack from Iran or China or our own rogue Deep State. Imagine the grid goes dark, bank accounts go to zero, and Americans everywhere are plunged into panic.

Would the masses not cry out to their masters?

I believe that regardless of the scenario, America must be brought to her knees for the global cabal to advance. The pain will be swift, but temporary. The solution is already packaged. They just need to create the circumstances to justify their next step.

Whatever happens next, the wise will be prepared. This war is far from over.

Get out and vote and tell your neighbors:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s weird.

Friends, last week was consumed with end of summer, get ready for winter, fall time projects around the homestead. As such, I didn’t do any serious research or writing. I did, however, keep a wary eye on the political circus, the escalation in the Middle East, and the relentlessly scheming global cabal (they had a very busy week).

It intrigues me that even as millions of Americans brace themselves for the next unexpected October Surprise, even with the potential that we will have a “hung election” and a civil war, the ruling class continues about their business, gathering and discussing the details of how they intend to lord over our future.

Last week, when essentially no one was looking, the World Economic Forum held their annual Global Futures Council to discuss, among other things, how to integrate more “neurodivergents” into the workforce. They were pushing global policies that demand business leaders do more to foster greater “psychological safety” in the workplace, to protect all the snowflakes who are afraid of other people’s opinions.

Of note, along with predictably squawking about the so-called “climate crisis,” these self-entitled elites also claim that the world is suffering from an “accelerating infodemic,” one that is fueling a “decline of trust in international systems.” Their solution is to infiltrate the workplace and steer the working class toward “streamlined, consistent and verified sources of information”—their words, not mine.

Make no mistake, this “accelerating infodemic” does factor into the 2024 election.

Also while no one is looking, this week the globalists are holding their “People’s COP” — the 16th meeting of the Conference of Parties to the UN Convention on Biological Diversity, known by the shorthand CBD COP16, to cite the socialist GlobalIssues.com website. As I’m sure you can deduce, that gathering is where the indoctrinated environmental cult is getting their marching orders for the next two years of radical action to save the planet.

This too has implications on the upcoming election.

Typically, I’d take a deep dive into these agendas and expose them for what they are, but in light of the election, now just 14 days away, I’m going to turn attention to center stage and provide a humble peasant’s perspective on what’s going on.

In my mind, there is an eerie calm right now. Given the lack of earth-shattering, mind-gripping headlines, I suspect we have yet to see the real October surprise.

That’s my suspicion.

Instead, people on the Left and Right are getting treated to a steady stream of spoon-fed drivel, as each echo chamber reinforces all their current assumptions. Most pundits are dutifully lapping at the trough, and few seem even slightly interested in the bigger picture. The result is a glaring lack of substance in the headline news.

No surprise there.

The big news today—if one were to succumb to the humdrum droning of subpar reporting—is that Donald J. Trump flipped some burgers at a Pennsylvania McDonalds. Both sides are spinning it in predictable fashion:

So, should we be thrilled that liberals are “melting down” over the “dumbest reason” ever? Or should we be fried that they are accusing Trump of being “one fry short of a happy meal”? Perhaps we should just dismiss this as prime time political theater?

Personally, I give a rip.

What I want to emphasize today is how diametrically opposed the perspectives on both sides are. Right now, low-information voters are enthralled by the theater, and as such, their emotions are getting played like a sardonic symphony.

CNN is ginning up leftist rage with headlines like this:

Meanwhile, the weaponized federal government is screeching about foreign interference and “misinformation” that might sway the election—which ties directly into the globalists ongoing agenda—while simultaneously deploying “district elections officers” across the country to beef up an Election Threats Task Force, which has issued the following warning:

“If you threaten to harm or kill an election worker or official or volunteer, the Justice Department will find you.”

Keep in mind, this thinly veiled threat—they will find you—undoubtedly dampens the appetite of some patriots who’d like to show up and ensure accountability in the election process. Nobody wants to be pursued by the rabid DOJ, especially if this pursuit can be triggered by any smug, sensational “election-related complaints.”

If some shady radical activist feels uncomfortable being watched, they can simply report that they feel intimidated and harassed, and then, the DOJ will find you.In fact, the government has already setup convenient public snitch lines and “local points of contact” to handle all the eagerly anticipated “reports on the ground.”

Pair this travesty with the bold, blatant, in-your-face election fraud that’s happening across the board, and what we have is a perfect recipe for friction. From my perspective, this appears to be a preemptive attempt to intimidate the American Patriots who desperately want to ensure that we have some level of election integrity.

Beyond that, I believe this is normalizing America’s own federal Stasi, the classic arm of totalitarian regimes that is charged with maintaining power for the ruling party. Put differently, the Feds are normalizing the federal government’s interference and control over our elections, so that they can maintain power in perpetuity.

Per Wikipedia:

“The function of the Stasi in East Germany (the GDR) resembled that of the KGB in the Soviet Union,⁠ in that it served to maintain state authority and the position of the ruling party, in this case the Socialist Unity Party of Germany (SED). This was accomplished primarily through the use of a network of civilian informants who contributed to the arrest of approximately 250,000 people in East Germany.”

Civilian informants ratted out dissenters, and the government swooped in to sweep them under the rug, mainly by yanking them out of their homes and locking them behind bars. This is the only way socialists can purge dissent from the public square, which is necessary to keep their delicate delusions intact. Therefore, those who resist assimilation into the Collective Cult must be forcefully removed from society.

They do it every damn time.

Speaking of snitch lines, I am reminded of the fed’s Speak Now program, as reported on back in TR 406 - The Future is In Our Hands. Those who’ve been with me may recall the pretty purple propaganda with big loopy letters:

Justice is better than revenge they say. You may not be superman, but you can be a super snitch and help the FBI “protect the country” by reporting your neighbors, coworkers, and political opponents to the weaponized federal government.

In reality, this despicable campaign is a massive power play, as noted in TR 406:

[Now] anyone, anywhere, at anytime can now report you, me, or anyone else to the FBI—and they can do so for any reason, however fictitious or untruthful, according the “FBI’S VERSION” of federal crime.

Thus, an FBI plant can report you to the FBI. Hell, an ex-spouse, disgruntled employee, spoiled brat kid, punk ass trouble maker, or business competitor could report you to the FBI. The question I have for you is this: Are you scared?

Will this shut you up? Will this tamp down your desire to rout out tyranny? Will this stifle your urge to live free? Will this prevent you from making a stand?

Those questions are more pressing today than ever before. Chew on it.

In passing, I’d like to mention that Sentinel Surveillance, Social Listening, and Algorithmic Social Interventions—all technical terms, used for election interference, and previously discussed at length (see below)—have formed a sort of digital Stasi that would make the KGB green with envy.

However, even with this massive technological advantage, when it comes to tyranny, there is no real substitute for boots on the ground.

So let’s be real: currently, the United States government has become a supercharged version of everything our forefathers warned us about. The federal beauracracy is deploying the same strategies used by the Stasi and the KGB to suppress and eliminate dissent. They are institutionalizing tyranny, and their mission is nearly complete. Where’s the resistance?

Consider the rampant fraud:

• Michigan’s Soros-funded SOS Has More Registered Voters on Voter Rolls Than Eligible Voters. Elon Musk: “Shame on you for blatantly lying to the public!”

• 31,000 Mail-In Ballots Requested At Ineligible Addresses – In One Swing State!

• NY Lawmaker Claims "Smoking Gun" In NYC Migrant Voter Fraud Scheme

• Fraud in Arizona as 218,000 Voters Are Registered Without Verifying Citizenship

• Democratic Candidate Arrested on Multiple Felony Voter Fraud Charges

• Watchdog Discovers Thousands of Unexplained Changes In Florida Voter Rolls

• Elon Musk Steps Up Election Integrity Crusade, Breaks Down How Democrats Make It Near Impossible to Prove Voter Fraud

• Progressive Dems In Michigan Tell Undercover Journo They Were 'Ballot Harvested' Out Of Office By Muslim Voter Fraud Network

• Woman Charged with Voter Fraud in Wisconsin Was ALSO INVOLVED in 2020 Election Night Absentee Ballot Flash Drive Scandal

• Jesse Watters Talks Mail-In Ballots and Democrat Voter Fraud on FOX News – The Most Important Issue Facing the Nation

• Connecticut Court Overturns Fraudulent Election Due to Ballot Box Voter Fraud

• "Isolated Event" Again? All Voters Of New York County Falsely Identified As Democrats In Voter IDs

• Abbott Says Texas Has Purged Over A Million Ineligible Voters

• Nevada Agrees To Purge 90K Ineligible Voters From Election Rolls

• Nearly 750,000 Purged From North Carolina's Voter Rolls, Including 130,000 Dead People And 290,000 Duplicates

I share all of those links to spare you the agony of sifting through the so-called fact-checkers who are doing everything they can to deny this reality and bury the truth. There is more truth out there, but you’ll find very little of it in your search results.

Of course, I’d be remiss to leave out the fact that the DOJ is actively suing at least two states who are trying to facilitate and secure a somewhat accurate election:

• DOJ Sues Virginia For Purging Voter Rolls

• DOJ Sues Alabama For Voter Roll Purge of Noncitizens

Think about that.

So much for state’s right to guarantee a free and fair election.

Clearly our elections have been compromised, but the point I want to return to and drive home today, is the fact that millions upon millions of Americans are living in two totally different realities. Do not underestimate the media’s ability to fabricate “reality” out of falsehoods—and though you yourself may not be so easily deceived, don’t doubt for a second that millions of people believe their lies.

There is a poll to support any given perspective. There are fact-checkers to conceal any given fact and plenty of narratives that can be used to shore up any given lie.

The situation, in all reality, is much more dire than most people realize. We are way, way past a “long train of abuses and usurpations.” We are witnessing an authoritarian takeover in real-time, using the same tried and true tactics of prior tyrannical regimes, complete with a 21st century techno-dystopian twist.

Ballots are out in most places. Vote like your life depends on it. Hope for the best, but be prepared for the worst. I don’t believe we’ve seen anything near the worst of it yet, and chances are, it’s about to get bumpy.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

There’s something there.

There has been a pattern cropping up in conversations lately, indicating a deeper level of manipulation that I’ve sensed beneath the surface, but not fully articulated. It has to do with the interaction between matter, energy, and consciousness, which in the simplest terms, manifests one’s emotional reality in the physical world.

I know it sounds all woo-woo, but there is a hard science backing up this phenomenon — known as “psychotronics” — and, if you’ve been with me on this learning journey, you may recall that it has been heavily researched by the Deep State. I’ll offer these links from the CIA.gov website to make the point:

• CIA WORLD FACTBOOK - THE PSYCHOTRONIC UNIVERSE

• 21ST CENTURY: THE ERA OF NEW SCIENCE AND NEW TECHNOLOGY, BEYOND MODERN PHYSICS THE EMERGENCE OF PSYCHOTRONICS

• CIA FOIA | PSYCHIC WARFARE: EXPLORING THE MIND FRONTIER

• DEFENSE INTELLIGENCE AGENCY: PARAPSYCHOLOGY RESEARCH

• PSYCHOTRONICS RESEARCH ON ATTRACTION AND GRAVITATION

Psychotronics is a fascinating field of study that has massive implications. There is a ton of information in those declassified documents, showing that this science has been thoroughly researched and developed over the last fifty years or so.

In those documents, you will find a great deal of physics and mathematics, being presented by some very brilliant people, that grounds all of this in natural reality. You will also find some very intriguing diagrams that flesh out the relationship between energy, matter, and consciousness, like this one:

As well as this more esoteric Psychotronic Model of Man:

Taking a look at the symbols above, I couldn’t help but think of the “all seeing eye” and the symbolism that is associated with certain secret societies. For example:

Please keep in mind that there are mathematical principles beneath these symbols, and these principles fully substantiate the science of psychotronics. The symbolism implies these principles have been understood much longer than the science of it, which is why I’d like to frame the rest of the conversation with this quote from declassified document #3 above:

“The brass hats are indeed dabbling in the dark arts.”

Whether you believe it or not, whether you interpret that statement literally or take it more metaphorically, it seems prudent to accept that there’s something there.

Someone understands how to manipulate energy, matter, and consciousness in a way that very, very few people would ever conceive possible. Could this knowledge be the big “secret” behind secret societies? Could this have anything to do with the historic capacity of rulers to control the masses?

More importantly, could any of this secret knowledge be impacting current geopolitical events, up to and including the 2024 election?

Let’s zoom out.

Today, we awaken to the devastating aftermath of Hurricane Milton, inflation coming in hotter than expected, another whistle-blower mysteriously dropping dead, another CNN panelist calling Trump Hitler and suggesting he would “engage in a eugenics program” targeting blacks and gays, another university professor calling for the execution of political opposition (claiming men who don’t vote for Kamala Harris should be lined up and shot), fresh assurance that even more chaos is coming, and of course, another “conspiracy theory” that’s been proven true.

Side note: It turns out putting fluoride in the water — which is a well-known neurotoxin — really does make people dumber. Gosh, after all these years, who knew.

I’m sure decades of the government forcing fluoridation was just an accident, because the government is our benevolent protector, right? I mean, come on man, the government would never do anything to damage or deceive its citizenry, right?

You know as well as I do that such sentiment is absurdly naive.

But, oddly enough, many people have a hard time accepting the possibility that the government would ever do anything to intentionally harm them. There are too few people who remember the warning of Ronald Reagan’s nine most terrifying words:

“I’m from the government, and I’m here to help.”

This dangerous deferral and dependence on government is, in my mind, the direct result of decades of psycho-social conditioning, neurolinguistic programming, and subconscious taming, all of which has culminated in a fundamental transformation of human consciousness and the intentional restructuring of the average mind.

AKA, public brainwashing. Not a conspiracy.

I’ve researched and written about this at length, as have many others, so I’ll take for granted that you’re aware there is a science to all of this as well. That said, you may be wondering where the so-called “dark arts” potentially play into this.

Consider that reprogramming the biological brain—via repetitive propaganda that embeds predictable emotional triggers within reinforced neuro synapses—conditions the mind and body to experience a physiological reaction (i.e. whenchemicals are released into the bloodstream that affect your respiration and heart rate, you feel it).

What must be realized is that this can, and does, happen without conscious awareness. Sometimes we are aware our emotional triggers have been activated, other times not.

As a result, many times our emotions are being manipulated without our realizing it.

But this is all biological, physiological, psycho-somatic stuff.

• Journal of Psychosomatic Research

• Differentiating Psychosomatic, Somatopsychic, and Medical Uncertainty

• Psychosomatics today: a review of contemporary theory and practice

In other words, this manipulation is impacting one’s perception via the mind-body connection. Put differently, suggested thoughts lead to the “lived experience” of emotional feelings—all of which may be prompted without conscious awareness.

For what it’s worth, the words “lived experience” are being embedded throughout the globalist propaganda, which has also trickled down into liberal talking points. Pay attention and you will notice it. It’s soon to be everywhere.

Why? Because by emphasizing “lived experience” they, the manipulators, are elevating conditioned emotional response to the level of “objective reality.”

Because I feel it, it must be real.

That’s my lived experience, and who the hell are you to deny it?

Examples abound.

For the manipulative and abusive global elites, this means they’ve got people right where they want them. People who can no longer distinguish between what they think, what they feel, and actual factual reality, become pawns on the chessboard.

They have been assimilated into the collective hive mind and transformed into mindless cogs. They can be whipped into a fit of rage, plunged into the depths of despair, or excited into an orgy of emotional rapture, all at the snap of a finger.

And they will vote accordingly.

We can see the evidence of this everyday, can we not?

But again, this is all just psychological conditioning. It is the result of state indoctrination, and though it leads to a detachment from reality, it really requires none of the “dark arts” or psychotronic warfare presented at the outset.

Learning from a declassified CIA document that the global elites “are indeed dabbling in the dark arts” suggests there is something else going on, something that is perhaps far darker and more nefarious than you’ve ever imagined. But what?

Before I attempt to answer that question, I’d like to acknowledge that I’m keenly aware of how “far out there” this all may seem. I’m also aware that this is not everyone’s cup of tea, and that many people would just as soon dismiss these broader philosophical considerations, in favor of more popcorn and political circus.

That said, I sincerely appreciate your time and attention in following me through on this. There is something there, and though it’s difficult to put the finger on, I’m going to make the effort to make the connection between this obscure knowledge and how this secret science may be impacting you, today, at the personal level.

By extension, we’ll also consider societal impact between now and the election, and over the long term as well.

How might psychotronic warfare be impacting you and I today? Beyond the simple emotional manipulation we all experience when confronted with well-crafted propaganda, I believe that the psychotronic attacks are targeting the spiritual aspect of the mind-body-soul connection.

As we’ve seen, the study of psychotronics mathematically models the relationship between energy, matter, and consciousness. In any mathematical formula, what you do to one side of the equation affects the other side of the equation. Studying the diagram at the top of the report will help you visualize this, and for the math lovers in the audience there are many additional equations in those source documents.

To keep it concise, think of it like this:

Energy » Matter » Consciousness

And then relate it to being human like this:

Mind » Body » Soul

“Where the focus goes, the energy flows.”

To cut to the chase, the physics and mathematics underlying the Psychotronic Model of Man provides a scientific method for spiritual manipulation—hence, the dark arts.

Here’s where it gets difficult to articulate…

Perhaps you’ve heard the terms “light of the soul” or “light of awareness” before?

Contrast that bright light from within with terms such as “brain fog” or “mental haze,” and you may begin to glimpse how the mind can obscure the soul.

Energy affects matter, which affects consciousness. For example, a flame releases heat, the heat warms your skin, and you become conscious of your proximity to the fire. But here’s the catch: consciousness also affects matter and energy. You might be conscious of the dwindling flame, toss wood on the fire, and release more energy.

How does this relate to the mind, body, soul connection, and why is this relevant to geopolitical chaos, the political circus, and presidential elections?

Awareness is the animating force of existence. This holds true from the level of personal awareness directing one’s actions, to flowers bending toward the sun, down to the subatomic level of molecular structure that gives rise to the different elements.

The permiation of awareness is a deep and profound truth.

Awareness responds to vibrational frequency at every level, which allows for the manipulation of matter, energy, and even consciousnes. That means it also allows for the manipulation of mind, body, and soul. Think brain entrainment.

When the congressional record refers to systems for “mood management and mind control,” I believe this is what they are referring to—or more accurately, how they are able to build and deploy these systems.

See the Chinese “neurostrike weapon” as a prime example.

I have written about “spiritual assassination” is several prior reports, and the buildling upon the science of psychotronics we’re digesting today, I’d like to really drive this point home—becauase this is an issue that affects everything.

If, by using frequency, those wielding 21st century weapons can deploy the so-called “dark arts” on a planetary scale, then we must sound the alarm. But to do so, we must first understand the problem well enough to articulate it to others.

I submitt for your consideration that psychotronic warfare aims to diminish spiritual awareness, to suffocate and even potentially extinguish consciousness, for the purpose of controlling the human spirit. How they do it is mathematically complex, but the purpose is simple: they want total control of mind, body, and soul.

Why? Because the human soul gives birth to the spirit of resistance. The human spirit is born to be free, even before our brains and bodies are fully formed, our minds come online, or we have any semblance of conscious awareness.

To snuff out the spirit of resistance, the individual human spirit must be diminished, reduced, and subdued. Spiritual assassination achieves just that.

Body and mind are hijacked to obscure inner spiritual awareness. The light from within gets intentionally concealed by a cloud of suggested thoughts and emotion. Unable to sense or connect with the spirit within, the subdued human becomes incapacitated and unable to connect with the Source of Truth, and therefore becomes hopelessly lost in an endless sea illusions.

There is no longer a Divine Light by which to navigate.

When emotional reaction to orchestrated chaos leaves people disheveled and confused, the only apparent solution is to cry out to the powerful ruling class for more protection and support. Then, feeding from the hands of their captors, the spiritually subdued finds comfort and meaning in something other than being human.

Gone is the magic of life.

May it never be so.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Like I was saying…

Front and center at TheHill.com this morning, was the suggestion that Hurricane Milton might be the October Surprise in the presidential race:

If you’ve been with me, you know I made that same suggestion yesterday, in TR 634 - On the Weaponization of Weather and Geoengineering Elections:

Could weaponized weather, engineered emergencies, and mass evacuations be the unexpected October surprise? Perhaps. At this point, anything seems possible.

Another pandemic might be too obvious. Nuclear war might be too destructive. Rigging the election with millions of illegal voters and third-party controlled, vote-flipping machines might not be enough.

But the weaponization of weather?

Surely they’d never see it coming—and surely no one would be crazy enough to suggest it, let alone believe that it was even possible.

Of course, there is exactly zero chance that anyone at The Hill would ever suspect or dare to suggest that this hurricane could potentially be intensified and intentionally steered for the explicit purpose of election interference. Who would?

That would be beyond the pale, right?

That said, this morning it was nice to see some of the big wig pundits coming around to the fact that the government is controlling the weather—which apparently is still shocking news to many, as this headline from the Gateway Pundit makes clear:

Marjorie Taylor Greene’s Weather Manipulation Claims Backed by Science — Must Read Deep Dive into History of Weather Manipulation — Shocking Facts Revealed!

…the facts are shocking indeed…

BUT, we’ve already covered that. So, in the spirit of staying one step ahead, I’d like to turn attention to some additionally known facts that may well play into the election. The disruptive destruction that a hurricane leaves in its wake might interfere with an election in myriad ways, but there’s one vector that seems almost tailor-made for the overarching narratives currently being circulated.

You may recall the recent spate of headlines about the exceedingly lethal Marburg Virus, and the theoretically unrelated panic buying of toilet paper, both of which were discussed last week. Keep these storylines in mind moving forward.

I say “theoretically unrelated” because the panic buying of toilet paper was allegedly related to the dock strikes, not related to the virus. However, I still believe that all the hype about “panic buying toilet paper” trigger memories of the pandemic in people’s minds. October started off with headlines suggesting another deadly virus and panic buying toilet paper, and I highly doubt that’s a coincidence.

Now, one week later, while the public’s attention is affixed on the next catastrophic storm, there are more rumors of a different virus outbreak, this time of Bird Flu:

• Poultry industry braces for economic hit from avian flu

• Bird flu outbreak impacts dairy farms in California's Central Valley

• As bird flu outbreak expands, dairy farms report it's worse than they expected

• Two California dairy workers were infected with bird flu, latest human cases

Just as a matter of semantics, I find it fascinating that dairy farms are suffering worse than expected from the bird flu. I find it even more fascinating that the transmission of bird flu into human beings has come from cows, but never mind all that.

Follow this timeline:

• (7/19) Bird flu is widening its reach. Maps show US counties affected by outbreak.

• (7/24) With the U.S. bird flu outbreak uncontained, scientists see growing risks

• (8/1) Scientific America: Bird Flu Cases in People Are Being Undercounted

• (8/2) Bird flu cases are going undetected, new study suggests.

• (8/15) Cats in the U.S. Are Contracting Bird Flu

• (8/19) Crossing the Species Barrier: Bird Flu's Surprising Spread to Humans

• (8/20) Bird flu now infecting domestic pet cats (and dogs) across US

And then:

• (9/6) CDC Confirms Human H5 Bird Flu Case in Missouri

“Missouri DHSS reports that the patient, who was hospitalized, had underlying medical conditions… There is no immediate known animal exposure.

This is the 14th human case of H5 reported in the United States during 2024 and the first case of H5 without a known occupational exposure to sick or infected animals.”

In a September 20th update, the CDC says that in addition to the 14 human cases of bird flu, there are now 213 dairy herds across 14 states that have confirmed cases of avian influenza A(H5N1) infections, along with “detections” in 36 commercial poultry flocks and 22 backyard flocks in 48 states, and all of these numbers continue to grow.

Additionally, they note that the sick individual in Missouri with no known animal contact also had a “household contact” who became ill on the same day—but this “simultaneous development of symptoms in two people does not support person-to-person spread but suggests a common exposure.”

Okay, sure.

If you’re tracking on the timeline, you’ll notice there has been an explosion of Bird Flu news over the last few months. There were many more stories out there, but the point is that this was all happening during the summer while pretty much no one was paying attention.

Thankfully, someone was paying attention.

In fact, during this same timeframe someone was planning for an International Bird Flu Summit, which took place in Washington, DC last week, October 2nd to the 4th. Curiously enough, the top of their brochure even lines out the steps of an outbreak:

• in “Birds.”

• in “Cattles.”

• in “Pets.”

• in “People.”

QUESTION: Did we not just see that exact same sequence in the headlines?

What are the chances that is just a coincidence?

The Bird Flu Summit itself seems to be structured very similar to the Event 201, which took place in October 2019, just months before the pandemic unleashed all hell and interfered with the 2020 election. For anyone unfamiliar how that all played out, here’s an excerpt from TR 41 (almost 600 reports ago!!):

In October 2019, Dr. Fauci, along with the Gates Foundation, the World Economic Forum, and a host of other stakeholders, ran a war-game simulation of a global viral pandemic. It was called Event 201, and it was a high-level strategy session that consisted of “pre-recorded news broadcasts, live “staff” briefings, and moderated discussions on specific topics. These issues were carefully designed in a compelling narrative that “educated the participants and the audience.”

When confronted on eerie similarities between Event 201 and the pandemic that kicked-off in the following months, Bill Gates tried to deny the simulation had ever happened, claiming the outbreak of a global viral pandemic was uncharted territory.

This is ironic, considering the 4th segment of this event was held December 18th, 2019 — just weeks before COVID headlines first appeared. What was the topic of discussion amongst these global elites on that historical day? Nothing less than manipulation of the masses by carefully controlling the narrative.

Now, nearly three years later, straight out the gate on the agenda, we find the Bird Flu Summit facilitating discussion about “Mass Fatality Management Planning” and “Continuity of Operations and Continuity of Government Planning” — which according to the brochure is designed for dealing with “successive waves of pandemic outbreaks.” Interesting.

Digging in a little, the list of program speakers presents a bunch of mid-level players from various universities and health departments across the country, all of whom I suspect are nothing more than useful idiots getting used by the global cabal.

The one standout to me was Dr. Karen Hogan, who works for Ginko Biosecurity (as opposed to a Health Department or School of Public Health like all the others).

Interestingly enough, Ginko Biosecurity produces “biological data” on demand. They also boast of “revolutionizing pharmaceutical manufacturing” with artificial intelligence, and claim to be the only biotech company in the U.S. with a “dedicated Biosecurity business” — which, of course, they are aggressively marketing to governments around the world.

Just in case it’s not clear, this company is perfectly positioned to create the problem (biological data on demand) and provide the solution (pharmaceutical manufacturing). Indeed, this company would be the perfect company to help pull off another round of public fleecing under the guise of a deadly pandemic.

But alas, as suspicious as all of this seems to me (the Summit websites smacks of globalist propaganda, but it doesn’t actually list who’s organizing the event), I want to bend the conversation back to the hurricanes.

Why?

Because hurricanes spread disease.

• Compound hazards: how hurricane protective actions could increase transmission risk of COVID-19

• When a hurricane finally passes, it spreads deadly disease in its wake

• Hurricanes Impact Public Health for Months After Storm

• In the Aftermath: Post-Hurricane Infections - ContagionLive

• In mountain areas flooded by Hurricane Helene, these health risks are rising

You see, not only does the aftermath of a hurricane spread disease, protective actions could actually increase transmission—that’s what The Science says.

Furthermore, with all the flooding and storm surge, waste water surveillance would provide a veritable cornucopia of data that could be vacuumed up by companies like Ginko Biosecurity, and then used to artificially inflate a bunch of scary statistics.

It many ways, the stage has been set for a perfect storm.

Mind the pun.

Let’s connect the dots.

Government weather modification is capable of intensifying and directing storms.

Extreme weather, like hurricanes, is known to accelerate the spread of disease.

The timeline of headlines indicates bird flu was spreading prior to the Summit.

The Bird Flu Summit suggests widespread H5N1 could be a mass fatality event.

That suggestion, combined with on demand data, would justify a pandemic response.

Could hurricane season whip fears over Bird Flu into a full-blown pandemic? Could that be the October surprise? Or is this perhaps something that will be waiting in the wind for after the inauguration? It’s all on the table I suppose, so we’ll just have to wait and see.

I highly doubt there will be any sort of pandemic response in the next 27 days, but again, the stage has been set. That said, the weather alone could interrupt and change the outcome of the election. Regardless, there are far too many bizarre coincidences afoot to overlook the possibility that Bird Flu might play into all of this.

How all of this plays out is anyone’s guess. Just remember, even if they do try to stir up another round of panic, the solution remains the same: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s do this.

As long time readers and listener of The Torch Report know, I am not one to entertain many of the more wild-eyed, tinfoil hat conspiracies that circulate through certain patriot circles. In fact, when confronted with such crap, I call it out and debunk it, or simply ignore it and cast into the bin of rubbish, psyop narratives.

The first example that comes to mind is the Brunson v. Adams psyop—one that still crops it’s ugly head up from time to time, even now. Like so many of the other BS stories out there, this one is all about instilling false hope. Hopium abounds.

Over the last four years, I’ve encountered various perspectives that are so outrageous, I’m often left scratching my head and wondering how in the hell anyone could possibly believe them. All the talk of Trump being the one who’s really in charge of the military, how the White Hats are working stealthily behind the scenes in a shadow government, the QAnon nonsense, and so on—none of it has ever rung true to me.

There were always direct questions that could easily dismantle these narratives, but people who had bought into them always had an excuse to justify the absurdity of it all. In my mind, this is essentially no different than believing if you strap a bomb on your body and blow up a bunch of innocent people, then you’ll get 40 virgins in heaven.

It just goes to show that people will believe anything.

This is all part of the human condition, and we’d all be wise to keep that in mind. Any one of us can convince ourselves, or be convinced, of damn near anything. Unfortunately, it’s easy to identify when other people have been duped into believing in fairytales, but it’s much more difficult to confront the possibility that we ourselves are suffering from delusions.

All that to say, as I’m sure you are aware, there are plenty of “conspiracies” that have proven to be true (i.e. the sham plan-demic), and even in some of the more absurd stories, there are often a few legitimate facts sprinkled throughout just to give it an air of legitimacy. Through the lens of psychological warfare, such tactics are intended to stir up confusion and uncertainty, turn people against each other, divide and delegitimize any opposition to tyranny, and keep people mentally off balance.

It also serves to heighten suggestibility, as the inherent urge to make sense of the madness and seek answers drives people down carefully fabricated rabbit holes, on an endless quest for truth. Put differently, human nature is being exploited to hijack our curiosity and lead our minds into the maze of our own mental mirage.

AND YET, there are many things happening in the world today, many inconvenient and obscure truths, that even though they may seem utterly outrageous, are nonetheless rooted in objective, verifiable reality. This is why I’ve previously written about the need for believing in impossible things.

If, for example, we reject the notion that there is a “secret cabal” working to undermine the United States, depopulate the planet, and institute a techno-dystopian hell they call Future Earth—all of which sounds so fantastically impossible, the average person cannot be blamed for rejecting it outright—then we cannot confront this evil and organize against it. Does that make sense?

Thus, we must navigate a difficult juxtaposition.

On the one hand, we must remain exceptionally skeptical of the various narratives encountered in the ethos of the online world, and be ready and willing to reject deceptive falsehoods, even if they appear to align with our own predilections.

On the other hand, we must remain intentionally curious, vigilantly verify the veracity of these narratives, and be prepared to accept that sometimes the truth is stranger than fiction, even when the mind would prefer to dismiss the uncomfortable truth.

For example, this is a truth that many would find difficult to accept:

• According to the congressional record, the U.S. government has “space based systems using radiation, electromagnetic, psychotronic, sonic, laser, or other energies directed at individual persons or targeted populations for the purpose of information war, mood management, or mind control of such persons or populations”—and they have had, for over twenty years.

That disturbing information was first unearthed in TR 401 - Meat Eaters Must Rise Up, which was scouring government sources to answer the following question:

Could the global cabal be driving all this climate change?

In light of the catastrophic disaster left in the wake of Hurricane Helene, and with another Category 5 storm brewing in the Gulf as we speak, it seems relevant to revisit this question, in light of the unequivocal conclusion:

I received several responses based on that report, indicating that in certain circles this is not only a hot topic, it’s a well-known fact. That led me to dig even deeper.

It’s been known that governments have been geoengineering weather patterns for decades, but I don’t want to get stuck on that now. Suffice it to say that governments have been modifying weather patterns in many different places around the world, including right here at home, for different disturbing reasons such as disrupting the economy and destroying crops. FACT.

It has been known…

It has been known, for over 50 years, that the U.S. government (and other governments around the world) have been able to weaponize weather modification for military purposes. Let that sink in.

Governments can weaponize the weather. FACT.

To further substantiate this fact, consider this short introduction from the United Nation’s 1978 Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental Modification Techniques:

“The problem of artificial modification of the environment for military or other hostile purposes was brought to the international agenda in the early 1970s. In July 1974, USA and USSR agreed to hold bilateral discussions on measures to overcome the danger of the use of environmental modification techniques for military purposes and three subsequent rounds of discussions in 1974 and 1975. In August 1975, USA and USSR tabled identical draft texts of a convention at the Conference of the Committee on Disarmament (CCD), where intensive negotiations resulted in a modified text and understandings regarding four articles of this Convention in 1976.”

Thus, the weaponization of weather modification is irrefutable, is it not?

Of course, that was then, and this is now. I’m sure no one is using “artificial modification of the environment for military or other hostile purposes” anymore—but to use these capabilities to save the planet, for the greater good?

There is no doubt that is still on the table.

In 2001, the U.S. Department of Energy called for a $64 million dollar investment to do just that. Feel free to peruse this 390-page government report on GEOENGINEERING: PARTS I, II, AND III, if you’d like to get up to speed on that.

But for today, I’d like to turn our attention to this headline:

World at War with Criminals Controlling Weather

At first glance, sans the preceding preface, one might be inclined to scoff at that headline, right? Is the world really at war with criminals who are controlling the weather, really? That sounds so absolutely ridiculous, who the hell would ever believe it? Surely this must be another one of those famous vast right-wing conspiracies!

Consider the perspective being presented:

“Hurricane Helene is the latest crime the climate engineering cabal put on the people of Georgia, North Carolina, Virginia, Tennessee and Florida. The storm was no accident, and neither was its path. …

[T]hese events are being ramped up to even more catastrophic levels. Finally, and thankfully, people are waking up to what is being done to them. More are waking up to the fact that these storms are being steered.

This is patented technology.”

The article goes on to speculate that the storm was intentionally intensified and steered toward strategic lithium and crystal mines in North Carolina.

Others, such as Marjorie Taylor Green—whom some consider to be a crackpot conspiracy theorist—have suggested that this storm may have been weaponized to interfere with the upcoming election by targeting large swaths of rural conservative voters along the eastern seaboard.

Regardless, setting the speculation aside, consider the current circumstance:

What are the chances that a Category 5 hurricane — one that just “exploded” onto the scene, with an “unusual path” that just so happens to be targeting the “especially vulnerable” Tampa Bay area — is intentionally being used to create a state of emergency and mass evacuations less than a month before the election?

While the majority of conservative pundits are mocking the fact that FEMA is out of money, presumably because they’ve squandered millions to buy up the votes of illegal aliens, while reportedly BLOCKING aid to devastated American communities, I’d like to double-down on the speculation that this could be an engineered storm that has been weaponized for election interference.

I know it sounds crazy, but please hear me out.

Consider that the path of this storm targets one of the most pivotal regions, in one of the most pivotal states, that could potentially sway the outcome of the entire election.

From the Tampa Bay Times:

“The Tampa Bay region, which for decades has been a swing region within a swing state, is a toss-up no longer. Now, DeSantis says, it can be penciled into the Republican column.

“Hillsborough (Tampa) is about to flip from D to R, which will mean every county in the Tampa Bay market has a R advantage in this previously ‘swing’ region of the state,” DeSantis wrote on the social platform X.”

The article goes on to explain that as recently as the fall of 2020, Democrats had an advantage of nearly 74,000 active registered voters in the area. Given that the area has since seen a massive shift toward Republicans in recent years, the cabal is probably freaking out, especially since this region could determine the next president:

• Florida Hispanic voters could decide the election

• The Latino swing voters who could decide the US election

• The Battle For Florida's Latino Voters Could Decide The Entire Election

• New poll shows Florida Hispanic voters back Trump over Harris

OUCH.

Clearly, having Hispanic voters in Florida falling for Donald Trump poses a major threat to democracy—at least in the eyes of the Deep State and the global cabal.

Could weaponized weather, engineered emergencies, and mass evacuations be the unexpected October surprise? Perhaps. At this point, anything seems possible.

Another pandemic might be too obvious. Nuclear war might be too destructive. Rigging the election with millions of illegal voters and third-party controlled, vote-flipping machines might not be enough.

But the weaponization of weather?

Surely they’d never see it coming—and surely no one would be crazy enough to suggest it, let alone believe that it was even possible.

Until now. Please share.

And remember, even in the face of weaponized weather, RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Where should we start?

I’m going to skip a rock off the headlines this morning, before sharing some perspective from the political fray on the local front. There’s a lot happening in the world, no doubt about it, but cumulatively, all I see is the “the slow roll of insanity”—as in, it’s just another day of theatrical madness, another day of edge-of-your-seat headlines that impart no real substance or understanding.

Of course, if you were to take all the theater at face value, you’d probably be expecting the world as we know it to come to end, sometime sooner than later. With all that’s happening between Israel and Iran, World War III appears to be officially underway. Now there’s a class X9 solar flare set to strike Earth sometime in the next 24-48hrs, which strangely echos a solar storm that almost sparked nuclear war back in 1967.

The coincidence is so striking, it’s worth sharing this short excerpt from Newsweek:

“In May 1967, a solar storm brought the world to the brink of what could have been a nuclear war. …The world was in the grips of the Cold War in 1967 when the sun belched out one of the largest solar storms ever observed at the time, releasing a colossal radio burst that interfered with communication services here on Earth.

The United States military was immediately troubled by this radio interference on its radar system, which it interpreted as a deliberate jamming attempt by a foreign adversary. Such a move could have been considered a potential act of war, with the US operating a radar-based early-warning missile detection system to defend against the Soviet Union.”

Framed through the lens of excuses, how convenient would it be to use this solar flare as an excuse to accuse Russian, Iran, or China for an attack on the grid?

Just yesterday there was a massive Bank of America outage that left customers with a $0 balance—a frightening occurrence that’s happened before—so how much of a stretch would it be if either the solar flare or the cyberattack crippled American’s ability to access their money?

There are already numerous reports of people “panic buying toilet paper” because of the dock strikes that have shutdown every shipping port on the eastern seaboard, all the way down into Texas—imagine the panic if their bank accounts were suddenly wiped out!

• People are panic-buying toilet paper because of the port strike

• Port strike raising fear of toilet paper shortages and panic buying

• Port Strike Update: Videos of People Panic Buying Toilet Paper Go Viral

Having some 47,000 union members refusing to work and shutting down all these ports has been called the “Biggest Wild Card In The Presidential Election”—because even a two-week strike would cripple the supply chain well into 2025.

Is this the October surprise?

Well, again, we know that panic buying is spreading, and taking a quick look at the map of shutdowns, it’s not hard to see why. Imagine if all these ports remained shutdown until the workers got the 77% pay increase they demand:

That said, I honestly do not believe this is the October surprise. There’s too much at stake here, and so there needs to be something bigger and more shocking to bring about the proper state of mind and circumstances necessary to institute martial law—that is my suspicion. I hope I’m wrong.

I probably am.

I can’t help but feel like all of this is somehow just meant to keep people glued to the tube, eyes peeled back as we stare at the chaos coming through our screens, the level of uncertainty and free floating anxiety sufficiently primed to make our minds more pliable. Something will happen, but what? When? What are we going to do?!

So disturbing is the mental tension, it is nearly impossible to pull away, even for a day, because any day now the big surprise is going to shock us all. It’s going to be CRAZY.

Will it be another, perhaps successful, assassination attempt? Today we learn that prosecutors have indefinitely delayed the trial of would-be assassin Ryan Routh, because of “complex evidence.” Does that mean his $150,000 reward for anyone who can “finish the job” still stands? Isn’t this another strange twist in the plot, and doesn’t it lend credence to the speculation of a Deep State cover up?

Or perhaps the big surprise might come in the form of another, much deadlier pandemic? Have you heard about the Marburg virus outbreak? Apparently this lethal little bug has a case fatality rate of a whopping 88%!!

• (9/28) WHO: Rwanda reports first-ever Marburg virus disease outbreak, with 26 cases confirmed

• (10/2) Hamburg train station platforms closed over suspected Marburg cases

• (10/3) Marburg virus 'arrives in Europe' as two suspected cases detected in Germany

Sounds like the virus is on the move, right?—but before you freak out and start panic buying toilet paper, you should probably know this is all just hype. These headlines were whipped up based on faulty PCR tests, just like with the last pandemic.

What a coincidence.

Meanwhile, in the center ring of the political circus, we find campaign surprises rolling in at a “dizzying pace,” which CNN laments could “offer an opening to Trump”:

The only reason I dropped that rag on the table, is to refresh my prior speculation that the global cabal has actually intended for Donald Trump to win all along, despite every appearance to the contrary. Why?

Because they know damn good and well that the radical left is ready and willing to unleash all bloody hell if that happens. And, given the failed assassination attempts on Trump, the openly rigged election, all the illegals voting, et cetera, the cabal may wager that American Patriots will finally be ready to fight back, physically.

Then, behold, we’ve got the hung election and civil war that Bill Gates predicted all the way back in September 2022.

The broader purpose here, of course, is to bring about the demise of America as founded, and create the circumstances for an international intervention.

Which brings me to the local front. Americans are being turned against each other. Americans are being conditioned to hate each other. The stage has been set.

I wrote an op-ed for the local newspaper, which the editor had requested I do, but then reneged and refused to run it. It warns the community of this intentionally conditioned hatred, and slices to the core of whom the real enemy is.

I’m going to share it with you now, with the hope that, if it resonates, you might share with others. I believe this is the wake-up call that every community needs to hear:

On July 13th, Donald Trump was nearly assassinated in Butler, Pennsylvania. On September 15th there was a second assassination attempt, this time at Trump International Golf Club in West Palm Beach, Florida. Let me ask you: what would have happened if either assassin had been successful? Sit with that question for a moment. Actively try to imagine the outcome if Donald Trump had actually been assassinated. Notice any thoughts or emotions that come up for you.

Your response will inevitably be linked to your opinion of Trump. It makes sense that people who have been conditioned to believe Trump is a “threat to democracy” will have an entirely different reaction than those who believe Trump is the best candidate to Make America Great Again. It would be prudent to dwell on this contrast and consider the implications. How do we reconcile this deep and festering division?

Whatever the solution, it will not be easy to break down the walls of siloed perspectives or penetrate the din of echo chamber chatter. Human nature stands in the way. It is never comfortable to learn that you’ve been duped or deceived. Nobody wants to be wrong, and yet in a world so full of illusions and lies, somebody—millions of people in fact—must necessarily be wrong, precisely because they have been deceived into believing falsehoods.

So, who’s wrong? Am I wrong? Are you wrong? Are we both wrong? Which is it? Am I the one who has been duped into believing a bunch of lies, or is it you? Is Donald Trump really a threat to democracy, or is this just heated political rhetoric and demeaning propaganda? Regardless of your opinion, does any of what is said about the man justify some lunatic attempting to kill him?

If any part of you sympathizes with the assassins or secretly wishes they would have succeeded, you should be ashamed of yourself. You should also be honest enough to acknowledge there are plenty of people infected with this despicable perspective and be curious enough to ask why. Why do so many people hate Donald Trump? Why was it okay for Kathy Griffin to hold up an effigy of Trump’s severed bloody head and call it comedy?

There are endless examples of prominent Democrat politicians and members of the media dehumanizing Donald Trump and his supporters. This goes far beyond disagreeing on policy positions. Understood properly, this is a very intentional, very systematic method of psychological conditioning, one that has reared its ugly head many times throughout history. Americans beware.

CNN reports, Oct. 6, 2023: Hillary Clinton calls for “formal deprogramming” of MAGA “cult members.” Is it normal for such an influential politician to talk like that? In a televised speech September 2022, President Joe Biden said, “Too much of what's happening in our country today is not normal.” I agree. Biden has labeled the MAGA movement (grassroots conservative voters) as the “most extreme political organization” in recent history and declared us to be an “extremist” threat to our nation. Is it normal for a president to disparage millions of Americans this way?

If your mind wants to justify and accept this rhetoric, you are under the media’s spell. You are being turned against your neighbor and conditioned to hate. Both assassins were under a similar spell. If you believe that the roughly 80 million Americans who want to Make America Great Again are in some radical cult that needs deprogramming, if you believe that we are a bunch of deplorable backwards thinking extremists, if you think that grassroots Republicans represent the most extreme political movement in recent history, then you are no longer thinking clearly.

Understand that there were over 74 million people who voted for Donald Trump in 2020 (almost five million more than voted for Obama!), and there will undoubtedly be millions more voting for him in the upcoming election. We are not your enemy. We are not extremists. We are not a threat to democracy. We are your neighbors, and we care about the future that we share. We are looking forward, not looking back, and we are voting to restore America, not destroy it. If you believe otherwise, please realize that you are being lied to. Talk to us and find out for yourself.

Americans are clearly being turned against each other. That should be alarming to us all. Who benefits from all this division? Please ponder the question and reconsider who the real enemy is.

It’s more than a little disheveling to consider what’s happening in our country. Now would be a really good time to talk to your liberal neighbors. Don’t underestimate the power of a meaningful conversation. If we cannot talk it out now, we very well may have to shoot it out later. Nobody in their right mind wants that to happen.

United we stand, divide we fall. In this epic battle for global control, the ultimate fight is on the local front—because that’s where the resistance is born.

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Got drones?

I have friends who have drones. They’re pretty cool gadgets, and obviously they’ve proven to have nearly endless uses. Matter of fact, I know a guy who helps build drones, and he once gave me a tour of the facility. It was neat and generally unassuming, but the state-of-the-art, cutting-edge capabilities were truly impressive.

Over the last decade there has been a meteoric rise in drone warfare. Nowadays, we think nothing of drone attacks ending lives in far off lands—when not that long ago, October 14, 2011, Americans were shocked to learn President Barack Hussein Obama had authorized the use of a drone strike to kill an American citizenon foreign soil.

Remember that story?

• Obama's legal argument for droning an American citizen without trial, explained

• President Barack Obama was responsible for "the assassination of at least four American citizens" in drone strikes.

• U.S. airstrike that killed American teen in Yemen raises legal, ethical questions

There were righteous howls of protest from liberals for a few news cycles, as you might imagine, but strangely enough they continued to hail Obama as a hero. Overall, according to the Council of Foreign Relations, Obama authorized 542 drone strikes that killed an estimated 3,797 people, including 324 civilians—at least four of which were American citizens who had been radicalized by Islamic terrorists.

It’s a pretty fascinating part of recent history, and look how far we’ve come.

Today we are being told that the Pentagon is preparing for drone-on-drone battles to defend American military bases, as the entire Middle East erupts into chaos:

Drone-on-drone battles seem like something straight out of a sci-fi thriller, and yet it’s happening. It’s been just over a year, but you may recall we’ve covered the threat of “AI-powered killer robots” before. From TR 447 - How to Defeat AI-powered Killer Robots, September 8, 2023:

Are you aware of the AI-powered killer robots that are about to shape our future?

Evidently “human-machine teams” are about to unleash Hell on Earth, like something straight out of Hollywood. What’s unbelievable to me, is that anyone would promote this sort of remote killing—where a kid is playing a video game, directing swarms of AI-driven weaponized drones, and killing real people on their digitized battlefield.

I mean, what could possibly go wrong?!

Interestingly enough, that report unearthed an article from DefenseNews.com, with this headline: “Pentagon’s counter-drone office to demo swarm destruction in 2024.” If one were to read between the lines, it might be inferred that since the Pentagon was planning to “demo swarm destruction in 2024,” what we are witnessing right now was in fact plotted out long ago.

Are we about to watch the Military Industrial Complex give a little flex?

What might this demonstration of “swarm destruction” actually look like?

No doubt it would look awesome, like a real life video game. If you think about it, it would probably even be fun to be wielding this awesome power, right? I mean, gosh, with swarms of killer drones coordinating their attacks via artificial intelligence, it seems like we should be able to hunt down and kill all of the terrorists pretty quickly, right? And come on, if that’s not for the greater good, then what is?

Do you see where I’m going with this?

What happens when these chickens come home to roost?

Rand Paul was quick to make this point over ten years ago, when he pressed the CIA Director John Brennan to confess there were no geographical limitations on the use of drone strikes. Thus, at least theoretically, since Obama justified the use of killing American civilians with drones and Brennan admitted that there are no geographical restrictions, the U.S. government could use drones to target American citizens on American soil—but I’m sure that will never happen.

To flesh this out, I’d like to throw a little excerpt from TR 447 into the mix:

I believe they are priming the public conscience to accept the idea that remote-controlled robots are killing people, as if it’s all just par for the course. Why do I believe that? Well, because they’ve been building the narrative for years—and always about this time of year. Notice the pattern:

• (Oct 2020) — New Weapons, Proven Precedent: a Treaty on Killer Robots

• (Dec 2021) — US rejects calls for regulating or banning ‘killer robots’

• (Nov 2022) — It’s time to talk about killer robots

• (Nov 2022) — San Francisco's Killer Robots Threaten the City's Most Vulnerable

• (Sept 2023) — Robots Are Already Killing People

Over the course of just three short years, we’ve moved from a Treaty of Killer Robots, to the U.S. rejecting these regulations, to “it’s time we talk about it,” to killer robots are threatening the most vulnerable (who isn’t vulnerable to a killer robot?), to the bluntly stated fact: “Robots are already killing people.”

So, here we are, another year down the road, and we are staring at the same exact pattern, are we not? I’ll tack on a few more recent articles to punctuate the point:

• (Jan. 2024) — 'Killer robots' are coming, and U.N. is worried - Harvard Gazette

• (June 2024) — China's Killer Robots Are Coming

• (Aug. 2024) — Killer Robots - Human Rights Watch

• (Sept. 2024) — Threat of 'killer robots' increasingly realistic, warns expert

And, just to make sure this threat hits home, to counteract the natural tendency to think these sorts of things could only happen some place far, far away, get this:

• Gavin Newsom vetoes California bill banning police use of killer drones

Ban the local police from using killer drones?

Meh. That’s so last-year’s liberal.

The progressive thing to do now, is to spend billions of dollars funding drone warfare and “swarm destruction” all around the world, and to be even edgier, fight to ensure that police can use killer drones on American citizens right here at home.

Now that’s some progressive s**t right there.

It has all the hallmarks of the radical left, if you think about it—to quote Bill Ayers:

“Kill all the rich people. Break up their cars and apartments. Bring the revolution home, kill your parents, that’s where it’s really at.”

Can you imagine the carnage if a guy like that got his hands on a swarm of killer drones? Care to guess how many crazy SOB’s like him are out there today?

If we combine that sort of leftist radicalization with the media’s demonization of “MAGA extremists” and the Deep State’s labeling of political opposition as domestic terrorists, what we find is a perfect scenario to provide cover for the eradication of rebellious peasants who refuse to give up their guns and bow to the increasingly omnipotent power of the state.

The extermination could be conducted with killer drones, but alas, that’s obviously just wild speculation. Nobody knows how this game might play out.

What I want to emphasize today is that all of this has been in motion for much longer than most people realize. I’d point to George Soros writing, in 1993, about using Ukrainians as cannon fodder to spare NATO body bags in their ongoing effort to undermine the Russian Empire, as a prime example.

If you are unfamiliar with “Toward a New World Order: The Future of NATO” you should get up to speed here:

Among other things, that 1993 essay penned by Soros makes it explicitly clear:

“There is a discrepancy between the needs of the world for a New World Order and the national self-interest of the United States.”

In a similar vein, to quote David Rockefeller writing in 2002:

“Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal, working against the best interests of the United States…If that’s the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”

The point here, is that there are some very powerful people who have been working for a really long time to institute the New World Order—aka Global Democracy—and they are not about to let a bunch of uppity peasants stand in their way.

They have no qualms with using drone strikes against civilians, obviously. Indeed, in an unclassified CIA document titled “The Rise of the Killer Drones: How America Goes to War in Secret,” there is a veritable laundry list of drones being used covertly in operations around the globe since the Vietnam War.

Fifty years later, the Deep State is quite cavalier about the “lethal convenience” of drones—i.e. “death by remote control”—to the point they even brag about it:

“Both the Pentagon and the CIA like to brag about drone strikes that have successfully taken out enemy combatants… Defense Secretary Leon Panetta has called drones ‘the only game in town,’ and President Obama recently dismissed concerns about civilian casualties, insisting that he is not ordering ‘a whole bunch of strikes willy-nilly’.”

He may not have been “willy-nilly” about it, but in his own words: “Turns out I’m really good at killing people. Didn’t know that was gonna be a strong suit of mine.”

How’s that for some hope and change?!

As the political circus continues to entice and enthrall, as both sides continue to claim victory and being ahead in the polls, Americans would be wise to keep their eyes on the end game. JD Vance put a veritable smackdown on Tampon Tim Walz last night, and I’m holding out hope that he and Trump and can make it into the White House—but even that monumental achievement will not deter the cabal for long.

The self-interest of the United States stands in the way of the New World Order. The global “secret cabal” is proud of working against everything America stands for.

These are their words, not mine.

Assassinations. Nuclear war. Economic collapse. Killer drones. Civil war.

It’s all on the table. Just like Obama was bragging, these people are really good at killing people. Trump may be the guy in their sights at the moment, but as most liberty loving Americans already know, we’re all on the list.

Their ultimate aim is to kill the American Spirit. For the global elites, everything that’s happening is all just a game, and it’s a game they intend to win at all costs. If you are not prepared for the bumpy road ahead, your time is getting short.

Get your house in order and be ready for anything. Give your loved ones a few extra hugs and enjoy the luxuries that come with living in peace. The goodness of life is found in the little things. Blessings abound, even in the midst of chaos.

As for the cabal, we’ve gotta play the long game, which is why I like to say:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

In the beginning…

“In the beginning was the Word… and the Word was GOD.”John 1:1

Given that I’m opening this report with this powerful passage from the Bible, I’d like to frame this scriptural reference in a secular slant—and I’ll tell you why.

Never has there been a greater need for people of all different religious and spiritual persuasions to stand together in defense of human freedom.

There are a great many people in this audience who are proud Christian conservatives, and you stand in good company. There are also many people, perhaps slightly fewer, who feel somewhat put out with religious piety, or who perhaps reject religious dogma altogether—and you stand in good company too.

From the Christian standpoint, one must realize there is an opportunity to be a light on the hill in these dark times. It is good to share your testimony and faith, because there are a lot of people who are lost and seeking truth during these turbulent times—so pray for people, invite them to your fellowship, and be a good witness to the blessings of God that still abound, regardless of the chaos all around.

Now, from the agnostic or atheistic perspective, one must realize that people of faith outnumber the faithless by a wide margin. This includes not just the various conflicting denominations under the Judeo-Christian umbrella, but also all the rest of the major and lesser known religions around the world. This pervasive tendency toward spiritual expression, alone, is a testament to the human need and desire for divine guidance and connection.

The point that must be kept front and center, when seeking practical solutions to real-world problems, is that there are people across the spectrum, in both camps, who share many of the same values and principles. This is true, despite deriving support for these principles from entirely different approaches.

Some arrive at supporting free speech, property rights, and equal justice under the law, through a faith based extrapolation of Biblical principles (i.e. Judeo-Christian values), others through raw logic and observation of the natural world.

Regardless of one’s approach, regardless of one’s affection for, or rejection of, religious scripture, those who are fighting against the oppression of these basic human rights are all on the same team. We face a common enemy, and if we fail to stand together on these common principles, we will surely succumb to tyranny.

Fair enough?

There is currently an all out assault on free speech, as power hungry politicians and their brain-dead minions clamor to silence opposition. As you know, they love to label any dissenting opinions, facts, and perspectives as misinformation, pointing to the harms of letting people speak freely in the public square. This is all rooted in the “Responsibility to Protect,” by the way, which is an ill-conceived, infectious idea riddled throughout the gray matter of so-called Enlightened Leaders.

What’s more, with the ongoing “whole-of-government” approach to reprogram the peasants to trust their masters (i.e. “rebuilding trust” in the government), at this point we should expect that an increasing perceptage of the population will be persuaded to shun all the alleged dangers of free speech, and thus passively accept one of the more ludicrous tenets of this so-called “cosmopolitan” perspective.

In short order, good global citizens will be demanding heavy-handed government censorship to protect them from the seductive wiles of free-thinking wordsmiths and out-spoken peasants. Of course, as you well know, the Enlightened Leaders have been suggesting this all along. Censorship is nothing new, but the boldness of their current efforts indicates that we may have reach an alarming tipping point.

Politicians can now declare their intent to censor free speech, and rather than getting booed and laughed off the stage, the useful idiots are actually applauding.

Case in point, the globalist wind-bag and consummate schmuck John Kerry has just declared that “our first amendment stands as a major roadblock” to protecting people from dangerous disinformation. He then attempts to advocate for unrestricted government censorship, so that the ruling class can deal with dissent once and for all—and “just, you know, hammer it out of existence.”

Kerry then laments that this can happen only if the Democrats win:

The frontal assault on sanity is coming from many angles. In a similar tell on the radical left’s authoritarian impulse, liberal commentators are now openly urging Biden to “dissolve” the Supreme Court before he leaves office. In their collectively bankrupt and backwards thinking, they have to get rid of “Trump’s harem.”

Just think about what these people are saying.

Think about Hillary Clinton calling for the “deprogramming” of we deplorable peasants who dare to defy her and her ilk. Consider that she, like John Kerry, is not only deadly serious about her dark and insidious intentions, she recently had the audacity to double down on this outrageos rhetoric. Puffing up her own deluded opinion in The Washington Post, Clinton reflects:

“In 2016, I famously described half of Trump’s supporters as ‘the basket of deplorables.’ I was talking about the people who are drawn to his racism, sexism, homophobia, xenophobia, Islamophobia — you name it. The people for whom his bigotry is a feature, not a bug. …

The masks have come off, and if anything, ‘deplorable’ is too kind a word for the hate and violent extremism we’ve seen from some Trump supporters. …

Talking about the ‘deplorables’ in 2016, I said, ‘Some of those folks, they are irredeemable.’ Part of me would still say this is objectively true.”

You see, “deplorable” is too kind of a word for the hate and extremism oozing out of the hearts of Donald Trump and his supporters. These “folks” are just irredeemable—and the Post has no shame in publishing this rubbish as if it were “objectively true.”

Why does this matter?

Because the word is God.

Let’s zoom out.

I’ve dissected the nuance of this passage in prior reports. Today, I’d like to tie it directly to the science of neuroplasticity, for the purpose of firmly establishing the connection been censorship, mind control, and rewiring the public psyche.

For a more philosophical romp into the power of language, see these three reports:

To slice through the meat of the matter and get right down to the bone-chilling implications of political censorship, I offer these studies as a starting point:

• How Learning a Language Changes Your Brain - “New language — at any age — creates new pathways that could also make you a better person…”

• Language and the brain - “Exposure to written language also restructures the brain, even when acquired late in life.”

• The Brain Basis of Language Processing: From Structure to Function - “Language functions are directly related to brain tissue…”

• Your brain wires itself to match your native language - “So, we are not the same if we learn to speak one language, or if we learn another.”

Working from the bottom up, our brains naturally wire themselves differently, relative to our native language, and the result of this phenomenon is that “we are not the same.” That’s a no-brainer, but the deeper implication here, directly related to the development of brain tissue and neural circuits, is that learning a different language early on—think state indoctrination—produces a lifelong effect.

Kids raised on socialist precepts, reciting socialist slogans, et cetera, are thus hardwired toward socialist sympathies, for life.

Of course, as the experiene of the many people who were born into communist or socialist hell-holes only to flee toward freedom later in life attests, learning is a lifelong adventure. It’s never too late to learn new language.

To be clear, I am not talking about “learning a new language”—which has its own effects on the brain—I’m talking about learning new language in general. As noted above, neuroscience proves that even exposure to written language can “restructure the brain” at any point in life. This fact has profound implications.

Suppose liberals get their way and make a whole-of-government effort to eradicate dissenting perspectives from everywhere all at once. No more dissenting news sources. No more dissenting blogs or podcasts. No more dissenting social media posts. There will be no more written language promoting hate speech or misinformation, anywhere, ever again.

Just think about how safe the world will be!

But what will be the outcome? This will restructure brains, will it not?

Thus, by selectively removing some language—like language conveying and defending traditional American values—and essentially force-feeding socialist propaganda from cradle to grave, everyone at every stage of life will steadliy nudged into new neural pathways that “could make you a better person.”

We’d be wise to realize that this is already happening. Try searching for any news suggesting that the 2020 election was stolen, that the pandemic was a sham, or that the vaccines are killing people, and you’ll see what I mean. The results you will find are exactly the “exposure to written language” that aims to restructure your brain.

Of course, you, being the wise and skeptical peasant that you are, are keen to this gimmick, and therefore you retain some degree of resilience to this neurological manipulation. That’s great. But for the vast majority of the population?

Hillary Clinton won the popular vote, Biden was the most popular president ever elected, and Donald Trump incited a violent insurrection. Never forget that.

But here’s a little twist:

The vast majority of the population does NOT represent the vast majority of the country. Less than 18% of counties accross the country have a population of 100,000 or more — only 563 out of 3,143 — which means that the vast majority of communities throughout the United States are thriving in counties with less than 100K people.

We are largely a rural nation.

In cities, groupthink is more effective, and therefore, more oppressive.

It is much more difficult to be an independent thinker when you are surrounded by hordes of half-wit automatons endlessly parroting the narratives they’ve been conditioned to accept. This alludes to the “sensitizing concepts” and “Neuropsychosocial Preparation Theory” we’ve studied before, all of which imbues the masses with socialistic ideals. Such is the science of mind control.

So, where does God fit into all of this?

Understood from a purely metaphorical standpoint, God represents the creative force that undeniably permeates the universe. From this angle, to say the “word was God” implies that language is the creative force that is shaping people’s reality. Thus, those seeking to control language through censorship, are in essence trying to play God.

From a spiritual perspective, as the Tower of Babel story indicates, we find that the Creator of the universe appears well aware of threat of censorship. We were warned long ago:

“If as one people speaking the same language they can do this, then nothing they plan to do will be impossible for them.”

By controlling language, the globalists are essentially capable of anything.

If, for example, they can fleece the people and fabricate a fictious pandemic by conditioning everyone to adopt the same same language — i.e. “no one is safe until everyone is safe” or “the vaccines are safe and effective” — then nothing they plan to do will be impossible for them.

(This disturbing montage of “no on is safe” drives the point home.)

To conclude, given their openly stated goals of total control over a reduced human population, we should all be very wary of the overt attempts to sell the public on the notion that censorship will keep them safe.

This is a vile plot concocted by the ruling class, who want to play God and effectively take control of humanity at the neurological level.

It should go without saying, but RESIST WE MUST!!!

Please help wake people up by sharing this post!

**If you have the means, it would mean a lot if you’d consider becoming a paid subscriber and fund the resistance to global tyrany. Thank you in advance!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

The receipts.

I’m sure you’ve heard the term cropping up a lot more lately, as a slang form of official proof, “Here are the receipts.” I know I’ve been hearing it more, and in fact, if you’ve been with on this learning journey, you may recall I’ve written several reports citing some of the bigger names dropping “the receipts” on some of the bigger issues.

For example:

• From TR 429 - JFK, RFK, & the Assassination of Truth:“Through the use of weaponized AI and Algorithmic Social Interventions, the global cabal is working around the clock to keep us locked in the illusions of our minds. They do so in order to advance their heinous anti-human agenda in broad daylight. In fact, Dr. Robert Malone just delivered “the receipts” on the globalist’s long-standing and sustained efforts to reduce the population. If the idea that the global elites are perpetrating crimes against humanity is new to you, read this.”

• From TR 458 - COVID, Blood Clots, & Cancer:“…the modeling is being used to support an agenda, and that agenda starts with spooking the public, running up the numbers, and sticking a needle in as many arms as possible. That’s their strategy—however the ultimate aim of the agenda is nothing less than depopulation. They’ve said as much out loud, repeatedly, for decades. I’ve covered this sinister agenda of the global cabal in detail in several reports, so rather than rehashing the eugenicists’ depopulation agenda here, I simply want to pull in a fresh primary source that will likely blow your mind, if you were to take the time to read it:

Population Control: The Receipts

That report provides irrefutable proof that there are nefarious forces striving to systematically reduce the human population. In their minds, they have a moral obligation to do so. This is the driving mentality behind Agenda 2030 and the Great Reset, and we’d all be wise to keep that in the back of our minds.

That said, it’s more or less impossible to keep this unimaginable crime front and center, because life is full of more pressing practical matters, and, because our attention is being intentionally shattered by never ending distractions. In yesterday’s report, when I pointed out that most people seem to have willfully forgotten about the horrors of the pandemic, I was alluding to the fact that these horrors are not over.

In the biological vector, given the continual mutations caused by leaky vaccines, the ongoing development of scary new bioweapons, and uptake of billions of toxic injections, what’s in motion is going to stay in motion, as previously discussed.

But let’s not get lost in the weeds here.

In other areas of concern, we’ve taken a look at “the receipts” dropped by Matt Taibbi, regarding the collusion between U.S. intelligence agencies, tech titans, media lapdogs, and liberal politicians to steal the 2020 election and install Biden in the White House.

Mission accomplished.

From TR 507 - Hamilton 68 and Unconventional Warfare:

“Keep in mind, we’re way past the Twitter Files and Google Leaks now, both of which documented gross government interference in the 2020 elections. …As bad as all of that is, the Hamilton 68 revelations take the cake.

…suffice it to say that agents from the FBI, the CIA, CISA and other nongovernmental organizations, conspired with Democrat politicians and liberal media outlets to create “fake news” operations, then promote this “fake news” with fake accounts, so they could then point to the spread of this “fake news” and use it to justify illegal censorship of accurate information.

This takes “create the problem, provide the solution” to a whole new level.

This is information warfare at its finest.”

Just as with the various vectors associated with biological warfare that stem from the pandemic, so too are there various vectors associated with the informational warfare stemming from Deep State election interference. Consider just three:

• The vector of continued censorship being orchestrated at the highest possible levels, effectively preventing most of the public from wising up to these evils.

• The vector of prolific propaganda, all sophisticated and scientifically backed, that is being used to reprogram the peasants at the neurological level.

• The vector of media fleecing, for the purpose of covering up these crimes, mesmerizing the masses, rewriting history, and controlling elections.

Just think about it: there are people who are powerful enough to pull all this off—and they’ve been working together with other powerful people, from all around the world, for decades. That’s what we’re up against here.

It goes far beyond just being out funded and out organized.

And that’s to say nothing of the January 6th Fed-surrection, the J6 show trials, the gross abuse of political prisoners, or the ongoing persecution and purge of political opposition—which brings me to “the receipts” I’d like to drop today.

Donald Trump clearly represents a threat to the globalists’ ambition to reduce the peasant population and erect a system of inescapable global control. He is the figurehead of a populist uprising, the man in which millions of people are placing their hope that we can win back our country and peacefully reclaims the reins of power. I am well aware that it’s a long shot, but I still remain cautiously optimistic, even though the next-to-nothing odds seem to be dwindling by the day.

My optimism is rooted in the observation that Trump is pulling together a coalition of people that blurs traditional political lines, his rallies are massive, and he continues to build momentum despite the odds being stacked against him. This, in my mind, and in the minds of millions, can only be attributed to Providence.

While I adamantly reject any religious suggestion of a “chosen one,” I must be quick to acknowledge the spiritual component of the situation, including powers and principalities of darkness, and I do believe that only a fool would rule out the Hand of God in all of this. There are forces at play here that are literally incomprehensible.

Let’s zoom out.

We have previously discussed the “whole-of-government” approach to eradicating MAGA extremists, and the fact that artificial intelligence has proven capable of changing an individual’s political beliefs. It is vitally important to keep a firm grip on these facts, because these facts are not going to go away.

Whether Donald Trump gets re-elected, or whether he gets assassinated, or whether Kamala Harris “wins” and Trump simply moves on—no matter what happens over the next few months, and regardless of the outcome of the election, these facts are not going to go away. The cabal keeps marching on, advancing their sickening agenda.

The point is, this is much bigger than just one man—but this one man appears to be such an existential threat to the globalist regime, precisely because he gives the people hope, that they now appear to be boldly trying to assassinate him in broad daylight. And, as I said yesterday, the Deep State has their fingerprints all over this.

What I’d like to do today, is deliver the receipts on that statement.

Things are moving so quickly now, it feels impossible to stay affixed to a single issue, even something as monumental as a covert intelligence operation to facilitate the assassination of a former president and leading presidential contender.

Fresh on the heels of the July 13th assassination attempt in Butler, Pennsylvania, I put out a couple of reports that were loaded with links that suggested the entire thing was a setup, and indeed, evidence has continued to emerge in the interim that confirms just that. Everything from the mysterious man in the gray suit, the possible second shooter on the water tower, testimony from local law enforcement, the scrubbing of the home, the odd behavior and connection of the parents, the FBI linked phone calls, agents at the range, and the inexplicably rapid incineration of the body of the alleged shooter Thomas Matthew Crooks—who some claim was not actually Crooks at all, but instead a different man named Maxwell Yearick, with receipts to back that up—it all just wreaks of a covert operation turned psyop.

But like I’ve said, we’ll never know for sure, therefore, chasing this rabbit is futile.

Nevertheless, if you’d like to do some digging, there are plenty of links here:

Then comes the second assassination attempt, September 15th, wherein the internationally renowned nutcase Ryan Wesley Routh posted up at Trump’s golf course for over twelve hours with a sniper rifle, undetected as agents walked the perimeter, just waiting to take a shot. Oddly enough, nobody quite knows how Ryan Routh just so happened to have a list of dates and locations where Trump was scheduled to be between August and October.

Strange, isn’t it?

This man also has prior interactions with FBI, had been flagged by federal agents upon his return from Ukraine, and had a mile long rap-sheet that spanned decades—including a misdemeanor citation for supposedly having a “weapon of mass destruction”—and of course, he had a nice-and-tidy manifesto that was mysteriously leaked to the press and plastered all over the news, offering to pay someone, anyone, $150,000 if they could finally “finish the job.”

The optics are so bad, even the local Martin County Sheriff suggested that Ryan Routhcould be “part of a bigger conspiracy” during a press conference. Now the GOP is investigating why Biden’s DOJ was so quick to release Routh’s “finish the job” manifesto, when they’ve stubbornly withheld so many other manifestos before. This whopper of a headline really captures the insanity of it all:

Oops! Deep State Gets Caught?… DOJ Says Letter Written by Would-Be Assassin Ryan Routh Apologizing for Not Killing Trump and Offering Reward was WRITTEN MONTHS BEFORE ATTEMPTED ASSASSINATION!?

Friends, you can’t make this stuff up.

It’s insanity.

This war for the hearts and minds of humanity is far, far from over.

Have wonderful weekend. Until next time: RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Time marches on.

Do you remember when “two weeks to flatten the curve” turned into over two years of lockdowns, isolation, masking up, forced vaccination, and getting tested and tracked like lab rats? It seems like most people have either simply forgot, or perhaps chosen to block this memory from their minds.

Does it even matter anymore?

Why yes, yes it does.

How about when the Evil Russian Tyrant invaded the poor, helpless, bastion of corruption known as Ukraine? Do you remember how all of the sudden the threat of nuclear Armageddon was upon the doorstep? World War III was said to be inevitable, and that was well over two years ago? Does that matter anymore?

Why yes, yes it does—but not for the reasons you might think.

Let me give you some clues:

From March 15, 2022, in TR 76 - Has The Unthinkable Become Inevitable?:

Raising the alert level of Russian nuclear forces is a bone-chilling development,” says UN Secretary Guterres. “The prospect of nuclear conflict, once unthinkable, is now back within the realm of possibility.”

From March 18, 2022, in TR 79 - HEADLINE: "Make Russia Great Again!":

Speaking to an energized crowd of more than 200,000 Russian patriots, Putin declared: “We have not had unity like this for a long time.” The Russians erupted in a round of thunderous applause that Joe Biden could only dream of. Meanwhile, here in the United States, our country remains bitterly divided as we are led ever closer to complete societal collapse… even as health officials finally decide to drop the mask mandates in Washington state, Dr. Fauci warns us that we “can’t just say we’re done” with covid.

From March 31, 2022, in TR 88 - The Toppling of Regimes:

According to Nigel Farage, [the West] directly encouraged the uprising in the Ukraine that led to the toppling of the president, Yanukovych, and that led, of course, in turn to Vladimir Putin reacting and the moral of the story is if you poke the Russian bear with a stick, don't be surprised when he reacts.

… [There were also] Senate reports that revealed there were “significant events involving the Bidens” during the chaos in Ukraine.

What’s the common thread here, besides the edge-of-your-seat existential threats of mutated variants and nuclear war? Hint: it rhymes with “election” but has absolutely nothing to do with voting, democratic process, or the will of the people.

That’s right, the sham Covid pandemic, just like the sham Russian invasion, had everything to do with the selectionof political leaders around the world. We could pull in the Arab Spring, the cyclical socialist coups in Brazil, or any of the color revolutions that have been orchestrated around the world, and in every case we can find a common denominator.

The common denominator is not just heinous political corruption or outright rigged elections. The common denominator is the same bad actors, namely the “secret” global cabal, and their Deep State operators in our own intelligence agencies.

Just for a quick point of reference:

• When the CIA Interferes in Foreign Elections: A Modern-Day History of American Covert Action

• How CIA Schemes Color Revolutions Around the World

• Database Tracks History Of U.S. Meddling In More Than 80 Foreign Elections

With this more “global” perspective on election interference, it is not difficult to deduce the probability that these same shysters are currently pulling out all the stops in a desperate attempt to prevent Donald Trump for getting elected.

Put differently, given that both recent assassination attempts on Donald Trump had Deep State fingerprints all over them, is there really any reason to think that they’re going to stop short of the full glory of a gory, bloody, political coup?

Probably not.

BUT HERE’S THE THING:

Does any of this even matter?

Well, of course it does… sort of.

It matters to the people who are aware of it and paying attention. But how many people do you think that is, as a percentage of the total population?

You, being the astute political analyst and savvy news peruser that you are, are probably already well aware that the Censorship Industrial Complex stands as a formidable bulwark against the dissemination of such valuable information.

No doubt you are aware that “the powers that be” are fabricating reality in real time, constantly spinning and weaving narratives so as to obfuscate any semblance of what’s actually happening in the world. The result is that the masses remain utterly clueless, and even those who have some hunch, really have no way to know for sure.

In an effort to ascertain some degree of confidence in what the hell is going on in the world, we peasants are left to pick at the knotted strings of tangled evidence, trying to tease out some thread of truth that’s long enough to make sense of things. The effort is not entirely futile, but it is certainly mentally taxing—which is precisely why most people have simply tuned out and turned back to living as if this is all normal.

The pandemic? Yeah, that was a bummer, but it’s over, and it probably won’t happen again. I mean, surely people wouldn’t stand that type of abuse all over again, right?

Election interference? Sure, that probably happens, but only the lunatics think that our intelligence agencies are behind the assassination attempts on Trump, right?

World War III? Well duh, I mean, haven’t you been keeping track of all those radical Islamic terrorists attacking “our greatest allies” — there’s even news that some Iranian assassins are now out hunting Trump! — and only a fool would try to deny the ongoing unilateral aggression of the Evil Russian Tyrant, right?!

Clearly the enemies of democracy are on the move, clearly. I mean c’mon, take a look at this tandem of headlines that are out just today:

• Everyone who grasps the risk of nuclear war says Trump shouldn't be trusted

• Ukraine war: Vladimir Putin ups the ante on his nuclear blackmail

Trump and Putin are trying to start nuclear war and destroy our democracy!

Even the UN is chiming in on this threat of impending doom today:

• United Nations: Governments urged to ‘stop gambling with humanity’s future’ and eliminate nuclear weapons

PAUSE.

What are the odds that all three of these sources would be pushing this same nuclear war narrative today? Even NATO is getting in on the action:

• NATO Prepares Mass Evacuation and Rescue Plans as Senior General Warns of World War 3 with Russia

Kind of fascinating, right?

With all these ominous warnings everywhere, how could anyone doubt the veracity of the claims? This is serious stuff. You’d better dig a bunker and prepare to shelter in place. It just speculation, but seems probably some jackass (Putin or Trump) is going to start a nuclear war at any minute. But wait a minute…

What is this is all just a setup? What if the real plan is for the Deep State to orchestrate some rogue act of nuclear terrorism, just in time for the election?! I mean, we already know there are terrorists in the country hunting Trump, and we know they are working with the Iranians, so what the chances they’ve managed to smuggle in some sort of improvised, nuclear, dirty bomb?

That would check a lot of boxes, wouldn’t it?

The Iranians get to chant “Death to America!”, the terrorist go to heaven and get their virgins, Donald Trump gets evaporated, the election gets suspended because of the national emergency, and the Deep State gets to install their selected candidate as they skirt the rubble. It’s a win-win for everyone except American patriots, and the relatively small number of poor b**s who get nuked as collateral damage.

Here are a few threads that could lend some credence to this narrative:

• How close is Iran to having nuclear weapons?

• Iran is closer than ever to a nuclear weapon as Biden runs out of options

• Iran has enough enriched uranium to build ‘several’ nuclear weapons, UN says

• Blinken says Iran’s nuclear weapon breakout time is probably down to 1-2 weeks

• What If Iran Already Has the Bomb?

And then there’s this gem, from two days ago (Sept. 24), when the Iranian president was speaking to the United Nations:

• Iran ready to end nuclear standoff with world powers

Well gosh, that’s sure nice of them.

Contrast that with the words coming out of the White House:

“Amid rising geopolitical tensions, the White House has issued a major warning, stating that the United States may have to broaden its nuclear weapons arsenal in reaction to Russia, China, and North Korea expanding their nuke programs “at a breakneck pace”.

So much for non-proliferation.

To lighten the mood, and bring it back around to the point, you might enjoy this “throw back Thursday” contribution of Seventeen ’80s Songs About Nuclear War.

The point is, it’s madness, and it’s driving people insane, but in reality, we’ve seen it all before. Many times. My guess is this will play out just like it always has, and nothing will happen. The charades will continue, and the propaganda will have served its purpose of being nothing more than a big fat distraction.

It’s a mess.

I’m not trying to make like of the many serious things that are happening in the world, I’m just trying to keep it all in perspective. States are now issues more “free” at home covid tests—which are actually faulty PCR tests that are known to throw false positives—just in time to crank up another covid surge before the election.

The majority of Americans expect another assassination attempt on Trump before election day. Others are fully convinced WWIII will kick off before election day ever gets here. Many have observed that the stage seems to be set for the “greatest period of chaos” in American history. Rumors of a civil war are everywhere.

AND YET…

Life is still good. It’s a great day to be alive, always.

I apologize for being a little sporadic this week. My birthday was Tuesday, and yesterday I had to block out the world so that I could finally breathe full life into the Mental Defense Workshop—a simple idea that was not so easy to implement.

The good news is, despite the relentless gaslighting, propaganda, and psychological warfare that’s been tearing at your psyche, now you can learn how to guard your heart and mind against these assaults, for free, courtesy of your favorite fuzzy peasant.

Check it out:

Until next time, remember:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

“It’s another manic Monday.”

As I dove into the headlines this morning, I couldn’t help but hear that classic 1986 hit by the Bangles in my head. The ever-increasing degree of gaslighting seems to be pressing the envelope of insanity to unimaginable levels. More and more people continue to become completely untethered from reality. The disconnect is everywhere we look, but these ridiculous headlines from The Hill help demonstrate the discombobulated state of things:

Trump holds a “slight lead” over Harris in battleground states.

No, wait, Harris “slightly improves lead” over Trump in battleground states.

Well, which is it?

It’s no wonder so many people are feeling politically exhausted!

“The political drama is suspenseful and exhausting. It’s a contest about everything and nothing. What’s intended to shock has a short shelf life, replaced by new shocks while complex ideas get distilled to bumper stickers. Voters either tell interviewers they don’t know enough about their choices or turn off the news and insist they’re ready to fill out ballots today.” —also from TheHill.com

To be blunt, this political circus is meant to break people down, or more specifically, to break people’s brains. Our minds cannot function forever under such stress and confusion, which is precisely why there is so much stress and confusion. This is the hallmark of Fifth Generation Warfare, which is an all out assault on mind, body, and soul—and the purpose of this assault is much darker than just stealing an election.

Just to reiterate, from TR 341 - Censorship & Population Control:

“Now that the global elite are using weaponized AI to control “emerging” public perceptions, the most sinister aspects of their agenda can manifest without making too many waves. The most heinous crimes against humanity can now be conducted in broad daylight, and most will remain none the wiser. Same goes for blatant political corruption and public persecutions. Such is the power of fusing state controlled censorship with Fifth Generation Warfare.

Now they can finish their unfinished agenda.”

Make no mistake, what’s happening today is all about finish an agenda. That said, to better establish just how serious the threat of Fifth Generation Warfare is—and to ensure that we remain rooted in reality and not caught up in some “vast right-wing conspiracy”—consider these excerpts coming from a Ph.D.’s paper circulating in academia, titled: Fourth- and Fifth-Generation Warfare: Technology and Perceptions.

“The composition of warfare is changing … conventional techniques of warfare are in decline and newer tactics and tools of warfare, such as information warfare, asymmetric warfare, media propaganda, and hybrid warfare, are filling the gap, blurring the lines between combatant and noncombatant, and between wartime and peacetime. …

Fourth-generation warfare (4GW)—which rose to prominence over the last five to six decades—brought the most radical change … introducing nonstate actors in warfare and by denying the state a monopoly. …

Fifth-generation warfare (5GW) is the battle of perceptions and information. 5GW is also a cultural and moral war, which distorts the perception of the masses to give a manipulated view of the world and politics. …

Information about the desired political world perspective is entrenched through manipulating the culture at the unconscious level, rendering it impossible for the conscious mind to even detect it and heavily influencing the political division to obtain the desired outcomes.” (Emphasis added)

Culture—i.e. the population at large—is being manipulated at the unconscious level, “rendering it impossible for the conscious mind to even detect it,” which is what makes 5GW such an insidious foe. Public perception is being heavily distorted to increase political divisions and achieve the “desired outcomes,” which in this case, means obtaining total control over a reduced human population.

Interestingly enough, in an excerpt that perfectly aligns with my oft-stated and typically criticized position that our enemies are trying to win without firing a shot, the dissertation continues:

“… information proliferation in warfare has technologically designed practices of warfare that obviate the requirement of violence and the direct physical involvement of the aggressors; instead, the information through networks and surveillance manipulates and exploits the public’s general perceptions. Sun Tzu defines this tactic of altering the perspectives of the world as the “acme of skill, a victory without fighting.”

I have written about the Art of War in several prior reports, notably:

The reason I think it’s so important to realize that Fifth Generation Warfare “obviates the need for violence” is because it reveals the enemies true intention. Even though it feels like we are inching closer and closer to a bloody civil war, or toward an inevitable nuclear World War III, it is absolutely critical to realize this is an “altered perspective of the world” that has been manipulated at an unconscious level.

This is what they want us to believe, whether it’s true or not.

Could we have a hung election and a civil war, as Bill Gates predicted? Yes.

Could the entire world erupt into WWIII and the whole thing turn nuclear? Yes.

BUT, is there also the distinct possibility that neither event happens? Yes.

Think about it.

Why not just use the 5GW to steal the election, install another globalist sock-puppet, and continue to implement Agenda 2030 and advance the Great Reset? That would be much less messy, wouldn’t it? Not that the cabal is averse to things getting messy (just look at the Middle East), but if things got “messy” right here in the good old U.S. of A., that would significantly increase the risk of high-level players—think politicians, media propagandists, and Deep State operatives—coming under direct attack from hordes of pissed-off, patriotic peasants, wouldn’t it?

From this angle, it is possible to glimpse the potential incentive of not pushing the American people to the breaking point, right? If you think about it, having millions of well-armed peasants rising up to rout out the tyrants constitutes the greatest threat to the enemies of freedom. Surely they know this, and because they do, wouldn’t it make sense that they would try to prevent that from happening?

And how might they do that? How might they be able to prevent a violent uprising of well-armed peasants? Well, how about with Fifth Generation Warfare, right?!

Here’s how it all plays out:

• Manipulate the public at the unconscious level, making it impossible for the conscious mind to detect that it’s being manipulated. Check.

• Distort the perception of the masses to generate a manipulated view of the world and politics, mesmerizing the public with never ending propaganda. Check.

• While the peasants remain riveted by the sensational headlines and threats of impending doom, gather global leaders to organize the takeover. Check.

• Steadily increase the rate of behavioral change to accelerate the neurological reprogramming and subconscious taming, thereby decreasing the probability of a violent uprising. Check.

• Establish an inescapable digital surveillance state to monitor public sentiment and deploy weaponized AI to control emerging perceptions. Check.

• Continue implementing all aspects of Sustainable Development to further consolidate power and control, as the peasants enjoy the circus. Check.

And you know what, there is no need for a grand finale.

Just rinse and repeat. This is the gist of the Adaptation Agenda. Children of the resistance will slowly be assimilated through state indoctrination. The ubiquitous deployment of the Delphi Method will ensure expert “consensus” converges on predetermined outcomes. Relentless censorship will continue eradicating dissenting perspectives, until one day, the whole of humanity simply accepts their servitude.

Check mate.

Tell me: if the Pentagon decides to send more troops to the Middle East, and it escalates into another World War, will it stop this agenda? What about if Donald Trump overcomes all the odds and gets elected, will that stop this agenda? Taking it a step further, is there anything in the news today that might stop this agenda?

The answer in every case, in my humble opinion, is no.

THAT’S why I’ve continually made the point that this too shall pass. The 2024 election will come and go. FACT. Global tensions will rise, and then they will fall. FACT.

We must lift the gaze.

In the midst of all this orchestrated chaos—which is being orchestrated not only to manipulate the unconscious mind, but also rearrange control of planetary resources and consolidate global power—this sophisticated psychological conditioning will continue unabated. Slowly but surely, the spiritual noose will tighten.

Less and less people will feel any need to resist. Fewer still will retain the will.

In time, all the messiness will work itself out. Biologically engineered viruses will sufficiently blunt population growth and drive the uptake of genetic therapies that will further modify humanity. Transhumanism will triumph over the antiquated notion that there is anything special about being a human.

This despicable domestication is nearly complete. As I have said before, I view this as a spiritual assassination, wherein the masses are psychologically severed from the inherent power of their own unique individual spirituality. To punctuate this perspective, consider the disturbing words of Dr. Yuval Noah Harari:

“We humans should get used to the idea that we are no longer mysterious souls – we are now hackable animals. That’s what we are.”

Unfortunately, we are hackable animals. We can be biologically hacked. As we have seen, the ruling class can also hack our minds—and that’s how they can introduce the idea that we are “no longer mysterious souls.” Using the blunt force of Fifth Generation Warfare, they can then reinforce this false belief, unconsciously, and systematically condition the masses to accept the futility of believing in God.

Adherence to religion will continue to be ridiculed into decline. The world’s major religions will continue to be infiltrated and exploited as mechanisms of control. Holy Wars will be orchestrated to further debase the value of religious observation—and, having an inherent need for spiritual guidance, in time many will turn to all-knowing Digital Gods.

Of course, I could always be wrong. Perhaps I’m just a crackpot peasant with a penchant for wild speculation… but something inside me stirs at the thought. My wild and mysterious soul wants to cry out, “Give me liberty or give me death! I will live free or die!!” I will not go quietly into the night, and I sure as hell will not allow my neighbors to be systematically assimilated in the collective hive-mind.

I will fight. I will defend. I will speak the truth without fear.

Will you join me in this fight? Help me get the word out:

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s all lies.

That was my immediate impression of the news this morning, unsurprisingly. Yesterday I’d spent a decent amount of time revisiting some of my “textbooks” on psychological warfare. The hope, I suppose, was to scour and extract a morsel or two of wisdom and insight that might unlock my deep inner reserves of optimism.

I could use some extra optimism right about now.

I found optimism in the words of Dr. Joost Merloo, who in 1956 affirmed what I’ve always believed to be true: that in the end, the human spirit will prevail, despite all the clinical mind control, menticide, and brainwashing.

Merloo points to the science behind the inevitable triumph of our irrepressible spirit. Indeed, it is in our nature to adapt and overcome. No matter how tortured our physical, mental, and emotional state may be, there will forever remain another dimension from which we can draw peace, strength, and intuitive solutions, namely the spiritual dimension.

It is our spirituality that makes us unique among the creatures of the earth, is it not? Ironically, in a wild twist of fate, having written the phrase above above— “there will forever remain another dimension” — around 1 a.m., then this morning as I was cruising the headlines, I saw this unexpected gem:

“Scientist says human consciousness comes from another dimension.”

I call that synchronicity.

More on that in a minute, but first, let’s recall the wisdom of Merloo:

“In the end, human rebellion and dissent cannot be suppressed; they await only one breath of freedom in order to awake once more.”

It only takes one breath of freedom to awaken from the media induced slumber that has hypnotized the masses. Once awake, rebellion and dissent cannot be suppressed. To me, there is a raw sort of power and beauty in this truth, and it resonates deeply. Never understimate the power of a properly taken breath!

That said, quite unfortunately, the powers that be — aka the “secret cabal,” the global elites, or our “Enlightened Leaders” — have long understood the predictable aspects of human nature. If you think about it, they have been studying the peasants for much longer than the majority of peasants have been able to read and write.

The culmination of their observations have long been canonized in a plethora of publications on human psychology, biology, sociology, and so on. Now, centuries of science has been compiled and fed into super-computers, where it has been digested by an artificial form of intelligence wielding an incomprehensible amount of power.

This is why the Enlightened ones refer to us as “hackable animals.”

In theory, they know us better than we know ourselves. They, the global elites, understand what makes us tick, much like a psychiatrist or a physician—and now, intelligent machines have this understanding too. Having already gathered an obscene amount of data on each and every one of us, there is no doubt that the algorithmic grooming will continue to accelerate the ongoing transformation of humanity.

For those new to the audience, you need to know that there is a literal, matter-of-factual, scientific transformation of human consciousness underway. Chew on that fact long enough, and it should send chills down your spine. If you are interested in understanding the science of how it works, start with the links in these reports:

For today though, I’d like to connect the dots between the Summit of the Future, the political circus, and the very real need for spiritual solutions. It may get deep, but if you wade through this with me, I think you’ll find there is peace on the other side.

Let’s zoom out.

Have you heard about thefive assassination teams that are currently running around the country gunning for Trump? It is unthinkable to me that the Department of Homeland Security is aware of this, and has briefed congress, and yet there have been no arrests.

This seems exponentially more egregious than the fact that the Biden-Harris regime has actually been forcing Border Patrol to suppress information on these illegal immigrants flooding into our country with known terrorist ties. Again, they are aware of the threat, and again, they do nothing to protect American citizens.

The degree of lawlessness is utterly astounding.

Keep that in mind when you hear the talking heads squawking about the latest and greatest scandals and twists in the increasingly bizarre and very “turbulent” presidential race. I assure you, such theater is nothing more than a magnificent distraction. Don’t get lost in the illusions.

Meanwhile, the globalists are gathering for the Summit of the Future and Sustainable Development Impact Meetings, ostensibly to save the planet from the unsustainable over-abundance of meat-eating, mouth-breathing peasants. At the center of all their discussions is Global Digital Governance, and all that that entails.

Think digital enslavement.

Lest you think this is some fringe concept, consider these sources:

• Global Digital Governance: Here's What You Need to Know - CSIS

• Global digital governance: paradigm shift and an analytical framework

• Framework Interoperability: A New Hope for Global Digital Governance

• A New Era In Digital Governance: The Global Digital Compact's Blueprint

• UN Press Release: Digital transformation accelerates

• Global Digital Compact & Internet Society

Here we can link together a few more concepts, namely Earth Systems Governance, Future Earth, and Planetary Boundaries. These are official terms, which along with the rest, form the “semantic fog” that is currently masking the anti-human agenda.

Taken altogether, the gist of global governance must be understood to be a skillfully managed, systematically implimented, radical reduction of the human population. Worse still, this intentional depopulation is being conducted in tandem with heavy psychological conditioning, on a planetary scale, for the exact purpose of transforming the remaining peasants into mindless, compliant, serfs.

The ongoing transformation of human consciousness aims to reprogram the masses to trust their masters, that is, to trust the government with naive and fawning adoration. In my mind, nothing could be more antithetical to the American Dream—but of course, if the globalists’ get their way, the American Dream is going to be dead in a matter of months, hence the international assassin squads hunting Trump.

While I’d like to say that the American Spirit will live on in the hearts of patriots throughout the land, regardless of what happens to Trump or the outcome of the election, it should be acknowledged just how close we are to the point of no return. The scary truth is, the American Spirit will not be able to live on once this transformation of consciousness is complete.

The reasons are complex, but they are related to weaponized AI and the World Economic Forum’s Advancing Data Equity Action-Oriented Framework.

“Advancing Data Equity,” what the hell does that mean?

Well, if we invokes the commie’s “socialistic interpretation” and read between the lines, it’s just as bad as it sounds:

“[D]ata equity serves as the foundation of fairness and justness in the development of a host of technologies and for earning trust for digital systems – as described in the World Economic Forum’s Digital Trust Framework. …Data equity can be advanced through corrective as well as proactive actions:

Corrective actions include addressing historical (and current or potential) biases in datasets, such as biased depictions or under-representation of marginalized groups…

Proactive actions include employing collection methods that enable identification, representation and participation of diverse groups; promoting open and transparent data sharing; developing inclusive, participatory systems …[and] verifying that these systems produce fair and equitable outcomes...”

It all sounds so nice, right? I’m sure they mean well. Gag.

Just to be clear, taking “corrective actions” to cure alledged dataset biases towards “marginalized groups” translates directly into statistical manipulation that’s meant to skew the algorithms toward supporting woke nonsense. That’s corrective action.

On the proactive side, all of these so-called “collection methods” are ultimately designed to suck up everyone’s data, everywhere—and the “inclusive, participatory systems” will ensure that everyone enjoys equitable surveillance, thanks to the government mandated “open and transparent data sharing.”

In other words, Big Gov will be tracking your every move with weaponized AI. The global social credit system will soon to follow, finally fleshing out the great inescapable global socialist surveillance state.

But did you catch it?

Advancing “data equity” is really all about “earning trust for digital systems.”

What do you think they mean by that?

Building trust in digital surveillance, that’s what they mean. They will condition the masses to accept and trust global digital governance, as if it’s for the greater good.

More specifically, “data equity” will directly target minorities for the purpose of digital assimilation into the collective hive-mind. Case in point, the WEF’s framework mentions “collective action” “collective responsibility” “collective agency” and “collective data” at least 15 times — and it refers to “collective benefit” only once, in reference to “Indigenous Data Governance.”

Viewed through the lens of Global Democracy (international mob rule), we can easily discern what these shysters are up to. Given that the populations of Europe and North America (i.e. the majority of white people) only account for about ~17% of the global population, the fact that we control the majority of the world’s wealth can only be a sign of gross inequity.

The only explanation, of course, is that greedy capitalist pigs are exploiting poor minorities and raping the planet in the process—or so the story goes.

The only solution, then, is for the globalists to exploit the poor minorities faster, via digital enslavement, so that they can leverage their massive global majority for the sorts of “collective action” that are necessary to finalize total global control.

From there, “digital equity” and “global governance” will lead the whole of humanity into an endless dream of utopian socialist fantasies, forever, entirely unencumbered by actual reality—or should I say, entirely “unburdened by what has been.”

Luke, what the hell does this have to do with spirituality?

I’m glad you asked.

It has everything to do with spirituality—and please notice, I didn’t say religion.

Religion resides in the mind. Spirituality abides in the heart.

This distinction is subtle yet significant, but I’m not going to dwell on it now. Suffice it to say that the rebel human spirit has existed far longer than any religion. Even though the global cabal is attempting to assassinate the human spirit through forceful psychological conditioning, they can never eradicate the human spirit altogether.

The human spirit is an inseparable aspect of our being, but most people have yet to realize what exactly that means. They are too caught up in religious bickering to contemplate the wonder and power of the spirit within, and mistakenly convolute their sense of self with the incessant ramblings of an untrained mind.

As I have said before, the mind is a tool. You either use it, or it uses you. Therefore, it is imperative that each person learns to realize that they are not their mind.

Because we are notour minds, we can control our minds.

Because we can control our minds, we can control and even cultivate our own consciousnesss. We can direct our own patterns of thought, select our own patterns of language, and in doing so, we can develop our own patterns of behavior.

Either the globalists can control our thoughts and behavior, or we can control our own thoughts and behavior—the choice is ours to make, but only if we are spiritually grounded and awake, not lost in the illusions of the mind.

Relative to the ongoing threats of menticide, mind control, and emotional manipulation, traditional spiritual practices such as meditation and prayer will serve as your first line of defense. However, due to the extreme psychological pressure of Fifth Generation Warfare, more advanced strategies are now needed to defend ourselves and prevent our minds from being sabotaged and enslaved.

That’s why I created the Mental Defense Workshop, to help you defend yourself against the stress, uncertainty, and confusion that’s being used to manipulate and control your behavior. Learn to see through the illusions, stay grounded, reduce stress, and reconnect with your sense of peace and purpose during these crazy times.

**I will be sending out an email with details on the Mental Defense Workshop soon!

Until next time, BE BRAVE, LIVE FREE, and STAY WISE!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Brace yourself.

This morning we awake to a world more crazy and on edge than ever before. Along with the madness in the Middle East, where Israel set off “pager bombs” that wounded 3,000 people, killing at least a dozen, we also learn that another lunatic sought to attack Trump and his supporters by planting a car bomb at a rally in New York. Meanwhile Ukraine just launched a major drone strike on an important Russian weapons stockpile, edging the another inch closer to World War III.

The planet feels like a tinderbox, and it’s anyone’s guess what comes next.

Taiwan is in fierce denial that it built the devices that blew up thousands of people, as Hezbollah fighters vow bloody revenge, Iran accuses the U.S. of being behind it, Israeli forces claim “no comment,” and everyone, everywhere is preparing for war.

The only thing that feels for certain, is that escalation is inevitable.

The “massive” drone attack nearly 500 kilometers into Russian territory forced local authorities to close schools and evacuate an entire town, hot on the heals of Putin threatening a broader war if Western allies hand Ukrainian forces long range missiles to rain down hell on Russian citizens. Now the U.S. military has deployed soldiers and rocket systems to Alaska as Russian activity “ramps up in the region.”

For the record, there is no doubt in my mind that all of this is intended to interfere with the 2024 election—most likely because the Deep State knows that it cannot “cheat” Kamala Harris into office. They are desperate to stop Trump, and more importantly, to stop the populist uprising that would doom their draconian plans.

BREAKING: Trump campaign and local authorities declare bomb scare is “fake news”

“[Officials] say reports that explosives were found in a car near the site of Donald Trump’s rally on Long Island are false.

Commissioner of Police Patrick Ryder said: “Reports of explosives being found at the site are unfounded. There is a person who is being questioned who may have been training a bomb detection dog near the site.

“The individual with the bomb dog falsely reported explosives being found, and that individual is currently being detained by the police.”

Can you feel your mind getting yanked this way and that?

What about the ongoing debate over Haitian immigrants “eating the cats,” have you been keeping up? Here’s what the left has to say:

• FACT CHECK: Video Footage and News Headlines Do NOT Document Haitian Immigrants eating cats

• What to know about the false rumor targeting Haitian immigrants in Ohio

• Authorities rebut claims that Haitian immigrants are eating cats

• How AI images of cats and ducks powered the pet-eating rumor mill in Springfield, Ohio

• Springfield, Ohio, cat-eating hoax - Wikipedia

Snopes has fact-checked the story, CNN has address this false rumor, authorities have rebutted the claims, NBC explains how conservative have been duped by AI, and Wikipedia has an official entry on the Cat Eating Hoax—and that’s all the liberals need to know. Never mind the rest of the news, outside their collective echo chamber:

• WATCH: Springfield City Manager Admits He HAS Heard Reports of ‘Horrid Things Occurring to Domesticated Animals.’

• Springfield Resident Alleges Cat Stolen and ‘Chopped Up’ by Haitian Neighbor in Disturbing Incident Reported to Police

• Newly unearthed ‘call report’ is more evidence Trump was right about the pets in Springfield, Ohio…

• CBS Accidentally Sides With Trump on Springfield, Sort Of...

• Vetted Video Shows Ohio Immigrants Grilling Neighborhood Cats

You see? Making sense of what the hell is going on in the world has become a choose-your-own reality sort of adventure. You can believe anything you want to believe. If you are a man, and you have the burning desire to have a baby and breastfeed, you can. If you are a woman, and you crave the raw power of being a man, all you have to do is chop off your breasts, take some hormones, grow a beard, and you can.

You can become anything you believe yourself to be.

You can even be “beautiful” if you look like this:

Please forgive the repulsive pictures—I’m sorry you had to see that—it’s just that these mutilations have become so common, it begs the question: why?

For me, and I imagine for many of you, there is no logic to it. Instead, there is a natural sense of disgust to see disfigured faces. This is entirely unnatural, so what the hell is wrong with these people?

In simplest terms, in my humble opinion, they have become completely detached from reality. They are stuck living in the illusions of mind. They cannot distinguish between what they think and what is actually real, any more than those suffering from so-called “gender dysphoria.”

The proper term for all of this is psychosis.

According to Merriam-Webster, psychosis is a serious mental illness characterized by a “defective or lost contact with reality.” The etymology of the word indicates that psychosis happens when a diseased or inflamed mind starts wreaking havoc with the “animating spirit” of a human being.

I believe we can see the evidence of this everywhere we look.

To reiterate, this is precisely because there has been a mental disconnect with reality—as in, a mental disconnect from Natural Reality, just to be clear. Natural Reality, in my own words, is the reality that exists outside of human interpretation. It is the reality that has been around since the beginning, the reality that has, and will continue, to transcend every epoch of human history.

Natural Reality exists whether we, as fickle, fallible human beings, chose to face it and embrace it or not. Natural Reality is the only metric by which one might measure the accuracy of thought, making it a cosmic ruler of sorts, a touchstone of tangible Truth that can, and should, be reconciled with often.

How else do we know that we’ve not succumbed to psychosis? How else do we know whether our thinking is accurate or true, if not by reconciling with Natural Reality?

Unfortunately, through many years of intentional urbanization and indoctrination, there has been a significant domestication of humanity. Domestication can be measure as the degree to which an individual has become insulated from Natural Reality, separated from the need and ability to sustain their own existence.

It’s just like turning wild animals into captive pets. It’s called husbandry, and there is a science to it, that science has long been perfected, and now that the global elites are wielding weaponized artificial intelligence, the pace of this conditioning is quickening. It’s sickening, if you think about it, to be subconsciously taming the masses on a planetary scale, without so much as a warning.

Actually, those who have been with me may recall, we have been warned, repeatedly, by some very bright and forward-thinking psychologists who fully understood the threat of systematic mental enslavement. We’ve discussed this before at length, but it feels appropriated to provide context, quoting from the preeminent 20th century psychologist Dr. Joost Merloo and his seminal work Rape of the Mind:

“The Big Lie and the phony slogan at first confuse and then dull the hearers, making them willing to accept every suggested myth… [building] special pictures in the minds of the citizenry so that finally they will no longer see and hear with their own eyes and ears but will look at the world through the fog of official catchwords and will develop automatic responses appropriate to totalitarian mythology.

[i.e. Donald Trump is a “threat to democracy”]

Pavlonian conditioning to special words forces people into and automatic thinking that is tied to those words. The words we use influence our behavior in daily life; they determine the thoughts that we have.”

Words determine our thoughts, thoughts determine our behavior. Thus, by controlling the language permeating a culture—what Merloo refers to as the “semantic fog”—it is relatively easy for dictators to bring the subjects into a state of passive acceptance. This leads to “logicide,” which is the death of logic, which allows for common language, our everyday words, to become “instruments of social revolution.”

As you know, we are in the middle of such a revolution right this moment.

“Loudmouthed phoniness threatens to become the ideal of our time.”Rape of the Mind, 1956

Merloo goes on:

“The semantic fog is thickened by the regimentation of information. The citizens have no access to sources of facts and opinions. They are not free to verify what they hear or read. They are the victims of the leader’s “labelomania”—their judgements are determined by the official labels everything and everyone bears.”

Think about the current battle over censorship, fact-checking, and the concerted effort to control the flow of information. We can intuitively understand that this is meant to control the way people think and behave, and thus control the outcome of elections, thereby facilitating the rise of a Totalitarian State.

Before expounding on the connection with Natural Reality, I’d like to offer one more excerpt that warns us of where all this is heading:

“Menticide is an old crime against the human mind and spirit…

One important result of this procedure is the great confusion it creates in the mind of every observer, friend or foe. In the end no one knows how to distinguish truth from falsehood. …

The core strategy of menticide is the taking away of all hope, all anticipation, all belief in a future. It destroys the very elements which keep the mind alive. …

For our understanding, it is important to stress that yielding is an unconcious and purely emotional process, no longer under the conscious intellectual control of the brainwashee. …

This systematic indoctrination of those who long avoided intensive indoctrination constitutes the actual political aspect of brainwashing and symbolizes the ideological cold war going on at this very moment.”

I emphasized that last part to drive home a point: even those of us who have “long avoided intensive indoctrination” are susceptible to the “political aspect of brainwashing” that is happening in the world today. When we have passively accepted that there is no hope, that the end is constantly near, that there is no possibility of restoring our Republic to its free and former state, we have succumbed.

These thoughts drive the emotions they want, namely frustration, confusion, and despair. This ultimately leads to desperation and predictable behaviors such as shutting down, tuning out, or with enough pressure, rising up and fighting back. Regardless of the direction, they are directing our behavior either way.

So, how can we tell if our minds have been infiltrated, if we’re lost in the semantic fog, or if our thoughts are actually our own? How do we defend ourselves against constant mental attacks and relentless emotional manipulation? How do we maintain peace of mind in the midst of chaos and certainty amongst all the confusion?

Friends, there is a science to mental defense — what Dr. Merloo called “perceptual defense” — and there is a very clear need for it as well. Part of the reason my reports have been more sporadic lately, is because I have been building a Mental Defense Workshop behind the scenes. It’s been in the works since January, I am very excited to be offering up the Mental Defense Workshop to you today!

There is no doubt that the world has gone mad. Millions of people have already lost their ever-loving minds, and millions more are on the ropes. Those who do not know how to defend themselves are like sitting ducks. The majority will succumb. However, there is always hope, says Merloo: “In the end, human rebellion and dissent cannot be suppressed; they await only one breath of freedom in order to awake once more.”

Like I always say, resistance is the spice of life, and therefore: RESIST WE MUST!!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

So here we are.

Two days after the second assassination attempt against Donald Trump, six days after the most brazenly biased “debate” I’ve ever seen, mired in memes about eating pets, and getting yanked from one shocking, b**t story to the next—and of all the things happening in the world, this is the sludge being slung at us by Drudge:

Sex trafficking and racketeering? Head of a criminal enterprise? Gosh, that’s just terrible. I hope this animal gets locked up for life! I wonder if he’ll go the way of Jeffrey Epstein. Who else was he working with? What do they know?

Ultimately: So. FCKING. What.*

It’s not that this isn’t a big story, but how many people do you think caught the Charlie Kirk interview with a Mexican missionary claiming that the cartels are working through Democrat politicians to sex-traffic thousands of little girls into the US? Would you be surprised to hear that this evil has exploded under the hair-sniffing Biden-Harris regime? Me neither.

To be perfectly fair, I have no doubt that this is a bipartisan evil.

Child sex-trafficking is one of the most heinous evils imaginable, period. The predators who prey upon innocent children should all be dead. I watched the heart-wrenching Sound of Freedom with my family, and coming face to face with this was very hard on the heart. Every fighting instinct of every good man should be to lunge into battle to save these children. My eyes well up just thinking about it.

Breathe… “Breath control is the most basic building block of self-control. When we learn to control our breathing, we learn to control our heart rate and our emotional state of mind.”

I have uttered those words thousands and thousands of time, teaching yoga, counseling people, and resetting my own emotions as often as needed. There is a science to managing stress, and learning how to use the power of breath control is key.

But alas, we’ve got a lot to cover today, so let’s get back to task.

There are two points I want to make about the headlines on Diddy:

• It is a big story, because it involves a celebrity doing evil things, which is almost irresistible clickbait for the masses. The story is important in the sense that it exposes an evil that is all too often swept under the rug, but the timing is highly suspicious: how long do you think they’ve had the dirt, and why are they releasing it just now? My take is that this was just another weapon in the propagandists’ arsenal, and there are many more where that came from.

• From the angle of “quantitative” analysis, i.e. looking at the numbers and comparing the stats, consider the impact of the Drudge Report impressing their cherry-picked propaganda on more than half-a-billion visitor every month. Consider the impact of branding brains with over 7 TRILLION impressions using these sophisticated psyops over the last year. These numbers are truly astounding:

But that’s not the worst of it.

Drilling down a little further, we must consider the fact that the Drudge Report is still being hailed as a “right-leaning” website—for those who know no better—as if it’s an alternative source for “influential conservative news.” This is a fact that’s not to be overlooked. Drudge used to be a right-leaning, libertarian sort of news source—I know because I’ve been referencing it for years.

BUT, sometime back they went full left-tilt, right about the time Trump announced he was going to run for president if memory serves. Coincidence? I think not. Drudge made a name for himself breaking the Monica Lewinsky scandal during the Clinton administration, which could potentially indicate an insider, Deep State connection. This raises the question: could this website have been a covert operation all along?

Regardless, think about the average person, say someone in the habit of passively browsing the headlines at Drudge Report. Slowly but surely, over several years, their news feed was steadily shifted from right to left. The shift was so subtle, many people never noticed. As a result, they now stand on the opposite side of many issues.

I believe we can see evidence of this, especially among liberals today. That would seem to imply that such a macro-level strategy of social influence could work very well, so perhaps this has been done through various left-leaning outlets as well?

That said, given that conservatives are generally more discerning than their liberal counterparts, it’s worth noting that Drudge has taken a massive hit over the last several years, precisely because they’ve become a repository for leftist propaganda, despite the fact they are still touted as being conservative:

In the broader context, the bigger issue is the Algorithmic Social Interventions I’ve written so much about. These algorithms are directing people, without their awareness or consent, toward state sanctioned sources. By doing so, the cabal is able to keep a fairly tight lid on the narrative, knowing full well that the vast majority of people are “low information voters” and mere casual consumers of the news—present company excluded.

Just to be clear, this all ties directly into the insidious Trusted News Initiative and the intricate Censorship Industrial Complex. See also:

All of this comes to bear on the real story of the day, which—according to your favorite fuzzy peasant—is the fact that “researchers” have proven conclusively that artificial intelligence can be used to successfully reprogram conspiracy theorists, via chatbots. Put differently, they have proven that AI can be used to change political beliefs.

AI can change belief in conspiracy theories, study finds

“Whether it is the mistaken idea that the moon landings never happened or the false claim that Covid jabs contain microchips, conspiracy theories abound, sometimes with dangerous consequences.

Now researchers have found that such beliefs can be altered by a chat with artificial intelligence (AI).”

We could add many, many things to the list of “conspiracy theories” that will inevitably come under attacked from this new high-speed “DebunkBot”—you know, conspiracies like the 2020 election was stolen, that the pandemic was orchestrated to accelerate depopulation, or that the cure is worse than the disease, by design, and these toxic experimental injections are genetically modifying humanity, for example.

I’m not going to chase any of those rabbits today. The point is, this weaponized AI is being used to reprogram human beings. It’s troubling to know that there are very intelligent people, with deep globalist connections, researching exactly how to make this work. What could possibly go wrong?!

Before diving into the globalist connections, I want to tip my hat to Ben Bartee of Armageddon Prose for the lead on this. He published a piece titled "‘DebunkBot’: Using AI to Rejigger Conspiracy Theorists’ Minds," and skillfully points out that:

“It’s only a matter of time until these [DebunkBots] get deployed in the “camps for adults” Hillary has promised.” —Ben Bartee, Armageddon Prose

Let’s zoom out.

When I sit down and begin sifting through the news, I tend to go wherever the moment takes me. It’s always fascinating to see what’s being pumped into the public psyche, and more fascinating still to see what lies beneath the narrative. My mind is always weaving the ongoing flow of information into the tapestry of thought that’s been meticulously woven over the last six-hundred-and-twenty-four reports.

Today, there were many things that caught my eye. For example:

• Brownstone predicts ‘Grocery Rationing Within Four Years’

• Oh, Look, a Video of a Cat Being Grilled Like Bobby Flay in Ohio

• This U.S. City Is Having Serious Issues With Animal Sacrifices, Torture

• "All Been Hoaxes" - Ohio Governor Debunks Claims Of Bomb Threats Against Haitians

• Resident Of PA Manufacturing Town Exposes Reality Of Haitian 'Great Job Replacement'

All of these headlines relate to several converging issues: 1) “the food shortages are gonna be real,” to quote Joe Biden; 2) the 2024 election, wherein Kamala Harris is promoting price controls and the green agenda that will drastically reduce the food supply; 3) the entertaining political circus and circulating “they’re eating the pets” memes than have gone viral since the debate; 4) the ongoing debate over the veracity of the stories, which is essentially just meaningless bickering between the left and right; 5) how controlling the flow of information forces people into siloed perspectives; and 6) how this media manipulation has played directly into the two assassination attempts against Donald Trump.

Which leads me to this batch of headlines:

• NBC’s Lester Holt Blames Trump Assassination Attempt on “Baseless Claims About Haitian Immigrants” Who Are Eating People’s Pets

• Democrats Aren’t Going to Stop If They Kill Trump

• Vile: ABC, NBC Tie Assassination Attempt to Trump's Rhetoric

• Democrats Ramp Up Anti-Trump Rhetoric Even After 2 Attempts on Trump's Life

• THERE ARE RECEIPTS: Team Trump Drops List of EVERY Democrat and Enabler Who Used Violent Language Against Trump Which Led to 2nd Assassination Attempt

Clearly this is too much to process in a single report, which is why I like to zoom out and stay above the fray. Few are those who do so, and rare is the perspective gained from this vantage. While it might be enticing to get caught up in the strangely predictable “unexpected” connections between would-be assassin Ryan Routh and the Deep State (hint: he had previous contact with the FBI), I must refrain for the sake of remaining focused on the bigger issue.

Very few people will ever know the truth. Although many patriotic types are keen to all these shenanigans, it is precisely the use of weaponized AI and state-backed censorhip that is enabling all of this evil to happen right out in broad daylight. Therefore, I believe we would be prudent to sound the alarm on this global heist of the human mind, calling out their ongoing efforts to control “emerging public perceptions.”

Which brings me back to the DebunkBots and the globalists behind the curtain. Trust your gut and have a look at these faces:

Those are the men behind DebunkBot.com. They are progamming computers to reprogram the public. Do you think they align with traditional American values?

Costello is the Assistant Professor of Psychology at American University, and his area of studies include “where political and social beliefs come from,” and how to use AI to change them. Looking around, it is unclear if this Tom Costello is related to the Tom Costello (Sr.?) who is Senior Correspondent for NBC News in Washington, D.C.

David Rand—makes me think of the globalist Rand Corporation, more on that in a minute—uses the tools of congnitive science for the purpose of “shifing accuracy” in the public’s perspective, by “nudging social media” with weaponized AI. He also studies things like how “religious fundamentalism” is associated is “delusionality” and believing in fake news. Sounds like a brilliant guy.

Pennycock, a highly esteemed Cornell psychologist who specializes in “experimental psychology” and received the 2016 Ig Nobel Prize for a co-authored study titled, “On the reception and detection of pseudo-profound b*t*,” has intriguing connections with organizations such as the International Social Cognition Network and the Psychonomics Society—both of which smack of globalist influence.

Attesting to this suspected prediliction, Pennycock has this to say of humanity:

“Alas, a lot of our problems as a species come from errors that we make during reasoning and decision-making – from global warming to health issues (including, but not limited to, the spread of pandemics) to political polarization and misinformation – and, thus, understanding why people make these errors is a major focus of mine.” (emphasis added)

You see, his major focus is understanding why everyone in the world doesn’t think the same way he does about global warming, pandemics, and socialist politics. Clearly the reason is because of misinformation, which is why, working with Costello and Rand, this group has decided to pour their considerable combined expertise into training artificial intelligence on how to mindfuck humanity.

Dark implications abound.

RESIST WE MUST!!

P.S.

This report is already long, but I have to close the loop on the Rand Corporation—and I think this illustrates the power of these biased algorithms. I knew for a FACT that I had referenced the Rand Corporation in prior reports, so I went to the archives and searched for it. Oddly enough, the algorithm refused to return the result:

Being the stubborn peasant that I am, I refused to accept this algorithmic gas lighting. I KNEW, for a FACT, that I’d written about “Rand Corporation” before, and therefore, those words should have been highlighted at the top of the search results of my own damn archives. It turns out the reference was made in a report that was exposing election fraud—you know, just the sort of “conspiracy” these shysters are trying to reprogram out of the public psyche.

Funny that the aglorithms refused to turn this up:

Thanks for bearing with me, I had to call that out!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s warped.

Reality has been warped in the minds of the masses. This is due to the intentional psychological conditioning and emotional manipulation that has been ongoing for decades. We are in the end stages of a transformation that is either going to enslave humanity in their own minds for generations to come, or turn into a violent revolution that forcefully reconciles public perspective with the harshness of actual reality.

With all the optimism I can muster, there is a very narrow third path, one that would see the will of We the People represented, despite every effort to rig the election.

IF, and only if, Donald Trump somehow overcomes all the odds and manages to make it through to his January 2025 inauguration—and IF, and only if, he is able to very rapidly investigate and arrest the multitude of treasonous officials and media moguls who are actively and illegally colluding to undermine the U.S. Constitution, thwart the will of the people, and subjugate Americans to authoritarian globalist rule…

THEN, maybe, just maybe… maybe we can legally rout out the tyrants, without violence, and once again restore our Republic for a few more generations.

What are the chances of that, on a scale of 1 to 10?

That’s anybody’s guess.

Obviously, the odds are not great. I’d say don’t rule out the hand of Providence, but then again, don’t count on it either. Pray, to be sure, but do not rely on supernatural intervention as your only strategy. We need people in the streets, talking to people, knocking on doors, directly engaging in an effort to get out the vote and win this election in a monumental landslide of epic proportion.

If we want to drain the swamp, we need to swamp the vote. It’s just that simple.

Now let’s zoom out.

I have repeatedly warned my fellow patriots to stay wise. Understand that we are being provoked and manipulated. They want us to rise up and fight back. They’ve been planning for exactly that for quite some time.

We’ve seen the headlines and discussed the predictive programming. They are driving Americans toward violence, precisely because it is both predictable and necessary, for both sides. This excerpt from TR 520 - Thomas Jefferson & the Spirit of Resistance captures the ethos of what I’m getting at:

They are priming the American public for violence.

While naive individuals may wonder why that is, the answer is abundantly clear. Though liberals often quip that “violence doesn’t solve anything,” in the natural order of things, violence is a very direct and effective means of solving all sorts of problems. Imagine a predator breaks into your home, grabs your wife or child by the hair, and starts dragging them out of the house. Here, as in infinite other examples, violence is the clear and righteous solution to quickly eliminate the threat. Put differently, violence is Nature’s way of delivering justice.

This is the root of Thomas Jefferson’s famous saying: “The tree of liberty must be refreshed from time to time with the blood of patriots and tyrants.”

Jefferson said, “God forbid we should ever be 20 years without such a rebellion.” And yet, as you and I both know — as does the Deep State and the Global Cabal — that kind of a rebellion is long overdue. This makes the uprising all the more inevitable, which in turn makes it all the more predictable, does it not?

Try to imagine a master military strategist contemplating how best to root out a scattered bunch of well-armed rebels. They have been watching the rebels for years, listening to their conversations, tracking their movements, and mapping out their networks. They have a fairly accurate idea of what’s in the rebels’ arsenal—and it’s nothing compared to the cutting edge military equipment in service today.

(We don’t have space-based weapons or Flamebot 9000s, for example.)

Beyond that, they’ve identified the leaders of various rebellious groups, and even profiled anyone who might be positioned to lead in the future. They know, in theory, what these people are capable of, what they’d be willing and capable of doing, and also—and this is important—how to get to them, and exactly how to push their buttons.

Anyone who’s been keeping track of American politics over the last decade or so, should have realized by now that they’ve been pushing our buttons on purpose for quite some time.

Now why might that be?

Perhaps it’s because they—the enemies of freedom, enemies of the Constitution, and enemies of the American people—are now perfectly positioned to eliminate these rebels once and for all? What do you think? Is that even possible?

But, “Oh no! Donald Trump got ganged up on 3 to 1, and the liberal moderators didn’t even fact check Kamala Harris for her shameless lies! Clearly they cheated!!”

Well, what the hell did you think was going to happen?

Or, “Oh no! The Democrats are cheating by getting illegal aliens to vote! They’re trying to steal the election!! And now even the RUSSIANS are trying to interfere with our elections, and now Putin is supporting Kamala too!!!”

Again, it’s all to be expected, isn’t it? We’ve seen it all before, and because they’ve gotten away with it in the past, they will almost certainly get away with it again.

They’re not just pushing our buttons, they’re pounding on them, forcefully, as if to say, “What the hell are you going to do about it, peasant?” They lie, and we know it. They cheat, and we know it. They steal, and we know it.

And they know that we know it.

They break the law with impunity, and rewrite the law anytime it can be used as a weapon against us. They fabricate false narratives and stage fictional show trials to arrest peaceful American Patriots, and then let violent criminals roam free to rape and murder at will. They claim that we are a “threat to democracy” for supporting Donald Trump and wanting to Make America Great Again, and yet they are the ones who just perpetrated a political coup to advance their Marxist revolution.

What’s happening is disgusting—almost as sickening as having a bunch of Haitians slaughtering geese in the park and eating people’s pets in Small Town Ohio.

B, b, b, but… ABC said that’s not true! Right.

HERE’S THE PROBLEM:

At this point, people are going to believe whatever the hell they want to believe.

Kamala Harris said there were no U.S. troops deployed in a combat zone anywhere around the world — “the first time this century” — and yet, numerous troops have been injured and killed, in multiple combat zones around the world, just in the last few weeks. Still, millions of useful idiots sincerely believe her lies.

The public is lost in illusion.

It is the sincerity of these convictions that I’d like to drill down on today. I’m found of saying, “as sure as a Baptist believes the Bible,” to indicate sincere belief in things that may or may not be true. In the case of radical leftists lying through their teeth, we need to understand that most of their target audience eagerly laps up the spew.

They believe this crap.

Even though it’s common to quip, “I can’t believe people believe this crap!” — in reality, it should come as no surprise that people believe all kinds of crazy things. This is just part of being human. Unfortunately, this part of being human is being actively exploited by a powerful cabal of evildoers who happen to be wielding the most powerful weapon ever created, weaponized AI.

Let me ask you: where do you think this is all headed, really?

If men can be conditioned to believe that they can have babies, if women can be conditioned to believe they can become men— then what are the limits of manipulation, if any?

Clearly there are hordes of useful idiots who can and will be used to push any agenda the puppet masters want. Clearly they can fleece the public en masse with all the bread and circus, distractions, and the endless stream of military grade propaganda.

Given all the factors that come to bear, they can clearly promote or conceal any story they want, any time they want, all while the vast majority of people remain blissfully ignorant to what’s really going on.

Perhaps we’d be wise to evaluate the provoking of violence in this context, no?

We’ve explored the nuance of violence many times before:

• TR 150 - When Violence is the Answer

• TR 166 - Understanding What We're Up Against

• TR 233 - The Big Lie (Part 1)

• TR 446 - Where Have All the Good Men Gone?

• TR 591 - Headlines, Hogwash, & the Verdict on Violence

I am a warrior, not a pacifist, but I am also a strategist. I have acknowledged, openly and repeatedly, that we are at war—and yet, I have also advocated, relentlessly and against the tropes of many of my fellow patriotic folks, that the only solution is ultimately going to have to be political in nature. Reiterating that fact, I can already hear the howls of protest, but I’m not going to rehash that argument now.

See also:

All that said, what I’d like to leave you with today, is a positive thought. Doing my very best to wrap my head around what the hell is happening in the world today, I still return to the same conclusion: we can win this war. We must. But in order to win, we must first believe that we can win… it’s kind of like believing in impossible things.

I believe that no matter what, life is still good. In fact, even in the midst of political chaos and turmoil, even with commie tyrants trying to take over the world, even on the doorstep of a bloody civil war or nuclear WWIII — no matter what — life is still PERFECT, just as it is. It can be no other way.

Wisdom says to embrace the gift of life just as it is. Breathe deep, feel the sun, laugh with friends, and hug your loved ones. This journey is too short to squander. Your time is precious. Use it wisely. Embrace the moment, invest in your future, and above all else, enjoy the journey. Life is good, so live it well!

As for the commie cabal, today and forevermore, remember: RESIST WE MUST!!!

PS: If you’re getting value from these reports, please consider upgrading to a paid subscription—it would mean the world to me if you do! Alternately you could also drop a donation or buy me a beer! Thanks in advance. Have a wonderful weekend!

Sincerely,

Luke

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s get this straight.

In his memoirs, David Rockefeller acknowledged that there was a “secret cabal”—his words, not mine—that was working to undermine the United States and institute a New World Order. Former president George H. W. Bush, of the infamous Skull & Bones “secret society” also spoke of this New World Order.

Just for good measure, we could also add to this list George Soros writing about the “Future of NATO” and describing it as a New World Order, back in 1993, along with the more recent and exciting conversations about the New World Order being held among global leaders at swanky gatherings like Davos, Bilderberg, and Jackson.

Far from conspiracy, this New World Order is said to be a new “rules based international order” that is to be upheld by “global governance.”

Global governance, properly understood, is a whole-of-government approach, coordinated amongst the many governments of the world via global bodies like the United Nations, that aims to manage “emerging” public perceptions—which is to say, they aim to control your personal emotions, beliefs, and behavior.

Put differently, they aim to control the hearts and minds of humanity as a whole, specifically by transforming human consciousness and rewiring our brains.

In simplest terms, governance is influence. Global governance is global influence, and it can come in the form of either a carrot or a stick. Some may recall that the globalists recently announced the need for “less carrot, more stick” during their annual “Meeting of the New Champions” held in China, summer of 2023.

Torch Report 395 dove into the “Summer Davos” agenda, analyzing the description of their plenary session: How to Stay Within Planetary Boundaries – Carrot or Stick?

This line really says it all:

“What is needed to effectively change course to a net-zero, just, safe and healthy future and induce desirable behavior and practices – carrots or sticks?”

In a fascinating twist, this morning when I went to click through and revisit the primary source from the WEF (World Economic Forum) website, I got this “Access Denied” message, indicating I could not access the WEF website “on this server.”

“This server” happened to be routed through Los Angeles, of all places:

Having encountered this issue before, I switch my VPN to Seattle, and voilà, I was instantly able to access the Annual Meeting of New Champions 2023 discussion on saving the planet by beating we peasants into submission with a stick.

But there was something there…

Why the hell is a Los Angeles based server blocking access to the WEF, while the Seattle based server is not? That is a fair and pressing question.

Consider the societal impact of shutting millions of people out of any given website, by just a few strokes of the keyboard on some shady globalist server?

Clearly this is happening, as it has been happening, likely for much longer than any peasant will ever really know. I wasn’t the only one who was keen to dig into this new-to-me phenomenon of being blocked by server-side shenanigans.

Who is this Edgesuite.net, anyhow?

Taking a moment to poke around, I found an interesting article by a Seattle tech writer that uncovered the fact that Edgesuite is run by Akamai Technologies. Akamai Technologies is a massive global player, routing some trillions of internet connections every day, impacting nearly 85% of global internet traffic.

Think of the reach. Think of the scale. Think of the power.

It should come as no surprise that Akamai is a woke corporation, championing DEI and Sustainability. In fact, they are likely on the leading edge of woke, given that a) they are a massive global corporation that is deeply entwined with the global cabal, and b) that they’ve already rebranded DEI, way ahead of the pack, and they’re now dubbing it “Inclusion, Diversity, & Engagement.”

From their about page:

Learning that Akamai — the company managing the server that appears to be blocking L.A. from accessing the WEF website — is “committed to impactful environmental change,” was another red flag for me. That implies that are all-in on the radical environmental agenda, and given their stature, they are also highly likely to be complicit in the globalists’ grand scheme to depopulate the planet.

But wait, there’s more…

There is something uniquely disturbing, at least to me, about the fact that Akamai is currently working simultaneously with the U.S. Department of Defense, FEMA, and the CCP (Chinese Communist Party). What do you make of that? On top of that, they are also partnering with many of the most woke and powerful corporations on the planet, like Microsoft, Amazon, Google, IBM, and others.

From their newsroom:

• June 11, 2024 — Akamai Partners with Digital China to Expand Enterprise Security Market and Co-build a Secure Ecosystem

• July 31, 2024 — Akamai Announces Intent to Achieve FedRAMP High and DoD Impact Levels 4 and 5 Accreditations

• August 06, 2024 — Akamai and Datadog Partner to Detect, Investigate, and Respond to Threats Across Applications and Workloads

Just to cut to the chase, given this degree of global collaboration and backend control, there is essentially nothing stopping these shysters from massive censorship on a global scale. I contend that this is already happening, in ways that the majority of people can’t even comprehend. This will facilitate crimes against humanity.

It’s bigger than state sanctioned censorship targeting political opponents and silencing dissenting opinions… this is all about “building trust.”

I grabbed this snapshot from one of their partners, Sekuro, because it captures what I’m saying:

Tell me: do you Trust Tomorrow?

Given that globalists use language with a “hidden, higher meaning” and a “socialistic interpretation,” what do you think those words actually mean? What are they saying here? What is this “digital transformation” really all about?

I’ve written about the weaponization of trust before (reports below), but I’d like to spell it out again today, within the context of the upcoming Summit of the Future, which is inextricably linked to the New World Order (aka Future Earth).

Let me tell you what I think is being communicated here, and you can decide for yourself whether or not I’m just another crackpot conspiracy theorist.

“Trust Tomorrow” is a great slogan. The desire to trust that everything is going to be okay is hardwired into human nature. Trust Tomorrow, as a matter of word choice, aims to trigger a sense of security for the future. It’s meant to make clients feel safer in a world that is rapidly being overrun by digital threats.

This is raw, seductive, emotional appeal.

Implied by these words, is the suggestion that if you trust this group of sneaky globalist tech moguls, they will keep you (or your company) safe from digital harm. It’s important to realize by targeting businesses, they are targeting the means of production and consumption, as we were discussing yesterday.

At a deeper level, they are controlling the flow of information that passes through these business (think “access denied”), which in turn directly influences the mindset, emotions, and workplace ethos of these giant corporations. Obviously there are many other influences affecting these same aspects of corporate culture, but this vector of influence is particularly insidious, precisely because it is so subtle.

Digital transformation — which is a term I’ve seen cropping up a lot lately — is a very nice way of alluding to the “fundamental transformation” lauded by Obama. Not only are the globalists transforming the whole of society, they are also, as I’ve hammered on repeatedly, very directly transforming human consciousness, “in a scientific way.”

Pavlov’s dogs learned to drool when they heard the bell. This was a scientifically conditioned psychological and physiological response, affecting both mind and body.

In the exact same way, the public is being conditioned to trust the government. Rather than ringing a bell, the triggers for this feeling of trust are words like “safe” and “secure”—which of course are riddled throughout government propaganda.

There is so much that I want to say about this, there is a torrent of thoughts crashing through my mind. This is HUGE. Everyone needs to tell everyone they know—that’s how I feel about it. I guarantee this is the most important issue impacting humanity today. They are getting away with murder in broad daylight, and attempting to conquer the whole of humanity by brainwashing the masses to trust their masters—and just to emphasize: they are doing all of this with scientificaly proven techniques that are currently being deployed with clinical precision by weaponized AI!!!

YIKES!!!

It kind of helps put the political circus into context, doesn’t it?

I know tonight is the big debate between Kamala Harris and Donald Trump. I’ll be watching, making snarky comments, and enjoying some popcorn with a group of friends. I anticipate it will be another shellacking for the commies who are running the Democrat Party and trying to shove Kamala Harris into the Oval Office.

But this too will come and go. The election will come and go. Civil war and societal collapse, if it happens, will come and go. The world will keep turning, and as it does, the weaponization of artificial intelligence will continue to reprogram humanity on a planetary scale. Eventually, if the global cabal is successful, they will eradicate the will to resist through psychological conditioning.

This is how they intend to ensure peace and stability.

It’s the only way if you really think about it.

People will “trust tomorrow” because they know that the inherent risks of life have been selectively removed, and that all remaining risks are being carefully managed by algorithms. They know they can trust the algorithms, because the government is regulating the algorithms to keep them safe—and everyone will feel extra warm and fuzzy knowing that there are “safeguards” and “safety protocols” being deployed to keep everyone safe, all around the world, courtesty of our Enlightened Leaders.

As for the rest of their sloganizing:

“Reducing risk” means silencing dissent and censoring public discourse—because how else could they keep people safe from the malicious harms of misinformation?

“Building resilience” means they are going to create very specific problems (i.e. iterative disruptions), so that they can then deploy very specific solutions—because how else could they possibly get every business on the planet to adopt their agenda?

“Enabling fearless innovation” … how might they do that?

Why, by reducing risk and buildling resilience of course! And that means that the globalists will then be able to fearlessly innovation new and improved ways to do everything from global weather modification to modifying the very essence of human nature, all without fear of a peasant uprising, because the peasants will feel nothing but tender-loving-trust toward the perpetrators of these heinous crimes.

Welcome to the New World Order.

If there was any doubt that this is what the Summit of the Future is really all about, consider these “interactive dialogues” being facilitated by the “secret” global cabal:

• Transforming global governance and turbocharging the implementation of the 2030 agenda for sustainable development

• Towards a Common Digital Future: strengthening inclusive innovation and cooperation to bridge the digital divides

• The Future Starts Now: enhancing the global system [i.e. systems of control]for current and future generations

Remember, they’ve already agreed on their Pact for the Future.

They have their plans. No peasant input needed.

There are solutions to all of this, rest assured, but for today I’d just like to remind you that united we stand, divided we fall. We are facing issues that are much bigger than political bickering. Thus, within our spheres of influence, it’s time to take our conversations to the next level. Please share this report.

Until next time: RESIST WE MUST!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Don’t buy it.

That’s kind of a funny phrase, isn’t it? Don’t buy it. I usually find myself using those words as in, “I don’t buy it.” Something seems a little fishy, just a little off. I can’t put my finger on it, but ultimately, I don’t buy it. Call it a hunch, or instinct, or a gut feeling, but I get the distinct impression I’m getting sold a hot load of crap.

When you hear that Kamala Harris is soaring in the polls, don’t buy it.

When you hear that toxic experimental injections are safe and effective, don’t buy it.

When you hear that America’s elections are the most secure elections in the world, don’t buy it.

There is an endless list of lies we could entertain and reject along these lines:

• J6 was a violent insurrection.

• Joe Biden was the most popular president ever elected.

• Biden’s economy is booming.

• Kamala is going to make it ever better.

DON’T BUY IT!!!

But of course, you already know all of that. Thus, rather than beating a dead horse, today I’d like to turn our attention toward something that has been simmering on the back burner of my mind for quite some time—a concept set to massively impact us all, one that casts “don’t buy it” in an entirely different context.

Sustainable Consumption.

Those two words — “sustainable consumption”— immediately raise the hair on the back of my neck. The gist is that governments around the world need to take control of the food supply, to ensure that we peasants don’t destroy the planet by eating too much food. In a nutshell, the only way humanity can avert the so-called Triple Planetary Crisis, is to stop eating beef and start eating bugs.

Why? Because cows burp and fart, and bovine flatulence is destroying the planet. If you don’t believe me, just ask Bill Gates:

• Bill Gates Is Trying to Get Cows to Stop Farting

• Gates helps fund $26.5 million for vaccine to stop cow farts and burps

• Bill Gates: Stop cow farts to help slow climate change

• Bill Gates wants to 'fix the cows' so they stop burping, farting

Personally, I don’t buy it.

Setting this lunatic and his bogus “science” aside, I believe this is how the globalists are attempting to justify governments taking control of the food supply, which builds off their desire totake control of the means of production and consumption, as we were discussing in TR 621 - Socialists, Psychopaths, and the Summit of the Future.

These efforts to exert top-down control over every aspect of our lives have long been draped in the altruistic notion of saving the planet, as if it’s essential for the greater good, even though most people (hopefully) can sense the darker purpose embedded within.

Control the food, control the peasants, and starve the rebels out.

This is a textbook communist strategy, as we’ve covered before. Digging deeper still, this radical agenda is ultimately rooted in eugenics, and it manifests throughout globalist literature as the need for population control—i.e. the depopulation agenda.

We’ve covered this at length.

In reality, the globalists are not shy about their intended outcome, which is total control over a significantly reduced, dumbed-down, and weakened population.

You see, having too many hungry, meat eating, mouth breathing peasants around is a direct threat to Global Democracy. The ruling class could not possibly feed them all — and they know that — but, since they promised that they would feed them all (which is a large part of how they get into power in the first place), the desperate mob of starving peasants inevitably ends up turning their wrath upon their rulers.

Such lessons from history have not been overlooked by the global cabal.

“Fast forward to the 21st century, and we just don’t need the majority of the human population.” —WEF speech in Davos.

Hence the methodically plotted depopulation agenda that’s currently masquerading as Sustainable Development. According to the globalists, the human population is unsustainable. Sustainable development, therefore, implies the need to manage the human population by driving down population growth and devising clever ways of rapidly reducing the human population, all without the peasants growing wise.

War. Famine. Genetically engineered viruses. Mandating toxic injections.

It’s all on the table. In fact, as you may already know, this plan has already long been in motion—which brings me to a 2005 article from the publication Sustainability: Science, Practice, & Policy, titled, “Sustainable consumption in national context: an introduction to the special issue.”

Citing Limits to Growth, Agenda 21, the 2002 World Summit on Sustainable Development, and more, this seven-page article meticulously documents the evolving efforts to control production and consumption. It’s a fascinating read, and for the record, these ongoing efforts have currently culminated in Agenda 2030, also known as the UN Sustainable Development Goals.

Just to emphasize the timeline a little:

“From the earliest days of the modern environmental era during the late 1960s and early 1970s, the common wisdom has been that air pollution, toxic waste, and so forth are the unfortunate outcomes of producers’ failure to internalize a sense of proper stewardship. …Critical scrutiny of the global North’s resource-intensive lifestyles was effectively prohibited until the preparatory meetings convened to work out the details of Agenda 21 and Rio’s other centerpiece documents.”

Agenda 21, a formalized blueprint for total global control, was adopted in Rio in 1992, but the framework for this thinking had already been in development for at least three decades prior. It’s worth noting the “modern environmental era” that cropped up during the late 60s actually has roots that date back to the late 1800s, wherein, at that point, early proponents of environmentalism were railing against industrial tycoons alongside the freshly minted and radicalized Marxists.

One group was trying to save the planet from pollution, the other was trying to overthrow all aspects of existing society, but their common enemy was the greedy capitalist pigs and evil corporations that were standing in their way. Understanding this, it makes perfect sense why the vast majority of environmental wackos are brain-dead communists. Just saying.

But the broader point here is that this mindset, this moral justification for centralized control at the global level, has carefully been cultivated for over a century. Those who have been relentlessly advocating for this centralized global control have been drilling down on how best to deliver their message and implement their policies for more than fifty years—and now they have several generations of indoctrinated youth to help pull it off.

For what it’s worth, their Plan of Implementation specifically encourages “partnerships between the public and private sectors based on regulatory frameworks established by governments.”

This fusion of state and corporate power is commonly referred to as fascism, though the word fascism itself has been heavily abused in recent years.

For perspective, the Webster’s New World Dictionary 2nd College Edition, published in 1972, defines fascism as:

“a system of government characterized by rigid one-party dictatorship, forcible suppression of opposition, private economic enterprise under centralized government control, belligerent nationalism, etc.”

If we pick that apart line-by-line, we can clearly see the writing on the wall.

Global Democracy is synonymous with rigid one-party dictatorship. It’s mob rule on a planetary scale. Forcible suppression of political opposition is already happening around the clock, every damn day, courtesy of weaponized algorithms and government agencies. Centralized government control of private enterprise is already happening too, via ridiculous environmental regulations and excessive taxation.

But belligerent nationalism?

Hmmm… what do you make of this headline from the New York Times:

Kamala Harris's Muscular Patriotism

Or how about these:

• Two decades after 9/11, Harris and Democrats have reclaimed patriotism

• How Democrats are reclaiming patriotism from Trump's MAGA movement

• Kamala Harris is embracing patriotism in her 2024 campaign

What strikes me as belligerent about these headlines, is the fact that Democrats are claiming to be patriots—promoting national pride—even though every single one of their policy positions are aimed directly at destroying the United States of America as we know it. Rather than “embracing patriotism,” Democrats are fighting against free speech, against fair elections, against national borders, against constitutional restraints on government, and against the American way of life in every conceivable way.

Upon closer inspection, there is little distinction between today’s Democrat Party, the global socialists, communist dictators, or the oft-decried but fully embraced-by-the-Left fascists. They all want the same damn thing: centralized power and control—and not just a little control, obviously, they want TOTAL control.

They believe they have a moral imperative to control what you can buy at the store, whether it be food or other goods, to control what you eat and how much, what you wear, how you wash, how you travel, how you heat your home, and so on—and here’s the thing:

They intend to do all of this by controlling how the majority of people think.

Hence the revitalized leftist love for state censorship, and their incessant demands for political oppression, via the fascist public-private partnerships between Big Tech and the Deep State. It should all be antithetical to liberalism, and yet, global democracy can work no other way. But as long as they can control the flow of information, for the majority of people, they can control the outcome of elections.

By doing so, slowly but surely, they will be able to take control of the food supply. As you can see, this process is well underway. They will sell the public “sustainable consumption” as if it’s necessary and good—but don’t buy it. Once they’ve taken control, orchestrated famines and the starvation of rebellious peasants will commence. Mark my words. We’ve seen this playbook before!

RESIST WE MUST!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s do this.

It’s Friday and I’m feeling feisty. Cruising through the news, it became readily apparent that there is nothing of substance—I don’t give a damn about the school shooting, the predictable outrage, or that they just arrested the kid’s father.

Funny that there is exactly NO ONE talking about Trump’s would-be assassin anymore, isn’t it? I guess since he got cremated before anyone could confirm how he actually died (as in what angle the shot came from) or how long he had been laying dead up on the roof, now there is nothing else to be curious about. Case closed.

Move along, peasant.

There are some interesting articles out swirling around global steel manufacturing, which I believe are undoubtedly intertwined in ways we commoners are incapable of grasping—but it still feels like there’s something there:

• US Steel Rises As Cleveland-Cliffs CEO Reaffirms Interest Amid Reports Biden Prepares To Nuke Nippon-US Steel Deal

• Chinese Steel Industry Warns Of 'Flash In A Pan' Recovery If Mills Ramp Production Amid Severe Slowdown

Japan is trying to angle in and capture the US steel market, snatching up assets like steel mills and manufacturing plants, displacing union workers, etc.—and Biden is dutifully going to “nuke” the deal, obviously, because it’s an election year. That makes Biden a savior to union workers, just to be clear.

As far as the Chinese stifling their own steel production, that obviously puts a dent in the global supply, which will obviously drive up prices. Interestingly enough, that also means they could choose to flood the market with cheap Chinese steel as well. In other words, even though the CCP is being depicted as economically weak, they still have their hands on a major lever of global manufacturing.

Steel is essential for all types of development: from the burgeoning data centers being built to accommodate the rapid expansion of artificial intelligence; to the critical infrastructure needed to maintain railways, roadways, and bridges; to the freshly minted military equipment that is now needed to replace the billions and billions of dollars of equipment that’s been shipped to Ukraine or simply abandoned in the Middle East.

Thus, any monkeying around with the steel market could have profound impact, especially if the CCP decided to tighten the screws to squeeze out a bit more geopolitical advantage.

BUT HERE’S THE THING:

The Chinese Communist Party is the role-model for the world, according to the global elites, and America’s bourgeois capitalism is destroying the planet. Therefore, there is built-in incentive to lay waste to the United States economy, which would allow the government (via globalist backers like Black Rock) to swoop in and snatch up the bankrupt assets of private industry.

Then, voilà, the government has control over the means of production and consumption—which, as mentioned many times before, is their stated goal.

As first revealed in TR 93 - The One Agenda to Rule Them All:

“…by connecting the covid pandemic with the climate agenda, the WHO is framing this transition (aka The Great Reset) as an opportunity to “re-imagine your world,” within the scope of the following recommendations:

• Keeping fossil fuels in the ground and stopping new fossil fuel exploration.

• Taxing the polluters and incentivizing carbon reduction.

• Removing highly processed and packaged foods from the workplace.

• Regulating the marketing of unhealthy foods and beverages in public spaces.

• Keeping thermostats set at 70 degrees or less.

• Fundamentally restructuring production, distribution, and consumption systems.

• Implementing policy measures that limit volumes of production and consumption.

According to the WHO, going back to “normal” is not good enough — and I assure you, that was never the plan. By linking one crisis with another and claiming that “the climate crisis is a health crisis,” the globalists at the WHO believe they have found the ultimate justification to fundamentally transform our world — and they are flexing their authority to enforce these policies at the global level.

This is all part of the vision for what globalists call Future Earth.”

Of course, it’s not just the World Health Organization that is in on this plan, it’s the entire global cabal. The radical climate agenda—based entirely on bought and paid for bunk science, statistical fabrications, and institutional coercion of faux consensus—gives progressives a smug sense of moral superiority and a “cause” which then can then use to kowtow the public and bludgeon their political opponents.

Taken a step further, by merging planetary health with public health, the globalists created the one agenda to rule them all. Human behavior is negatively affecting planetary health (i.e. causing climate change), and climate change is negatively affecting public health (i.e. causing pollution, drought, wars, famine, and geographical displacement), THEREFORE, the globalists absolutely must regulate human behavior.

In their warped minds, this is a water tight argument.

In reality, it’s a raw power grab that’s being conducted under the guise of the greater good. It’s a consolidation of power and control, not just through ridiculous environmental regulations, but also through the intentional bankrupting of industries that will then be taken into the ward of the state.

Again, we’re back to the government taking control of the means of production and consumption. For those who may be unaware, this comes directly out of the Communist Manifesto:

“The proletariat will use its political supremacy to wrest, by degrees, all capital from the bourgeoisie; to centralize all instruments of production in the hands of the State... this cannot be effected except by means of despotic inroads on the rights of property and on the conditions of bourgeois production…”

This is the section where Marx and Engels spell out their 10-point plan to take over the world and rule every aspect of your life. Indeed, it appears these commies are now reaching beyond the grave to do just that. All aspects of the UN Sustainable Development Goals, Agenda 2030, the Great Reset, the Pact for the Future, and the innumerable offspring of these insidious schemes, are rooted directly in this plan.

It’s despicable, but it’s happening.

Think about it.

According to their own Manifesto, the commies claim they cannot centralize control in the hands of the State, “except by means of despotic inroads.” In other words, they are unabashedly admitting that they will use abusive and tyrannical tactics to obtain unlimited power, and that is exactly what we are witnessing in the world today.

I’ve tied the Communist Manifesto to the Great Reset and the radical environmental agenda—and tracked how these plans have been disseminated from on high and sown into federal, state, and local level policies—in many prior reports. If it feels like a stretch to see it for what it is, you can refresh or get up to speed here:

• TR 154 - How the Useful Idiots are Getting Used

• TR 186 - Are We Prisoners of War?

• TR 203 - Stepping Out of the Box

• TR 223 - The Adaptation Agenda

• TR 342 - The Real Red Wave

That said, I’d like to turn our attention back to the Summit of the Future.

Let’s zoom out.

Yesterday’s report was titled, “Globalists Reveal their Master Plan for Dealing With Donald Trump.” It wasn’t until after I’d sent out the email that I realized my rambling hadn’t directly addressed this master plan. Thus, I later added this postscript:

“PS: what is the globalists’ plan for Donald Trump?

If you guessed that they plan to beat him by any and all means necessary, that would be a good guess. However, more specifically I believe they intend to beat Trump by continuing to reprogram the peasants, rewrite history, and ultimate remove his stain from their record. They will use the 2016 and 2020 elections to train the algorithims so that they will not lose again. In the end, Trump is just a speed bump.The globalists are deadset on winning the long game, and we’d all be wise to adjust our strategies accordingly!”

The point I was driving at was this: given that most Americans are wholly fixated on the political circus, caught up in the theater of the upcoming election, and braced for the potential of impending doom that may strike from any given vector, the globalists can continue to trot out their plans and push their commie-fascist agenda right out in front of God and everyone—and most people will never know that it’s happening.

If Donald Trump wins, there will blood in the streets as antifa, tran-tifa, and violent third-world gang members unleash all hell in American cities. If Donald Trump loses, there will be blood in the streets as MAGA extremists and Christian Nationalists gang up to drive a rusty stake through the heart of American democracy. That’s the story.

These narratives have been being sown and nurtured for years. Add to the angst the fact that our nation is both economically and militarily vulnerable, the fact that we’ve been pissing-off and pissing-on both enemies and allies all around the globe, and of course the tinderbox of geopolitical tension, and it feels as if anything and everything that’s bad could really happen at any moment… and that’s right where they want us.

But tell me: how can the global cabal be so confident in their planning for 2030, 2050, and beyond, if they are secretly plotting to destroy the United States of America? Imagine the damage of a nuclear bomb or a crippling cyber-strike taking down the grid. Imagine Americans getting plunged into darkness and taken back to the Bronze Age. Or imagine the utter destruction of a long, drawn out, devastating civil war.

The globalists’ plans, as indicated by the Summit of the Future documentation, seem to anticipate that America will remain open for business and continue to significantly fund their over arching agenda in the coming years. How does that mesh with all the predictions of apocalyptic destruction? Do you see what I’m saying?

Read their vision and decide for yourself:

• Pact for the Future

• Declaration on Future Generations

• The Global Digital Compact

As I’ve stated before, I believe that the globalists intend to capture the United States, not destroy it, and the way that they will capture the United States is by capturing our political system. They have already captured the financial system and most of our institutions, and they’ve already captured most of the political establishment—but unfortunately for them, there are still a bunch of stubborn red-necks clinging to their guns and Bibles, believing that America is worth fighting and dying for.

We believe in the Constitution and Providence, both of which are impediments to the global cabal’s plan for total domination, and we vote according to these convictions.

Thus, We The People are the part of the political system they are working to capture now. That’s why progressives are advocating for censorship. That’s why the government has been colluding with Big Tech to silence dissenting opinions and scrub inconvenient facts from the public square. That’s why I’m always squawking about how weaponized AI is being used to rapidly reprogram the public psyche.

That’s the greater threat: the slow, subtle, subconscious taming that seeks to eradicate the will to resist and condition the masses to trust their masters.

If the enemy is successful, they will win this war without firing a shot.

If we don’t want to lose, we’re going to need to wake a lot more people up.

Thus, RESIST WE MUST!!!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

There’s more to the story.

After a brief reprieve from the daily deluge, I feel somewhat refreshed. It is refreshing to work hard, building tangible things. It is refreshing to be outside, feeling the sun on my skin and smelling the fresh outdoor air. There wasn’t a news story in sight.

I didn’t listen to the radio news. I wasn’t checking my phone. I didn’t read any articles or watch any videos. And you know what? The world just kept right on turning.

The political circus continued to dazzle and distract. The media continued to fleece the public with never ending gaslighting and propaganda.

The cabal kept marching on.

Today, as I dutifully took note of the humdrum and headlines, I felt an awkward heaviness settle in. I couldn’t help but notice a distinct sense of heavy-heartedness. It’s not so much the crap that passes as news these days, from sources on both the left and the right, it’s the fact that a significant percentage of people take these stories at face value—they buy into the b**t—and that’s what weighs on my heart.

All at once, my mind darts in the direction of more important things, things that are not in the news, but are nevertheless much at play. I think about the weaponized AI that is currently being used to rewire the public psyche, transforming human consciousness with clinical precision. I think about the Sentinel Surveillance, the Social Listening, and the Algorithmic Social Interventions that are quietly nudging the masses toward trusting Enlightened Leaders and accepting their master’s plan.

I think about the intentional targeting and exploitation of women and children, the “sensitization” of society as a whole, and the embedded socialist principles that have been branded deeply into the subconscious minds of entire generations. I think about the UN’s Adaptation Agenda, and how they are using cutting edge technology to accelerated behavioral change.

I think about transhumanism and the post-truth era.

Woven throughout the contemplation is the subtle but distinct awareness that what we are witnessing right now is a masterpiece in the making. I am aware of the plans that have long been in place, of the way words are twisted to conceal their true meaning, and how truly evil the overarching agenda actually is.

We’ve discussed the orchestrated chaos and iterative disruptions at length, and rightly concluded that pain is all part of the plan. Indeed, aiming to capture and control the means of production and consumption (think government ran farms and manufacturing), we’ve explored starvation as an active part of their strategy.

I’ve minced no words about the Marxist Cultural Revolution that besets us, I’ve repeatedly called out the globalists’ communist agenda—their efforts to centralize power and control in the hands of Rockefeller’s “secret cabal” of global elites—AND I’ve called out the unholy alliance between the commies and fascists who are currently parading around the planet as public-private partnerships.

The Chinese Communist Party is being hailed as a role model for the world, remember? The public is being psychologically conditioned to trust the government, children are being conditioned to hate their own country, millions of military aged males have been incentivized to invade our nation, our elections have become a hopelessly corrupt process, and our once great institutions are now cesspools of woke ideology. I’m sure I’ve missed some other worthy gripes, as there is a veritable laundry list of things that are so messed up right now, it’s enough to drive a person insane—and even as I say that, I realize that too is part of the plan.

They are breaking people down!

Think about the skyrocketing depression and suicide. Think about the stress of making ends meet when the cost of everything just keeps going up, up, up. Think about the cognitive dissonance, the disconnect from reality, the Stockholm Syndrome, and the general malaise that seems to have gripped so many of our fellow Americans.

It just goes on and on.

And then there’s this:

The raw audacity of these shysters is breathtaking. But people believe it.

In a similar vein, right on cue, CNN is warning Americans that Russia! Russia! Russia! is trying to influence the 2024 election. The Biden administration is going to “accuse Moscow” of targeting voters with the much dreaded “disinformation,” according to six sources who are familiar with the matter:

Of course it’s Russia.

No mention of the Twitter Files, the Google Leaks, or Mark Zuckerberg coming out and admitting that Meta was “pressured” by the White House to selectively censor the information Americans had access to during the last election cycle. No mention of the Deep State running their own operations to skew the outcome of the election toward the commie-controlled Democratic Party.

But whatever.

Republicans have their own internal problems, right?

It’s all just utterly ridiculous. It’s meaningless. Such headlines are nothing more than worthless junk cluttering up our mental space and clogging the channels of critical thinking. By burying people in this steady stream of steaming crap, the media and their masters are skillfully concealing the bigger picture.

Let’s zoom out.

We are officially in September now, and that means the UN’sSummit of the Future is just around the corner. For the global elite, this is perhaps the biggest event of the year—not for the elites themselves, mind you, but for the thousands of useful idiots who will be lauded as dignitaries and “Excellencies,” i.e. the loyal army of globalist stooges who will be there getting their marching orders for the year ahead.

In reality, all relevant decisions have already been made in places like Bilderberg, Davos, and Jackson. The scenarios have all been war-gamed and the scripts have been carefully fine-tuned. Those who will be pulling the strings have carefully planned out the choreography, and the choir of stooges will be singing their chosen song.

The purpose of the Summit of the Future is to put concrete plans in place to accelerate the Sustainable Development Goals, as well as “transforming global governance” by radically revamping the international financial infrastructure (think global digital currency).

Additional ambitions include:

• Increasing the use of “science in policymaking” — i.e. using fabricated data and warp statistics to drive the global socialist agenda.

• Expanding “youth participation in global decision-making” — because these heavily indoctrinate youth are a critical component in their plans.

• Updating their “collective security system” to better manage conflicts with “preventative diplomacy” — which, reading through the fine lines, I personally interpret as accelerating AI-infused global surveillance, via the global cabal’s EARS: Early AI-supported Response with Social listening program.

Just quickly, from TR 492 - The Hypnotizing of Humanity:

“[Globalists] built a platform called EARS, or the Early AI-supported Response with Social listening tool, which allows decision-makers to view a real-time analysis of narratives happening in public online forums in multiple countries and languages.

Rather than conducting surveys and polls, which can be expensive and offer feedback about past trends and attitudes, policymakers can get access to real-time feedback from local contexts about constituent concerns in the moment.”

This system was launched in 2021 under the pretense of the pandemic, and it was designed to deploy “behavioral change models” and develop interventions that “build trust” and resilience to misinformation. This is how the AI-supported responses work: the algorithms reprogram people.

When the natives are getting restless, the globalists know it—and now they have some very sophisticated tools for managing these formerly sticky situations.

I think this is why the words “preventative diplomacy” hit my ears with the same shrill, piercing sound as “predictive policing.” Preventative diplomacy is another globalist tool to control emerging public perceptions. It is a proactive deployment of military-grade memes and other mechanisms of manipulation that are meant to guarantee a predetermined outcome—and the public remains none the wiser.

For the uninitiated, consider the implications of what’s known:

Looking at the world through this lens, through the lens of memetic warfare, we see that even though there are a great number of American Patriots and freedom loving human beings around the planet who are directly engaged in the battle of ideas, we are not equally equipped.

We do not have state-controlled media, weaponized AI, or military grade memes. We do not have Sentinel Surveillance or EARS for Social Listening. Moreover, we do not have the data, the expertise, or the computational capacity to compete in the Big League. In every conceivable material way, we are simply outmatched.

But that doesn’t mean that we lose.

There’s always more to the story.

The untold story is that of the indomitable human spirit and the infinite imaginative ways we might thwart the globalists’ will and wrest the fate of humanity from their greedy, power hungry grip. The tale, in the end, I believe will be of a great reckoning, wherein massive noncompliance and civil disobedience bring their schemes to a screeching halt.

When that day comes, evil will retreat into the crevices of so-called civil society, and there it will lay in wait, licking its wounds, and plotting its next ascent.

We are in a timeless conflict.

It will take years, decades perhaps, to weed out the seeds of socialism that are currently corrupting society—and it will take full scale institutional reform at that—but in the end, I believe that the sound logic of Nature will prevail. Human hearts will awaken to the truth, and the truth will set them free.

American ideals will once again flourish and spread throughout the land.

How’s that for some unbridled optimism? I had to balance out the cynical slant.

Remember: to win this war, we must believe we can win. Failure is not an option.

RESIST WE MUST!

PS: what is the globalists’ plan for Donald Trump? If you guessed that they plan to beat him by any and all means necessary, that would be a good guess. However, more specifically I believe they intend to beat Trump by continuing to reprogram the peasants, rewrite history, and ultimate remove his stain from their record. They will use the 2016 and 2020 elections to train the algorithims so that they will not lose again. In the end, Trump is just a speed bump. The globalists are deadset on winning the long game, and we’d all be wise to adjust our strategies accordingly!

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

It’s despicable.

I’m not going to offer any commentary on the Democratic National Convention. I just don’t have the heart to do it, and there are plenty of pundits (like pretty much all of them) who are happy to tease out the best one-liners and most obvious lies.

Instead, I’d like to hone in on a creeping issue that’s being mostly overlooked—but first, let’s set the stage. There is no doubt that we are in an existential battle for the future of America—and now, both sides believe that they are fighting for freedom.

===BREAKING: RFK Annihilates the DNC and Endorses Donald Trump===…but we’ll get to that in a minute.

Regarding the Democrat’s sinister rebranding of what freedom actually means, consider the gaslighting coming out of the gas-bag Hillary “Cankles” Clinton.

Looking “FORWARD!” to a radical leftist regime, the wench proclaims:

“I see the freedom to make our own decisions about our health, our lives, our loves, our families, the freedom to work with dignity and prosper, to worship as we choose or not, to speak our minds freely and honestly. I see freedom from fear and intimidation, from violence and injustice, from chaos and corruption.”

To clarify, what Clinton is saying is that under Kamala’s commie regime, we will have freedom to make our own decisions, unless the government says we can’t. We will have the freedom to worship as we want, unless the government says we can’t. We will have the freedom to speak our minds, unless the government says we can’t.

I’m sure you get the point.

As far as her vision of the American people enjoying freedom from violence, injustice, chaos, and corruption, well, that’s just a flat out lie. Quite the opposite, it is the intentional unleashing of violence, the outrageous degree of injustice, the orchestrated chaos, and the predictable assembly line corruption that is meant to intimidate and strike fear in the hearts of American patriots.

As you well know, this is how Marxists operate. They lie, cheat, and steal their way into power, so that they can “forcibly overthrow” all aspects of existing society. I believe we are currently witnessing a full-court press to achieve just that.

Once in power, as all throughout their ascent, their strategy will be to divide and conquer by turning people against each other. Beyond that, they will continue to brainwash the useful idiots in a relentless deluge of propaganda, laying a firm grip on the public psyche, ala China-style.

America will never be the same.

Eventually, they will get around to rounding up the remaining dissenters for deprogramming, shuttling them off to publicly funded re-education camps.

Six Straight Minutes of Democrats Calling For Re-Education Camps

Don’t think that it can’t happen.

That said, I must confess some skepticism of them ever successfully rounding up American patriots for re-education. We are too well-armed, and though there is some percentage of people who would go quietly into the night, I hold onto the hope that millions upon millions of us would not.

The enemy knows this.

We will not be rounded up. We will not give up our guns.

We will not go down without a fight—at least that’s the theory.

Unfortunately, knowing all of this, I believe the enemies of freedom have cooked up a different scheme altogether, one that doesn’t require them to even fire a shot.

Instead, using all manners of psychological warfare (including military grade memes and the psychotronic and neurostrike weaponry discussed yesterday), the enemy intends to capture the minds of the masses. They mean to conquer the American Spirit by forcefully rewiring the public psyche using any and all tools available.

This, of course, will take time.

They know that, which is why they’ve been chipping away at mental stability and shared cultural values for decades. Every appearance is that we are now in the end stages, wherein a narrow majority of the population has already succumbed to this sinister scheme. It has become clear that there are a great many people who are now completely incapable of thinking for themselves.

What remains to be seen, is whether the wisdom of our Founding Fathers will prevail against this dark coup, whether or not the brilliance of having an electoral college will be able to stave off this hostile takeover in November. We’ll see.

Within all of this, I’d like to remind you: this too shall pass.

The election will come and go.

Come hell or high water, bloody civil war or not, the world will keep turning… and as it does, the cabal will keep marching on. The globalists will continue to advance. The peasants will continue to be reprogrammed. The techno-dystopian hell they have envisioned for us will continue to be constructed right before our eyes.

Let’s zoom out.

Today has been a historic day.

With Robert F. Kennedy Jr. formally endorsing Donald Trump — and shredding the anti-democratic Democrat Party in the process — there is a fresh sense of optimism in the air. As I’ve been saying, there has been a monumental shift in public sentiment, as the scales fall from the public’s eyes and more people begin to see this coup for what it is.

Kennedy’s bold declaration of truth, and his willingness to put the good of the country ahead of party politics, was just the sort of inspiration that millions of left-leaning middle-of-the-road Americans needed to unite behind Trump.

This move bodes well for the future.

That said, the Deep State and the global cabal should not be expected to go quietly into the night. They have everything to lose, and they will undoubtedly cling to power with everything they’ve got. At this point, we should probably expect the unexpected.

BUT, let’s not lapse back into projecting pessimistic potentials.

Instead, consider the possibilities of actually draining the swamp, actually enforcing accountability for the lawlessness and treasonous corruption. Consider the possibility that Trump, having learn many painful lessons in his last presidency, may now be able to assemble an all-star team of American Patriots, who collectively hold the wisdom and the might to fight for what’s right and spare our nation from global assimilation.

It’s a high hope, I know, but again: if we do not believe we can win, then what’s the point? I chose to remain cautiously optimistic, and my degree of optimism is rising.

We can put a stop to the progressive march toward madness. We can stand firm and staunchly oppose the globalist forces seeking to subvert the United States. We can, once again, shine brightly as a beacon of freedom and demonstrate to the world what unity, liberty, and justice for all is actually supposed to look like.

But we can only do so if we stand united as a nation, which is why RFK’s endorsement of Trump was such a historically significant decision. Both men, working together, are bringing the country together. This is huge.

The choice has never been clearer, just as the death of our nation has never been nearer, but right now, against all odds, the momentum is in favor of We The People.

Americans, regardless of political or religious affiliations, generally do not want Marxism. Marxism, socialism, communism, collectivism, communitarianism and the like, are entirely antithetical to everything the United States is said to stand for.

Centralized government control is the opposite of a free and prosperous society.

Despite the heavy indoctrination of several generations, which has given the faux appearance of support for such reprehensible, historically rejected systems of control — which are admittedly supported by a few million useful idiots — there is still embedded deep within the social conscience of our nation precisely the yearning for freedom that I’ve been writing about this week.

What I want to make clear here, is that though the global cabal and their intricate web of influence is incredibly powerful, they are not all powerful. However, they are powerful enough that We The People will not be able to withstand or overcome the onslaught of their oppression without coming together as a nation.

We will not be able to purge the ranks of the American bureaucracy of the globalist’s ilk without national level leadership. We must have patriotic leadership in all three branches of government to be able to effectively rid ourselves of the Marxist rot that has been eating away at the heart of the nation for decades.

As yet another week and month draws to an end, I find myself in a strange place. Holding the dichotomy of impending doom in the same mental space as optimism stretches the brain immensely. Knowing what’s out there, having studied the globalists plans intensely, I am fully aware of what may lie ahead.

And yet, having engaged in the local political trenches, having traveled back and forth to the nation’s Capitol multiple times to meet with other activists and patriotic leaders, having been elected as a state and national delegate and recently attended both of those conventions, I cannot help but believe that we can win this war.

It is an exciting time to be alive—but we’ve got a long way to go.

Nobody said it’s going to be easy, but I believe we’ve got this.

It might get bumpy or be a bloody mess,But when the dust settles we will have arrived.To a brighter day for the American Way,Because the Dream of the People survived.

Heads up, I’ll be taking next week off to focus on my family and ensure the school year gets started off right. I will also be evaluating the best path forward for The Torch Report, as I’ve put a tremendous amount of effort into this publication, and it’s still not paying the bills. Perhaps I need to tweak my business strategy—or perhaps it’s time to seek more gainful engagement elsewhere. Either way, it’s time to decide.

For those who have joined me on this learning journey and who have supported my efforts, please know that I am forever grateful. If you have the means, please consider becoming a paid subscriber or visiting the Donations Page to make a heartfelt contribution. I hope you all have a wonderful weekend, and I’ll catch back up with you in September!

Until next time:BE BRAVE, LIVE FREE, & STAY WISE!

Sincerely,

Luke

This is a public episode. If you’d like to discuss this with other subscribers or get access to bonus episodes, visit www.thetorchreport.com/subscribe

View Details

Let’s talk tactics.

There is something that has been driving me nuts lately.

It’s the classic denial and reversal of reality that we’ve all come to expect from the subversive agents embedded among us. They claim that they are the victims, when in fact they are the abusers, for example. Or, as with pushing queer ideology upon children, they claim to be defending “victims of oppression,” when in reality they are exploiting them. This despicable tactic is likely as old as time itself.

Regardless, it drives me nuts, precisely because it’s so hard to overcome.

Earlier this week I’d mentioned in passing that freedom was being rebranded, that the word no longer means what it used to mean, that it no longer conjures up the instinctive longing for liberty that it once did, and properly speaking, that it still should. These headlines help illustrate what I was getting at:

• From democracy to freedom: How Kamala Harris shifted Democrats' rhetoric

• Tim Walz leads a pep rally for 'freedom' at the Democratic convention

• How Democrats at DNC are seizing on 'freedom' theme after years of GOP monopoly

• Walz joins Kamala Harris for 'Freedom Rally' at Milwaukee site of RNC

• Tim Walz and Bill Clinton headline the Democrats' third day, focusing on a 'fight for our freedoms'

It’s maddening to see this shift in rhetoric, to know that it’s intentional, and to realize that the vast majority of useful idiots are going to buy it hook-line-and-sinker. The democratic base is being whipped into an emotional frenzy and reprogrammed to believe that Kamala Harris and Tim Walz are “fighting for our freedoms.”

That fact that there is a science to this brainwashing cannot be overstated.

Perhaps this fact—knowing that there is a science to mental and emotional manipulation—accounts for some part of my mind gnawing away on a nugget of information I stumbled upon last summer, way back in TR 401.

The title fails to reveal the many gems contained within the report itself:

I’ve often referenced back to TR 402 - The Transformation of Human Consciousness, because the title there really says it all, but it was actually researching for TR 401 that led me to discover this fascinating declassified diagram from the CIA, illustrating the mathematical relationship between consciousness, matter, and energy:

Being the dork that I am, I could stare at that diagram all day, my mind weaving the various vectors through the multitudes of implication, tracing the metaphysical loop-DE-loos and losing all track of time, until once again arriving in the present moment.

Fortunately, tactically speaking, there’s no need to embark on such a philosophical romp. Suffice it to say, some really smart people have penciled this out, and having this knowledge has enabled them to develop incredibly powerful weapons to directly attack the human mind—i.e. manipulate our consciousness.

Remember China’s “neurostrike” weapons?

Far from conspiracy, you may recall that these weapons recently graced the headlines:

Connecting the dots back to what we are witnessing today, as the Democrats continue to rebrand tyranny as a fight for freedom, as government gaslighting induces Stockholm Syndrome on a societal scale, we must account for the sophistication of the tools and attacks that are being used against us—else we remain sitting ducks.

It is not enough to simply point out that people on the Left are batshit crazy.

There are plenty of people on the Right who are batshit crazy as well.

It is insufficient to simply scoff at the liberal idiots, because if we’re honest, there are plenty of conservative idiots as well, right? To break out of the box of party politics — which is absolutely essential in order to mount an effective opposition against the global forces of evil — we must begin to separate ourselves, one layer at a time, from the psychological conditioning that imprisons us within our own minds.

If we cannot free our own minds, we certainly cannot free others.

I know that’s pretty deep, but please hear me out. It is often easier to identify patterns in other people’s lives than it is to identify patterns in our own lives. If my instinct is correct, by identifying patterns that illuminate the ramifications of psychological tampering in our opponents, we will be better equipped to identify these patterns within our own social circles, and indeed, within ourselves.

This is important, because we are ALL under attack and being manipulated.

We are all at risk of being deceived.

Currently, the Democrats are being conditioned to believe that they are fighting for freedom, but in reality, they are fighting to centralize control over everyone else’s life—to include what people think, what they can say, how they behave, et cetera.

At it’s root, this is the reversal of reality we’ve become so accustomed to seeing, or more mathematically speaking, this is the inverse of reality.

The question I’m pondering: is this inversion evidence of psychological attack?

I suspect the answer exceeds the scope of this report, but that’s what’s on my mind. There is something there… and it’s bugging me… but alas, I’ll move on.

HERE’S THE POINT:

There is a relationship between consciousness, energy, and matter. FACT.

This relationship has been unlocked mathematically. FACT.

Technology has been developed to exploit this relationship. FACT.